一、大品显示巴利原文
1. Mahākhandhakaṃ
菩提事注释显示巴利原文
Bodhikathāvaṇṇanā
如今,为了在二部分别之后,开始注释已纳入结集、含摄于大品和小品中的犍度之义,而说“二部巴帝摩卡”等语。其中,“二部巴帝摩卡”指二部巴帝摩卡分别。此处以“巴帝摩卡”一语,无简别地统括了它们的分别。所谓“他们结集了犍度”,是文句的衔接。“犍度”即诸蕴的聚合,或因能开示、说明诸蕴而名为“犍度”。而此处的“蕴”,指出家、受具足戒等被称为律行之事的规定,以及被称为应作、不应作的学处的规定。因为出家等是由世尊所制立的,故说为“制立”。于“制立”一义,可见“蕴”字的使用,如“木蕴”、“火蕴”等。此外,这里“部分、集聚”之义也完全适合,因为这些制立正是依部分与集聚而分别的。“通达犍度者”,即通达于制立之部分、集聚义的蕴义者。显示巴利原文
Idāni ubhatovibhaṅgānantaraṃ saṅgahamāropitassa mahāvaggacūḷavaggasaṅgahitassa khandhakassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ ārabhitukāmo ‘‘ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhānanti ubhinnaṃ pātimokkhavibhaṅgānaṃ. Pātimokkhaggahaṇena hettha tesaṃ vibhaṅgo abhedena gahito. Yaṃ khandhakaṃ saṅgāyiṃsūti sambandho. Khandhānaṃ samūho khandhako, khandhānaṃ vā pakāsanato dīpanato khandhako. ‘‘Khandhā’’ti cettha pabbajjupasampadādivinayakammasaṅkhātā cārittavārittasikkhāpadasaṅkhātā ca paññattiyo adhippetā. Pabbajjādīni hi bhagavatā paññattattā ‘‘paññattiyo’’ti vuccanti. Paññattiyañca khandhasaddo dissati ‘‘dārukkhandho aggikkhandho’’tiādīsu viya. Apica bhāgarāsaṭṭhatāpettha yujjatiyeva tāsaṃ paññattīnaṃ bhāgato rāsito ca vibhattattā. Khandhakovidāti paññattibhāgarāsaṭṭhavasena khandhaṭṭhe kovidā.
在词语分解中,诸词之义已由那些注释方式所阐明,应作如是连接。若我们再将那些说明一遍,即再说明那些注释方式;或者,在词语分解中,那些词的那些意义已于前文阐明,若我们再将那些意义说明一遍,应作如是连接。于此情形,“hi”字应视为填充虚词。“结束”指注释的终结。“那些意义既已明显”,指那些意义即使未曾阐明,也是显而易见的,并不深奥。显示巴利原文
Padabhājanīye yesaṃ padānaṃ atthā yehi aṭṭhakathānayehi pakāsitāti yojetabbaṃ. Te ce puna vadeyyāmāti te ce aṭṭhakathānaye punapi vadeyyāma. Atha vā padabhājanīye yesaṃ padānaṃ ye atthā heṭṭhā pakāsitā, te ce atthe puna vadeyyāmāti yojetabbaṃ. Imasmiṃ pakkhe hi-saddo padapūraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Pariyosānanti saṃvaṇṇanāpariyosānaṃ. Uttānā ceva ye atthāti ye atthā pubbe apakāsitāpi uttānā agambhīrā.
1 此处并无特别因缘。也就是说,不像“那时,具寿舍利弗长老心中生起了作为请佛制戒之因的思维,于那时……”等所说的因缘那样,这里并没有特别的因缘。“这种说法”指的便是“于那时”这一表述。若问,说这句话有何用意呢?意为:若无特别因缘,说此句有何用意?应连接“显示因缘即是其用意”。为阐明此义,而说“因为世尊所……”等。显示巴利原文
1.Visesakāraṇaṃ natthīti ‘‘yena samayena āyasmato sāriputtattherassa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanahetubhūto parivitakko udapādi, tena samayenā’’tiādinā vuttakāraṇaṃ viya idha visesakāraṇaṃ natthi. Ayamabhilāpoti ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti ayamabhilāpo. Kiṃ panetassa vacane payojananti yadi visesakāraṇaṃ natthi, etassa vacane kiṃ payojananti adhippāyo. Nidānadassanaṃ payojananti yojetabbaṃ. Tameva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yā hi bhagavatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“大时”如同大时,其义为:因堆积了广大之沙,故如同巨大的沙岸。因此说:“义为在巨大的沙堆中”。“uru”、“maru”、“sikatā”、“vālukā”、“vaṇṇu”、“vālikā”这些词意义相同,仅是文辞有别。因此说:“uru 即称为沙”。显示巴利原文
Mahāvelā viya mahāvelā, vipulavālukapuñjatāya mahanto velātaṭo viyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘mahante vālikarāsimhīti attho’’ti. Uru maru sikatā vālukā vaṇṇu vālikāti ime saddā samānatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘urūti vālikā vuccatī’’ti.
自此以下——显示巴利原文
Ito paṭṭhāya ca –
由于诸经文的义理已作简略注释;
因此,我们将阐明其义理。
显示巴利原文 Yasmā suttantapāḷīnaṃ, attho saṅkhepavaṇṇito; Tasmā mayaṃ karissāma, tāsaṃ atthassa dīpanaṃ.
“Najjā”:流动、奔流者称为河(nadī),其 najjā 即河流、溪流的意思。“尼连禅河”:本应说“nelañjalā”,将 la 字转为 ra 字,而成“nerañjarā”,意为没有泥泞、水草、苔藓等过失之水。有些人说:“本应说‘nīlaṃjalā’,却说为‘nerañjarā’”,或者当知这只是那条河的名称。为了显示世尊所住的河岸,故说“在菩提树下”。“菩提”一词,在“菩提称为四道中的智”(《小部·犀角经释义》121)中,指道智为菩提;在“得菩提、最胜广慧者”(《长部》3.217)中,则指一切知智。世尊于此证得此二种菩提,因此树也获称为“菩提树”。又或者,世尊以七觉支而觉悟,故为“菩提”。因其觉悟时依止此树,故此树得名“菩提树”。注释中,为以一分显示义理,而说“菩提称为四道中的智”等。“Mūle”意指附近。“Paṭhamābhisambuddho”是省略鼻音词的说法,故说“最初现等觉”。“Paṭhamaṃ”是中性词作副词用,因此应知此处连接为:显示巴利原文
Najjāti (udā. aṭṭha. 1) nadati sandatīti nadī, tassā najjā, nadiyā ninnagāyāti attho. Nerañjarāyāti ‘‘nelañjalāyā’’ti vattabbe la-kārassa ra-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālapaṇakādidosarahitasalilāyāti attho. Keci ‘‘nīlaṃjalāyāti vattabbe nerañjarāyāti vutta’’nti vadanti, nāmameva vā etaṃ tassā nadiyāti veditabbaṃ. Tassā nadiyā tīre yattha bhagavā vihāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti (cūḷava. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) ettha maggañāṇaṃ bodhīti vuttaṃ, ‘‘pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti (dī. ni. 3.217) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tadubhayampi bodhiṃ bhagavā ettha pattoti rukkhopi ‘‘bodhirukkho’’tveva nāmaṃ labhi. Atha vā satta bojjhaṅge bujjhatīti bhagavā bodhi. Tena bujjhantena sannissitattā so rukkho ‘‘bodhirukkho’’ti nāmaṃ labhi. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ekadeseneva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Mūleti samīpe. Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti anunāsikalopenāyaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho’’ti. Paṭhamanti ca bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso, tasmā abhisambuddho hutvā sabbapaṭhamaṃ bodhirukkhamūle viharatīti evamettha sambandho veditabbo.
“那时,世尊”这句中,“atha”应作“在那时”解,因为不变词有多义;意为:在他成为正自觉者之后,于菩提树下安住之时,即是那时。因此《优陀那》(《优陀那》2)中说:“那时,世尊单跏趺坐七日,感受解脱之乐。”或者,“atha”是表“之后”义的不变词,故应取“正自觉之后”的意思。“kho”是填充虚词。“七日”是“satta ahāni”。此处是表持续关系的业格。因为世尊在那七日中,无间断、持续地安住于果等至乐,所以依持续关系而用“sattāhaṃ”的业格。“以单跏趺坐”:从卫塞月满月日,太阳尚未西沉时,以不可摧破的跏趺坐坐于金刚座之时起,未曾起身,即是以最初所盘坐的那一跏趺坐而住。显示巴利原文
Athakho bhagavāti ettha athāti tasmiṃ samayeti evamattho gahetabbo anekatthattā nipātānaṃ, yasmiṃ samaye abhisambuddho hutvā bodhirukkhamūle viharati, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Teneva udānapāḷiyaṃ (udā. 2) ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinno hoti vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti vuttaṃ. Athāti vā pacchāti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto, tasmā abhisambodhito pacchāti evamattho gahetabbo. Khoti padapūraṇe nipāto. Satta ahāni sattāhaṃ. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā taṃ sattāhaṃ nirantaratāya accantameva phalasamāpattisukhena vihāsi, tasmā ‘‘sattāha’’nti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekapallaṅkenāti visākhapuṇṇamāya anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye aparājitapallaṅkavasena vajirāsane nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya sakimpi anuṭṭhahitvā yathābhujitena ekeneva pallaṅkena.
在“感受解脱乐”一句中,此处指的是五种解脱——彼分断、镇伏断、正断、安息断、出离解脱——之中,被称为安息断解脱的世尊的果解脱,因此说“感受解脱乐,即果等至乐”。而所谓“解脱”,是指由于从随烦恼中安息下来,心达到解脱的状态,或者应当理解为心本身如此解脱。由那种解脱而生起或与之相应的乐,即是解脱乐。根据“尊者,世尊在寂静乐中所说的那个舍”(《中部·第88经》)的说法,在此处,舍也应当被理解为乐。正如《破除愚痴》中所说:“然而,由于舍是寂静的,所以也被说为乐。”因为世尊入的是第四禅的阿拉汉果等至,而非其他。或者,如同“它们的寂止是乐”等(《长部》第221、272经)所说,正如诸行苦的寂止被称为“乐”,同样,由于在最高果位中获得的、一切烦恼苦寂止的状态,在此处,安息断解脱本身应当被理解为“乐”。显示巴利原文
Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti ettha tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavimuttīsu pañcasu paṭippassaddhivimuttisaṅkhātā bhagavato phalavimutti adhippetāti āha ‘‘vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedayamāno’’ti. Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cittassa vimuttabhāvo, cittameva vā tathā vimuttaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tāya vimuttiyā jātaṃ, sampayuttaṃ vā sukhaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, upekkhā sante sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) vacanato upekkhāpi cettha sukhamicceva veditabbā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 232) ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti. Bhagavā hi catutthajjhānikaṃ arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, na itaraṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.221, 272) yathā saṅkhāradukkhavūpasamo ‘‘sukho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ sakalakilesadukkhūpasamabhāvato aggaphale labbhamānā paṭippassaddhivimutti eva idha ‘‘sukha’’nti veditabbā.
“Atha”是表示“另外、再者”之义的不变词,“kho”是填充虚词。此处,以“另外”之义,“atha”一词显示与感受解脱乐不同的另一个主题。那么,那个主题是什么呢?是对缘起的作意。“于夜”是表示部分与整体关系的属格。“初”是表示彻底投入关系的业格。因为世尊于该夜的整个初夜分,都完全投入于那种作意之中。显示巴利原文
Athāti adhikāratthe nipāto, khoti padapūraṇe. Tesu adhikāratthena ‘‘athā’’ti iminā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanato aññaṃ adhikāraṃ dasseti. Ko panesoti? Paṭiccasamauppādamanasikāro. Rattiyāti avayavasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Paṭhamanti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ . Bhagavā hi tassā rattiyā sakalampi paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ teneva manasikārena yutto ahosīti.
“缘相”指无明等缘法。“缘”(paṭicca)的意思是:面对、朝向,即不排斥因缘的和合。而“面对、朝向”,正是指缘作为因缘和合的一个部分而生起果。“不排斥”的意思则是:若离开那因缘的和合,不成为其部分,自己便不能生起。由此显示了因的众多性,因为这里是以无明等每一个单独的因,来指称整个因的集合。“俱时”的意思是:聚合在一起,不可分离。因为无明等缘法,正是在聚合一起、彼此不可分离而运作的法中,产生果。由此便显示了缘所生法的众多性。通过这两者,便阐明了“一因不生一果”等道理。因为,从一个因,在这里既不会产生一个单一的果,也不会产生多个果;从多个因,也不会产生一个单一的果;而是从多个因,才会产生多个果。正如所见,从地、水、火、风、种子等众多因,会产生色、香、味、芽等众多果。至于这里所说的“以无明为缘,有诸行;以行为缘,有识”等,对每一对单独的因与果的说明,其意并不在于此。显示巴利原文
Paccayākāranti avijjādipaccayadhammaṃ. Paṭiccāti paṭimukhaṃ gantvā, kāraṇasāmaggiṃ apaṭikkhipitvāti attho. Paṭimukhagamanañca paccayassa kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvena phalassa uppādanameva. Apaṭikkhipitvāti pana vinā tāya kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvaṃ agantvā sayameva na uppādetīti attho. Etena kāraṇabahutā dassitā. Avijjādiekekahetusīsena hi hetusamūho niddiṭṭho. Sahiteti samudite, avinibbhutteti attho. Avijjādiko hi paccayadhammo sahiteyeva aññamaññaṃ avinibbhogavuttidhamme uppādeti. Iminā paccayuppannadhammabahutā dassitā. Ubhayenapi ‘‘ekaṃ na ekato’’tiādinayo (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; visuddhi. 2.617) dīpito hoti. Ekato hi kāraṇato na idha kiñci ekaṃ phalamatthi, na anekaṃ, nāpi anekehi kāraṇehi ekaṃ, anekehi pana kāraṇehi anekameva hoti. Tathā hi anekehi utupathavībījasalilasaṅkhātehi kāraṇehi anekameva rūpagandharasādiaṅkurasaṅkhātaṃ phalamuppajjamānaṃ dissati. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ekekahetuphaladīpanaṃ kataṃ, tattha payojanaṃ na vijjati.
世尊有时因某因最为主要,有时因某因最为显著,有时因某因不共,并随说法之善巧及所化众生的根机,而只阐明一个因或一个果。例如,“以触为缘,有受”一句,便只阐明了一个因和一个果。因为触是受的主要因,依触而确定受;受是触的主要果,依受而确定触。又如“由痰引起的疾病”一句,是因痰显著而唯说一因,因为在此情况中,痰是显著的,而非业等。又如“诸比丘,任何不善法,皆以不如理作意为根本”一句,是因不共而说一因。因为不如理作意是不善法的不共因,而所依、所缘等则是共因。因此,在此处,虽然也还有其他诸行的因,如所依、所缘、俱生法等,但无明首先由于是主要因——如经中说“于味随观者,渴爱增长”,以及“从无明之集起,有漏集起”,而无明又是其他如渴爱等行之因的因;其次,由于显著——如经中说“诸比丘,无闻凡夫为无明所覆,造作福行”;再则,由于不共——故应知无明被阐明为诸行的因。如此,在一切处,对于每一对单独的因与果的阐明,都应随其所宜地类推。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Bhagavā hi katthaci padhānattā katthaci pākaṭattā katthaci asādhāraṇattā desanāvilāsassa ca veneyyānañca anurūpato ekameva hetuṃ vā phalaṃ vā dīpeti. ‘‘Phassapaccayā vedanā’’ti hi ekameva hetuṃ phalañcāha. Phasso hi vedanāya padhānahetu yathāphassaṃ vedanāvavatthānato. Vedanā ca phassassa padhānaphalaṃ yathāvedanaṃ phassavavatthānato. ‘‘Semhasamuṭṭhānā ābādhā’’ti (mahāni. 5) pākaṭattā ekaṃ hetuṃ āha. Pākaṭo hi ettha semho, na kammādayo. ‘‘Ye keci, bhikkhave, akusalā dhammā, sabbete ayonisomanasikāramūlakā’’ti asādhāraṇattā ekaṃ hetuṃ āha. Asādhāraṇo hi ayonisomanasikāro akusalānaṃ, sādhāraṇāni vatthārammaṇādīnīti. Tasmā avijjā tāvettha vijjamānesupi aññesu vatthārammaṇasahajātadhammādīsu saṅkhārakāraṇesu ‘‘assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.52) ca ‘‘avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.104) ca vacanato aññesampi taṇhādīnaṃ saṅkhārahetūnaṃ hetūti padhānattā, ‘‘avidvā, bhikkhave, avijjāgato puññābhisaṅkhārampi abhisaṅkharotī’’ti pākaṭattā asādhāraṇattā ca saṅkhārānaṃ hetubhāvena dīpitāti veditabbā. Evaṃ sabbattha ekekahetuphaladīpane yathāsambhavaṃ nayo netabbo. Tenāhu porāṇā –
于此,一因不生一果,多因亦不生一果;唯多因生多果,而非一果。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekaṃ na ekato idha, nānekamanekatopi no ekaṃ; Phalamatthi atthi pana eka-hetuphaladīpane attho’’ti.
因值得被了知,故称为“缘”(paṭicca)。因为,凡是了知它、通达它的人,它必定导向苦的完全止息。“正确且一起地生起”,故称为“起”(samuppāda)。因为缘法在生起自己的果时,是完整地生起,而非残缺;而且它所生起的诸法,是全部一起生起,并非逐一地。如此,它既是“缘”,又是“起”,故为“缘起”——此处应如此理解其义。“广说”是指对缘起一词解释的详述。由于担心过于冗长,此处不予展示;同样,后文将要说的广说亦不展示。“顺逆”是中性名词的表述,如“日月不正运行”等中的用法。“那个”即指那个缘相。或者,“依前说方式所说”是指依“以无明为缘,有诸行”等方式所说的缘相。“于流转”是指于轮回中的流转。“作意”的意思是:任何一个缘法对任何一个缘所生法,以任何方式——如因缘等——作为缘而起缘的作用,对于这一切,以不颠倒、无遗漏、毫无剩余地观察的方式,心中进行了作意。显示巴利原文
Paccetumarahatīti paṭicco. Yo hi naṃ pacceti abhisameti, tassa accantameva dukkhavūpasamāya saṃvattati. Sammā saha ca uppādetīti samuppādo. Paccayadhammo hi attano phalaṃ uppādento sampuṇṇameva uppādeti, na vikalaṃ. Ye ca dhamme uppādeti, te sabbe saheva uppādeti, na ekekaṃ. Iti paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Vitthāroti paṭiccasamuppādapadavaṇṇanāpapañco. Mayampi taṃ atipapañcabhayā idha na dassayissāma, evaṃ parato vakkhamānampi vitthāraṃ. Anulomapaṭilomanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso ‘‘visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.70) viya. Svevāti so eva paccayākāro. Purimanayena vā vuttoti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena vutto paccayākāro. Pavattiyāti saṃsārappavattiyā. Manasi akāsīti yo yo paccayadhammo yassa yassa paccayuppannadhammassa yathā yathā hetupaccayādinā paccayabhāvena paccayo hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ aviparītaṃ aparihāpetvā anavasesato paccavekkhaṇavasena citte akāsīti attho.
在“无明缘”等之中,应知:于不应知的身恶行等中而了知,故为无明;于应知的身善行等中不了知,故为无明;令不了知诸法的真实自性,故为无明;令有情在无始的轮回、有等之中奔驰,故为无明;在不存在中奔驰,在存在中不奔驰,故为无明;或者,是明的对立面,故为无明。应知它即是“于苦无知”等四种。缘,即依此而有果生起与转起,并非无此而有果,故为缘;或者,缘是资助之义。无明既是彼,又是缘,故为无明缘;因此说“以无明为缘”。行,即造作,是世间善与不善思。它们依福行、非福行、不动行之类别,应知有三种。识,即了知,依世间异熟识的类别,有三十二种。名,即朝向,是受等三蕴。色,即变坏,是四大种色及眼等所造色。处,即来至,以及令轮回之苦延长,故为处。触,即接触。受,即感受。此二者依门而别,各有六种;若取异熟,则有三十二种。爱,即渴望、热望,它依欲爱等,略说有三种,广说有一百零八种。取,即执取,它依欲取等,有四种。显示巴利原文
Avijjāpaccayātiādīsu (vibha. aṭṭha. 225; visuddhi. 2.586-587; udā. aṭṭha. 1) avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre bhavādīsu satte javāpetīti avijjā, avijjamānesu javati, vijjamānesu na javatīti avijjā, vijjāpaṭipakkhāti vā avijjā. Sā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā catubbidhā veditabbā. Paṭicca naṃ na vinā phalaṃ eti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti paccayo, upakāraṭṭho vā paccayo. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo , tasmā avijjāpaccayā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā, lokiyā kusalākusalacetanā. Te puññāpuññāneñcābhisaṅkhāravasena tividhā veditabbā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ, taṃ lokiyavipākaviññāṇavasena bāttiṃsavidhaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, bhūtarūpaṃ cakkhādiupādārūpañca. Āyatanti, āyatañca saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Idampi dvayaṃ dvāravasena chabbidhaṃ, vipākavasena gahaṇe bāttiṃsavidhaṃ. Tassati paritassatīti taṇhā, sā kāmataṇhādivasena saṅkhepato tividhā, vitthārato aṭṭhasatavidhā ca. Upādiyatīti upādānaṃ, taṃ kāmupādānādivasaena catubbidhaṃ.
有,既是存在,也是令其存在,依业有与生有之别,分为两种。生,即出生。老,即衰老。死,是藉此而死去。愁,是忧愁。悲,是悲泣。苦,是令人痛苦;或者,因为依生起与住立的样态而分为两种、带来损害,所以是苦。忧,是心不悦的状态。恼,是剧烈的苦恼。集起,即产生。而且,不仅与愁等词语相连,还应与所有词句作“集起”一词的连结。如此一来,便显示了“以无明为缘,行集起”等缘与缘生法的确定。因此说:“以无明为缘,行集起——应以此方法,理解所有词句的意义。”如是,此……生起,在这里,其意思是:“如是”,是对上述方法的指认,借此显示只以无明等为因,而不是以大自在天所造等为因。“此”,即前述的内容。“纯”,即不混杂的,或者全部的。“苦蕴”,是苦的聚集,既不是有情,也不是乐、净等。“生起”,即产生、发生。显示巴利原文
Bhavati bhāvayati cāti bhavo, so kammopapattibhedato duvidho. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti tenāti maraṇaṃ. Socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ. Uppādaṭṭhitivasena dvedhā khanatīti vā dukkhaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Na kevalañca sokādīheva, atha kho sabbapadehi ‘‘sambhavantī’’ti padassa yojanā kātabbā. Evañhi avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti paccayapaccayuppannavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti iminā nayena sabbapadesu attho veditabbo’’ti. Evametassa…pe… samudayo hotīti ettha pana ayamattho. Evanti niddiṭṭhanayanidassanaṃ. Tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa, sakalassa vā. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa nāpi subhasukhādīnaṃ. Samudayo hotīti nibbatti sambhavati.
离,是藉此彻底离于诸行,即是圣道,因此说“以名为离的道”。无余灭,即没有残余的灭;无余,就是无遗余、无残存地灭去,是断除,依随眠的断除,由最上道彻底断除无明,这是它的含义。虽然由较低诸道所断的无明也是以彻底断除的方式而断的,但并非毫无残余地断除。因为,导致堕入恶趣的无明由初道断除;同样,作为只在这里以及一切非圣者所处之地的受生之缘的无明,依次由第二、第三道断除,而不是由其他道;唯有依于阿拉汉道,它才毫无残余地断除。无生灭,就是一切诸行毫无残余地无生灭。因为,由下三道,有些行会灭,有些行不灭,这是由于无明还留有残余的灭;而由最上道,由于它的毫无残余的灭,没有哪一行不灭。如此灭尽,即依这样无生灭而灭尽。“纯”这个词,既有毫无残余的意思,如“纯一摩揭陀国”等;也有不混杂的意思,如“纯有顶”等。因此,说这两种意义:“全部的,或者纯净的”。其中,“全部的”即毫无残余的、一切有等所包含的。“无有情的”,就是远离他人所计执的命者。显示巴利原文
Accantameva saṅkhārehi virajjati etenāti virāgo, ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘virāgasaṅkhātena maggenā’’ti. Asesaṃ nirodhā asesanirodhā, asesetvā nissesetvā nirodhā samucchindanā anusayappahānavasena aggamaggena avijjāya accantasamugghātatoti attho. Yadipi heṭṭhimamaggehipi pahīyamānā avijjā accantasamugghātavaseneva pahīyati, tathāpi na anavasesato pahīyati. Apāyagamanīyā hi avijjā paṭhamamaggena pahīyati, tathā sakideva imasmiṃ loke sabbattha ca anariyabhūmiyaṃ upapattiyā paccayabhūtā avijjā yathākkamaṃ dutiyatatiyamaggehi pahīyati, na itarāti, arahattamaggeneva pana sā anavasesaṃ pahīyatīti. Anuppādanirodho hotīti sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Heṭṭhimena hi maggattayena keci saṅkhārā nirujjhanti, keci na nirujjhanti avijjāya sāvasesanirodhā, aggamaggena panassā anavasesanirodhā na keci saṅkhārā na nirujjhantīti. Evaṃ niruddhānanti evaṃ anuppādanirodhena niruddhānaṃ. Kevala-saddo niravasesavācako ca hoti ‘‘kevalā aṅgamagadhā’’tiādīsu. Asammissavācako ca ‘‘kevalā sālayo’’tiādīsu. Tasmā ubhayathāpi atthaṃ vadati ‘‘sakalassa, suddhassa vā’’ti. Tattha sakalassāti anavasesassa sabbabhavādigatassa. Sattavirahitassāti paraparikappitajīvarahitassa.
而且,在这里,虽然仅仅说了“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭”直至此处,也已经阐明了一切苦蕴的无余灭,然而,如同在顺观中,为了显示“由于某某缘法存在,某某缘生法便不灭而转起”这一意义,而说“以无明为缘,行……集起”。同样,为了从它的对立面显示“由于某某缘不存在,某某缘生法便灭而不转起”,在此说“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭,识灭则名色灭……苦蕴灭”,但并非如同顺观那样,是为了显示涵摄了三时的苦蕴之灭。因为,只有未来的、若不修习圣道便会生起的苦蕴,由于修习了圣道而灭去,这才是所期望的。这个差别也应知道。显示巴利原文
Apicettha kiñcāpi ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’ti ettāvatāpi sakalassa dukkhakkhandhassa anavasesato nirodho vutto hoti, tathāpi yathā anulome yassa yassa paccayadhammassa atthitāya yo yo paccayuppannadhammo na nirujjhati pavattati evāti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tappaṭipakkhato tassa tassa paccayassa abhāve so so paccayuppannadhammo nirujjhati na pavattatīti dassanatthaṃ idha ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho, viññāṇanirodhā nāmarūpanirodho…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana anulome viya kālattayapariyāpannassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhadassanatthaṃ. Anāgatasseva hi ariyamaggabhāvanāya asati uppajjanārahassa dukkhakkhandhassa ariyamaggabhāvanāya nirodho icchitoti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
此处“Yadā have”中的“have”是小品词,意为“确实”。然而,有些人认为“have”意为“在战斗中”,因为《法句经》第40颂有言:“应以智慧之武器战胜魔罗”,他们的意思是:那是在与烦恼魔战斗之时。所谓“以所缘近伺为相”,即具有所缘近伺的本质。所谓“以特相近伺为相”,此处道理相同。其中,“所缘近伺”指八种等至,因为它们近伺于所缘的遍相。“特相近伺”指观、道、果。观因近伺于三相,故为特相近伺;道成就由观所成办的任务,故为特相近伺;果近伺于如实之相──灭谛,故为特相近伺。“No kallo pañho”意为“此问不合宜,是劣问”。以“ādi”一词……显示巴利原文
Yadā haveti ettha haveti byattanti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Keci pana ‘‘haveti āhave yuddhe’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, ‘‘yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhenā’’ti (dha. pa. 40) hi vacanato kilesamārena yujjhanasamayeti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇenāti ārammaṇūpanijjhānasabhāvena. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānalakkhaṇenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tattha ārammaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma aṭṭha samāpattiyo kasiṇārammaṇassa upanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ nāma vipassanāmaggaphalāni. Vipassanā hi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, maggo vipassanāya āgatakiccaṃ sādhetīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ, phalaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānaṃ. No kallo pañhoti ayutto pañho, duppañho esoti attho. Ādisaddena –
“触者”──我不说。若我说“触者”,那么“尊者,谁触?”这样的问题便是合宜的。但我不这样说。对于不这样说的我,如果有人问:“尊者,触以何为缘?”这才是合宜的问题。对此,合宜的回答是:“以六处为缘而有触,以触为缘而有受。”“尊者,谁感受?”世尊说:“此问不合宜。”“感受者”──我不说。若我说“感受者”,那么“尊者,谁感受?”这样的问题便是合宜的。但我不这样说。对于不这样说的我,如果有人问:“尊者,受以何为缘?”这才是合宜的问题。对此,合宜的回答是:“以触为缘而有受,以受为缘而有爱。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Phusatīti ahaṃ na vadāmi. Phusatīti cāhaṃ vadeyyaṃ, tatrassa kallo pañho ‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatī’ti? Evañcāhaṃ na vadāmi, evaṃ maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kiṃpaccayā nu kho, bhante, phasso’ti, esa kallo pañho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ ‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā’ti. Ko nu kho, bhante, vedayatīti? No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avoca, vedayatīti ahaṃ na vadāmi, vedayatīti cāhaṃ vadeyyaṃ, tatrassa kallo pañho ‘ko nu kho, bhante, vedayatī’ti? Evañcāhaṃ na vadāmi. Evaṃ maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kiṃpaccayā nu kho, bhante, vedanā’ti, esa kallo pañho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ ‘phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.12) –
以上这些,便摄括了其余的经文。显示巴利原文
Evamādiṃ pāḷisesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
所谓“以等起及方法”,此处的“等”字包含了诸如“尊者,什么是生?而这是谁的生?世尊说:‘此问不合宜。’”等内容。有人会问:“尊者,什么是老死?”难道这不是善问吗?虽然是善问,但就像在价值十万金的黄金器皿中盛满美食,却放上一小块枣核大小的粪团,所有美食便因此成为劣食、应被丢弃一样,由于“而这是谁的老死?”这句执著有情的邪见,如同粪团一般,使得那个善问也变成了劣问。显示巴利原文
Ādinā ca nayenāti ettha ādi-saddena pana ‘‘katamā nu kho, bhante, jāti, kassa ca panāyaṃ jātīti. ‘No kallo pañho’ti bhagavā avocā’’ti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Nanu cettha ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.35) idaṃ supucchitanti? Kiñcāpi supucchitaṃ, yathā pana satasahassagghanake suvaṇṇathālake vaḍḍhitassa subhojanassa matthake āmalakamatte gūthapiṇḍe ṭhapite sabbaṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ hoti chaḍḍetabbaṃ, evameva ‘‘kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti iminā sattūpaladdhivādapadena gūthapiṇḍena taṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ viya ayampi sabbo duppañho jātoti.
十六种疑,即:“我于过去世是否存在?是否不存在?曾是什么?如何存在?从什么成为什么?我于过去世……我于未来世将存在吗?将不存在吗?将是什么?将如何存在?从什么将成为什么?我于未来世……我现在存在吗?不存在吗?是什么?如何存在?此有情从何处来?他将去往何处?”如此,是涉及过去、未来、现在三世的十六种疑。显示巴利原文
Soḷasa kaṅkhāti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kathaṃ nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kathaṃ nu kho bhavissāmi, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, ahaṃ nu khosmi, no nu khosmi, kiṃ nu khosmi, kathaṃ nu khosmi, ayaṃ nu kho satto kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20; ma. ni. 1.18) evamāgatā atītānāgatapaccuppannavisayā soḷasavidhā kaṅkhā.
其中,“我是否存在?是否不存在?”是依于常见之相与无因生起之相,而对过去自我的存在与不存在产生疑惑,其原因为何并不必追问。因为愚痴凡夫就像疯子一样,行事毫无准则。再者,这里的原因就是不如理作意。那么,不如理作意的原因又是什么?就是凡夫性本身,或未得见圣者等。难道凡夫也会有如理作意吗?谁说过他们“不作意”呢?然而,在那个情形下,凡夫性并非原因,听闻正法、亲近善友等才是那里的原因。因为鱼肉等本身并非芳香,但通过加工处理,也可以变得芳香。显示巴利原文
Tattha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.18; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.20) ahosiṃ nu kho, na nu khoti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati, kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ. Ummattako viya hi bālaputhujjano yathā tathā vā pavattati. Apica ayonisomanasikāroyevettha kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ ayonisomanasikārassa pana kiṃ kāraṇanti? Sveva puthujjanabhāvo ariyānaṃ adassanādīni vā. Nanu ca puthujjanopi yoniso manasi karotīti. Ko vā evamāha ‘‘na manasi karotī’’ti. Na pana tattha puthujjanabhāvo kāraṇaṃ, saddhammasavanakalyāṇamittādīni tattha kāraṇāni . Na hi macchamaṃsādīni attano pakatiyā sugandhāni, abhisaṅkhārapaccayā pana sugandhānipi honti.
“曾是什么?”——这是依出身、种姓、性别、投生之处而产生的疑惑:“我曾是刹帝利吗?是婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者,或是天、人中的某一种吗?”显示巴利原文
Kiṃ nu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati.
“如何存在?”——这是依形体、相貌而产生的疑惑:“我曾是高个子吗?是矮个子、白肤色、黑肤色、有量、无量等中的某一种吗?”然而有些人说:“这是依自在天所造等,从原因上疑惑:‘是由于什么原因而存在?’”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ, rassaodātakaṇhappamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādiṃ nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosi’nti hetuto kaṅkhatī’’ti vadanti.
“从什么成为什么?”——这是依出身等而对自己相续的疑惑:“从刹帝利成为婆罗门吗?……乃至……从天成为人吗?”在所有这些处所中,“addhāna”一词是时间的同义词,且应视为在处格意义上使用了业格。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manusso’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ, tañca bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“我将存在吗?将不存在吗?”是依于常见之相和断灭之相,而对未来的自己存在与否产生疑惑。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
Bhavissāmi nu kho, na nu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
“我现在存在吗?”是对自身存在性的疑惑。然而这合理吗?合理与否,此处又何须思惟?而且,在此还举出这样一个事例:据说,小母的儿子是秃头,大母的儿子不是秃头。他们给他剃了头。他起来后想:“我是小母的儿子吗?”如此,“我现在存在吗?”的疑惑便生起。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃnu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti, cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo. Taṃ suttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ. So uṭṭhāya ‘‘ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya putto’’ti cintesi. Evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhā hoti.
“我难道不存在吗?”这样怀疑自己不存在。此处也有一个事例:据说,有一个人捕鱼时,因在水中久站而大腿变凉,他以为是“鱼”,便打了下去。另一个人在坟场边守田,因为害怕蜷缩着睡了。醒来后,把自己的膝盖当成了“两个夜叉”,便打了下去。如此,便是“我难道不存在吗?”的疑惑。显示巴利原文
No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ ‘‘maccho’’ti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi. So paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni ‘‘dve yakkhā’’ti cintetvā pahari, evaṃ ‘‘no nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhati.
“我到底是什么呢?”如此,本是刹帝利,却怀疑自己的刹帝利身份,如迦尔纳那样自认为是车夫之子。其余诸种姓亦同此理。然而,身为天神却不知自己乃天神者,是不存在的。但天神也会依“我是有色的还是无色的?”等方式而疑惑。若问:刹帝利等为何不知?因为他们对各处家族中的出生并无现量认知。在家众中,如波吒厘等人,也会生起出家众之想;出家众也会依“我的业是否有过失?”等方式,而生起在家众之想。人类中也有一些人,如同诸王一般,对自己生起天神之想。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati kaṇṇo viya sūtaputtasaññī. Esa nayo sesesu. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce? Appaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca pātalikādayo pabbajitasaññino. Pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca ekacce rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti.
“我是怎样的呢?”其解释方式如前所述。只是在此,由于执取“身中存在所谓命者”,便依其形态相貌而疑惑:“我是长的吗?还是短的、方的、六角、八角、十六角等中的某一种类?”应知,这便是“我是怎样的呢?”之疑。然而,对眼前身体的形态,没有人不知道。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañhettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu khosmi, rassacaturassachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāro’’ti kaṅkhanto ‘‘kathaṃ nu khosmī’’ti kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi.
“从何处来?他将往何处去?”如此,乃是对有身之来处与去处的疑惑。显示巴利原文
Kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhati.
“Vapayanti”即“viapayanti”,此处是省略 i 字母的表述,意指“byapayanti”(消散)。因此说“vapayanti apagacchantī”(消散即离去)。而“离去”是就未生起之灭尽而言,故说“nirujjhantī”(灭尽)。显示巴利原文
Vapayantīti viapayanti, ikāralopenāyaṃ niddeso. Byapayantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘vapayanti apagacchantī’’ti. Apagamanañca anuppattinirodhavasenāti āha ‘‘nirujjhantī’’ti.
3 那么,菩提分法或四圣谛法何时显现、生起、阐明呢?是在观智与道智现前的时候。其中,先就观智来说:与观智相应的念等诸法以及观智本身,各随其宜,在各自的所缘上,以彼分断的方式舍离净相等想,依身随观等方式各别生起。而在道刹那,它们缘取涅槃,以正断的方式舍离对立之法,于四圣谛中以无痴通达成就的方式,仅同时生起一次。如此应知,此处菩提分法是以“生起”之义为“显现”。至于四圣谛法:世间圣谛在观刹那,是作为观的缘境而显明;出世间圣谛在道刹那,是以彼决意、以证得灭谛之缘、以一切圣谛作用证得的方式而显明,故以“阐明”之义为“显现”。显示巴利原文
3. Kadā panassa bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsantīti? Vipassanāmaggañāṇesu pavattamānesu. Tattha vipassanāñāṇe tāva vipassanāñāṇasampayuttā satiādayo vipassanāñāṇañca yathārahaṃ attano attano visayesu tadaṅgappahānavasena subhasaññādike pajahantā kāyānupassanādivasena visuṃ visuṃ uppajjanti. Maggakkhaṇe pana te nibbānamālambitvā samucchedavasena paṭipakkhe pajahantā catūsupi ariyasaccesu asammohapaṭivedhasādhanavasena sakideva uppajjanti. Evaṃ tāvettha bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ uppajjanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo. Ariyasaccadhammānaṃ pana lokiyānaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena lokuttarānaṃ tadadhimuttatāvasena maggakkhaṇe nirodhasaccassa ārammaṇābhisamayavasena sabbesampi kiccābhisamayavasena pākaṭabhāvato pakāsanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.
如是,世尊虽以一切方式,于一切法之自智已得显现,然因依缘起之门而修习观,缘相甚深、极微细、极难见;世尊审察此缘相后,生起极大的胜喜,连同显示对立面的正断,而在此宣说了彰显其证悟威德的优陀那。显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā satipi sabbākārena sabbadhammānaṃ attano ñāṇassa pākaṭabhāve paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa katattā nipuṇagambhīrasududdasatāya paccayākārassa taṃ paccavekkhitvā uppannabalavasomanasso paṭipakkhasamucchedavibhāvanena saddhiṃ attano tadabhisamayānubhāvadīpakamevettha udānaṃ udānesi.
以“欲是汝第一军”等方式所说的魔军,即:显示巴利原文
‘‘Kāmāte paṭhamā senā’’tiādinā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenanti –
“欲是汝第一军,第二名为不乐;
第三是饥渴,第四名为渴爱。”
第五为昏沉睡眠,第六称为怖畏;
第七为疑惑,悭吝与傲慢为第八。
利养、称誉、恭敬,及邪得之名闻;
凡是抬高自己、轻视他人的人。
魔罗,这是你的军队,黑暗魔的攻击军;
非勇士不能胜之,胜已则得安乐。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāmā te paṭhamā senā, dutiyā arati vuccati; Tatiyā khuppipāsā te, catutthī taṇhā pavuccati. ‘‘Pañcamī thinamiddhaṃ te, chaṭṭhā bhīrū pavuccati; Sattamī vicikicchā te, makkho thambho ca aṭṭhamā. ‘‘Lābho siloko sakkāro, micchāladdho ca yo yaso; Yo cattānaṃ samukkaṃse, pare ca avajānati. ‘‘Esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī; Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukha’’nti. (su. ni. 438-441; mahāni. 28) –
依此方式所说的魔军。显示巴利原文
Iminā nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenaṃ.
其中,由于最初在家众生被烦恼欲在种种事欲中迷惑;他们征服烦恼欲而进入无家状态后,于边远的坐卧处或种种殊胜善法中,会生起不乐。这也有说过:“贤友,于出家者,喜乐难成。”由此,他们因生活受制于他人而被饥渴逼迫;被逼迫者,其求索之渴爱令心疲惫;心疲惫后,便陷入昏沉睡眠;由此,未得殊胜者住于难安的山林旷野坐卧处时,生起名为“惊惧”的怖畏;他们常怀疑惧、长夜未得品尝远离之味而住者,于行道中生起疑惑:“此道莫非不存在?”为遣除此而住者,因微小的殊胜证得而生起慢、悭吝、傲慢;即使遣除了他们而住者,依止更上的殊胜证得,又生起利得、恭敬、声望;耽著利得等者,宣说似法,邪得名誉,安住其中,以出身等自赞、轻蔑他人。因此,当知欲等为第一军等之理。显示巴利原文
Tattha (su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.439-41; mahāni. aṭṭha. 28) yasmā āditova agāriyabhūte satte vatthukāmesu kilesakāmā mohayanti, te abhibhuyya anagāriyabhāvaṃ upagatānaṃ pantesu vā senāsanesu aññataraññataresu vā adhikusalesu dhammesu arati uppajjati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘pabbajitena kho, āvuso, abhirati dukkarā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.331). Tato te parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā khuppipāsā bādhati, tāya bādhitānaṃ pariyesana taṇhā cittaṃ kilamayati, atha nesaṃ kilantacittānaṃ thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, tato visesamanadhigacchantānaṃ durabhisambhavesu araññavanapatthesu senāsanesu viharataṃ utrāsasaññitā bhīru jāyati, tesaṃ ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitānaṃ dīgharattaṃ vivekarasamanassādayamānānaṃ viharataṃ ‘‘na siyā nu kho esa maggo’’ti paṭipattiyaṃ vicikicchā uppajjati, taṃ vinodetvā viharataṃ appamattakena visesādhigamena mānamakkhathambhā jāyanti, tepi vinodetvā viharataṃ tato adhikataraṃ visesādhigamaṃ nissāya lābhasakkārasilokā uppajjanti, lābhādimucchitā dhammapatirūpakāni pakāsentā micchāyasaṃ adhigantvā tattha ṭhitā jātiādīhi attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti paraṃ vambhenti, tasmā kāmādīnaṃ paṭhamasenādibhāvo veditabbo.
如此,在指出这十种军队之后,由于它具备黑暗法,因而有助于黑暗的魔罗,故在指明‘这是你的军队’时,说道:‘魔罗,这是你的军队,是黑暗的、能摧破的。’其中,‘能摧破的’意为杀害、击倒沙门和婆罗门,即作障碍的意思。‘非懦夫能战胜它,战胜后则得安乐’:意思是,你这支军队,一个顾惜身体与生命的懦夫不能战胜,而勇者却能战胜,战胜后则证得道乐与果乐。‘那位也是婆罗门’:意思是,那位也是漏尽的婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ senaṃ uddisitvā yasmā sā kaṇhadhammasamannāgatattā kaṇhassa namucino upakārāya saṃvattati, tasmā naṃ ‘‘tava senā’’ti niddisantena ‘‘esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha abhippahārinīti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ghātanī nippothanī, antarāyakarīti attho. Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukhanti evaṃ tava senaṃ asūro kāye ca jīvite ca sāpekkho puriso na jināti, sūro pana jināti, jetvā ca maggasukhaṃ phalasukhañca adhigacchatīti attho. Sopi brāhmaṇoti sopi khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo.
现在,为了显示《优陀那》中所述——“那时,世尊结跏趺坐七日,体验解脱乐。七日过后,世尊从该定出起,于夜初分,善以心随顺作意缘起;于夜中分,善以心逆作意缘起;于夜后分,善以心随顺与逆作意缘起”——与此《犍度》经文并不相违,故而有“但在《优陀那》中”等语。这里,“依彼之力”是指依于了知缘相及证得缘灭之力。“每一部分”是指在随顺与逆观中的每一分。“在隔夜如是作意”是指于夜的三分中,唯以心作意随顺与逆。据说,世尊除了宝屋七日之外,在其余六个七日中,间或省察法,而多分安住于体验解脱乐;但在宝屋七日中,唯以阿毗达摩推度而住。因此,其意趣是:在那些由省察法而间或生起作意的情况下,针对隔夜所生起的作意,在此《犍度》经文中作如是说。显示巴利原文
Idāni ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinno hoti vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī. Atha kho bhagavā tassa sattāhassa accayena tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā rattiyā paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomaṃ sādhukaṃ manasākāsi. Rattiyā majjhimaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭilomaṃ sādhukaṃ manasākāsi. Rattiyā pacchimaṃ yāmaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ sādhukaṃ manasākāsī’’ti evaṃ vuttāya udānapāḷiyā (udā. 1) imissā ca khandhakapāḷiyā avirodhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘udāne panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ettha tassa vasenāti tassa paccayākārapajānanassa paccayakkhayādhigamassa ca vasena. Ekekameva koṭṭhāsanti anulomapaṭilomesu ekekameva koṭṭhāsaṃ. Pāṭipadarattiyā evaṃ manasākāsīti rattiyā tīsupi yāmesu anulomapaṭilomaṃyeva manasākāsi. Bhagavā kira ṭhapetvā ratanagharasattāhaṃ sesesu chasu sattāhesu antarantarā dhammaṃ paccavekkhitvā yebhuyyena vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī vihāsi, ratanagharasattāhe pana abhidhammapavicayavaseneva vihāsi. Tasmā antarantarā dhammapaccavekkhaṇavasena uppāditamanasikāresu pāṭipadarattiyā uppāditaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāya imissaṃ khandhakapāḷiyaṃ evaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo.
牧羊人榕树叙事注释显示巴利原文
Ajapālakathāvaṇṇanā
4 “该七日过后”是指结跏趺坐七日过去之后。“从该定中出起”是指从阿罗汉果等至定中,依时限出定。“还有其他成佛之法”是指从毗舍佉月满日开始,于那些日日夜夜如此成为恒常等持之因的佛陀功德之上,还有其余成就佛果之法。“这是佛”——为了向他人显示佛性,是否有这样的法呢?这是文句的连接。“某些天人”是指那些已证道、现证灭、以一分了知佛德的天人,除此以外的其他天人。“以不瞬目”是指因法喜洋溢而显现净信,眼睑不动,无有眨眼。“宝经行处”是指天人所建造的宝石经行处。也有说:“由于在那里以七部论藏之宝及无上法宝的思惟,该处成为名为宝屋的支提之处。”因此,《阿毗达摩义广释》中说:“所谓宝屋,并非宝石所造之屋,而是思惟七部论藏之处,应知为宝屋。”显示巴利原文
4.Tassa sattāhassa accayenāti pallaṅkasattāhassa apagamanena. Tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvāti tato arahattaphalasamāpattisamādhito yathākālaparicchedaṃ vuṭṭhahitvā. Aññepi buddhattakarāti visākhapuṇṇamito paṭṭhāya rattindivaṃ evaṃ niccasamāhitabhāvahetubhūtānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ upari aññepi buddhattasādhakā. ‘‘Ayaṃ buddho’’ti buddhabhāvassa paresaṃ vibhāvanā dhammā kiṃ nu kho santīti yojanā. Ekaccānaṃ devatānanti yā adhigatamaggā sacchikatanirodhā ekapadesena buddhaguṇe jānanti, tā ṭhapetvā tadaññāsaṃ devatānaṃ. Animisehīti dhammapītivipphāravasena pasādavibhāvaniccaladalatāya nimesarahitehi. Ratanacaṅkameti devatāhi māpite ratanamayacaṅkame. ‘‘Ratanabhūtānaṃ sattannaṃ pakaraṇānaṃ tattha ca anuttarassa dhammaratanassa sammasanena taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jāta’’ntipi vadanti. Teneva aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) ‘‘ratanagharaṃ nāma na ratanamayaṃ gehaṃ, sattannaṃ pana pakaraṇānaṃ sammasitaṭṭhānaṃ ratanagharanti veditabba’’nti vuttaṃ.
为何这棵树名叫牧羊人榕树?为此说“据说”等语。然而,有些人说:“因为在那里,那些不能诵习吠陀的年老婆罗门,建造了以墙垣围绕的住所,全都居住于此,所以这棵树得名牧羊人榕树。”此处词义是:不诵习者称为ajapā,即不诵咒者之意。这些ajapā们在此居住、执取住处,故称ajapāla。另有些人说:“因为正午时分,山羊进入树下,用自己的阴凉保护、守护它们,所以这棵树惯常称为牧羊人。”无论如何,这就是那棵树的名字。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panāyaṃ ajapālanigrodho nāma jātoti āha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘yasmā tattha vede sajjhāyituṃ asamatthā mahallakabrāhmaṇā pākāraparikkhepayuttāni nivesanāni katvā sabbe vasiṃsu, tasmāssa ‘ajapālanigrodho’ti nāmaṃ jāta’’nti vadanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – na japantīti ajapā, mantānaṃ anajjhāyakāti attho. Ajapā lanti ādiyanti nivāsaṃ etthāti ajapāloti. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘yasmā majjhanhike samaye anto paviṭṭhe aje attano chāyāya pāleti rakkhati, tasmā ‘ajapālo’tissa nāmaṃ ruḷha’’nti. Sabbathāpi nāmametaṃ tassa rukkhassa.
“体验解脱乐”是指在推度法之间,也体验解脱乐。或者,此处应取“推度法并体验解脱乐”这样的读法,因为在《优陀那注释》中正是此读法。这里,“推度法”是指如此思惟阿毗达摩中的理趣:首先是名为《法集论》之论,其次是《分别论》、《界论》、《人施设论》、《论事》、《双论》,然后是名为《大论》的《发趣论》。在那里,当心进入微细之处时,生起喜;喜生起时,血液清净;血液清净时,皮肤清净;皮肤清净时,从身体前侧放出如楼阁等量的光芒,跃入空中,如六牙象族般,跃入东方无量轮围世界。从身体后侧放出,跃入西方无量轮围世界;从右肩骨放出,跃入南方无量轮围世界;从左肩骨放出,跃入北方无量轮围世界。从足底放出如珊瑚芽色的光芒,穿透大地,将水分为二,破开风层,跃入无碍虚空。从头部生起如旋转宝珠鬘般的蓝色光轮,穿透六欲天,超越九梵天,跃入无碍虚空。在那日,无量轮围世界中的无量众生,全都成为金色。而且,据说从那日世尊身体所放出的光芒,直至今日仍在遍照无量的世界界。不应认为仅在此七日中,推度法时才从身体放出光芒;在宝屋七日中,思惟《发趣论》时,也同样从身体放出光芒。显示巴利原文
Vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedentoti dhammaṃ vicinantoyeva antarantarā vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento. ‘‘Dhammaṃ vicinanto vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento’’ti evaṃ vā ettha pāṭho gahetabbo. Udānaṭṭhakathāyampi (udā. aṭṭha. 4) hi ayameva pāṭho. Dhammaṃ vicinanto cettha evaṃ abhidhamme nayamaggaṃ sammasi paṭhamaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇīpakaraṇaṃ nāma, tato vibhaṅgappakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathāpakaraṇaṃ, puggalapaññattippakaraṇaṃ, kathāvatthuṃ nāma, yamakaṃ nāma, tato mahāpakaraṇaṃ paṭṭhānaṃ nāmāti. Tatthassa saṇhasukhumaṭṭhānamhi citte otiṇṇe pīti uppajji, pītiyā uppannāya lohitaṃ pasīdi, lohite pasanne chavi pasīdi, chaviyā pasannāya puratthimakāyato kūṭāgārādippamāṇā rasmiyo uṭṭhahitvā ākāse pakkhandaṃ chaddantanāgakulaṃ viya pācīnadisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā. Pacchimakāyato uṭṭhahitvā pacchimadisāya, dakkhiṇaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇadisāya, vāmaṃsakūṭato uṭṭhahitvā uttaradisāya anantāni cakkavāḷāni pakkhandā. Pādatalehi pavāḷaṅkuravaṇṇā rasmiyo nikkhamitvā mahāpathaviṃ vinibbijjha udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā vātakkhandhaṃ padāletvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Sīsato saṃparivattiyamānaṃ maṇidāmaṃ viya nīlavaṇṇarasmivaṭṭi uṭṭhahitvā cha devaloke vinivijjhitvā nava brahmaloke atikkamma ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandā. Tasmiṃ divase aparimāṇesu cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇā sattā sabbe suvaṇṇavaṇṇāva ahesuṃ. Taṃ divasañca pana bhagavato sarīrā nikkhantā yāvajjadivasāpi kira tā rasmiyo anantalokadhātuyo gacchantiyeva. Na kevalañca imasmiṃyeva sattāhe dhammaṃ vicinantassa sarīrato rasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, atha kho ratanagharasattāhepi paṭṭhānaṃ sammasantassa evameva sarīrato rasmiyo nikkhantā evāti veditabbaṃ.
这在《法集论注》的缘起讲述中已说过了。显示巴利原文
Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) –
在这二十一天中,没有一天从世尊的身体发出光芒。然而在第四个七日,世尊坐在西北方的宝屋中。在那里,即使推度《法集论》,身体也没有发出光芒。推度《分别论》、《界论》、《人施设论》、《论事》、《双论》时,身体也没有发出光芒。但当进入《大论》,开始推度“因缘、所缘缘……乃至……不离去缘”时,当他推度二十四缘的全面发趣时,一切知智唯独在《大论》中得到了机会。正如巨大的提弥罗频伽罗大鱼只有在八万四千由旬深的大海中才能得到活动空间,同样,一切知智唯独在《大论》中才得到机会。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imesu ca ekavīsatiyā divasesu ekadivasepi satthu sarīrato rasmiyo na nikkhantā, catutthe pana sattāhe pacchimuttarāya disāya ratanaghare nisīdi. Tattha dhammasaṅgaṇiṃ sammasantassapi sarīrato rasmiyo na nikkhantā. Vibhaṅgappakaraṇaṃ, dhātukathaṃ, puggalapaññattiṃ, kathāvatthuppakaraṇaṃ, yamakappakaraṇaṃ sammasantassapi rasmiyo na nikkhantā. Yadā pana mahāpakaraṇaṃ oruyha ‘hetupaccayo ārammaṇapaccayo…pe… avigatapaccayo’ti sammasanaṃ ārabhi, athassa catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ sammasantassa ekantato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ mahāpakaraṇe okāsaṃ labhi. Yathā hi timirapiṅgalamahāmaccho caturāsītiyojanasahassagambhīre mahāsamuddeyeva okāsaṃ labhati, evameva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ekantato mahāpakaraṇeyeva okāsaṃ labhi.
世尊以如此获得机缘的一切知智,随其意乐思择微细深妙之法时,从身体放出蓝、黄、红、白、亮红色六色光芒。从头发、胡须以及眼睛的蓝色部位放出蓝色光芒,在其映照下,天空如同撒满安阇那粉末,铺满亚麻花与蓝莲花瓣,又如展开的宝石扇子,如铺开的深蓝布幔。从皮肤及眼睛的黄色部位放出黄色光芒,在其映照下,十方如同被金色液体浇灌,如铺开的金色布匹,如撒满藏红花粉与迦尼迦罗花。从肌肉、血液及眼睛的红色部位放出红色光芒,在其映照下,十方如同被朱砂粉染红,如被煮熟的虫胶汁液浇灌,如覆盖了红毯,又如撒满胜利须曼花、巴利跋陀迦花与般度耆婆迦花。从骨骼、牙齿及眼睛的白色部位放出白色光芒,在其映照下,十方如同从银壶中倾泻的乳汁流注,如铺开的银帐,如展开的银扇,又如覆盖了白茉莉、白睡莲、辛度婆罗花、须曼花、茉莉花等花朵。亮红色光芒则从全身各处放出。如此,六色光芒迸发而出,遍照了厚密的大地。显示巴利原文
‘‘Satthu evaṃ laddhokāsena sabbaññutaññāṇena yathāsukhaṃ saṇhasukhumadhammaṃ sammasantassa sarīrato nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu. Kesamassūhi ceva akkhīnañca nīlaṭṭhānehi nīlarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena gaganatalaṃ añjanacuṇṇasamokiṇṇaṃ viya umāpupphanīluppaladalasañchannaṃ viya vītipatantamaṇitālavaṇṭaṃ viya sampasāritamecakapaṭaṃ viya ca ahosi. Chavito ceva akkhīnañca pītaṭṭhānehi pītarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā suvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānā viya suvaṇṇapaṭapasāritā viya kuṅkumacuṇṇakaṇikārapupphasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virociṃsu. Maṃsalohitehi ceva akkhīnañca rattaṭṭhānehi lohitarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā cīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇarañjitā viya supakkalākhārasanisiñcamānā viya rattakambalaparikkhittā viya jayasumanapāribaddhakabandhujīvakakusumasamparikiṇṇā viya ca virociṃsu. Aṭṭhīhi ceva dantehi ca akkhīnañca setaṭṭhānehi odātarasmiyo nikkhamiṃsu, yāsaṃ vasena disābhāgā rajatakuṭehi āsiñcamānakhīradhārāsamparikiṇṇā viya pasāritarajatapaṭavitānā viya vītipatantarajatatālavaṇṭā viya kundakumudasindhuvārasumanamallikādikusumasañchannā viya ca virociṃsu. Mañjiṭṭhapabhassarā pana tamhā tamhā sarīrappadesā nikkhamiṃsu. Iti tā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamitvā ghanamahāpathaviṃ gaṇhiṃsu.
厚达二十四万由旬的大地变得如同精炼的金块。光芒穿透大地后,遍照下方之水。持地之水厚达四十八万由旬,变得如同从金壶中倾泻而出的熔化黄金。光芒穿透水后,遍照了风。风厚达九十六万由旬,变得如同竖立的金柱。光芒穿透风后,向下射入无碍虚空。随即向上腾升,遍照了四大王天。穿透四大王天后,遍照了三十三天,又遍照夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天,继而遍照九个梵天界,遍照广果天,穿透五个净居天后,遍照四个无色界。穿透四个无色界后,射入无碍虚空。显示巴利原文
‘‘Catunahutādhikadviyojanasatasahassabahalā mahāpathavī niddhantasuvaṇṇapiṇḍi viya ahosi. Pathaviṃ bhinditvā heṭṭhā udakaṃ gaṇhiṃsu. Pathavīsandhārakaṃ aṭṭhanahutādhikacatuyojanasatasahassabahalaṃ udakaṃ suvaṇṇakalasehi āsiñcamānavilīnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya ahosi. Udakaṃ vinivijjhitvā vātaṃ aggahesuṃ. Channavutādhikanavayojanasatasahassabahalo vāto samussitasuvaṇṇakkhandho viya ahosi. Vātaṃ vinivijjhitvā heṭṭhā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu. Uparibhāgena uggantvāpi catumahārājike gaṇhiṃsu. Te vinivijjhitvā tāvatiṃse, tato yāme, tato tusite, tato nimmānaratī, tato paranimmitavasavattī, tato nava brahmaloke, tato vehapphale, tato pañca suddhāvāse vinivijjhitvā cattāro āruppe gaṇhiṃsu. Cattāro ca āruppe vinivijjhitvā ajaṭākāsaṃ pakkhandiṃsu.
光芒横向射入无边的世界,在那些处所,月光不再明亮,日光不再闪耀,星光不再璀璨,天人的园林、宫殿、如意树、身体、饰物等一切处,光明悉皆隐没。在三千大千世界中,能遍照光明的大梵天,于佛光映照下犹如日出时分的萤火虫,月亮、太阳、星辰、天人、园林、宫殿、如意树仅能辨出轮廓。整个区域尽被佛光所摄。而这并非诸佛的决意神通,亦非修习所成神通,而是当世间怙主思择微细深妙之法时,血液变得明净,依处色变得明净,肤色变得明净。由心等起的色界遍布周围约八十肘的范围,安住不动。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tiriyabhāgehi anantā lokadhātuyo pakkhandiṃsu, ettake ṭhāne candamhi candappabhā natthi, sūriye sūriyappabhā natthi, tārakarūpesu tārakarūpappabhā natthi, devatānaṃ uyyānavimānakapparukkhesu sarīre ābharaṇesūti sabbattha pabhā natthi. Tisahassimahāsahassilokadhātuyā ālokapharaṇasamattho mahābrahmāpi sūriyuggamane khajjopanako viya ahosi, candasūriyatārakarūpadevatuyyānavimānakapparukkhānaṃ paricchedamattakameva paññāyittha. Ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ buddharasmīhiyeva ajjhotthaṭaṃ ahosi. Ayañca neva buddhānaṃ adhiṭṭhāniddhi, na bhāvanāmayiddhi. Saṇhasukhumadhammaṃ pana sammasato lokanāthassa lohitaṃ pasīdi, vatthurūpaṃ pasīdi, chavivaṇṇo pasīdi. Cittasamuṭṭhānā vaṇṇadhātu samantā asītihatthamatte padese niccalā aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
如此坐下:指从该禅定出定后坐下。有一位婆罗门:指一位因名字与族姓而不为人知、不显赫的婆罗门。他一边发出‘哼哼’声一边游走:指他看到一切不净之物后,感到厌恶,一边发出‘哼哼’声游走。说了以下的话:指说了现在要说的‘怎样才算……’等话语。其中,‘怎样才算’意为以什么为标准。‘nu’是表示疑惑的不变词,‘kho’是填充词。‘bho’是婆罗门因出身而使用的称呼。正如所说:‘若他有任何执著,他便被称为说bho者’。‘乔达摩’:他以族姓称呼世尊。然而,这位婆罗门若是现在才遇见的,又如何会知道世尊的族姓呢?他并非现在才遇见。在六年精勤修行期间,世尊曾与侍奉他的五比丘一起游方,后来舍弃那种苦行,在优楼频螺的将军村独自一人、无有伴侣地乞食时,这位婆罗门就曾见过他并与他交谈过。因此,他忆念起以前从五比丘那里听到的世尊的族姓,便以族姓称呼世尊为‘乔达摩尊者’。或者说,自从世尊发起大出家,在阿诺玛河畔出家以来,他就如同月亮、太阳一般,以‘沙门乔达摩’之名而广为人知,因此不必探究他知晓族姓的原因。‘婆罗门形成’:指的是那。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ nisinneti tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhahitvā nisinne. Eko brāhmaṇoti nāmagottavasena anabhiññāto apākaṭo eko brāhmaṇo. ‘‘Huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicaratīti sabbaṃ acokkhajātikaṃ passitvā jigucchanto ‘‘huṃ hu’’nti karonto vicarati. Etadavocāti (udā. aṭṭha. 4) etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha kittāvatāti kittakena pamāṇena. Nu-ti saṃsayatthe nipāto, kho-ti padapūraṇe. Bho-ti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (dha. pa. 396; su. ni. 625). Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ brāhmaṇo sampati samāgato bhagavato gottaṃ jānātīti? Nāyaṃ sampati samāgato, chabbassāni padhānakaraṇakāle upaṭṭhahantehi pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ caramāno aparabhāge taṃ vataṃ chaḍḍetvā uruvelāyaṃ senanigame eko adutiyo hutvā piṇḍāya caramānopi tena brāhmaṇena diṭṭhapubbo ceva sallapitapubbo ca, tena so pubbe pañcavaggiyehi gayhamānaṃ bhagavato gottaṃ anussaranto ‘‘bho gotamā’’ti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Yato paṭṭhāya vā bhagavā mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto anomānadītīre pabbaji, tato pabhuti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’ti cando viya sūriyo viya pākaṭo paññāto hoti, na ca tassa gottajānane kāraṇaṃ gavesitabbaṃ. Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti brāhmaṇaṃ karontīti brāhmaṇakaraṇā, brāhmaṇabhāvakarāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘kittāvatā’’ti etena yehi dhammehi brāhmaṇo hoti, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ parimāṇaṃ pucchati. ‘‘Katame’’ti pana iminā tesaṃ sarūpaṃ pucchati.
‘说了优陀那’:指说了‘那位婆罗门……’等优陀那,但并非为那位婆罗门说法。为何?因为他并非领受法义之器。事实上,那位婆罗门听了此偈后,并未证得谛现观。如同这位一样,优波迦邪命外道听闻了佛陀功德的阐扬之后,也是如此。因为在转法轮之前,世尊所说的话,即使他人听闻,也如同给予塔普沙与跋利迦的皈依那样,只属于习气分,而并非无学分或决择分。此即法性。‘知了边际’:此处,‘边际’是指一切行的究竟,即涅槃。‘这些增盛不存在’:因为这些已完全断除,故不存在。显示巴利原文
Udānaṃ udānesīti ‘‘yo brāhmaṇo’’tiādikaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, na pana tassa brāhmaṇassa dhammaṃ desesi. Kasmā? Dhammadesanāya abhājanabhāvato. Tathā hi tassa brāhmaṇassa imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā na saccābhisamayo ahosi. Yathā ca imassa, evaṃ upakassa ājīvakassa buddhaguṇappakāsanaṃ sutvā. Dhammacakkappavattanato hi pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ paresaṃ suṇantānampi tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na asekkhabhāgiyaṃ vā nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ vā. Esā hi dhammatāti. Vedehi vā antanti ettha antaṃ nāma sabbasaṅkhārapariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ. Ime ussadā natthīti sabbaso ime pahīnattā na santi.
目真邻陀论注释显示巴利原文
Mucalindakathāvaṇṇanā
5 第五、在目真邻陀树下:在此,目真邻陀是指一种名为‘尼波’的树,也称为‘尼周罗’,意为在其附近。然而有些人说:‘目遮罗是那棵树的名字,但因为它是森林中最年长的,所以称为目真邻陀。’生起:指充满整个轮围界内部的大云生起。据说这样的云只在两种时候降雨:转轮王出现时,或佛陀出现时。此处是在佛陀出现时生起的。生于莲池:指莲池下方有龙宫,在那里出生。从自己的龙宫:指从自己的龙宫。如此以蛇身缠绕:指以自己身体的蛇身缠绕世尊的身体七圈。在上方头顶展开大蛇冠:指在世尊头顶区域上方,展开自己的大蛇冠。也有‘作蛇冠’的异读,意思相同。显示巴利原文
5.Mucalindamūleti (udā. aṭṭha. 11) ettha mucalindo vuccati nīparukkho, yo ‘‘niculo’’tipi vuccati, tassa samīpeti attho. Keci pana ‘‘mucaloti tassa rukkhassa nāmaṃ, vanajeṭṭhakatāya pana mucalindoti vutta’’nti vadanti. Udapādīti sakalacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ pūrento mahāmegho udapādi. Evarūpo kira megho dvīsuyeva kālesu vassati cakkavattimhi vā uppanne buddhe vā, idha buddhuppādakāle udapādi. Pokkharaṇiyā nibbattoti pokkharaṇiyā heṭṭhā nāgabhavanaṃ atthi, tattha nibbatto. Sakabhavanāti attano nāgabhavanato. Evaṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvāti satta vāre attano sarīrabhogehi bhagavato kāyaṃ parivāretvā. Uparimuddhani mahantaṃ phaṇaṃvihaccāti bhagavato muddhappadesassa upari attano mahantaṃ phaṇaṃ pasāretvā. ‘‘Phaṇaṃ karitvā’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho.
据说,那位龙王当时心想:“世尊正在我住处附近的树下坐着,这场七日大雨又下个不停,应当为他提供一个住所。”他虽然有能力化现一座七宝宫殿,却这样思忖:“那样做只是护持了外表,并非真正的护持,我要亲自承事十力者的身体。”于是他化出巨大的身躯,以蛇身盘绕导师七匝,并在上方撑起蛇冠。此处有云:“他所环绕的内部空间,如同铁制殿堂中的库房大小。”然而《中部注释》中说:显示巴利原文
Tassa kira nāgarājassa etadahosi ‘‘bhagavā ca mayhaṃ bhavanasamīpe rukkhamūle nisinno, ayañca sattāhavaddalikā vattati, vāsāgāramassa laddhuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. So sattaratanamayaṃ pāsādaṃ nimminituṃ sakkontopi ‘‘evaṃ kate kāyasāro gahito na bhavissati, dasabalassa kāyaveyyāvaccaṃ karissāmī’’ti mahantaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā satthāraṃ sattakkhattuṃ bhogehi parikkhipitvā upari phaṇaṃ dhāresi. ‘‘Tassa parikkhepabbhantaraṃ lohapāsāde bhaṇḍāgāragabbhappamāṇaṃ ahosī’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) pana –
“所围绕的内部空间,下方如同铁制殿堂的大小。龙王的心意是:‘导师将以随意自在的威仪安住。’因此他围绕出如此广大的空间。中间铺设了宝座,上方悬着以金星装饰、垂挂花鬘与香布的天盖,四角燃着香油灯,四方敞开放置着栴檀香盒。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Parikkhepassa anto okāso heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇo ahosi, ‘icchiticchitena iriyāpathena satthā viharissatī’ti nāgarājassa ajjhāsayo ahosi, tasmā evaṃ mahantaṃ okāsaṃ parikkhipi, majjhe ratanapallaṅko paññatto hoti, upari suvaṇṇatārakavicittaṃ samosaritagandhadāmakusumacelavitānaṃ ahosi, catūsu koṇesu gandhatelena dīpā jalitā, catūsu disāsu vivaritvā candanakaraṇḍakā ṭhapitā’’ti –
“将以随意自在的威仪安住”,这仅是龙王的心意罢了;然而世尊只是保持着原本的坐姿,静坐度过了七日。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Icchiticchitena iriyāpathena viharissatīti ca nāgarājassa ajjhāsayamattametaṃ, bhagavā pana yathānisinnova sattāhaṃ vītināmesi.
虽然……但……在此,有些人说:‘提及热,是为了说明蛇身缠绕之所以做得宽广的原因。倘若空间狭小,龙王身体产生的热气就可能困扰世尊;做得宽广,这样的热便不会成为困扰。’带有前缀的词,即使去除前缀也能理解其义,因此说‘viddhaṃ即ubbiddhaṃ’。而那种高远的状态,是由于远离烦恼而显得遥远,故说‘如云消散而远去’。如同因陀罗尼蓝宝石般闪耀、发光者,即称为天,也就是虚空。‘知道’:指知道‘现在虚空已无云,世尊没有寒冷等灾患’。‘解开’:指移除。‘自己的形态’:指自己的龙形。‘收回’:指隐没。‘青年模样’:指童子的形态。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi…pe… cintetuṃ yuttanti ettha keci vadanti ‘‘uṇhaggahaṇaṃ bhogaparikkhepassa vipulabhāvakaraṇe kāraṇakittanaṃ. Khuddake hi tasmiṃ bhagavantaṃ nāgarājassa sarīrasambhūtā usmā bādheyya, vipulabhāvakaraṇena pana tādisaṃ mā uṇhaṃ bādhayitthā’’ti. Saupasaggapadassa attho upasaggena vināpi viññāyatīti āha ‘‘viddhanti ubbiddha’’nti, sā cassa ubbiddhatā upakkilesavigamena dūrabhāvena upaṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘meghavigamena dūrībhūta’’nti. Indanīlamaṇi viya dibbati jotatīti devo, ākāso. Viditvāti ‘‘idāni vigatavalāhako ākāso, natthi bhagavato sītādiupaddavo’’ti ñatvā. Viniveṭhetvāti apanetvā. Attanorūpanti attano nāgarūpaṃ. Paṭisaṃharitvāti antaradhāpetvā. Māṇavakavaṇṇanti kumārakarūpaṃ.
‘了知此义’:意即对于‘体验到远离之乐者,无论何处皆有乐’这一义理,以一切方式完全了知。‘此感兴语’:即宣说了这首彰显远离之乐威力的感兴语。‘闻名之法者’:即声名远播的法者。因此说‘显扬法者’。‘不动之性’:即不被扰动的本性。显示巴利原文
Etamatthaṃviditvāti ‘‘vivekasukhapaṭisaṃvedino yattha katthaci sukhameva hotī’’ti etaṃ atthaṃ sabbākārena jānitvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ vivekasukhānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Sutadhammassāti vissutadhammassa. Tenāha ‘‘pakāsitadhammassā’’ti. Akuppanabhāvoti akuppanasabhāvo.
王处故事义注显示巴利原文
Rājāyatanakathāvaṇṇanā
6 ‘奉上药诃子’:并非仅仅奉上药诃子,也奉上了齿木。对于‘paccagghe’一词,有些人不接受前一种解释,因此阿阇梨法护长老说:‘paccagghe,意为新鲜的。有些人说paccagghe是因各别珍贵,那并不妥当,因为诸佛世尊并不受用贵重之物。’显示巴利原文
6.Osadhaharītakaṃ upanesīti na kevalaṃ osadhaharītakameva, dantakaṭṭhampi upanesi. Paccaggheti ettha purimaṃ atthavikappaṃ keci na icchanti, teneva ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘paccaggheti abhinave. Paccekaṃ mahagghatāya paccaggheti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Na hi buddhā bhagavanto mahagghaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti paribhuñjanti vā’’ti.
梵天劝请故事义注显示巴利原文
Brahmayācanakathāvaṇṇanā
7 “已习行、已正习行”,即已行持,且为诸行持者正确无误地行持之义。以此指出:此思惟确实于一切诸佛初成正觉时生起,这是此处的法性。甚深之法,若破除其对治,便能极为明显;而破除对治则系于正行道,正行道则系于听闻正法,听闻正法则取决于对师与法的净信。此净信,尤其在世间,是对应受尊敬者与应受重视者的希求之因。如此辗转相续,为令众生依法而行道,梵天的劝请遂成为因缘。为显示此义,故说“因梵天劝请而欲说法”等语。显示巴利原文
7.Āciṇṇasamāciṇṇoti ācarito ceva ācarantehi ca sammadeva ācaritoti attho. Etena ayaṃ parivitakko sabbabuddhānaṃ paṭhamābhisambodhiyaṃ uppajjatevāti ayamettha dhammatāti dasseti. Gambhīropi dhammo paṭipakkhavidhamanena supākaṭo bhaveyya, paṭipakkhavidhamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammasavanādhīnā, taṃ satthari dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ. So visesato loke sambhāvanīyassa garukātabbassa abhipatthanāhetukoti paramparāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmuno yācanānimittanti taṃ dassento ‘‘brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyā’’tiādimāha.
“已证得”,即已通达,以自觉智如实了知“此是苦”等之义。“法”,即四谛法,因为除此之外别无应通达之法。“甚深”,犹如大海,除了已积累、成熟智资粮者之外,他人之智无法得其立足处,犹如蚊喙之针。正因甚深,故为“难见”,须历辛苦方能得见,不能由乐得见。那些无法得其立足处者,由于不能深入,故于自相与共相不易得见,唯有历尽艰难方能得见。正因难见,故为“难觉”,须历辛苦方能得觉,不能由乐得觉。连见尚不可得,何况深入而觉?因为觉悟是难行之事。此处应引经文:“诸比丘,于汝意云何?何者更难行、更难成就?”显示巴利原文
Adhigatoti paṭividdho, sayambhūñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho. Dhammoti catusaccadhammo tabbinimuttassa paṭivijjhitabbadhammassa abhāvato. Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho. Gambhīrattāva duddaso dukkhena daṭṭhabbo, na sakkā sukhena daṭṭhuṃ. Yo hi alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho, so ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato ca visesato ca sukhena passituṃ na sakkā, atha kho kicchena kenaci kadācideva daṭṭhabbo. Duddasattāva duranubodho dukkhena avabujjhitabbo, na sakkā sukhena avabujjhituṃ. Yañhi daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anubujjhane kathā eva natthi avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) suttapadaṃ vattabbaṃ.
“寂静”,因无有躁动本质的烦恼与诸行,且一切热恼已止息,故为寂静、涅槃;或因以寂静为所缘而称寂静。此处,灭谛以寂静为所缘,故为“寂静所缘”;道谛既是寂静,又以寂静为所缘,故亦为“寂静所缘”。已臻殊胜状态,故为“微妙”。或说“微妙”,如美味佳肴,以其令人不会生厌足之义,故为无厌足。此处正因寂静与微妙,故应理解其不混杂性与无厌足性。此二者唯就出世间而说。“非思量所行境”,因是至上智之境域,故不可以思量而行、而深入,唯可以智而行。正因如此,以极其微妙的智为行境,且具微细之本质,故为“微细”“微妙”。“唯智者所觉”,因非愚者之境,唯由行道之智者所能觉知。显示巴利原文
Santoti anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato vūpasantasabbapariḷāhatāya santo nibbuto, santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti paṇīto. Atha vā paṇītoti atittikaraṇaṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Santapaṇītabhāveneva cettha asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Idañhi dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atakkāvacaroti uttamañāṇavisayattā takkena avacaritabbo ogāhitabbo na hoti, ñāṇeneva avacaritabbo. Tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇo saṇho. Paṇḍitavedanīyoti bālānaṃ avisayattā sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannehi paṇḍitehi eva veditabbo.
“执著”,因应可乐住之义而为所亲近,故称为“所依”,即五种欲功德。因此说:“众生执著于五种欲功德,因此这些被称为所依。”其中,“执著于五种欲功德”,即是亲近五种欲功德之义。“这些”即五种欲功德。“乐著”,即获得快乐、嬉戏、游玩。“执著”,以乐住而亲近,故为“所依”,即百八爱行。乐著于这些所依,故称为“所依乐著者”——应如此理解其义。这些众生,正如对欲功德一般,也同样味著、欢喜于贪。正如国王进入布置精美、花果满树的园林,于种种成就而乐著,欢喜踊跃,不感厌倦,乃至傍晚仍不愿离去;同样,这些众生以欲所依、爱所依而乐著,于轮回中欢喜而住,无有厌倦。因此,世尊将两种所依示现如园林,而说“所依乐著者”等语。“乐著”即耽著。“极欢喜”,即因不生厌倦而极度欢喜。显示巴利原文
Allīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena seviyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇāti āha ‘‘sattā pañcakāmaguṇe allīyanti, tasmā te ālayāti vuccantī’’ti. Tattha pañcakāmaguṇe allīyantīti pañcakāmaguṇe sevantīti attho. Teti pañca kāmaguṇā. Ramantīti ratiṃ vindanti kīḷanti laḷanti. Ālīyanti abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni, tehi ālayehi ramantīti ālayarāmāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ime hi sattā yathā kāmaguṇe, evaṃ rāgampi assādenti abhinandantiyeva. Yatheva hi susajjitapupphaphalabharitarukkhādisampannaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho rājā tāya tāya sampattiyā ramati, sammudito āmoditapamodito hoti, na ukkaṇṭhati, sāyampi nikkhamituṃ na icchati, evamimehi kāmālayataṇhālayehi sattā ramanti, saṃsāravaṭṭe sammoditā anukkaṇṭhitā vasanti. Tena nesaṃ bhagavā duvidhampi ālayaṃ uyyānabhūmiṃ viya dassento ‘‘ālayarāmā’’tiādimāha. Ratāti niratā. Suṭṭhu muditāti ativiya muditā anukkaṇṭhanato.
“就‘处’字而言”,是就‘处’这个词来说。然而就义理而言,“处”所指的即是缘起。“果报安住于此,因其运作依存于此”,故称为“处”,即以无明等为诸行等之缘。“这些诸行等之缘”就是“以此为缘”,即无明等。“以此为缘”即是“以此为缘之性”,正如“天人”即是“天神”。或者,“以此为缘之性”,是指无明等这些“以此为缘”者,以其自身果报为所依而具有缘之性,即具有令其生起的能力。由此,缘起便被显示为“具有能力之缘”的特征。“果报依此而生起”,故称为“缘起”。以此二词,阐明了诸法之缘义。“以此为缘之性”与“缘起”,乃是以无明等为诸行等之缘者的异名。“一切行之止息”等,就义理而言,所指皆是涅槃。因为依凭、缘于彼涅槃,由于对圣道而言作为所缘之缘的缘故,一切行之动摇皆止息、平息,故称为“一切行之止息”。在远离一切有为法的涅槃中,与行之平息同义,此是合乎正理的。此处释名如下:“一切行于此中止息”,故称为“一切行之止息”。显示巴利原文
Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhānasaddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato pana ṭhānanti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto . Tiṭṭhati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā yathā devo eva devatā. Idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ paṭicca paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatā idappaccayatā. Tena samatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenapi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Saṅkhārādipaccayānañhi avijjādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppādoti. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbaṃ atthato nibbānameva. Yasmā hi taṃ āgamma paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu sabbasaṅkhāravipphanditāni sammanti vūpasammanti, tasmā ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamatho’’ti vuccati. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyutte hi nibbāne saṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo ñāyāgatoyevāti. Idaṃ panettha nibbacanaṃ – sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti.
且因依凭彼涅槃,一切依着皆以断除的方式被舍离、遍舍,一百零八种的一切渴爱皆灭尽,一切烦恼贪染皆离染,老死等所摄的一切轮回之苦皆灭尽,故被称为“一切依着之舍离、渴爱之灭尽、离染、灭尽”。而所谓渴爱,以其于各各生存中,以对生存之渴爱状态而编织、缝合,或业与果报共同编织、缝合,故称为“编织”;由此编织中出离,故为“涅槃”。“疲劳”,即身体的疲劳。“苦恼”亦仅是身体的苦恼,然而在佛陀心中,此二者皆不存在,因于菩提树下已断除故。此处,因久坐、久说法等,以背部酸痛、上颚干燥等方式,应知有身体的疲劳及身体的苦恼,而这只是就说法时不理解义理者及不修行者而言。然而对于理解义理者及修行者,说法时导师的身体疲劳亦非疲劳,因此世尊说:“法之因缘不令我苦恼。”正因如此,才说:“所谓对不解者之说法,方是我的疲劳。”显示巴利原文
Yasmā ca taṃ āgamma sabbe upadhayo paṭinissaṭṭhā samucchedavasena pariccattā honti, aṭṭhasatappabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā khīyanti, sabbe kilesarāgā virajjanti, jarāmaraṇādibhedaṃ sabbaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā ‘‘sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggo taṇhākkhayo virāgo nirodho’’ti vuccati, yā panesā taṇhā tena tena bhavena bhavantaraṃ bhavanikantibhāvena vinati saṃsibbati, phalena vā saddhiṃ kammaṃ vinati saṃsibbatīti katvā vānanti vuccati, tato nikkhantaṃ vānatoti nibbānaṃ. Kilamathoti kāyakilamatho. Vihesāpi kāyavihesāyeva, citte pana ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā. Ettha ca ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca veditabbā, sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānañca appaṭipajjantānañca vasena. Jānantānaṃ pana paṭipajjantānañca desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova, tenāha bhagavā ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesetī’’ti. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti.
“Apissu”为表总括义的不变词。它显示:他不仅生起此念,这些偈颂也同时映现于心。“Bhagavantanti”因与“paṭi”字结合,表所属义而用 accusative 格,故说“bhagavato”。已得增长成就者,既可称为稀有,亦可称为非稀有。因为“a”字也含增长之义,例如“asekkhā dhammā”(无学之法)。当知,在百千俱胝与四无数劫中,为与天界分享正法而圆满诸波罗蜜、今已证得法王者,于此处所示现的不过是微小之事,故而此偈颂之义并非稀有;其增长成就亦应了知。就义而言,此偈颂非稀有。“成为行境”者,即现前、呈现;现前即应思惟,故说“达到应思惟的状态”。显示巴利原文
Apissūti sampiṇḍanatthe nipāto. So na kevalaṃ etadahosi, imāpi gāthā paṭibhaṃsūti dīpeti. Bhagavantanti paṭisaddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti. Vuddhippattā acchariyā vā anacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi a-kāro hoti yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti. Kappānaṃ cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni satasahassañca sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni samadhigatadhammarajjassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanattā gāthātthassa anuacchariyatā tassa vuddhippatti ca veditabbā. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā. Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahaṃsu, upaṭṭhānañca vitakkayitabbatāti āha ‘‘parivitakkayitabbabhāvaṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.
“Kicchena”并非指苦行道。诸佛的四道实皆为乐行道。然而,这是就圆满波罗蜜的时期而言:那时菩萨仍存贪瞋痴,对于络绎不绝的乞求者,他割下自己装饰端严的头,引出喉中鲜血,剜出涂过油的眼目,施舍如同家族明灯的儿子和行止可爱的妻子等,又在如忍辱论者等生中承受割截等苦。这只是就其来行之道而说。“Ha”是属于“确实”“明了”义的不变词,也有说是“决定义”。“Ha byattaṃ”或“ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ”等,表示如此艰难证得之法,宣说也无用,如此连接。“Halaṃ”或“alaṃ”,与此同义,如“halanti vadāmi”等中。也读作“pakāsitaṃ”,义为已说。因此,如此艰难证得之法,既已宣说、已周遍说、已开示,再说又有何用?这是所说之义。“Rāgadosaparetehi”者,指被贪与瞋所触、所胜伏,如被毒所触之蛇;或指随贪瞋而行,为贪与瞋所追随。这是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Kicchenāti na dukkhappaṭipadāya. Buddhānañhi cattāropi maggā sukhappaṭipadāva honti. Pāramīpūraṇakāle pana sarāgasadosasamohasseva sato āgatāgatānaṃ yācakānaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā galalohitaṃ nīharitvā suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā kulavaṃsappadīpaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyanti evamādīni dentassa aññāni ca khantivādisadisesu attabhāvesu chejjabhejjādīni pāpuṇantassa āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ha-iti vā byattanti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Ekaṃsattheti keci. Ha byattaṃ ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigataṃ dhammaṃ desetunti yojanā. Halanti vā alanti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu viya. ‘‘Pakāsita’’ntipi paṭhanti, desitanti attho. Evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa alaṃ desitaṃ pariyattaṃ desitaṃ, ko attho desitenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosaphuṭṭhehi, phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehīti attho. Atha vā rāgadosaparetehīti rāgadosānugatehi, rāgena ca dosena ca anubandhehīti attho.
“Paṭisotagāmin”(逆流而行)者:对常执等逆流而行,即以此方式趣入、运转于无常、苦、无我、不净之四圣谛法。其含义如此。“Rāgarattā”(为贪所染)者,指被欲贪、有贪和见贪所染污。“Na dakkhanti”(他们将不能见)者,指他们不能以“无常、苦、无我、不净”的真实本质去观见;对于这类不能观见者,谁能令其如实了知“无常”等本质之法呢?这是其意旨。由于他们也被贪与瞋所征服,处于愚痴状态,故说“tamokhandhena āvuṭā”(被黑暗之蕴所覆盖),含义即是被无明之蕴彻底淹没。显示巴利原文
Paṭisotagāminti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.65; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.281; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.172) niccagāhādīnaṃ paṭisotaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti evaṃ gataṃ pavattaṃ catusaccadhammanti attho. Rāgarattāti kāmarāgena bhavarāgena diṭṭhirāgena ca rattā. Na dakkhantīti aniccaṃ dukkhamanattā asubhanti iminā sabhāvena na passissanti, te apassante ko sakkhissati aniccantiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhammaṃ jānāpetunti adhippāyo. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammuḷhabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti, avijjārāsinā ajjhotthaṭāti attho.
“心倾向于少事无为”——为何他的心会如此倾向呢?岂非他曾思惟:“我已解脱,将令他人解脱;我已渡越,将令他人渡越”?显示巴利原文
Appossukkatāya cittaṃ namatīti kasmā panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami, nanu esa ‘‘muttohaṃ mocessāmi, tiṇṇohaṃ tāressāmi,
我何必以外道之形相示现,既然在此已亲证正法、
证得一切知智之后,我当度脱诸天世间。”(《佛种姓经》2.55)——
显示巴利原文 Kiṃ me aññātavesena, dhammaṃ sacchikatenidha; Sabbaññutaṃ pāpuṇitvā, tārayissaṃ sadevaka’’nti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.55) –
难道不是发愿之后,圆满诸波罗蜜,而证得一切知智的吗?确实如此。然而,正是由于他审察的威力,他的心才这样倾向。当他证得一切知智后,审察众生的烦恼稠密与法的甚深时,众生的烦恼稠密与法的甚深便以一切方式清晰地显现。于是,他思惟:“这些众生如同盛满酸粥的葫芦、充满酪浆的罐子、浸透油膏的破布、涂满眼膏的手一般,充满了烦恼,极度染污,为贪所染,为嗔所败坏,为痴所迷惑,他们究竟能通达什么呢?”即使由于审察众生烦恼稠密的威力,他的心也这样倾向了。显示巴利原文
Patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūretvā sabbaññutaṃ pattoti? Saccameva, tadeva paccavekkhaṇānubhāvena panassa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Tassa hi sabbaññutaṃ patvā sattānaṃ kilesagahanataṃ dhammassa ca gambhīrataṃ paccavekkhantassa sattānaṃ kilesagahanatā ca dhammagambhīratā ca sabbākārena pākaṭā jātā. Athassa ‘‘ime sattā kañjiyapuṇṇalābu viya takkabharitacāṭi viya vasātelapītapilotikā viya añjanamakkhitahattho viya ca kilesabharitā atisaṃkiliṭṭhā rāgarattā dosaduṭṭhā mohamuḷhā, te kiṃ nāma paṭivijjhissantī’’ti cintayato kilesagahanapaccavekkhaṇānubhāvenapi evaṃ cittaṃ nami.
“此法如同支撑大地之水界一般甚深,如同被山遮覆的芥子一般难见,如同劈为百份的马尾尖端一般微细。当我为了通达此法而精进时,没有未施舍过的布施,没有未守护过的戒,没有任何未圆满的波罗蜜。然而,即便在我似乎毫不费力地摧破魔军时,大地未曾震动;在初夜分随念宿世时,也未曾震动;在中夜分净化天眼时,也未曾震动;只有在后夜分通达缘起时,我这十千世界才震动了。如此,即使以我这样锐利的智慧,也是历尽艰辛方始通达此法,那么世间的凡夫大众又如何能通达呢?”应知,即便由于审察法之甚深的威力,他的心也这样倾向了。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo pathavīsandhārakaudakakkhandho viya gambhīro, pabbatena paṭicchādetvā ṭhapito sāsapo viya duddaso, satadhā bhinnassa vālassa koṭi viya aṇu. Mayā hi imaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantena adinnaṃ dānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ nāma natthi, aparipūritā kāci pāramī nāma natthi, tassa me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassapi pathavī na kampittha, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussarantassapi na kampittha, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhentassapi na kampittha, pacchimayāme pana paṭiccasamuppādaṃ paṭivijjhantasseva me dasasahassilokadhātu kampittha. Iti mādisenapi tikkhañāṇena kicchenevāyaṃ dhammo paṭividdho, taṃ lokiyamahājanā kathaṃ paṭivijjhissantī’’ti dhammagambhīratāya paccavekkhaṇānubhāvenapi evaṃ cittaṃ namīti veditabbaṃ.
而且,当梵天劝请时,出于他说法的意愿,他的心也这样倾向了。因为世尊知道:“当我的心倾向于少事时,大梵天将会劝请说法。而这些众生敬重梵天,他们会想:‘听说导师原本不欲说法,然后大梵天劝请他,他才说法。此法的确是善妙、殊胜的。’这样思惟后,他们便会恭敬聆听。”应知,也正因如此,他的心才倾向于少事,而并非不想说法。显示巴利原文
Apica brahmunā yācite desetukāmatāyapissa evaṃ cittaṃ nami. Jānāti hi bhagavā ‘‘mama appossukkatāya citte namamāne mahābrahmā dhammadesanaṃ yācissati, ime ca sattā brahmagarukā, te ‘satthā kira dhammaṃ na desetukāmo ahosi, atha naṃ mahābrahmā yācitvā desāpeti, santo vata bho dhammo paṇīto’ti maññamānā sussūsissantī’’ti. Idampissa kāraṇaṃ paṭicca appossukkatāya cittaṃ nami, no dhammadesanāyāti veditabbaṃ.
8 “Sahampatissāti”(娑婆世界主):据说,在迦叶世尊的教法中,有一位名为娑诃迦的长老,他证得初禅后,投生于初禅地,成为寿命长达一劫的梵天。在那里,众人称他为娑婆世界主梵天。因此,经中说“梵天娑婆世界主的”。“Nassati vatāti”(哎,要毁灭了):据说,他以这样的方式发出此声,使得十千世界的梵天听闻后全都聚集而来。“Apparajakkhajātikāti”(尘垢微少之类):在由慧所成的眼中,这些人的贪、嗔、痴尘垢是微少、少量的,具有如此性质者,称为尘垢微少之类。或者说,那些贪等尘垢微少者,其性质即是尘垢微少之类。此处应如此理解其义。“Assavanatāti”(由于不闻):如同“sayaṃ abhiññā”(自己证知)等词一样,此处是工具格用作主格,其含义是“由于不闻”。“Bhavissantīti”(将会有):他指出,那些在过去诸佛处,通过十种福行事而积累了资粮的人,犹如等待阳光触照的、已然成熟的莲花,一心期待说法。他们不是一两个,而是有数十万、数百万人,将在四……显示巴利原文
8.Sahampatissāti so kira kassapassa bhagavato sāsane sahako nāma thero paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ kappāyukabrahmā hutvā nibbatto, tatra naṃ sahampati brahmāti sañjānanti. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘brahmuno sahampatissā’’ti. Nassati vatāti so kira imaṃ saddaṃ tathā nicchāreti, yathā dasasahassilokadhātubrahmāno sutvā sabbe sannipatiṃsu. Apparajakkhajātikāti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesaṃ evaṃsabhāvāti apparajakkhajātikā. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ te sabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Assavanatāti ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu viya karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, assavanatāyāti attho. Bhavissantīti purimabuddhesu dasapuññakiriyavasena katādhikārā paripākagatapadumāni viya sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ dhammadesanaṃyeva ākaṅkhamānā catuppadikagāthāvasāne ariyabhūmiṃ okkamanārahā na eko, na dve, anekasatasahassā dhammassa aññātāro bhavissantīti dasseti.
“Pāturahosīti”(出现了):即出现了。“Samalehi cintitoti”(被污秽者所思惟):被富兰那迦叶等六位污秽的导师所思惟。因为他们更早出世,在整个赡部洲洲,如同散布荆棘、喷洒毒液一般,宣说污秽的邪见之法。据说,他们因听闻佛陀即将出世的传闻而生起好奇,欺骗世间,以欺诈为生,自称一切知者,将种种非法宣说为法。“Apāpuretanti”(请开启):请开启这扇门。“Amatassa dvāranti”(不死之门):即作为不死之涅槃之门的圣道。这是说:自迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来,这扇通往涅槃大城的宏伟大门——圣道,便已关闭。请以宣说正法之手,开启、推开它吧。“Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti”(愿他们听闻由无垢者所证悟之法):愿这些众生,听闻由远离贪等污垢的无垢正自觉者所证悟的四圣谛法。他如此向世尊请求。显示巴利原文
Pāturahosīti pātubhavi. Samalehi cintitoti samalehi pūraṇakassapādīhi chahi satthārehi cintito. Te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā sakalajambudīpe kaṇṭake pattharamānā viya visaṃ siñcamānā viya ca samalaṃ micchādiṭṭhidhammaṃ desayiṃsu. Te kira buddhakolāhalānussavena sañjātakutūhalā lokaṃ vañcetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānantā yaṃ kiñci adhammaṃyeva dhammoti dīpesuṃ. Apāpuretanti vivara etaṃ. Amatassa dvāranti amatassa nibbānassa dvārabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – etaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti pihitaṃ nibbānanagarassa mahādvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ saddhammadesanāhatthena apāpura vivara ugghāṭehīti. Suṇantu dhammaṃ vimalenānubuddhanti ime sattā rāgādimalānaṃ abhāvato vimalena sammāsambuddhena anubuddhaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ suṇantu tāva bhagavāti yācati.
石山高耸且坚固,不是尘土山或杂土山,故说“如立于石山之顶”。其意为:如同站在纯一坚固的石山顶上。因为站在那里的人,无需抬头、伸颈等动作便可将一切尽收眼底。“如是譬喻”,即与那石山之喻相似。法殿,是指出世间法。因为它能带来完全的清净信,且以超越一切法而耸立,有如殿堂;或者,这里的“法”字是智慧的异名。因为智慧以耸立之义,在阿毗达摩中被称作殿堂。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Selapabbato ucco hoti thiro ca, na paṃsupabbato missakapabbato vāti āha ‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti. Tassattho ‘‘selamaye ekagghane pabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova. Na hi tattha ṭhitassa dassanatthaṃ gīvukkhipanapasāraṇādikiccaṃ atthī’’ti. Tathūpamanti tappaṭibhāgaṃ selapabbatūpamaṃ. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi sabbaso pasādāvaho sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca, paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo. Paññā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādoti abhidhamme niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –
登上智慧之殿堂,无忧者俯视沉溺忧悲的众生;
犹如立于山顶之人,智者俯视地上的愚者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ; Pabbataṭṭhova bhūmaṭṭhe, dhīro bāle avekkhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 28);
此处略义为:犹如具眼之人立于石山之巅,能遍见四方大众;同样,你,善慧者、具足妙智、以一切知智成就普眼之世尊,登上法所成、慧所成的殿堂后,自身已离忧悲,请俯察、审观沉溺于忧悲、被生老所制伏的众生。此中意趣如下:譬如在山脚下四方开垦大田,于田埂上搭建小屋,夜晚燃起灯火,且具足四支的黑暗笼罩之时,具眼之人立于山顶俯视大地,因田地、田埂、小屋及眠卧之人皆不发光,故不得见,唯见小屋中火焰之光,因其光明显耀。同样,登上法殿俯察众生界之如来,于未造善业之众生,纵使同坐精舍之中、近在右膝之旁,亦不入佛眼之视野,因其智慧之火未燃,不发光、非殊胜,犹如夜间射出之箭。而于已造善业、堪受度化之人,纵立远方,亦入其视野,因其所成熟之智慧火正燃,光明且相续殊胜,犹如火焰,又如雪山。恰如所说:显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yathā selapabbatamuddhani yathāṭhitova cakkhumā puriso samantato janataṃ passeyya, tathā tvampi sumedha sundarapañña sabbaññutaññāṇena samantacakkhu bhagavā dhammamayaṃ paññāmayaṃ pāsādamāruyha sayaṃ apetasoko sokāvatiṇṇaṃ jātijarābhibhūtaṃ janataṃ avekkhassu upadhāraya upaparikkhāti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – yathā hi pabbatapāde samantā mahantaṃ khettaṃ katvā tattha kedārapāḷīsu kuṭikāyo katvā rattiṃ aggiṃ jāleyyuṃ, caturaṅgasamannāgatañca andhakāraṃ assa, atha tassa pabbatassa matthake ṭhatvā cakkhumato purisassa bhūmiṃ olokayato neva khettaṃ, na kedārapāḷiyo, na kuṭiyo, na tattha sayitamanussā paññāyeyyuṃ anujjalabhāvato, kuṭikāsu pana aggijālāmattameva paññāyeyya ujjalabhāvato, evaṃ dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha sattanikāyaṃ olokayato tathāgatassa ye te akatakalyāṇā sattā, te ekavihāre dakkhiṇajāṇupasse nisinnāpi buddhacakkhussa āpāthaṃ nāgacchanti ñāṇagginā anujjalabhāvato anuḷārabhāvato ca, rattiṃ khittā sarā viya honti. Ye pana katakalyāṇā veneyyapuggalā, te evassa dūrepi ṭhitā āpāthamāgacchanti paripakkañāṇaggitāya samujjalabhāvato uḷārasantānatāya ca, so aggi viya himavantapabbato viya ca. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
善人虽居远处,亦如雪山显著;
恶人虽在近处,亦不显现,犹如夜间射出的箭。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dūre santo pakāsenti, himavantova pabbato; Asantettha na dissanti, rattiṃ khittā yathā sarā’’ti. (dha. pa. 304);
“起来吧”:这是世尊为了说法而劝请游行,如此说。或者,“起来吧”意为:从因说法而生、称为“少事”的退缩与疲惫状态中奋起。在“勇者”等词中:世尊因具足殊胜的四种正勤精进,故为勇者;因战胜天子、死魔、烦恼与诸行,故为战胜者;因能将应度化的众生从生死旷野等中运渡,令其到达名为涅槃的安稳之地,故为商队主;因无欲贪之债,故为无债者——应当如此了知。譬如有人借入他人债务而挥霍,即使被债主们责令“还债”、以粗语辱骂、轻蔑乃至殴打,也无法还手反抗,唯有忍受一切;那债务便是他忍受的原因。同样地,若有人对某物生起欲贪,以渴爱执取该事物,即使因此被粗语辱骂、轻蔑乃至殴打,也无法还手反抗,唯有忍受一切;那欲贪便是他忍受的原因,犹如被家主们欺辱的妇女们。何以故?因为欲贪如同债务。显示巴利原文
Uṭṭhehīti bhagavato dhammadesanatthaṃ cārikacaraṇaṃ yācanto bhaṇati. Uṭṭhehīti vā dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha. Vīrātiādīsu bhagavā sātisayacatubbidhasammappadhānavīriyavantatāya vīro, devaputtamaccukilesābhisaṅkhārānaṃ vijitattā vijitasaṅgāmo, jātikantārādito veneyyasatthaṃ vāhanasamatthatāya nibbānasaṅkhātaṃ khemappadesaṃ sampāpanasamatthatāya satthavāho, kāmacchandaiṇassa abhāvato aṇaṇoti veditabbo. Yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti, so tehi ‘‘iṇaṃ dehī’’ti tajjamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi vambhamānopi vadhiyamānopi kiñci paṭippaharituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti, evameva yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāgahaṇena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhāti, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi vambhamānopi vadhiyamānopi kiñci paṭippaharituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa so kāmacchando hoti gharasāmikehi viheṭhiyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viya. Kasmā? Iṇasadisattā kāmacchandassa.
9 “劝请”是指亲近应恭敬者之后,为了更崇高的目的而发出的希求,其本质即是乞求。“以佛眼”是指以根上下智与意乐随眠智。因为这两种智称为佛眼,一切知智则称为普眼。下三道之智称为法眼。在“尘垢少”等说法中,如前所述,那些在智慧眼中贪等尘垢薄少者,是尘垢少者;那些尘垢深厚者,是尘垢多者;那些信等诸根锐利者,是利根者;那些根性柔软者,是钝根者;那些信等行相美好者,是善行相者;那些能领会所说法义、容易教导者,是易教导者;那些因见他世与过患而心生怖畏者,称为见怖畏他世与过患者。显示巴利原文
9.Ajjhesananti garuṭṭhānīyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato yācanā eva. Buddhacakkhunāti indriyaparopariyattañāṇena ca āsayānusayañāṇena ca. Imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāmaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇassa samantacakkhūti . Heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ dhammacakkhūti. Apparajakkhetiādīsu yesaṃ vuttanayeneva paññācakkhumhi rāgādirajaṃ appaṃ, te apparajakkhā. Yesaṃ taṃ mahantaṃ, te mahārajakkhā. Yesaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni tikkhāni, te tikkhindriyā. Yesaṃ tāni mudūni, te mudindriyā. Yesaṃ teyeva saddhādayo ākārā sundarā, te svākārā. Ye kathitakāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā. Ye paralokañceva vajjañca bhayato passanti, te paralokavajjabhayadassāvino nāma.
有青莲花之处,即青莲池,可指陆地或水域,但此处指水域,因此应取“青莲池”即“青莲林”之义。以下诸词也是如此。“内沉而生者”是指那些完全沉入水中而生长的花,这些花称为内沉而生者。“超出水面而住者”是指超出水面而挺立者。其中,那些超出水面而住、等待日光照触的,是今日将开之花;那些与水面齐平而住的,是明日将开之花;那些未出水面、内沉而生的,是第三日将开之花。此外,还有未出水面、名为“病青莲”等的其他花,它们将永不开放,只会成为鱼龟的食物。这些虽未列入经文,但注释书中指出应加以说明。正如这四种花,同样有四种人:略说即悟者、广说即悟者、应被引导者、以文句为最者。显示巴利原文
Uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī, gacchopi jalāsayopi, idha pana jalāsayo adhippeto, tasmā uppaliniyanti uppalavaneti evamattho gahetabbo. Ito paresupi eseva nayo. Antonimuggaposīnīti yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pussanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīni. Udakaṃ accuggamma tiṭṭhantīti udakaṃ atikkamitvā tiṭṭhanti. Tattha yāni accuggamma ṭhitāni sūriyarasmisamphassaṃ āgamayamānāni, tāni ajja pupphanakāni. Yāni samodakaṃ ṭhitāni, tāni sve pupphanakāni. Yāni udakā anuggatāni antonimuggaposīni, tāni tatiyadivase pupphanakāni. Udakā pana anuggatāni aññānipi sarogauppalādīni nāma atthi, yāni neva pupphissanti macchakacchapabhakkhāneva bhavissanti, tāni pāḷiṃ nāruḷhāni, āharitvā pana dīpetabbānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni. Yatheva hi tāni catubbidhāni pupphāni, evameva ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti cattāro puggalā.
其中,若有人在说法刚刚宣出之时便证悟法,此人能依“四念处”等略说论母,顺随说示而运其智慧,堪能证得阿罗汉果,称为“略说即悟者”。若有人于略说之义被详细分别时证悟法,此人称为“广说即悟者”。若有人通过听受、请问、如理作意,亲近、交往、承事善知识,渐次证悟法,此人称为“应被引导者”。若有人虽多闻、多宣说、多受持、多诵习,却于此生不能证悟法,以此有身不能生起道、果,乃至不能生起禅那或毗婆舍那,此人称为“以文句为最者”。于此,世尊观察一万世界,见“略说即悟者”犹如今日将开之花,“广说即悟者”犹如明日将开之花,“应被引导者”犹如第三日将开之花,“以文句为最者”犹如被鱼龟所食之花。正观察时,他如是遍见一切行相:“有这么多少尘垢者,这么多多尘垢者;这些里面又有这么多略说即悟者”等。显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṅkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ugghaṭitaññūti vuccati. Yassa puggalassa saṅkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto kalyāṇamitte sevato bhajato payirupāsato anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato bahumpi bhaṇato bahumpi dhārayato bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamo. Tattha bhagavā uppalavanādisadisaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokento ajja pupphanakāni viya ugghaṭitaññū, sve pupphanakāni viya vipañcitaññū, tatiyadivase pupphanakāni viya neyye, macchakacchapabhakkhapupphāni viya padaparame ca addasa, passanto ca ‘‘ettakā apparajakkhā, ettakā mahārajakkhā, tatrāpi ettakā ugghaṭitaññū’’ti evaṃ sabbākāratova addasa.
其中,前三类人在此身(即此生)中,便能因世尊说法而成就义利;而句义为最者,则成为未来习气。随后,世尊了知这四类众生能领受法益,生起说法的意欲,再将三界一切众生依堪能与不堪能分为两类。对此曾开示:“那些具足业障、具足果报障、具足烦恼障、无信、无欲、智慧低劣、不能契入善法正性决定的众生,是不堪能者。哪些众生是堪能者呢?那些不具足业障……(中略)……这些众生是堪能者。”在此,舍弃一切不堪能者,唯以智慧摄持堪能者,又将堪能者分为六类:“如许贪行者,如许嗔行者、痴行者、寻行者、信行者、慧行者。”如此分类后,世尊思惟:“我将说法。”当世尊以“少尘垢者”、“堪能者”等方式作意时,应知那些众生是成群成类地现前,而非一个一个地出现。显示巴利原文
Tattha tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ imasmiññeva attabhāve bhagavato dhammadesanā atthaṃ sādheti. Padaparamānaṃ anāgatatthāya vāsanā hoti. Atha bhagavā imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ atthāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ viditvā desetukamyataṃ uppādetvā puna sabbepi tīsu bhavesu satte bhabbābhabbavasena dve koṭṭhāse akāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ye te sattā kammāvaraṇena samannāgatā vipākāvaraṇena samannāgatā kilesāvaraṇena samannāgatā assaddhā acchandikā duppaññā abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattaṃ, ime te sattā abhabbā. Katame te sattā bhabbā? Ye te sattā na kammāvaraṇena…pe… ime te sattā bhabbā’’ti (vibha. 826-827). Tattha sabbepi abhabbapuggale pahāya bhabbapuggaleyeva ñāṇena pariggahetvā ‘‘ettakā rāgacaritā, ettakā dosa, moha, vitakka, saddhā, buddhicaritā’’ti cha koṭṭhāse akāsi, evaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desessāmīti cintesi. Ettha ca apparajakkhādibhabbādivasena āvajjentassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“Paccabhāsī”意为回应、回答。“Apārutā”意为已开启。“不死之门”即圣道。因为圣道是通向名为不死之涅槃的门,世尊表明:此门由我以大悲为依止、以自觉智证得而开启并安立。也有人读作“Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāra”(已为他们开启不死之门)。“Pamuñcantu saddhaṃ”意为:愿一切人放下、展现自己的信心,即对我所说之法及于我,生起信解之相。后面两句的含义是:我先前因顾虑身语的疲劳,未曾宣说、也不曾想宣说这善巧、善转的殊胜无上法,如今愿一切人将信心的容器带来,我将满其所愿。“Antaradhāyi”意为:诸天以香花等供养大师后便隐没,各还本处。因为前来亲近大师的诸天与梵天,在大师面前隐没,即是回到自己本处。显示巴利原文
Paccabhāsīti patiabhāsi. Apārutāti vivaṭā. Amatassa dvārāti ariyamaggo. So hi amatasaṅkhātassa nibbānassa dvāraṃ, so mayā vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhūñāṇena adhigatattāti dasseti. ‘‘Apārutaṃ tesaṃ amatassa dvāra’’nti keci paṭhanti. Pamuñcantu saddhanti sabbe attano saddhaṃ muñcantu vissajjentu pavedentu, mayā desite dhamme mayi ca attano saddahanākāraṃ uṭṭhāpentūti attho. Pacchimapadadvaye ayamattho – ahañhi attano paguṇaṃ suppavattitampi imaṃ paṇītaṃ uttamaṃ dhammaṃ kāyavācākilamathasaññī hutvā na bhāsiṃ, na bhāsissāmīti cintesiṃ, idāni pana sabbo jano saddhābhājanaṃ upanetu, pūressāmi nesaṃ saṅkappanti. Antaradhāyīti satthāraṃ gandhamālādīhi pūjetvā antarahito, sakaṭṭhānameva gatoti attho. Satthusantikañhi upagatānaṃ devānaṃ brahmānañca tassa purato antaradhānaṃ nāma sakaṭṭhānagamanameva.
五群故事义注显示巴利原文
Pañcavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
10 “Etadahosi”意为“他生起此念”,即生起这样一个与说法相应的寻思:“我该最先为谁说法呢?”这是其含义。“Āḷāra”是其名。据说此人身材高挑、眼色黄褐。因其身材高耸而得名“高”,因黄褐眼而得名“黄褐”,故名“Āḷāra”。“Kālāma”是族姓。“智者”指具足智慧,即具足那种由证得禅定所成就的、称为“证得”与“多闻”意义上的智者素质,这是其义。“明达”指具足明达,即具足由获得禅定之缘所成就的、称为“运持慧”意义上的明达素质,这是其义。“有慧”指具足适时生起之慧。或者,“有慧”指具足称为“三因结生慧”以及能成办各各自应作之事的智慧,此处当如此理解其义。“少尘垢者”指因禅定镇伏烦恼而无垢、清净的众生。“将了知”指将能觉察、将能通达。显示巴利原文
10.Etadahosīti etaṃ ahosi, ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti ayaṃ dhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko udapādīti attho. Āḷāroti tassa nāmaṃ. Dīghapiṅgalo kiresa. So hi tuṅgasarīratāya dīgho, piṅgalacakkhutāya piṅgalo, tenassa ‘‘āḷāro’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi. Kālāmoti gottaṃ. Paṇḍitoti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284) paṇḍiccena samannāgato, samāpattipaṭilābhasaṃsiddhena adhigamabāhusaccasaṅkhātena paṇḍitabhāvena samannāgatoti attho. Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato, samāpattipaṭilābhapaccayena pārihārikapaññāsaṅkhātena byattabhāvena samannāgatoti attho. Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyā paññāya samannāgato. Atha vā medhāvīti tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātāya taṃtaṃitikattabbatāpaññāsaṅkhātāya ca medhāya samannāgatoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Apparajakkhajātikoti samāpattiyā vikkhambhitattā nikkilesajātiko visuddhasatto. Ājānissatīti sallakkhessati paṭivijjhissati.
世尊的智也同样生起,即世尊生起了一切知智。相传世尊并未仅凭天女所说便下结论,而是亲自以一切知智观察,见到:‘此人于第七日命终后,投生于无所有处。’以此因缘而说‘世尊的智也生起了’。‘大损失者’:因在七日之内从应得的道果退失,故有大的损失、退失,故称大损失者。生于非时:彼处没有前来闻法的因缘,即使我前往,到了之后,他也没有耳根的净信来听闻所宣说的法,如此即表明他成了大损失者。问:‘难道世尊不能以自己佛陀的威神力使他了知法吗?’答:‘是的,不能。因为若不借助他人的音声,声闻弟子不可能证悟法;否则,即使缺少其他缘也应能证悟法,但事实并非如此。诚如所说:“诸比丘,此二缘能生起正见:他人的音声与内在的如理作意。”’显示巴利原文
Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti bhagavatopi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uppajji. Bhagavā kira devatāya kathiteneva niṭṭhaṃ agantvā sayampi sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ito sattamadivasamatthake kālaṃ katvā ākiñcaññāyatane nibbattoti addasa. Taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti. Mahājāniyoti sattadivasabbhantare pattabbamaggaphalato parihīnattā mahatī jāni parihāni assāti mahājāniyo. Akkhaṇe nibbattatthā idha dhammadesanaṭṭhānaṃ āgamanapādāpi natthi, athāhaṃ tattha gaccheyyaṃ, gantvā desiyamānaṃ dhammampissa sotuṃ sotapasādopi natthi, evaṃ mahājāniyo jātoti dasseti. Kiṃ pana bhagavatā taṃ attano buddhānubhāvena dhammaṃ ñāpetuṃ na sakkāti? Āma na sakkā, na hi paratoghosamantarena sāvakānaṃ dhammābhisamayo sambhavati, aññathā itarapaccayarahitassapi dhammābhisamayena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca taṃ atthi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya parato ca ghoso ajjhattañca yonisomanasikāro’’ti (a. ni. 2.127).
优陀迦是他的名字,因是罗摩之子,故称罗摩子。‘Abhidosakālakatoti’,意为于半夜命终。此处‘世尊的智也生起了’,相传世尊同样未依凭天女所说便作定论,而以一切知智观察,见到:‘优陀迦·罗摩子于昨夜半夜命终,投生于非想非非想处。’因此这样说。其余内容与前文相似。显示巴利原文
Udakoti tassa nāmaṃ, rāmassa pana puttatāya rāmaputto. Abhidosakālakatoti aḍḍharatte kālakato. Bhagavatopi kho ñāṇaṃ udapādīti idhāpi kira bhagavā devatāya kathitavacanena sanniṭṭhānaṃ akatvā sabbaññutaññāṇena olokento ‘‘hiyyo aḍḍharatte kālaṃ katvā udako rāmaputto nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbatto’’ti addasa, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.
‘多有利益’:即极为有益之义。‘以精勤致力之心而侍奉’:意为他们为修行的目的,以被差遣之心,于所住的精舍,以打扫院落、持取衣钵、随行侍从、供给洗面水和齿木等方式侍奉。那么,这五比丘究竟是谁呢?他们即是——显示巴利原文
Bahūpakārāti bahuupakārā. Padhānapahitattaṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsūti padhānatthāya pesitattabhāvaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne pariveṇasammajjanena pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā anubandhanena mukhodakadantakaṭṭhadānādinā ca upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Ke panete pañcavaggiyā nāma? Ye te –
罗摩、达若、拉卡纳与曼帝;
憍陈如、婆阇、须耶摩与须达多;
当时,这八位皆是婆罗门。
显示巴利原文 Rāmo dhajo lakkhaṇo cāpi mantī; Koṇḍañño ca bhojo suyāmo sudatto; Ete tadā aṭṭha ahesuṃ brāhmaṇā; Chaḷaṅgavā mantaṃ viyākariṃsūti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.284; jā. aṭṭha. 1.nidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā);
在菩萨诞生时,有八位婆罗门既是解梦者,也是相好占察者。其中三人作了两种解说:‘具足这些相好者,若居家则成为转轮王,若出家则成佛。’五位婆罗门作了决定说:‘具足这些相好者不会住于在家,必定成佛。’其中前三位依真言文句而行。他们因无法依所说的方法断定‘依相好真言所说的吠陀文句,只有两种归趣,别无其他’,故只依所说而行,并未期待大士成佛。而憍陈如等五人则因已生起‘必定成佛’的决定,超越了真言文句。他们舍弃了从亲属所得的满意供养,以‘此大士不会住于在家,决定成佛’的无疑信心,为了菩萨而依沙门法出家;也有说他们是那些婆罗门的儿子,但注释书中已予否定。据说他们于年幼时便通达许多真言,因此婆罗门们将他们置于师长的地位。他们心想‘以后我们若被妻儿之网缠缚,将无法出家’,便于年幼时即出家,受用可爱的住处而游行。他们时常询问:‘朋友,大士是否已作大出离?’人们说:‘你们在哪里能见到大士?他如同天神一般,在三座宫殿中、于种种歌舞之中享受荣华。’他们听后,便想‘大士的智慧尚未成熟’,于是少事少业而住。显示巴利原文
Bodhisattassa jātakāle supinapaṭiggāhakā ceva lakkhaṇapaṭiggāhakā ca aṭṭha brāhmaṇā. Tesu tayo dvedhā byākariṃsu ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāraṃ ajjhāvasamāno rājā hohiti cakkavattī, pabbajamāno buddho’’ti. Pañca brāhmaṇā ekaṃsabyākaraṇā ahesuṃ ‘‘imehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato agāre na tiṭṭhati, buddhova hotī’’ti. Tesu purimā tayo yathāmantapadaṃ gatā. Ete hi lakkhaṇamantasaṅkhātavedavacanānurūpaṃ paṭipannā dve gatiyo bhavanti anaññāti vuttaniyāmena nicchinituṃ asakkontā vuttameva paṭipajjiṃsu, na mahāpurisassa buddhabhāvappattiṃ paccāsīsiṃsu. Ime pana koṇḍaññādayo pañca ‘‘ekaṃsato buddho bhavissatī’’ti jātanicchayattā mantapadaṃ atikkantā. Te attanā laddhaṃ tuṭṭhidānaṃ ñātakānaṃ vissajjetvā ‘‘ayaṃ mahāpuriso agāre na ajjhāvasissati, ekantena buddho bhavissatī’’ti nibbematikā bodhisattaṃ uddissa samaṇapabbajjaṃ pabbajitā, tesaṃ puttātipi vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ. Ete kira daharakāleva bahū mante jāniṃsu, tasmā ne brāhmaṇā ācariyaṭṭhāne ṭhapayiṃsu. Te ‘‘pacchā amhehi puttadārajaṭaṃ chinditvā na sakkā bhavissati pabbajitu’’nti daharakāleyeva pabbajitvā ramaṇīyāni senāsanāni paribhuñjantā vicariṃsu. Kālena kālaṃ pana ‘‘kiṃ bho mahāpuriso mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhanto’’ti pucchanti. Manussā ‘‘kuhiṃ tumhe mahāpurisaṃ passissatha, tīsu pāsādesu vividhanāṭakamajjhe devo viya sampattiṃ anubhotī’’ti vadanti. Te sutvā ‘‘na tāva mahāpurisassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gacchatī’’ti appossukkā vihariṃsuyeva.
为何世尊在此说“五比丘对我多有帮助”?难道他只对有恩者说法,对无恩者就不说法吗?并非不说。他其实是以熟悉程度而观察阿罗罗·迦罗摩和优陀迦·罗摩子。然而,在此佛的教区内,除了阿若·憍陈如之外,没有其他人能首先证悟法。为什么?因为具有那样的亲依止缘。据说过去在造善业时,有兄弟二人,他们一起种田。其中兄长心想:“在一块田的庄稼中,我应作九次最上施。”他在播种时施了种子之最上;在结穗时与弟弟商量:“结穗时我要破穗而施。”弟弟说:“你想毁坏嫩庄稼吗?”兄长知道弟弟不愿听从,便将田地分开,从自己那份中破穗取乳,和以酥油、糖蜜而施;在嫩苗时,令人做成嫩苗而施;在收割时施收割之最上;在捆束时施束之最上;将束以人所能担之量捆好后,在成捆时施捆之最上;在打谷场上堆放捆的那天施场之最上;在捣米堆成谷堆那天施场物之最上;在谷仓中存放谷物的那天施仓之最上。如此在一块田的庄稼中作了九次最上施。弟弟则是在从打谷场取出谷物、拿回家的那天才布施。二人之中,兄长后来成为阿若·憍陈如长老,弟弟成为须跋陀游行者。因此,由于在一块田的庄稼中作了九次最上施,除了长老之外,没有其他人能首先证悟法。而“由于作了九次最上施”这句话,是就其成为知旧者中第一的、与所发之愿相应的、在声闻波罗蜜圆满之际所生起的情况而说的。因为三位菩萨各自的波罗蜜达到顶点时所生起的善业或不善业,其果报都极为重大;而若不首先证悟法,又如何能成就知旧者中第一的地位呢?至于“五比丘对我多有帮助”这句话,仅仅是出于忆念恩德而说的。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha bhagavā ‘‘bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā’’ti āha. Kiṃ upakārakānaṃyeva esa dhammaṃ deseti, anupakārakānaṃ na desetīti? No na deseti. Paricayavasena hesa āḷārañceva kālāmaṃ udakañca rāmaputtaṃ olokesi. Etasmiṃ pana buddhakkhette ṭhapetvā aññāsikoṇḍaññaṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Kasmā? Tathāvidhaupanissayattā. Pubbe kira puññakaraṇakāle dve bhātaro ahesuṃ. Te ca ekato sassaṃ akaṃsu. Tattha jeṭṭhassa ‘‘ekasmiṃ sasse nava vāre aggasassadānaṃ mayā dātabba’’nti ahosi. So vappakāle bījaggaṃ nāma datvā gabbhakāle kaniṭṭhena saddhiṃ mantesi ‘‘gabbhakāle gabbhaṃ phāletvā dassāmī’’ti. Kaniṭṭho ‘‘taruṇasassaṃ nāsetukāmosī’’ti āha. Jeṭṭho kaniṭṭhassa ananuvattanabhāvaṃ ñatvā khettaṃ vibhajitvā attano koṭṭhāsato gabbhaṃ phāletvā khīraṃ nīharitvā sappiphāṇitena yojetvā adāsi, puthukakāle puthukaṃ kāretvā adāsi , lāyane lāyanaggaṃ, veṇikaraṇe veṇaggaṃ, veṇiyo purisabhāravasena bandhitvā kalāpakaraṇe kalāpaggaṃ, khale kalāpānaṃ ṭhapanadivase khalaggaṃ, madditvā vīhīnaṃ rāsikaraṇadivase khalabhaṇḍaggaṃ, koṭṭhāgāre dhaññassa pakkhipanadivase koṭṭhagganti evaṃ ekasmiṃ sasse nava vāre aggadānaṃ adāsi. Kaniṭṭho pana khalato dhaññaṃ uddharitvā gahaṇadivase adāsi. Tesu jeṭṭho aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero jāto, kaniṭṭho subhaddaparibbājako. Iti ekasmiṃ sasse navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā ṭhapetvā theraṃ añño paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. ‘‘Navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattā’’ti idañca tassa rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvatthāya katābhinīhārānurūpaṃ pavattitasāvakapāramiyā ciṇṇante pavattitattā vuttaṃ. Tiṇṇampi hi bodhisattānaṃ taṃtaṃpāramiyā sikhāppattakāle pavattitaṃ puññaṃ apuññaṃ vā garutaravipākameva hoti, dhammassa ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ sacchikiriyāya vinā kathaṃ rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvasiddhīti? ‘‘Bahukārā kho me pañcavaggiyā’’ti idaṃ pana upakārānussaraṇamattakeneva vuttaṃ.
“在仙人堕处鹿野苑”:据说,当佛陀尚未出世时,那个地方曾有独觉佛在香山住七日,出灭尽定后,嚼龙蔓齿木,在阿耨达池洗脸,取衣钵,从空中飞来降落。他们在此披上袈裟,入城乞食,用完餐要离去时,也从那里腾空而去。如此,仙人们于此降落、腾空,故此地得名“仙人堕处”;又因该处是为令鹿群无畏而施设的,故称“鹿野苑”。因此说“在仙人堕处鹿野苑”。其他佛陀初次为说法而去时,是从空中飞去并在那里降落的;但我们的世尊观察到优波迦邪命外道的亲依止缘,知道:“优波迦正走在此路上,他见到我、交谈之后将会离去,后来生起厌离,回来证得阿拉汉果。”于是世尊步行了十八由旬的路。所以说“向波罗奈方向游行而去”。显示巴利原文
Isipatane migadāyeti tasmiṃ kira padese anuppanne buddhe paccekasambuddhā gandhamādanapabbate sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā vītināmetvā nirodhā vuṭṭhāya nāgalatādantakaṭṭhaṃ khāditvā anotattadahe mukhaṃ dhovitvā pattacīvaramādāya ākāsena āgantvā nipatanti. Tattha cīvaraṃ pārupitvā nagare piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakiccā gamanakālepi tatoyeva uppatitvā gacchanti. Iti isayo ettha nipatanti uppatanti cāti taṃ ṭhānaṃ ‘‘isipatana’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ, migānaṃ pana abhayatthāya dinnattā ‘‘migadāyo’’ti vuccati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘isipatane migadāye’’ti. Aññe buddhā paṭhamaṃ dhammadesanatthāya gacchantā ākāsena gantvā tattheva otaranti, amhākaṃ pana bhagavā upakassa ājīvakassa upanissayaṃ disvā ‘‘upako imaṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno, so maṃ disvā sallapitvā gamissati, atha puna nibbinno āgamma arahattaṃ sacchikarissatī’’ti ñatvā aṭṭhārasayojanaṃ maggaṃ padasāva agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yena bārāṇasī, tena cārikaṃ pakkāmī’’ti.
11 “在伽耶与菩提之间”:即位于伽耶与菩提之间,相距三伽浮陀的地方。从菩提道场至伽耶为三伽浮陀,至波罗奈为十八由旬。优波迦于菩提道场与伽耶之间见到了世尊。因与“antarā”一词相连,故用了业格。在此类场合,文法家们会如“antarā gāmañca nadiñca yāti”这般,仅用一个“antarā”,但它须与第二个词也相连;若不如此连接,则由于“antarā”所关联而要求业格时,业格便不能成立,而可能变为属格。但此处是在连接之后而说的。“长途路”:即称为长途的道路,意指长路。在分别长途行时,有“若欲行半由旬,则应受食”等说法,因此半由旬也算作长途路。然而,从菩提道场至伽耶是三伽浮陀。“极清净”:即十分明净。“诸根”:指包括意根在内的六根。“清净”:即无有过失。“洁白”:是它的同义词。之所以说“洁白”,是就无杂染而言,并非指白色。正是见到了这种洁白,才知其诸根明净;据说那位邪命外道具有导引之慧。显示巴利原文
11.Antarā ca gayaṃ antarā ca bodhinti gayāya ca bodhissa ca vivare tigāvutantare ṭhāne. Bodhimaṇḍato hi gayā tīṇi gāvutāni, bārāṇasī aṭṭhārasa yojanāni. Upako bodhimaṇḍassa ca gayāya ca antare bhagavantaṃ addasa. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarā-saddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti, ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Idha pana yojetvā eva vutto. Addhānamagganti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ, dīghamagganti attho. Addhānagamanasamayassa vibhaṅge ‘‘addhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’ntiādivacanato (pāci. 218) addhayojanampi addhānamaggo hoti. Bodhimaṇḍato pana gayā tigāvutaṃ. Vippasannānīti suṭṭhu pasannāni. Indriyānīti manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni. Parisuddhoti niddoso. Pariyodātoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Nirupakkilesatāyeva hi esa ‘‘pariyodāto’’ti vutto, na setabhāvena. Etassa pariyodātataṃ disvāva indriyānaṃ vippasannataṃ aññāsi, nayaggāhīpaññā kiresā tassa ājīvakassa.
“征服一切者”:即征服一切三界之法而安住。“了知一切者”:即了知、遍知一切四界之法,因为已断除一切所知障。“于一切法无染着”:即对于一切三界之法,不为贪染、瞋害、愚痴等烦恼垢秽所染。“舍离一切者”:即舍离一切三界之法而安住。纵使是不应舍的善法及无记法,由于已断除与之相应的烦恼,也成已舍,故说为已舍。“于渴爱灭尽得解脱”:即于渴爱灭尽的涅槃,以之为所缘而解脱。“自证知”:即自己了知一切四界之法。“应指认谁”:即还能指认其他什么人作“这是我师”呢?显示巴利原文
Sabbābhibhūti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Sabbavidūti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ avediṃ aññāsiṃ sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇassa pahīnattā. Sabbesu dhammesu anūpalittoti sabbesu tebhūmakadhammesu rajjanadussanamuyhanādinā kilesalepena alitto. Sabbañjahoti sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito. Appahātabbampi hi kusalābyākataṃ tappaṭibaddhakilesappahānena pahīnattā na hotīti jahitameva hoti. Taṇhakkhaye vimuttoti taṇhakkhaye nibbāne ārammaṇakaraṇavasena vimutto. Sayaṃ abhiññāyāti sabbaṃ catubhūmakadhammaṃ attanāva jānitvā. Kamuddiseyyanti kaṃ aññaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ me ācariyo’’ti uddiseyyaṃ.
“我无师”:在出世间法上,我没有老师。因为,虽然世间导师对于世间法的证得也那样的证得,并非全无他人教导,但在出世间法上,则丝毫没有。“我无等者”:没有以戒等功德能与我匹敌的人。“正自觉者”:由因、由理而自证四谛者。“清凉”:因熄灭一切烦恼之火而清凉,也就是烦恼止息的寂灭。显示巴利原文
Na me ācariyo atthīti lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthi. Kiñcāpi hi lokiyadhammānampi yādiso lokanāthassa adhigamo, na tādiso adhigamo parūpadeso atthi, lokuttaradhamme panassa lesopi natthi. Natthi me paṭipuggaloti mayhaṃ sīlādīhi guṇehi paṭinidhibhūto puggalo nāma natthi. Sammāsambuddhoti hetunā nayena cattāri saccāni sayaṃ buddho . Sītibhūtoti sabbakilesagginibbāpanena sītibhūto, kilesānaṃ yeva nibbutattā nibbuto.
“卡西那城”:即卡西国的城市。“我将击打”:意为“我将敲响”。“不死鼓”:为令应受教化者证得不死,世尊以宣告等方式的说法被称为“不死鼓”,意为“为获得法轮,我将擂响那不死鼓而前往”。显示巴利原文
Kāsinaṃpuranti kāsiraṭṭhe nagaraṃ. Āhañchanti āhanissāmi. Amatadundubhinti veneyyānaṃ amatādhigamāya ugghosanādiṃ katvā satthu dhammadesanā ‘‘amatadundubhī’’ti vuttā, dhammacakkapaṭilābhāya taṃ amatabheriṃ paharissāmīti gacchāmīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“你堪为无量胜者”:意为即使是无量胜者,你也有资格成为。“无量胜者”:指具足无量智慧、已战胜烦恼者。“贤友,愿你也成为这样的人”:贤友,你也能成为这样的人。意思是:对于如此殊胜的色身之宝,理当具足这般智慧。这就是他出家的因缘。他确已积累了资粮。因此,世尊为了与他相会,亲自踏上那条道路。“他出发了”:他前往名为弯颈的地区。显示巴利原文
Arahasi anantajinoti anantajinopi bhavituṃ yuttoti attho. Anantañāṇo jitakilesoti anantajino. Hupeyyapāvusoti āvuso evampi nāma bhaveyya, evaṃvidhe nāma rūparatane īdisena ñāṇena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Ayañhissa pabbajjāya paccayo jāto. Katādhikāro hesa. Tathā hi bhagavā tena samāgamanatthaṃ padasāva taṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji. Pakkāmīti vaṅkahārajanapadaṃ nāma agamāsi.
在那里,他依一个猎人小村而住,一位年长的猎人在旁照料。那个地区有许多凶猛的苍蝇,于是众人便让他住在一口大缸之中。猎人要到远处去打猎,临行前吩咐他那名为恰巴的女儿:‘不可怠慢了我们的阿拉汉。’随后便与儿子和兄弟们一同离开了。他的女儿容貌美丽,身姿匀称。次日,优波迦回到家中,见到那位少女在完成一切侍奉后上前送食,心中便被贪欲所征服,连饭也无法下咽,只用容器盛了饭,带回住处,放在一旁,心想:‘我若能得到恰巴,便活下去;若得不到,还不如死了的好。’于是便绝食而卧。到了第七天,猎人打猎归来,向女儿问起优波迦的情况。她说:‘他只在那天来过一次,之后就再没有来了。’显示巴利原文
Tatthekaṃ migaluddakagāmakaṃ nissāya vāsaṃ kappesi, jeṭṭhakaluddako taṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Tasmiñca janapade caṇḍā makkhikā honti. Atha naṃ ekāya cāṭiyā vasāpesuṃ. Migaluddako dūraṃ migavaṃ gacchanto ‘‘amhākaṃ arahante mā pamajjī’’ti cāpaṃ nāma dhītaraṃ āṇāpetvā agamāsi saddhiṃ puttabhātukehi. Sā cassa dhītā dassanīyā hoti koṭṭhāsasampannā. Dutiyadivase upako gharaṃ āgato taṃ dārikaṃ sabbaṃ upacāraṃ katvā parivisituṃ upagataṃ disvā rāgena abhibhūto bhuñjitumpi asakkonto bhājanena bhattaṃ ādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā bhattaṃ ekamantaṃ nikkhipitvā ‘‘sace cāpaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi. No ce, marāmī’’ti nirāhāro sayi. Sattame divase māgaviko āgantvā dhītaraṃ upakassa pavattiṃ pucchi. Sā ‘‘ekadivasameva āgantvā puna nāgatapubbo’’ti āha.
猎人打算一回来就去见他,好问明情况,于是立刻赶到他身边,一边轻抚他的脚,一边问道:‘尊者,您身体不适吗?’优波迦只是低声呻吟,辗转反侧。猎人说:‘尊者,请您说吧,但凡是我能做到的,我一定全部照办。’优波迦说:‘我若能得到恰巴,便能活下去;若得不到,对我来说还不如死了的好。’猎人问:‘尊者,您可会什么手艺吗?’优波迦答:‘不会。’猎人说:‘尊者,一个人若是没有任何手艺,是无法养家糊口的。’优波迦说:‘我虽然不会任何手艺,但我可以为你们搬运猎物的肉,并且拿去贩卖。’猎人说:‘这也正合我们的心意。’于是便给了他一件上衣,将他带回家中,把女儿嫁给了他。两人同居后,生下了一个儿子,取名为‘善贤’。恰巴在孩子啼哭时,唱着哄孩子的歌谣来嘲笑优波迦:‘运肉人的崽子,猎人的崽子,别哭,别哭……’优波迦说:‘贤女,你以为我没有依靠吗?我有一位名叫“无量胜者”的朋友,我要去投奔他。’恰巴心里明白‘他这是感到羞耻了’,于是便反复说这些话来嘲弄他。终于有一天,优波迦没有告知任何人,便朝着中部地区出发了。显示巴利原文
Māgaviko āgataveseneva naṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāmīti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva gantvā ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, aphāsuka’’nti pāde parāmasanto pucchi. Upako nitthunanto parivattatiyeva. So ‘‘vada bhante, yaṃ mayā sakkā kātuṃ, sabbaṃ karissāmī’’ti āha. Upako ‘‘sace cāpaṃ labhāmi, jīvāmi, no ce, mayhameva maraṇaṃ seyyo’’ti āha. Jānāsi kira, bhante, kiñci sippanti? Na jānāmīti. Na, bhante, kiñci sippaṃ ajānantena sakkā gharāvāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātunti. So āha ‘‘nāhaṃ kiñci sippaṃ jānāmi, apica tumhākaṃ maṃsahārako bhavissāmi, maṃsañca vikkiṇissāmī’’ti. Māgaviko ‘‘amhākampi etadeva ruccatī’’ti uttarasāṭakaṃ datvā gharaṃ ānetvā dhītaraṃ adāsi. Tesaṃ saṃvāsamanvāya putto vijāyi, ‘‘subhaddo’’tissa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Cāpā tassa rodanakāle ‘‘maṃsahārakassa putta migaluddakassa putta mā rodi mā rodī’’tiādīni vadamānā puttatosanagītena upakaṃ uppaṇḍesi. ‘‘Bhadde tvaṃ maṃ anāthoti maññasi, atthi me anantajino nāma sahāyo, tassāhaṃ santikaṃ gamissāmī’’ti āha. Cāpā ‘‘evamayaṃ aṭṭīyatī’’ti ñatvā punappunaṃ kathesi. So ekadivasaṃ anārocetvāva majjhimadesābhimukho pakkāmi.
那时,世尊正住在舍卫城的祇陀林。当时,世尊事先吩咐比丘们:‘诸比丘,如果有人前来询问“无量胜者”在哪里,你们就把他带来见我。’优波迦也一路打听着‘无量胜者住在哪里’,次第来到了舍卫城,他站在寺院中央问道:‘无量胜者在哪里?’比丘们便把他带到世尊面前。他见到世尊后说:‘世尊,您认得我吗?’世尊说:‘是的,优波迦,我认得你。那么,你如今住在哪里呢?’优波迦答:‘在世尊,我住在弯颈地区。’世尊说:‘优波迦,你年纪已经老了,还能出家吗?’优波迦说:‘世尊,请让我出家吧。’于是世尊为他剃度,并授予了业处。他精进修习业处,证得了不还果,命终之后,投生到无烦天,在投生的那一刹那便证得了阿拉汉果。因为在无烦天中,有七位众生刚一投生即证阿拉汉果,他就是那其中之一。正如所说的那样——显示巴利原文
Bhagavā ca tena samayena sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane, atha kho bhagavā paṭikacceva bhikkhū āṇāpesi ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, anantajinoti pucchamāno āgacchati, tassa maṃ dasseyyāthā’’ti. Upakopi kho ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino vasatī’’ti pucchanto anupubbena sāvatthiṃ āgantvā vihāramajjhe ṭhatvā ‘‘kuhiṃ anantajino’’ti pucchi. Taṃ bhikkhū bhagavato santikaṃ nayiṃsu. So ca bhagavantaṃ disvā ‘‘sañjānātha maṃ bhagavā’’ti āha. Āma upaka sañjānāmi, kuhiṃ pana tvaṃ vasitthāti. Vaṅkahārajanapade, bhanteti. Upaka mahallakosi jāto, pabbajituṃ sakkhissasīti. Pabbajissāmi, bhanteti. Bhagavā pabbājetvā tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ adāsi. So kammaṭṭhāne kammaṃ karonto anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāya kālaṃ katvā avihesu nibbatto, nibbattikkhaṇeyeva ca arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Avihe nibbattamattā hi satta janā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, tesaṃ so aññataro. Vuttañhetaṃ –
投生于无烦天者,有七位比丘得解脱;
灭尽贪与嗔,已渡过世间贪著。
优波迦、帕罗犍陀与普库萨提,他们三位;
跋提耶、康陀提婆、巴胡拉吉与僧祇耶;
他们舍弃了人身,超越了天界的结缚。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Avihaṃ upapannāse, vimuttā satta bhikkhavo; Rāgadosaparikkhīṇā, tiṇṇā loke visattikaṃ. ‘‘Upako palagaṇḍo ca, pukkusāti ca te tayo; Bhaddiyo khaṇḍadevo ca, bāhuraggi ca saṅgiyo; Te hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upaccagu’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.50, 105);
12 ‘他们制定了’:意指他们达成了‘不应礼敬’等约定。
‘多事者’:指为了袈裟等众多资具而行事的人。
‘从精进中退堕者’:指从精进、从先前所修的难行中退堕、失坏的人。
‘转向多事’:指为了袈裟等众多资具而转向。
‘然而,座位应当设置’:但他们说,对于出身高等种姓的他,至少应当为他设置一个座位。
‘不能确立’:被佛陀的威神力、佛陀的威力所降伏,无法坚持自己的约定。
‘以名字和朋友之语相称’:他们称他为‘乔达摩’,称他为‘朋友’,并说:‘朋友乔达摩,往昔我们在优楼频螺精进修习时,曾为你执持衣钵、给你漱口水、为你备齿木、打扫你住过的精舍。后来是谁照顾你的起居?我们离开后,你可曾想念我们?’他们说了这样的话,这便是其含义。显示巴利原文
12.Saṇṭhapesunti ‘‘neva abhivādetabbo’’tiādinā katikaṃ akaṃsu. Bāhullikoti cīvarabāhullādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno. Padhānavibbhantoti padhānato pubbe anuṭṭhitadukkaracaraṇato vibbhanto bhaṭṭho parihīno. Āvatto bāhullāyāti cīvarādibahubhāvatthāya āvatto. Apica kho āsanaṃ ṭhapetabbanti apica kho panassa uccakule nibbattassa āsanamattaṃ ṭhapetabbanti vadiṃsu. Asaṇṭhahantāti buddhānubhāvena buddhatejena abhibhūtā attano katikāya ṭhātuṃ asakkontā. Nāmena ca āvusovādena ca samudācarantīti ‘‘gotamā’’ti ca ‘‘āvuso’’ti ca vadanti, ‘‘āvuso gotama, mayaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhānakāle tuyhaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā vicarimha, mukhodakaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ adamha, vutthapariveṇaṃ sammajjimha, pacchā te ko vattapaṭipattiṃ akāsi, kacci amhesu pakkantesu na cintayitthā’’ti evarūpaṃ kathaṃ kathentīti attho.
“不久”意谓未久。族子有两种:出身族子与行为族子,二者皆为族子。“从家”即舍离居家。于家有益者名为在家,指农耕、牧牛等维持家业之事。此中无有在家之事,故称无家,是出家的别名。他们出家,即趣入、亲近。“彼无上”即那无上的。“梵行圆满”指道梵行之圆满,即阿罗汉果。族子正是为此而出家。“于现法”指即此生命体。“自己以证智作证后”即自己以智慧亲证之后,成为不依他人者。“具足而住”即证得、成就之后而住。显示巴利原文
Na cirassevāti acireneva. Kulaputtāti duvidhā kulaputtā jātikulaputtā ācārakulaputtā ca, ete pana ubhayathāpi kulaputtāyeva. Agārasmāti gharā. Agārāya hitaṃ agāriyaṃ, kasigorakkhādi kuṭumbaposanakammaṃ vuccati. Natthi ettha agāriyanti anagāriyaṃ. Pabbajjāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Pabbajantīti upagacchanti upasaṅkamanti. Tadanuttaranti taṃ anuttaraṃ. Brahmacariyapariyosānanti maggabrahmacariyassa pariyosānaṃ, arahattaphalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa hi atthāya kulaputtā pabbajanti. Diṭṭheva dhammeti tasmiṃyeva attabhāve. Sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvāti attanoyeva paññāya paccakkhaṃ katvā, aparappaccayaṃ katvāti attho. Upasampajja viharissathāti pāpuṇitvā sampādetvā viharissatha.
“以威仪”即通过难行的威仪。“以行道”即通过难行的行道。“以难行作”即通过食用少量豆羹等方式行难行。“上人法”即超越常人之法。“足以成为圣”即堪为圣者,意谓有能力成就圣位。智见即是智见的殊胜,而堪为圣且为智见殊胜者,即为“堪为圣的智见殊胜”。所言“智见”,可指天眼、观智、道、果、省察智乃至一切知智。如“不放逸者成就智见”(《中部》1.311)中,天眼称为智见;在“引导心、令心倾向智见”(《长部》1.235)中,指观智;在“你们不可能为智见、为无上正觉”(《增支部》4.196)中,指道;在“我证得此另一上人法、堪为圣的智见殊胜、安乐住”(《中部》1.328)中,指果;在“智与见生于我:‘我心解脱不动,此为最后生,今无后有’”(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》16)中,指省察智;在“智与见生于我:‘阿罗罗·迦罗摩于七日后命终’”(《中部》1.284;2.340;《大品》10)中,指一切知智。而此处,则以一切知智为近因的圣道,或即指一切知智本身。显示巴利原文
Iriyāyāti dukkarairiyāya. Paṭipadāyāti dukkarapaṭipattiyā. Dukkarakārikāyāti pasatapasatamuggayūsādiāharaṇādinā dukkarakaraṇena. Uttari manussadhammāti manussadhammato upari. Alaṃ ariyaṃ kātunti alamariyo, ariyabhāvāya samatthoti vuttaṃ hoti, ñāṇadassanameva ñāṇadassanaviseso, alamariyo ca so ñāṇadassanaviseso cāti alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Ñāṇadassananti ca dibbacakkhupi vipassanāpi maggopi phalampi paccavekkhaṇañāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇampi vuccati. ‘‘Appamatto samāno ñāṇadassanaṃ ārādhetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.311) hi ettha dibbacakkhu ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Ñāṇadassanāya cittaṃ abhinīharati abhininnāmetī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.235) ettha vipassanāñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Abhabbā te ñāṇadassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyā’’ti (a. ni. 4.196) ettha maggo. ‘‘Ayamañño uttarimanussadhammā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso adhigato phāsuvihāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.328) ettha phalaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi ‘akuppā me cetovimutti, ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavo’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 16) ettha paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādi ‘sattāhakālakato āḷāro kālāmo’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.284; 2.340; mahāva. 10) ettha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Idha pana sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhāno ariyamaggo sabbaññutaññāṇameva vā adhippetaṃ.
“你们忆念我否”即你们是否忆念我。“我曾说过如此这般的话语”在此指如此这般的话语差别,意为:我是否曾在优楼频螺精勤时,为摄受你们、为令你们不厌倦,于夜间或白昼前来,说过“贤友们,你们不要思虑‘我们将去往何处’,我的光明或业处之相显现了”等任何话语差别。他们以此一语即得正念,生起恭敬,确信“此人必定已成佛”,故说“否,尊者,并无此事”。“世尊能令五比丘信解”即世尊能令五比丘了知“我是佛”。“他们令心倾向于证知”即他们令心倾向于证知,导向阿罗汉果的证得。显示巴利原文
Abhijānātha me noti abhijānātha nu me. Evarūpaṃ pabhāvitametanti ettha evarūpaṃ vākyabhedanti attho, api nu ahaṃ uruvelāyaṃ padhāne tumhākaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ rattiṃ vā divā vā āgantvā ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ yattha katthaci gamissāmāti mā vitakkayittha, mayhaṃ obhāso vā kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ vā paññāyatī’’ti evarūpaṃ kañci vacanabhedaṃ akāsinti adhippāyo. Te ekapadeneva satiṃ labhitvā uppannagāravā ‘‘addhā esa buddho jāto’’ti saddahitvā ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti āhaṃsu. Asakkhi kho bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū saññāpetunti bhagavā pañcavaggiye bhikkhū ‘‘buddho aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ asakkhi. Aññā cittaṃ upaṭṭhāpesunti aññāya arahattappattiyā cittaṃ upaṭṭhapesuṃ abhinīhariṃsu.
转法轮经义注显示巴利原文
Dhammacakkappavattanasuttavaṇṇanā
13 “诸比丘,此二边”——意为:诸比丘,此两者,此二分。此处“边”是部分之义,如“前际智、后际智”(《法集论》1063)等中的用法。而当此语被说出时,以佛之威力,所发音声向下达至无间地狱,向上至于有顶,遍满一万世界而安住。就在那时,善根成熟、曾为现证诸谛积累功德的十八亿梵天聚集而来。西方太阳沉落,东方与阿沙陀星宿和合的满月升起。那时,世尊开始宣说《转法轮经》:“诸比丘,此二边……”等。显示巴利原文
13.Dveme, bhikkhave, antāti dve ime, bhikkhave, koṭṭhāsā, dve bhāgāti attho. Bhāgavacano hettha anta-saddo ‘‘pubbante ñāṇaṃ aparante ñāṇa’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 1063) viya. Imassa pana padassa uccāraṇasamakālaṃ pavattanigghoso buddhānubhāvena heṭṭhā avīciṃ upari bhavaggaṃ patvā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃyeva samaye paripakkakusalamūlā saccābhisambodhāya katādhikārā aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno samāgacchiṃsu. Pacchimadisāya sūriyo atthameti, pācīnadisāya āsāḷhanakkhattena yutto puṇṇacando uggacchati. Tasmiṃ samaye bhagavā dhammacakkappavattanasuttaṃ ārabhanto ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“由出家者”:指断除在家束缚、已出家者。“不应习行”:即不应受用,不应投入。而“此于诸欲中耽著欲乐”一句,即在此所依欲中耽著于烦恼欲乐,意思是追随与烦恼欲相应的乐。卑劣,即低劣。粗俗,即属于村民之所行、为他们所惯习者。凡夫法,即凡夫、愚暗之人所惯行者。非圣,即非圣、非清净、非最上,或非圣者所有。无利益,即不具利益,不依止于带来利益安乐之因。自苦行:即自我折磨的投入,意为造作痛苦、产生痛苦。苦:即由卧荆棘床等自我折磨而带来的苦。中道:是就圣道而言。因为此道不接近、不落于耽著欲乐和自苦行这两边,从这些边中解脱,故称为“中道”。因处于这些之中而为中,因是希求从轮回之苦出离者应行之道而为行道。同样地,贪为一边,嗔为一边;常见为一边,断见为一边——应依前述方法广说。显示巴利原文
Tattha pabbajitenāti gihibandhanaṃ chetvā pabbajjupagatena. Na sevitabbāti na vaḷañjetabbā nānuyuñjitabbā. Yo cāyaṃ kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogoti yo ca ayaṃ vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasukhassa anuyogo, kilesakāmasaṃyuttassa sukhassa anugatoti attho. Hīnoti lāmako. Gammoti gāmavāsīnaṃ santako tehi sevitabbatāya. Pothujjanikoti puthujjanena andhabālajanena āciṇṇo. Anariyoti na ariyo na visuddho na uttamo, na vā ariyānaṃ santako. Anatthasaṃhitoti na atthasaṃhito, hitasukhāvahakāraṇaṃ anissitoti attho. Attakilamathānuyogoti attano kilamathassa anuyogo, dukkhakaraṇaṃ dukkhuppādananti attho. Dukkhoti kaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādīhi attabādhanehi dukkhāvaho. Majjhimā paṭipadāti ariyamaggaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Maggo hi kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, attakilamathānuyogo eko anto, ete dve ante na upeti na upagacchati, vimutto etehi antehi, tasmā ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Etesaṃ majjhe bhavattā majjhimā, vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi paṭipajjitabbato ca paṭipadāti, tathā lobho eko anto, doso eko anto. Sassataṃ ekaṃ antaṃ, ucchedo eko antoti purimanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.
以“能作眼者”等语,是赞叹那行道本身。能作慧眼,故为“能作眼者”。因为此行道能导向对四圣谛的观见,即令遍知、现观等类之见生起,故称为“能作眼者”。应知此义:虽与行道本身无别,但由部分而成立的意义,是依整体而说,故属于譬喻之说。第二词是它的同义词。“为寂静”:即为了令烦恼止息。“为证智”:即为了遍知四圣谛。“为等觉”:即为了遍觉诸谛。“为涅槃”:即为了作证涅槃。或者,“为涅槃”指为无余涅槃,因为“为寂静”一词已涵盖了有余涅槃。显示巴利原文
Cakkhukaraṇītiādīhi tameva paṭipadaṃ thometi. Paññācakkhuṃ karotīti cakkhukaraṇī. Sā hi catunnaṃ saccānaṃ dassanāya saṃvattati pariññābhisamayādibhedassa dassanassa pavattanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘cakkhukaraṇī’’ti vuccati. Tayidaṃ satipi paṭipadāya anaññatte avayavavasena sijjhamāno attho samudāyena kato nāma hotīti upacāravasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dutiyapadaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Upasamāyāti kilesupasamatthāya. Abhiññāyāti catunnaṃ saccānaṃ abhijānanatthāya. Sambodhāyāti tesaṃyeva sambujjhanatthāya. Nibbānāyāti nibbānasacchikiriyāya. Atha vā nibbānāyāti anupādisesanibbānāya. ‘‘Upasamāyā’’ti hi iminā saupādisesanibbānaṃ gahitaṃ.
现在,为了显示那条中道的自相,在提问“什么是那”之后,便以“就是这”等方式作了回答。其中,“就是这”是限定语,旨在否定另有其他导向涅槃之道。因为在此,由于得不到其他道,故对其他道的否定即是遮止。圣:因为远离烦恼,故依词源学为“圣”;或者,因为能导向断除怨敌,故为“圣”——“怨敌”即恶法,由此而离去,故为“圣”;又或者,因为是圣者世尊所宣说,故属于圣者,此亦为“圣”;再或者,因为能导向获得圣位,故为“圣”。然而在此,应知“圣”一词的成就,是通过省略后分而以“圣作”来解释。由于具足八支,故为“八支”。这是在道支的集合上施设道的名称,而集合即被说为具足集合之支。但在此,词义是:属于它自己的八部分支存在于它,故为“八支”。就胜义而言,支本身就是道,如同五支乐器等,而非如六支吠陀那样离支而别有。杀烦恼而行,故依词源学为“道”;或者,寻求、探索涅槃,故为“道”。因为圣道以涅槃为所缘时,即如同在寻求。或者,为求涅槃者所寻求,故为“道”——从作为转依缘的福业开始,乃至为此而修行。又或者,被他们所行、所修习,故为“道”。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ majjhimappaṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetukāmo ‘‘katamā ca sā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘ayamevā’’tiādinā nayena vissajjesi. Tattha ayamevāti avadhāraṇavacanaṃ aññassa nibbānagāmimaggassa atthibhāvapaṭisedhanatthaṃ. Sattāpaṭikkhepo hi idha paṭisedhanaṃ alabbhamānattā aññassa maggassa. Ariyoti kilesānaṃ ārakattā ariyo niruttinayena. Aripahānāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo arayo pāpadhammā yanti apagacchanti etenāti katvā. Ariyena bhagavatā desitattā ariyassa ayantipi ariyo, ariyabhāvappaṭilābhāya saṃvattatītipi ariyo. Ettha pana ariyakaro ariyotipi uttarapadalopena ariya-saddasiddhi veditabbā. Aṭṭhahi aṅgehi upetattā aṭṭhaṅgiko. Maggaṅgasamudāye hi maggavohāro, samudāyo ca samudāyīhi samannāgato nāma hoti. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – attano avayavabhūtāni aṭṭhaṅgāni etassa santīti aṭṭhaṅgikoti. Paramatthato pana aṅgāniyeva maggo pañcaṅgikatūriyādīni viya, na ca aṅgavinimutto chaḷaṅgo vedo viya. Kilese mārento gacchatīti maggo niruttinayena, nibbānaṃ maggati gavesatīti vā maggo. Ariyamaggo hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karonto gavesanto viya hoti. Nibbānatthikehi maggīyatīti vā maggo vivaṭṭūpanissayapuññakaraṇato paṭṭhāya tadatthapaṭipattito. Gammati vā tehi paṭipajjīyatīti maggo. Ettha pana ādiantavipariyāyena saddasiddhi veditabbā.
“Seyyathidaṃ”是助词,意为“那个是什么”或“哪些是那八支”。因为此助词通用于一切性、格、数的表达。每一支本身就是道。如所说:“正见既是道也是因”(《法集论》1039)。古师亦说:“见道是正见,安立道是正思惟……乃至……无散乱道是正定”。难道不是诸支合集才称为道,乃至缺少七支的圣道都不存在吗?的确如此,在证谛之时;但就道缘性而言,由于各自执行其作用,每一支本身也就是道,否则,即便合集,它们也无法完成道的作用。在正见等中,正见:正确地见,故为正见;正思惟:正确地思惟,将相应法安立于名为涅槃的所缘,故为正思惟;正语:依此而正确地说,故为正语;正业:依此而正确地作,故为正业,亦即正业道;正命:依此而正确地活命,故为正命;正精进:正确地精勤、努力,故为正精进;正念:正确地忆念、随念,故为正念;正定:依此而心正确地等持,故为正定——应如此了知词释。现在,“比丘们,这就是那”是总结那行道而说。其义为:将四出世间道合为一而说的八支道,比丘们,这就是那……乃至……导向涅槃。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa katamo so iti ceti attho, katamāni vā tāni aṭṭhaṅgānīti. Sabbaliṅgavibhattivacanasādhāraṇo hi ayaṃ nipāto. Ekamekampi aṅgaṃ maggoyeva. Yathāha ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi maggo ceva hetu cā’’ti (dha. sa. 1039). Porāṇāpi bhaṇanti ‘‘dassanamaggo sammādiṭṭhi, abhiniropanamaggo sammāsaṅkappo…pe… avikkhepamaggo sammāsamādhī’’ti. Nanu ca aṅgāni samuditāni maggo antamaso sattaṅgavikalassa ariyamaggassa abhāvatoti? Saccametaṃ saccasampaṭivedhe, maggappaccayatāya pana yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇena paccekampi tāni maggoyeva, aññathā samuditānampi tesaṃ maggakiccaṃ na sambhaveyyāti. Sammādiṭṭhiādīsu sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi, sammā saṅkappeti sampayuttadhamme nibbānasaṅkhāte ārammaṇe abhiniropetīti sammāsaṅkappo, sammā vadati etāyāti sammāvācā, sammā karoti etenāti sammākammaṃ, tadeva sammākammanto, sammā ājīvati etenāti sammāājīvo, sammā vāyamati ussahatīti sammāvāyāmo, sammā sarati anussaratīti sammāsati, sammā samādhiyati cittaṃ etenāti sammāsamādhīti evaṃ nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Idāni ayaṃ kho sā bhikkhaveti tameva paṭipadaṃ nigamento āha. Tassattho – yvāyaṃ cattāropi lokuttaramagge ekato katvā kathito aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, ayaṃ kho sā bhikkhave…pe… nibbānāya saṃvattatīti.
14 14. 如此显示了中道的自相后,现在为了显示四圣谛,便说:“然而,比丘们,这是”等。其中,在“苦”一词中,“du”此音见于“可厌”之义。因为人们称可厌的儿子为“恶子”。“kha”音则见于“空”之义。因为虚空被称为“空”。而这第一谛,因是众多灾祸的依处,故为可厌;因缺乏凡夫所计执的常、净、乐、我之性,故为空。因此,由可厌与空,故称为“苦”。然而,因为佛等圣者通达此,故称为“圣谛”。因为应被圣者通达的谛,在前分中省略后分而说为“圣谛”。又或者,是圣者如来的谛,故为“圣谛”。因为由如来自己证得并宣说,且由此而可被他人证得,故那是属于他的。再或者,因为通达此而成就圣位,故是令成圣的谛,亦如前省略后分而说为“圣谛”。或者,由不虚妄性而应被知、应被证得,故是圣谛,亦为“圣谛”。至于谛的含义,将在后面统一显示四谛。显示巴利原文
14. Evaṃ majjhimapaṭipadaṃ sarūpato dassetvā idāni cattāri ariyasaccāni dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha (visuddhi. 2.530) dukkhanti ettha du-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitañhi puttaṃ ‘‘duputto’’ti vadanti, khaṃ-saddo pana tucche. Tucchañhi ākāsaṃ ‘‘kha’’nti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekaupaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato, tasmā kucchitattā tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati. Yasmā panetaṃ buddhādayo ariyā paṭivijjhanti, tasmā ‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuccati. Ariyapaṭivijjhitabbañhi saccaṃ purimapade uttarapadalopena ‘‘ariyasacca’’nti vuttaṃ. Ariyassa tathāgatassa saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ. Tathāgatena hi sayaṃ adhigatattā paveditattā tato eva ca aññehi adhigamanīyattā taṃ tassa hotīti. Atha vā etassa abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhito ariyasādhakaṃ saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ pubbe viya uttarapadalopena . Avitathabhāvena vā araṇīyattā adhigantabbattā ariyaṃ saccantipi ariyasaccaṃ. Saccatthaṃ pana catunnampi saccānaṃ parato ekajjhaṃ dassayissāma.
现在,为了显示此苦圣谛的自性,而说“生也是苦”等。在此,“生”一词有多义。正如在“一生、二生”中,它出现于“有”的意义上;在“维沙卡,有称为尼犍陀的沙门种类”中,它出现于“种类”的意义上;在“生由二蕴所摄”中,它出现于“有为相”的意义上;在“于母胎中,最初生起的心、最初显现的识,依此而有他的‘生’”中,它出现于“结生”的意义上;在“阿难,菩萨刚刚出生”中,它出现于“分娩”的意义上;在“不被关于出生的言论所轻视、所责难”中,它出现于“家族”的意义上。而在此处,对于胎生者,应视为从结生直至出胎期间转起的诸蕴;对于其他化生等,则仅取结生刹那的诸蕴。这也是一种方便说;若从究竟意义上而言,则是在各处转生的众生,其诸蕴的显现——那些蕴的最初显现,即名为“生”。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘jātipi dukkhā’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ jāti-saddo anekattho. Tathā hesa ‘‘ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31; ma. ni. 1.148) ettha bhave āgato. ‘‘Atthi, visākhe, nigaṇṭhā nāma samaṇajātī’’ti (a. ni. 3.71) ettha nikāye. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 71) ettha saṅkhatalakkhaṇe. ‘‘Yaṃ mātukucchismiṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ paṭhamaṃ viññāṇaṃ pātubhūtaṃ, tadupādāya sāvassa jātī’’ti (mahāva. 124) ettha paṭisandhiyaṃ. ‘‘Sampatijāto, ānanda, bodhisatto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) ettha pasūtiyaṃ. ‘‘Akkhitto anupakuṭṭho jātivādenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.303) ettha kule. Svāyamidha gabbhaseyyakānaṃ paṭisandhito paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchimhā nikkhamanaṃ, tāva pavattesu khandhesu, itaresaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇesvevāti daṭṭhabbo. Ayampi ca pariyāyakathāva, nippariyāyato pana tattha tattha nibbattamānānaṃ sattānaṃ ye khandhā pātubhavanti, tesaṃ paṭhamapātubhāvo jāti nāma.
为什么它是苦呢?因为它是众多苦的所依处。确实,有众多苦,即:苦苦、变易苦、行苦、隐蔽苦、非隐蔽苦、方便苦、究竟苦。其中,身心的苦受,因其自性与名称俱是苦,故名苦苦。乐受,因为是变易苦生起之因,故为变易苦。舍受以及其余的三界诸行,由于受到生灭的逼迫,故为行苦。耳痛、牙痛、贪欲的热恼、嗔恚的热恼等身心疾病,需经询问方能了知,且其起因不明显,故为隐蔽苦。由三十二种业处等所生的疾病,不待询问而能知晓,其起因明显,故为非隐蔽苦。除了苦苦之外,在《谛分别》中提到的其余苦,如生等一切,由于是彼彼苦的所依处,故为方便苦。而苦苦则称为究竟苦。在此,这个‘生’之所以是苦,是因为它正是世尊在《愚人贤者经》等中以譬喻所开示的地狱之苦,以及在善趣人间,以入胎等为根本而生起的种种苦的所依处。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Kasmā panesā dukkhāti ce? Anekesaṃ dukkhānaṃ vatthubhāvato. Anekāni hi dukkhāni. Seyyathidaṃ – dukkhadukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhaṃ paṭicchannadukkhaṃ appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ pariyāyadukkhaṃ nippariyāyadukkhanti. Tattha kāyikacetasikā dukkhā vedanā sabhāvato ca nāmato ca dukkhattā dukkhadukkhanti vuccati. Sukhā vedanā vipariṇāmadukkhuppattihetuto vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ. Upekkhā vedanā ceva sesā ca tebhūmakā saṅkhārā udayabbayapīḷitattā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ. Kaṇṇasūladantasūlarāgajapariḷāhadosajapariḷāhādikāyikacetasikā ābādhā pucchitvā jānitabbato upakkamassa ca apākaṭabhāvato paṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Dvattiṃsakammakāraṇādisamuṭṭhāno ābādho apucchitvāva jānitabbato upakkamassa ca pākaṭabhāvato appaṭicchannadukkhaṃ. Ṭhapetvā dukkhadukkhaṃ sesadukkhaṃ saccavibhaṅge āgataṃ jātiādi sabbampi tassa tassa dukkhassa vatthubhāvato pariyāyadukkhaṃ. Dukkhadukkhaṃ pana nippariyāyadukkhanti vuccati. Tatrāyaṃ jāti yaṃ taṃ bālapaṇḍitasuttādīsu (ma. ni. 3.246 ādayo) bhagavatāpi upamāvasena pakāsitaṃ āpāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yañca sugatiyampi manussaloke gabbhokkantimūlakādibhedaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa vatthubhāvato dukkhā. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“倘若众生不生于地狱,
在此,火焰灼烧等苦难以忍受;
他无论在何处都无法获得安稳,唯得受苦;
因此,牟尼在这里说:‘生即是苦。’”
在畜生道中,由鞭打、刺棒、
杖击等所生的种种苦;
那种苦,如何会在那里有‘生’呢?
而于饿鬼之中,有饥渴所生、
风、热等所生的种种苦;
因未生者于彼即无有是等,
故牟尼说:‘生是苦。’
在浓密的黑暗与难忍的严寒中,
世界间隙中阿修罗所受的苦;
若那里无生,便没有那种苦;
因此,这个生也就是苦。
再者,如同在粪秽地狱中一般,住于母胎时,
众生久住其中,而后出离时,
便遭受极其惨烈的痛苦。而若无生,便无此苦。
于此世间,无论何时,但凡有纤毫之苦……
无有不由生而有者,故大仙首说此‘生是苦’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jāyetha no ce narakesu satto; Tatthaggidāhādikamappasayhaṃ; Labhetha dukkhaṃ na kuhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ; Iccāha dukkhāti munīdha jātiṃ. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ tiracchesu kasāpatoda- Daṇḍābhighātādibhavaṃ anekaṃ; Yaṃ taṃ kathaṃ tattha bhaveyya jātiṃ; Vinā tahiṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Petesu dukkhaṃ pana khuppipāsā- Vātātapādippabhavaṃ vicittaṃ; Yasmā ajātassa na tattha atthi; Tasmāpi dukkhaṃ muni jātimāha. ‘‘Tibbandhakāre ca asayha sīte; Lokantare yaṃ asuresu dukkhaṃ; Na taṃ bhave tattha na cassa jāti; Yato ayaṃ jāti tatopi dukkhā. ‘‘Yañcāpi gūthanarake viya mātu gabbhe; Satto vasaṃ ciramato bahi nikkhamañca; Pappoti dukkhamatighoramidampi natthi; Jātiṃ vinā itipi jāti ayañhi dukkhā. ‘‘Kiṃ bhāsitena bahunā nanu yaṃ kuhiñci; Atthīdha kiñcidapi dukkhamidaṃ kadāci; Nevatthi jātivirahena yato mahesi;
所谓“苦”者,最初所说的苦,正是“生”。显示巴利原文
Dukkhāti sabbapaṭhamaṃ imamāha jāti’’nti. (visuddhi. 2.541; vibha. aṭṭha. 191; mahāni. aṭṭha. 5; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.32-33);
关于“老也是苦”:这里老有两种——有为相,以及被认可为“衰败等”的、在同一生命相续中所含摄的诸蕴之旧态,此处所指是后者。复次,此老既是行苦,又是苦的所依,故是苦。诚然,由于肢节松弛、根门衰变、容貌丑陋、青春坏灭、精力衰退、念与慧的舍离、遭他人轻蔑等众多缘由,而产生的身心之苦,老便是其依处。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Jarāpidukkhāti ettha pana duvidhā jarā saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca khaṇḍiccādisammato santatiyaṃ ekabhavapariyāpannakkhandhapurāṇabhāvo ca, sā idha adhippetā. Sā panesā jarā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ceva dukkhavatthuto ca dukkhā. Yañhi aṅgapaccaṅgasithilabhāvaindriyavikāravirūpatāyobbanavināsavīriyāvisādasatimativippavāsaparaparibhavādianekapaccayaṃ kāyikacetasikaṃ dukkhamuppajjati, jarā tassa vatthu. Tenāhu porāṇā –
由念等之远离,与己之儿女妻子等分离,
既因不令人喜悦,更因陷入愚痴的状态。
凡人所受之苦,无论是身苦还是心苦,
这一切皆以老为因,因此老即是苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṅgānaṃ sithilībhāvā, indriyānaṃ vikārato; Yobbanassa vināsena, balassa upaghātato. ‘‘Vippavāsā satādīnaṃ, puttadārehi attano; Appasādanīyato ceva, bhiyyo bālattapattiyā. ‘‘Pappoti dukkhaṃ yaṃ macco, kāyikaṃ mānasaṃ tathā; Sabbametaṃ jarāhetu, yasmā tasmā jarā dukhā’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.542; vibha. aṭṭha. 192; mahāni. aṭṭha. 5; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.32-33);
“病也是苦”这句话,在《分别论》的苦谛解说中并未出现,因此《清净道论》在解说苦谛时也未加引用,它仅在《转法轮经》的正文中才能见到。所以,应当探究它在此处被说、而在别处不说的原因。显示巴利原文
Byādhipi dukkhoti idaṃ padaṃ vibhaṅge dukkhasaccaniddesapāḷiyaṃ na āgataṃ, teneva visuddhimaggepi dukkhasaccaniddese taṃ na uddhaṭaṃ, dhammacakkapavattanasuttantapāḷiyaṃyeva pana upalabbhati, tasmā tatthevimassa vacane aññattha ca avacane kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
“死也是苦”:这里的死也有两种,即有为相,与在一生中所摄命根相续的断绝。前者是就“老死由二蕴所摄”而说;后者是就“常因死而有怖”而说,此处所指即是后者。生缘死、横死、断灭死、寿尽死、福尽死,也都是它的名称。应知,由于它是苦的所依,故说为苦。因此古德们说:显示巴利原文
Maraṇampi dukkhanti etthāpi duvidhaṃ maraṇaṃ saṅkhatalakkhaṇañca. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71). Ekabhavapariyāpannajīvitindriyappabandhavicchedo ca. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘niccaṃ maraṇato bhaya’’nti (su. ni. 581; jā. 1.11.88), taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Jātipaccayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇaṃ sarasamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayamaraṇantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Tayidaṃ dukkhassa vatthubhāvato dukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāhu porāṇā –
那观察恶业等相的恶人,
善人无法忍受与所爱的分离,
临终者心中无差别地生起痛苦。
对于一切众生,当关节、韧带等处被割裂时,
对于要害遭受摧折的人,便会产生身体之苦。
因为此苦无法忍受、无可对治;
因此,以死亡为事由,这才被说为‘苦’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pāpassa pāpakammādi-nimittamanupassato; Bhaddassāpasahantassa, viyogaṃ piyavatthukaṃ; Mīyamānassa yaṃ dukkhaṃ, mānasaṃ avisesato. ‘‘Sabbesañcāpi yaṃ sandhi-bandhanacchedanādikaṃ; Vitujjamānamammānaṃ, hoti dukkhaṃ sarīrajaṃ. ‘‘Asayhamappaṭikāraṃ, dukkhassetassidaṃ yato; Maraṇaṃ vatthu tenetaṃ, dukkhamicceva bhāsita’’nti. (visuddhi. 2.543; vibha. aṭṭha. 193; mahāni. aṭṭha. 5; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.32-33);
然而此处,在《分别论》的苦谛解说中虽载有‘愁、悲、苦、忧、恼亦为苦’,此处却未提及,其中缘由亦应探究。显示巴利原文
Imasmiñca ṭhāne ‘‘sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā’’ti vibhaṅge dukkhasaccaniddese āgataṃ, idha pana taṃ natthi, tatthāpi kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ.
‘与不爱者相会是苦’:此处,与不爱者相会,即与不可意的有情及诸行结合。这也是以苦为因的苦。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Appiyehi sampayogo dukkhoti ettha appiyasampayogo nāma amanāpehi sattasaṅkhārehi samodhānaṃ. Sopi dukkhavatthuto dukkho. Tenāhu porāṇā –
见到不爱者时,心中首先生起苦;
由此所生之苦,随即于此身中生起。
因此,大牟尼由二苦之事由,
“与不爱者相会”被说为苦,此应当了知。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Disvāva appiye dukkhaṃ, paṭhamaṃ hoti cetasi; Tadupakkamasambhūta-matha kāye yato idha. ‘‘Tato dukkhadvayassāpi, vatthuto so mahesinā; Dukkho vuttoti viññeyyo, appiyehi samāgamo’’ti.
“与可爱者别离是苦”——在此,与可爱者别离,是指与可意的有情及诸行相分离。它也是以愁苦为因的苦。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Piyehi vippayogo dukkhoti ettha pana piyavippayogo nāma manāpehi sattasaṅkhārehi vinābhāvo. Sopi sokadukkhassa vatthuto dukkho. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“亲属、财富等的离散,
饱含愁悲之苦,令他们备受煎熬;
因为愚者们正是由此而受苦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ñātidhanādiviyogā; Sokasarasamappitā vitujjanti; Bālā yato tatoyaṃ; Dukkhoti mato piyavippayogo’’ti.
‘求不得’者:于此,诸如‘啊,愿我们不具生法’等,对于不可得之事物所起的欲求,即说为‘求不得,彼亦是苦’。而此欲求也因是苦的所依,故为苦。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Yampicchaṃ na labhatīti ettha ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ na jātidhammā assāmā’’tiādīsu alabbhaneyyavatthūsu icchāva ‘‘yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkha’’nti vuttā, sāpi dukkhavatthuto dukkhā. Tenāhu porāṇā –
那些各怀所求者,因求不得其欲,
那由失落所成的苦,便在这世间、于众生中生起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Taṃ taṃ patthayamānānaṃ, tassa tassa alābhato; Yaṃ vighātamayaṃ dukkhaṃ, sattānaṃ idha jāyati. ‘‘Alabbhaneyyavatthūnaṃ, patthanā tassa kāraṇaṃ; Yasmā tasmā jino dukkhaṃ, icchitālābhamabravī’’ti.
“略言之,五取蕴是苦”——在此,正如薪为火之依,靶为打击之依,牛为虻蚊等之依,田为收割者之依,村为屠村者之依,生等种种苦唯依五取蕴而生起,如杂草等生于大地,花、果、嫩叶等生于树木;五取蕴的初苦是生,中苦是老,后苦是死;对于心愿受挫者,求不得即是愿求受挫之苦。如此从种种方面审察时,唯五取蕴是苦。若一一开示而说,纵经多劫亦不能无余尽述,因此,世尊将彼一切苦摄入五取蕴中而显示,如将全大海之水味摄于一水滴中,故说‘略言之,五取蕴是苦’。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhāti ettha pana yasmā indhanamiva pāvako, lakkhamiva paharaṇāni, gorūpaṃ viya ḍaṃsamakasādayo, khettamiva lāyakā, gāmaṃ viya gāmaghātakā, upādānakkhandhapañcakameva jātiādayo nānappakārehi vibādhentā tiṇalatādīni viya bhūmiyaṃ, pupphaphalapallavāni viya rukkhesu upādānakkhandhesuyeva nibbattanti, upādānakkhandhānañca ādidukkhaṃ jāti, majjhedukkhaṃ jarā, pariyosānadukkhaṃ maraṇaṃ, manorathavighātappattānañca icchāvighātadukkhaṃ icchitālābhoti evaṃ nānappakārato upaparikkhiyamānā upādānakkhandhāva dukkhāti yadetaṃ ekamekaṃ dassetvā vuccamānaṃ anekehipi kappehi na sakkā anavasesato vattuṃ, tasmā taṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ ekajalabindumhi sakalasamuddajalarasaṃ viya yesu kesuci pañcupādānakkhandhesu saṅkhipitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti bhagavā avoca. Tenāhu porāṇā –
“从生等开始的众苦,即如此处世尊所说;
乃至未说之一切苦,若离这些,亦不可得。
是故,这些取蕴,略言之,
即被宣说苦边的大牟尼称为‘苦’。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Jātippabhutikaṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ vuttamidha tādinā; Avuttaṃ yañca taṃ sabbaṃ, vinā ete na vijjati. ‘‘Yasmā tasmā upādāna-kkhandhā saṅkhepato ime; Dukkhāti vuttā dukkhanta-desakena mahesinā’’ti.
如此以自相显示了苦谛之后,现在为显示集谛,而说“诸比丘,此是苦集”等语。其中,“saṃ”之音,在“samāgamo, sameta”等词中表示结合;“u”之音,在“uppannaṃ, udita”等词中表示生起;而“aya”之音则表示原因。此第二谛,即在其余诸缘和合时,成为苦生起的原因。因为是苦的结合与生起之因,故称为“苦集”。所谓“此渴爱”,即指这一渴爱。所谓“导致再有”:令再有生起即是“再有”,此为省略了后分词;“以再有为习性”者,即是“导致再有”。“与喜贪俱行”:即与欢喜和贪染相伴而行。其意思是:以在任何状态下都不舍弃喜悦与染着的喜贪方式,与之俱行。“于处处欣喜”:无论于何处结生,即于彼彼处感到欣喜。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sarūpato dukkhasaccaṃ dassetvā idāni samudayasaccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudaya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha saṃ-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘samāgamo sameta’’ntiādīsu saṃyogaṃ dīpeti, u-iti ayaṃ ‘‘uppannaṃ udita’’ntiādīsu uppattiṃ. Aya-saddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañcāpi dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassuppattikāraṇanti dukkhassa saṃyoge uppattikāraṇattā ‘‘dukkhasamudaya’’nti vuccati. Yāyaṃ taṇhāti yā ayaṃ taṇhā. Ponobbhavikāti punabbhavakaraṇaṃ punabbhavo uttarapadalopena, punabbhavo sīlametissāti ponobbhavikā. Nandīrāgena sahagatāti nandīrāgasahagatā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘nandanato rajjanato ca nandīrāgabhāvaṃ sabbāsu avatthāsu appaccakkhāya vuttiyā nandīrāgasahagatā’’ti. Tatratatrābhinandinīti yatra yatra attabhāvo nibbattati, tatratatrābhinandinī.
“即所谓”是不变词,其含义是“那是哪一种呢?”。依照色渴爱等的差别,渴爱共有六种;而依其转起行相的区别,则说为欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱三种。即是说:当色渴爱以欲乐之味而转起,品尝着出现在眼前的色所缘时,此时便名为欲渴爱。当那同一个所缘,与“是常、是恒”的常见一起转起时,便名为有渴爱。与常见相应的贪染,即说为“有渴爱”。当那同一个所缘,与“断灭、毁坏”的断见一起转起时,便名为无有渴爱。与断见相应的贪染,即说为“无有渴爱”。对于声渴爱等,此义理也同样适用。显示巴利原文
Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa sā katamāti ceti ayamattho. Rūpataṇhādibhedena chabbidhāyeva taṇhā pavattiākārabhedato kāmataṇhādivasena tividhā vuttā. Rūpataṇhāyeva hi yadā cakkhussa āpāthamāgataṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ kāmassādavasena assādayamānā pavattati, tadā kāmataṇhā nāma hoti. Yadā tadevārammaṇaṃ dhuvaṃ sassatanti pavattāya sassatadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ pavattati, tadā bhavataṇhā nāma hoti. Sassatadiṭṭhisahagato hi rāgo ‘‘bhavataṇhā’’ti vuccati. Yadā pana tadevārammaṇaṃ ucchijjati vinassatīti pavattāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ pavattati, tadā vibhavataṇhā nāma hoti. Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato hi rāgo ‘‘vibhavataṇhā’’ti vuccati. Esa nayo saddataṇhādīsupi.
然而,为何在此只将渴爱说为集谛呢?因为它是殊胜之因。无明由于遮蔽了诸有的过患,而见取、戒禁取等执取则在各处固执不舍,从而令渴爱增长;瞋恚等法固然也是业的成因,但渴爱却希求种种不同的有、生趣、识住、有情居、众生类别、家族、财富、主权等差别,它既是种种业最亲近的依止缘,也是业的助伴,由此决定了后有等种种的差异。因此,虽然经藏与阿毗达摩中也提到无明、取、业等其他烦恼与不善根等苦因的存在,但由于渴爱是苦最殊胜的因,所以唯独说渴爱为“集谛”。应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha taṇhāva samudayasaccaṃ vuttāti? Visesahetubhāvato. Avijjā hi bhavesu ādīnavaṃ paṭicchādentī diṭṭhiādiupādānañca tattha tattha abhinivisamānaṃ taṇhaṃ abhivaḍḍheti, dosādayopi kammassa kāraṇaṃ honti, taṇhā pana taṃtaṃbhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāāvāsasattanikāyakulabhogissariyādivicittataṃ abhipatthentī kammavicittatāya upanissayataṃ kammassa ca sahāyabhāvaṃ upagacchantī bhavādivicittataṃ niyameti, tasmā dukkhassa visesahetubhāvato aññesupi avijjāupādānakammādīsu sutte abhidhamme ca avasesakilesākusalamūlādīsu vuttesu dukkhahetūsu vijjamānesu taṇhāva ‘‘samudayasacca’’nti vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
今为开示苦灭圣谛,世尊说:“诸比丘,此是苦之灭”等。其中,因“ni-”词表“无”,“rodha”词表“牢狱”,故此处称为“苦灭”:因一切趣中,名为轮回牢狱的苦之牢狱皆空无所有;或因证得彼时,名为轮回牢狱的苦之牢狱即不复存在,以此为其对治。又或因苦之不生与灭尽以此为缘,故为苦灭。在此,开示苦灭者以“即彼渴爱”等理趣说为集之灭,何以故?因由集灭而有苦灭。譬如病因止息则病止息,由因灭故果灭,是故唯由集灭而苦灭,非由他法。故说:显示巴利原文
Idāni dukkhanirodhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yasmā ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo ca cārakaṃ dīpeti, tasmā abhāvo ettha saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa sabbagatisuññattā, samadhigate vā tasmiṃ saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkharodhassa abhāvo hoti tappaṭipakkhattātipi ‘‘dukkhanirodha’’nti vuccati. Dukkhassa vā anuppādanirodhapaccayattā dukkhanirodhaṃ. Dukkhanirodhaṃ dassentena cettha ‘‘yo tassāyeva taṇhāyā’’tiādinā nayena samudayanirodho vutto, so kasmā vuttoti ce? Samudayanirodhena dukkhanirodho. Byādhinimittavūpasamena byādhivūpasamo viya hi hetunirodhena phalanirodho, tasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, na aññathā. Tenāha –
犹如树根未损、尚坚固时,
纵被砍伐,此树仍能重新生长;
同样地,当渴爱的随眠未被根除时,
此苦便一再地生起。”(《法句经》第338偈)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yathāpi mūle anupaddave daḷhe; Chinnopi rukkho punareva rūhati; Evampi taṇhānusaye anūhate; Nibbattatī dukkhamidaṃ punappuna’’nti. (dha. pa. 338);
因此,正因为唯由集灭而苦灭,世尊在开示苦灭时,便以集灭来教导。如来具有与狮子相同之行仪。他们在灭苦及开示苦灭时,致力于因,不致力于果。正如狮子对射向自身的箭,即于彼处显示其力,而非对箭;同样,诸佛致力于因,不致力于果。然而外道则具有与狗相同之行仪。他们在灭苦及说苦灭时,以自我折磨的实践等教说而致力于果,不致力于因。正如狗被人投掷土块时,吠叫着去咬那土块,而不攻击投掷者;同样,其他外道在希望灭苦时,致力于令身体疲惫,而非灭尽烦恼。如是,当知世尊以集灭而说苦灭的教导之要义。显示巴利原文
Iti yasmā samudayanirodheneva dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, tasmā bhagavā dukkhanirodhaṃ dassento samudayanirodhena desesi. Sīhasamānavuttino hi tathāgatā. Te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca desentā hetumhi paṭipajjanti, na phale. Yathā hi sīho yenattani saro khitto, tattheva attano balaṃ dasseti, na sare, tathā buddhānaṃ kāraṇe paṭipatti, na phale. Titthiyā pana suvānavuttino. Te dukkhaṃ nirodhentā dukkhanirodhañca desentā attakilamathānuyogadesanādīhi phale paṭipajjanti, na hetumhi. Yathā hi sunakhā kenaci leḍḍuppahāre dinne bhussantā leḍḍuṃ khādanti, na pahāradāyake uṭṭhahanti, evaṃ aññatitthiyā dukkhaṃ nirodhetukāmā kāyakhedamanuyujjanti, na kilesanirodhanaṃ, evaṃ tāva dukkhanirodhassa samudayanirodhavasena desanāya payojanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
此处之义为:‘即彼渴爱’——即先前说为‘能再生’后,依欲爱等分别的渴爱。‘离欲’即指道,因有言:‘由离欲而解脱’(《中部》1.245;《相应部》3.12, 59)。由离欲而灭,是为离欲灭;由于随眠的根除而无余的离欲灭,是为无余离欲灭。或者,‘离欲’即指断除,由此,从随眠的根除而无余的离欲、无余的灭——此处应见如此连结。然就义理而言,所有这些都是涅槃的同义词。因为从究竟义上说,苦灭圣谛即称为涅槃。然而,由于依此涅槃,渴爱既离染又灭尽,故说为‘离欲’及‘灭’。又由于依此而有对渴爱的舍等,且其中并无任何对欲乐等的依着,故说为舍、遣离、解脱、无依着。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha attho. Tassāyeva taṇhāyāti tassā ‘‘ponobbhavikā’’ti vatvā kāmataṇhādivasena vibhattataṇhāya. Virāgo vuccati maggo. ‘‘Virāgā vimuccatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.245; saṃ. ni. 3.12, 59) hi vuttaṃ. Virāgena nirodho virāganirodho, anusayasamugghātato aseso virāganirodho asesavirāganirodho. Atha vā virāgoti pahānaṃ vuccati, tasmā anusayasamugghātato aseso virāgo aseso nirodhoti evampettha yojanā daṭṭhabbā, atthato pana sabbāneva etāni nibbānassa vevacanāni. Paramatthato hi dukkhanirodho ariyasaccanti nibbānaṃ vuccati. Yasmā pana taṃ āgamma taṇhā virajjati ceva nirujjhati ca, tasmā ‘‘virāgo’’ti ca ‘‘nirodho’’ti ca vuccati. Yasmā ca tadeva āgamma tassā cāgādayo honti, kāmaguṇālayādīsu cettha ekopi ālayo natthi, tasmā cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayoti vuccati.
今为开示导至苦灭之道圣谛,世尊说:‘诸比丘,此是导至苦灭之道’等。由于此圣谛以所缘之力而趋向苦灭、面对于彼,且是证得苦灭之道,故称为‘导至苦灭之道’。此处其余如前所说。然而,这些苦等之谛相为何?即:当以智慧之眼审察时,它们不如幻术般颠倒,不如阳焰般欺诳,不如外道所执之我般具有不可得之自性;反之,以逼迫、生起、寂静、出离的方式,具有真实不颠倒的实相,故为圣智之境。应知此真实不颠倒的实相即是谛相,犹如火的特征、世间法性一般。在此,火的特征即暖热。彼在任何薪柴等所依变化时,从不欺诳、颠倒或虚妄。应知‘有生法、有老法、有死法’(《增支部》5.57)等所说之生等为世间法性。‘某些畜生横向生长,人类纵向生长,达到生长极限后不再增长等,亦是世间法性。’显示巴利原文
Idāni dukkhanirodhagāminipaṭipadāariyasaccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagāminī’’tiādimāha. Yasmā panetaṃ ariyasaccaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati ārammaṇavasaena tadabhimukhabhūtattā, paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā, tasmā ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti vuccati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Ko pana nesaṃ dukkhādīnaṃ saccaṭṭhoti? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhiyamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīciva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ attā viya anupalabbhasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanappabhavasantiniyyānappakārena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hotiyeva, esa aggilakkhaṇaṃ viya lokapakati viya ca tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvo saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Ettha ca aggilakkhaṇaṃ nāma uṇhattaṃ. Tañhi katthaci kaṭṭhādiupādānabhede visaṃvādakaṃ viparītaṃ abhūtaṃ vā kadācipi na hoti, ‘‘jātidhammā jarādhammā, atho maraṇadhammino’’ti (a. ni. 5.57) evaṃ vuttajātiādikā lokapakatīti veditabbā. ‘‘Ekaccānaṃ tiracchānānaṃ tiriyaṃ dīghatā, manussādīnaṃ uddhaṃ dīghatā, vuddhiniṭṭhappattānaṃ puna avaḍḍhananti evamādikā ca lokapakatī’’ti vadanti.
离彼(爱)则无苦从他处生,彼亦不离彼而有;
由苦因的必然性,故贪爱是谛。
除涅槃外,别无寂静;彼寂静亦非离彼而有;
由寂静性的必然,故知此是谛。
除道之外,别无出离;此道亦非不能出离;
因其具有真实的出离性,故被称为谛。
如此,于四者中,以真实、无颠倒的实相,
诸智者称,苦等之中各有谛义。
显示巴利原文 Nābādhakaṃ yato dukkhaṃ, dukkhā aññaṃ na bādhakaṃ; Bādhakattaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Taṃ vinā nāññato dukkhaṃ, na hoti na ca taṃ tato; Dukkhahetuniyāmena, iti saccaṃ visattikā. Nāññā nibbānato santi, santaṃ na ca na taṃ yato; Santabhāvaniyāmena, tato saccamidaṃ mataṃ. Maggā aññaṃ na niyyānaṃ, aniyyāno na cāpi so; Tacchaniyyānabhāvattā, iti so saccasammato. Iti tacchāvipallāsa-bhūtabhāvaṃ catūsupi; Dukkhādīsvavisesena, saccaṭṭhaṃ āhu paṇḍitāti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 189);
15 “前未曾闻”:即在此之前,对“此是苦”等四谛法未曾闻、前所未闻。“眼”等皆是智的异名。在此,智依现见义,如眼,故名眼;依了知义,故名智;依遍知义,故名慧;依通达义,故名明;依破除覆蔽谛的愚痴黑暗、照亮义,故名光。当知,这是于四谛中,世间与出世间混合而说。显示巴利原文
15.Pubbe ananussutesūti ito pubbe ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā na anussutesu assutapubbesu catusaccadhammesu. Cakkhuntiādīni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇameva hettha paccakkhato dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu viyāti cakkhu, ñāṇaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pakārato jānanaṭṭhena paññā, paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, saccappaṭicchādakassa mohandhakārassa vidhamanato obhāsanaṭṭhena ālokoti vuttaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ catūsu saccesu lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ.
16 “Yāvakīvañca”意为那段时间。“Tiparivaṭṭaṃ”即由谛智、应作智、已作智三种转所构成的三转。因为依谛智等而有三种转,故智见被称为三转。其中,对四圣谛——“此是苦圣谛,此是苦集圣谛”——如实了知的智慧,即是谛智。对它们——“应遍知、应断、应证、应修”——了知应作之事的智慧,即是应作智。了知“已遍知、已断、已证、已修”这一已作之事的智慧,即是已作智。“Dvādasākāraṃ”指每一谛各有三种行相,共十二行相。“Ñāṇadassanaṃ”即依此三转、十二行相而生起的智见。显示巴利原文
16.Yāvakīvañcāti yattakaṃ kālaṃ. Tiparivaṭṭanti saccañāṇakiccañāṇakatañāṇasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ parivaṭṭānaṃ vasena tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Saccañāṇādivasena hi tayo parivaṭṭā etassāti tiparivaṭṭanti vuccati ñāṇadassanaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ, idaṃ dukkhasamudaya’’nti evaṃ catūsu saccesu yathābhūtañāṇaṃ saccañāṇaṃ nāma. Tesuyeva ‘‘pariññeyyaṃ pahātabbaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ bhāvetabba’’nti evaṃ kattabbakiccajānanañāṇaṃ kiccañāṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Pariññātaṃ pahīnaṃ sacchikataṃ bhāvita’’nti evaṃ tassa katabhāvajānanañāṇaṃ katañāṇaṃ nāma. Dvādasākāranti tesaṃyeva ekekasmiṃ sacce tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena dvādasākāraṃ. Ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ tiparivaṭṭānaṃ dvādasannaṃ ākārānaṃ vasena uppannañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ.
「无上正等觉」指无有更上、最胜、正确且自觉的菩提;或指殊胜、美妙的菩提。此处「菩提」意指世尊的阿罗汉道。声闻的阿罗汉道是否可称为无上菩提?不能。为何?因为它不能成就一切功德。对于某些声闻,阿罗汉道仅成就阿罗汉果;对于某些,成就三明;对于某些,成就六神通;对于某些,成就四无碍解;对于某些,成就声闻波罗蜜智。独觉佛也仅成就独觉菩提智;然而对于佛陀,则成就一切功德,犹如灌顶令国王获得一切世间自在。因此,其余任何人的菩提皆非无上菩提。「已正觉」即已证知:我已正觉,已证得、已通达而住——如此宣称。「而且我生起了智与见」指能如实照见所证功德的省察智在我中生起。「我的解脱不动摇」指我的阿罗汉果解脱是不动摇的,不被敌对法所动摇——如此之智生起。其中,不动摇性当从两种角度了知:依名为道的因,以及依所缘。因为四道所断的烦恼不再回转,故从因上亦不动摇;因为以不动法涅槃为所缘而转起,故从所缘上亦不动摇,世间等至并非以不动为所缘。最后生即是最终。今无后有,即现在不再有任何后有。显示巴利原文
Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ sammā sāmañca bodhiṃ. Atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhiṃ. Bodhīti ca bhagavato arahattamaggo idhādhippeto. Sāvakānaṃ arahattamaggo anuttarā bodhi hoti, na hotīti? Na hoti. Kasmā? Asabbaguṇadāyakattā. Tesañhi kassaci arahattamaggo arahattaphalameva deti, kassaci tisso vijjā, kassaci cha abhiññā, kassaci catasso paṭisambhidā, kassaci sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Paccekabuddhānampi paccekabodhiñāṇameva deti, buddhānaṃ pana sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ. Tasmā aññassa kassacipi anuttarā bodhi na hotīti. Abhisambuddhoti paccaññāsinti abhisambuddho ahaṃ patto paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitoti evaṃ paṭijāniṃ. Ñāṇañca pana me dassanaṃ udapādīti adhigataguṇānaṃ yāthāvato dassanasamatthaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇañca pana me udapādi. Akuppā me vimuttīti ayaṃ mayhaṃ arahattaphalavimutti akuppā paṭipakkhehi na kopetabbāti evaṃ ñāṇaṃ udapādi. Tattha dvīhākārehi akuppatā veditabbā maggasaṅkhātakāraṇato ca ārammaṇato ca. Sā hi catūhi maggehi samucchinnakilesānaṃ puna anivattanatāya kāraṇatopi akuppā, akuppadhammaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattatāya ārammaṇatopi akuppā anākuppārammaṇānaṃ lokiyasamāpattīnaṃ tadabhāvato. Antimāti pacchimā. Natthi dāni punabbhavoti idāni puna añño bhavo nāma natthīti.
「在此记说中」指在此无偈颂之经中。因为无偈颂之经包含问答,故称为「记说」。「正在诵说时」即正在诵念、宣说之时。「离尘」指因远离堕恶趣的贪欲等尘而离尘。「离垢」指因断尽一切见与疑之垢而离垢。或者,因脱离初道所断之烦恼尘而称离尘,因断除五种恶戒之垢而称离垢。「法眼」:在《梵寿经》中说下三道,在《小罗睺罗教诫经》中说漏尽,而此处意指入流道。于四圣谛法中,以见他们之义为眼,故称法眼;或于下三道法中,以一道即入流道为眼,故称法眼;或因生起止观之法,或因成为戒等种种法蕴,故为法所成之眼,亦称法眼。为示其生起之行相,而说「凡任何集起之法,彼一切皆灭尽之法」。难道道智不是以无为法为所缘,而非以有为法为所缘吗?确实如此,但由于它以涅槃为所缘,并通过作用门通达一切有为,以不痴通达门而通达,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasminti imasmiṃ niggāthake sutte. Niggāthakañhi suttaṃ pucchāvissajjanasahitaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇa’’nti vuccati. Bhaññamāneti bhaṇiyamāne, desiyamāneti attho. Virajanti apāyagamanīyarāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena virajaṃ. Vītamalanti anavasesadiṭṭhivicikicchāmalāpagamena vītamalaṃ . Paṭhamamaggavajjhakilesarajābhāvena vā virajaṃ, pañcavidhadussīlyamalāpagamena vītamalaṃ. Dhammacakkhunti brahmāyusutte (ma. ni. 2.383 ādayo) heṭṭhimā tayo maggā vuttā, cūḷarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 3.416 ādayo) āsavakkhayo, idha pana sotāpattimaggo adhippeto. Catusaccasaṅkhātesu dhammesu tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhena cakkhūti dhammacakkhu, heṭṭhimesu vā tīsu maggadhammesu ekaṃ sotāpattimaggasaṅkhātaṃ cakkhūti dhammacakkhu, samathavipassanādhammanibbattatāya sīlāditividhadhammakkhandhabhūtatāya vā dhammamayaṃ cakkhūtipi dhammacakkhu, tassa uppattiākāradassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti āha. Nanu ca maggañāṇaṃ asaṅkhatadhammārammaṇaṃ, na saṅkhatadhammārammaṇanti? Saccametaṃ, yasmā taṃ nirodhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccavasena sabbasaṅkhataṃ asammohappaṭivedhavasena paṭivijjhantaṃ uppajjati, tasmā tathā vuttaṃ.
17 17.「法轮」指证悟智与宣说智,以转起之义为轮,故称法轮。因为世尊坐于菩提树下时,对四圣谛生起的十二行相证悟智,以及坐于仙人堕处时,以十二行相宣说圣谛而转起的宣说智,两者皆名法轮。此二者实为十力尊胸中转起之智。世尊以此宣说开示此二者,故称转法轮。此法轮,直至具寿阿若憍陈如与十八梵天众一同住立于须陀洹果为止,世尊仍在转,因转起之事尚未完成。当住立时,则称已转,因为从迦叶正等觉教法隐没以来,直至佛陀出世,此段期间未曾转起,而今已转。依此而说:「世尊转法轮时,地居诸天发声传告……」其中,「地居」指住于地面之诸天。「发声传告」指一时同发善哉,并说「此是世尊……」等语而传告。「光明」指依一切知智威力而转起的心、时节所生光明。此光明当时超越诸天威光而照耀。「尊者憍陈如确已了知」此感兴语的音声亦遍满一万世界而住立。因为于世尊转法轮之始与终,皆生起了极为殊胜的喜与悦。显示巴利原文
17.Dhammacakketi paṭivedhañāṇañceva desanāñāṇañca pavattanaṭṭhena cakkanti dhammacakkaṃ. Bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa hi catūsu saccesu uppannaṃ dvādasākāraṃ paṭivedhañāṇampi, isipatane nisinnassa dvādasākārāya saccadesanāya pavattakaṃ desanāñāṇampi dhammacakkaṃ nāma. Ubhayampi hetaṃ dasabalassa ure pavattañāṇameva. Tadubhayaṃ imāya desanāya pakāsentena bhagavatā dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ nāma. Taṃ panetaṃ dhammacakkaṃ yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññatthero aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāti, tāva bhagavā pavatteti nāma pavattanakiccassa aniṭṭhitattā. Patiṭṭhite pavattitaṃ nāma kassapasammāsambuddhassa sāsanantaradhānato paṭṭhāya yāva buddhuppādo, ettakaṃ kālaṃ appavattapubbassa pavattitattā. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pavattite ca pana bhagavatā dhammacakke bhummā devā saddamanussāvesu’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bhummāti bhūmaṭṭhakadevatā. Saddamanussāvesunti ekappahāreneva sādhukāraṃ datvā ‘‘etaṃ bhagavatā’’tiādīni vadantā anussāvayiṃsu. Obhāsoti sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvena pavatto cittapaccayautusamuṭṭhāno obhāso. So hi tadā devānaṃ devānubhāvaṃ atikkamitvā virocittha. Aññāsi vata bho koṇḍaññoti imassapi udānassa udāharaṇaghoso dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharitvā aṭṭhāsi. Bhagavato hi dhammacakkappavattanassa ārambhe viya parisamāpanepi ativiya uḷāratamaṃ pītisomanassaṃ udapādi.
18 由已见圣谛法,故称“见法者”。此理也适用于其他诸词。这里,“见”除了智见之外,尚有其他含义;为遮止彼义,故说“得法者”。而“得”除了智得,还有其他含义;为简别彼义,故说“了知法者”。然而,了知法性亦有部分了知的情形;为显示无余了知,故说“彻入法者”,以此表明他正是现观圣谛。因为道智以一次现观便成就遍知等作用,即是无余地、全面地彻入四圣谛法。犹如充满怖畏的旷野,十六事及八事所摄的疑惑已被他度越,故为“度疑者”。于转起等中,“是这样呢,还是不是这样呢”这般转起的犹豫已灭尽、已断除,故为“离犹豫者”。已得无畏:由于已断除令人怯懦的恶法,并善安住于其对立面的戒等功德中,故已获得、已证得无畏、明敏。此无畏善安住于何处?说“于大师的教法中”。因为自己现量证得,故不依从他人,不因信受他人而转起,没有他人可被依从,故为“不依他者”。显示巴利原文
18. Diṭṭho ariyasaccadhammo etenāti diṭṭhadhammo. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Ettha ca dassanaṃ nāma ñāṇadassanato aññampi atthīti taṃnivattanatthaṃ ‘‘pattadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Patti ca ñāṇasampattito aññāpi vijjatīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘viditadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā panesā viditadhammatā ekadesatopi hotīti nippadesato viditabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenassa saccābhisambodhiṃyeva dīpeti. Maggañāṇañhi ekābhisamayavasena pariññādikiccaṃ sādhentaṃ nippadesena catusaccadhammaṃ samantato ogāḷhaṃ nāma hoti. Sappaṭibhayakantārasadisā soḷasavatthukā aṭṭhavatthukā ca tiṇṇā vicikicchā anenāti tiṇṇavicikiccho. Pavattiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ nukho na nukho’’ti evaṃ pavattikā vigatā samucchinnā kathaṃkathā assāti vigatakathaṃkatho. Vesārajjappattoti sārajjakarānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ pahīnattā tappaṭipakkhesu ca sīlādīsu guṇesu suppatiṭṭhitattā visāradabhāvaṃ veyyattiyaṃ patto adhigato. Svāyaṃ vesārajjappattisuppatiṭṭhitabhāvo katthāti āha ‘‘satthusāsane’’ti. Attanā paccakkhato adhigatattā na paraṃ pacceti, parassa saddhāya ettha nappavattati, na tassa paro paccetabbo atthīti aparappaccayo.
“愿我得”即“愿我得到”,是乞求语。“来”是对被乞求者表示允准出家、受具足戒之词,因此意为:“来,如你所乞求地,接受出家与具足戒的殊胜吧。”“iti”一词表示他获得“善来比丘”具足戒的因缘之语到此结束,因为他的比丘身份即以此语为终。所以说:“以世尊‘来,比丘’之语而成就,这即是那位尊者的善来比丘具足戒。”“修习梵行吧”,即证得上三道所摄的梵行。为了什么目的?为了正确地作苦的终结。此处也应连接“说了”一词。以“九俱胝千”等(《清净道论》1.20;《无碍解道注》1.1.37)所说的种种分类,受持并奉行数千律仪防护,由此成为最上、最胜的成就,故为“具足戒”。显示巴利原文
Labheyyāhanti labheyyaṃ ahaṃ, āyācanavacanametaṃ. Ehīti āyācitānaṃ pabbajjūpasampadānaṃ anumatabhāvappakāsanavacanaṃ, tasmā ehi sampaṭicchāhi yathāyācitaṃ pabbajjūpasampadavisesanti attho. Iti-saddo tassa ehibhikkhūpasampadāpaṭilābhanimittavacanapariyosānadassano. Tadavasāno hi tassa bhikkhubhāvo. Tenevāha ‘‘ehi bhikkhūti bhagavato vacanena abhinipphannā sāva tassa āyasmato ehibhikkhūpasampadā ahosī’’ti. Cara brahmacariyanti uparimaggattayasaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyaṃ samadhigaccha. Kimatthaṃ? Sammā dukkhassa antakiriyāya. Idhāpi ‘‘avocā’’ti sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Nava koṭisahassānī’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.20; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37) vuttappabhedānaṃ anekasahassānaṃ saṃvaravinayānaṃ samādiyitvā vattanena uparibhūtā aggabhūtā sampadāti upasampadā.
19 “持出食者”指持出食物之人,意思是:比丘们从村里取出食物后所给的食物。因为世尊如同照料幼童一般护持那些比丘,从修行之日起,即使为了乞食也不进入村庄,只住在寺院内。显示巴利原文
19.Nīhārabhattoti nīhaṭabhatto, gāmato bhikkhaṃ nīharitvā bhikkhūhi dinnabhattoti attho . Bhagavā hi daharakumārake viya te bhikkhū pariharanto pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya piṇḍapātatthāyapi gāmaṃ apavisitvā antovihāreyeva vasi.
无我相经义注显示巴利原文
Anattalakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
20 “告知”指:于阿沙荼月满月之日,从转法轮开始,渐次令以阿若憍陈如为首的五百众弟子安住于须陀洹果后,心中思惟“现在我将为他们宣说漏尽之法”,遂于该半月的第五日召集告知。
“无我”,即是不自在义、无主义、空义、遮破我义这四种含义。其中,如“愿已生起的色不要安住;已安住者不要衰老;已衰老者不要坏灭;不要被生灭所恼害”——于此之中,没有任何人的自在力存在,这便是它的不自在义。没有所有者存在,即是无主义。由于没有居住者、作者、受者、住持者,故为空,是空义。没有他人所施设的我的自性,便是遮破我义。
现在,为了阐明无我性本身,而说“诸比丘,若此色是我……”等。其中,“若是我”意指:若是作者、受者、自主者这样的我。若如此,则色导致疾病便不合理。此处虽然看似以“诸比丘,因为色是无我,所以色导致疾病”显示了由色的无我性而显苦性,但实质上是以“因为色导致疾病,所以是无我”——这一可致病性的明显事实,显示了色没有我之坚实,并由此显示出“于色中,不能得其愿‘愿我的色如是,愿我的色不如是’”,即于色中没有任何人的主宰力,及其不自在性。显示巴利原文
20.Āmantesīti āsāḷhīpuṇṇamadivase dhammacakkappavattanato paṭṭhāya anukkamena sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhite aññāsikoṇḍaññappamukhe pañcavaggiye ‘‘idāni tesaṃ āsavakkhayāya dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti pañcamiyā pakkhassa āmantesi. Anattāti avasavattanaṭṭhena asāmikaṭṭhena suññataṭṭhena attapaṭikkhepaṭṭhenāti evaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi anattā. Tattha ‘‘uppannaṃ rūpaṃ ṭhitiṃ mā pāpuṇātu, ṭhānappattaṃ mā jīratu, jarappattaṃ mā bhijjatu, udayabbayehi mā kilamayatū’’ti na ettha kassaci vasībhāvo atthi, svāyamassa avasavattanaṭṭho. Sāmibhūtassa kassaci abhāvo asāmikaṭṭho. Nivāsīkārakavedakaadhiṭṭhāyakavirahena tato suññatā suññataṭṭho. Paraparikappitaattasabhāvābhāvo eva attapaṭikkhepaṭṭho. Idāni anattataṃyeva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca hidaṃ bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha attā abhavissāti kārako vedako sayaṃvasīti evaṃbhūto attā abhavissāti adhippāyo. Evañhi sati rūpassa ābādhāya saṃvattanaṃ ayujjamānakaṃ siyā. Kāmañcettha ‘‘yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ anattā, tasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattatī’’ti rūpassa anattatāya dukkhatā vibhāvitā viya dissati, tathāpi ‘‘yasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattati, tasmā anattā’’ti pākaṭāya sābādhatāya rūpassa attasārābhāvo vibhāvito, tato eva ca ‘‘na ca labbhati rūpe ‘evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’ti’’ rūpe kassaci anissaratā tassa ca avasavattanākāro dassito. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
21 “诸比丘,你们对此怎么想?”这一句为何而发起?应知:至此为止,只宣说了无我相,尚未说无常相与苦相。现在,为了显示后二者,并将三相综合显示,才开始这一段。
“尊者,是无常”,即:尊者,因为存在后便不存在,故是无常。因为先前并不存在,由诸缘和合而生起后,又归于坏灭而不存在,故为非常,即是无常,意为不坚固。或者,也因为有生灭性、暂时性、变易终极性、遮破常性——以这些理由而为无常。其中,由于刹那刹那地生灭,故有生灭性。由于是刹那性,故有暂时性。由于有变异性,故有变易终极性。因为色经历生起等变化而变异,最终达到灭尽。没有常的自性,即是遮破常。诸法确实无常,因此,以其自身的无常性,从意义上便遮破了常性。显示巴利原文
21.Taṃ kiṃmaññatha bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ? Ettakena ṭhānena anattalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, na aniccadukkhalakkhaṇāni, idāni tāni dassetvā samodhānetvā tīṇipi lakkhaṇāni dassetuṃ idamāraddhanti veditabbaṃ. Aniccaṃ bhanteti bhante yasmā hutvā na hoti, tasmā aniccaṃ. Yasmā pubbe asantaṃ paccayasamavāyena hutvā uppajjitvā puna bhaṅgupagamanena na hoti, tasmā na niccanti aniccaṃ, addhuvanti adhippāyo. Atha vā uppādavayavantatāya tāvakālikatāya vipariṇāmakoṭiyā niccappaṭikkhepatoti imehipi kāraṇehi aniccaṃ. Ettha khaṇe khaṇe uppajjanavasena nirujjhanavasena ca pavattanato uppādavayavantatā. Taṅkhaṇikatāya tāvakālikatā. Vipariṇāmavantatāya vipariṇāmakoṭi. Rūpañhi uppādādivikārāpajjanena vipariṇāmantaṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇāti. Niccasabhāvābhāvo eva niccapaṭikkhepo. Aniccā hi dhammā, teneva attano aniccabhāvena atthato niccataṃ paṭikkhipanti nāma.
“苦”,即“压迫”之义。由于生、老、灭,色法无间断地遭受逼迫,以压迫的方式而成为苦。或者,以煎熬义、苦义、苦所依义、排斥乐义这四种理由,说其为苦。其中,煎熬是指以苦苦等方式折磨、烧灼。正是因此,它难以忍受,故有苦义。由于是三种苦与轮回苦的所依,故有苦所依义。乐的自性不存在,即是排斥乐。
“变坏法”,指因老与死而具有变坏的性质。
“是否合理?”即“是否恰当?”。“那”指如此无常、苦、变坏法之色。
“这是我的”,是依渴爱之执,源于我所执。“我是这个”,是依慢之执,源于我执。“这是我的我”,是依见之执,源于对自身的颠倒执取。其中,渴爱执应依一百零八种渴爱行相来理解,慢执应依九种慢来理解,见执应依六十二种邪见来理解。正是依此三种渴爱、慢、见的执取,而说“那样观察是否合理?”显示巴利原文
Dukkhaṃ bhanteti bhante paṭipīḷanākārena dukkhaṃ. Uppādajarābhaṅgavasena hi rūpassa nirantaraṃ bādhati, paṭipīḷanākārenassa dukkhatā. Atha vā santāpaṭṭhena dukkhamaṭṭhena dukkhavatthukaṭṭhena sukhapaṭikkhepaṭṭhena cāti catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhaṃ. Ettha ca santāpo nāma dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Tato evassa dussahatāya dukkhamatā. Tissannaṃ dukkhatānaṃ saṃsāradukkhassa ca adhiṭṭhānatāya dukkhavatthukatā. Sukhasabhāvābhāvo eva sukhapaṭikkhepo. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya maraṇena ca vipariṇāmasabhāvaṃ. Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu. Tanti evaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ rūpaṃ. Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho mamaṅkārabhāvato. Esohamasmīti mānagāho ahaṅkārabhāvato. Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho attabhāvavipallāsaggāhato. Taṇhāgāho cettha aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritavasena, mānagāho navavidhamānavasena, diṭṭhigāho dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhivasena veditabbo. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhigāhānaṃ vasena yuttaṃ nu taṃ samanupassitunti vuttaṃ hoti.
如此,世尊以无常与苦为门,开显无我相。世尊有时以无常开示无我,有时以苦开示无我,有时兼用二者而开示。正如《六六经》中所说:“若有人说‘眼是我’,那是不成立的,因为眼的生起与灭去皆可知见。凡是生起与灭去皆可知见者,便会生起‘我的我生起、灭去’之想,因此那是不成立的。若有人说‘眼是我’,由此可知眼是无我。”这是以无常开示无我。在《无我相经》中:“比丘们,若此色是我……愿我这色不如此。”这是以苦开示无我。在《阿拉汉经》中:“比丘们,色是无常,凡无常者是苦,凡苦者是无我,凡无我者,应以正慧如实观察:‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的我。’”这是兼用二者开示无我。何以故?因为无常与苦是明显的,而无我是不明显的。当器皿等物破碎时,人们会说“啊,无常”,却无人会说“啊,无我”。当身上生疮或被刺扎伤时,人们会说“啊,苦”,却无人会说“啊,无我”。何以故?因为此无我相是不明显的、难见的、难以说明的。如萨罗邦伽等外道师尚且未曾见到,何况能加以说明?因此,世尊以无常、苦或二者来开示无我。在此三转法轮显示巴利原文
Iti bhagavā aniccadukkhavasena anattalakkhaṇaṃyeva dassesi. Bhagavā hi katthaci aniccavasena anattataṃ dasseti, katthaci dukkhavasena, katthaci ubhayavasena. Tathā hi ‘‘cakkhu attāti yo vadeyya, taṃ na upapajjati, cakkhussa uppādopi vayopi paññāyati. Yassa kho pana uppādopi vayopi paññāyati, ‘attā me uppajjati ceva veti cā’ti iccassa evamāgataṃ hoti, tasmā taṃ na upapajjati. ‘Cakkhu attā’ti yo vadeyya, iti cakkhu anattā’’ti imasmiñca chachakkasutte (ma. ni. 3.422) aniccavasena anattataṃ dassesi. ‘‘Rūpañca hidaṃ, bhikkhave, attā abhavissa…pe… evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’’ti imasmiṃyeva anattalakkhaṇasutte dukkhavasena anattataṃ dassesi. ‘‘Rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā, yadanattā, taṃ ‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na me so attā’ti evametaṃ yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya daṭṭhabba’’nti imasmiṃ arahantasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.76-77) ubhayavasena anattataṃ dassesi. Kasmā? Aniccaṃ dukkhañca pākaṭaṃ, anattā apākaṭaṃ. Paribhogabhājanādīsu hi bhinnesu ‘‘aho anicca’’nti vadanti, ‘‘aho anattā’’ti pana vattā nāma natthi. Sarīre gaṇḍapiḷakāsu vā uṭṭhitāsu kaṇṭakena vā viddhā ‘‘aho dukkha’’nti vadanti, ‘‘aho anattā’’ti pana vattā nāma natthi. Kasmā? Idañhi anattalakkhaṇaṃ nāma avibhūtaṃ duddasaṃ duppaññāpanaṃ. Tathā hi sarabhaṅgādayopi satthāro nāddasaṃsu, kuto paññāpanā, tena naṃ bhagavā aniccavasena vā dukkhavasena vā ubhayavasena vā dassesi. Tayidaṃ imasmimpi teparivaṭṭe aniccadukkhavaseneva dassitaṃ. Vedanādīsupi eseva nayo.
22 “因此”即“所以”之意。其中,“ti”音与“ha”音是语气词,义为“因为这五蕴是无常、苦、无我,所以”。“任何”是指无余尽摄。其中,“凡”是以总相显示无确定,“任何”是从类别上区分后显示无确定。二者结合,则遍摄一切应依中性词表述之法——无论是过去、未来、现在,内、外,粗、细,劣、胜,远、近,少、多,还是任何形态者。故说“任何”为无余尽摄。如此,为避免对其他应依中性词表述者产生过度关联,也为了限定此处所指之义,而说“色”。由此二词,便对色作了无余的把握。接着,开始对色进行过去等分类,说“过去、未来、现在”等。意即:任何色,有些是过去,有些是未来等。对于受等其余蕴,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
22.Tasmātihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ. Ti-kāra ha-kārā nipātā, yasmā ime pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattā, tasmāti attho. Yaṃ kiñcīti anavasesapariyādānametaṃ. Yanti hi sāmaññena aniyamadassanaṃ, kiñcīti pakārato bhedaṃ āmasitvā aniyamadassanaṃ. Ubhayenapi atītaṃ vā…pe… santike vā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā yādisaṃ vā tādisaṃ vā napuṃsakaniddesārahaṃ sabbaṃ byāpetvā saṅgaṇhāti, tasmā anavasesapariyādānametaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti. Evañca sati aññesupi napuṃsakaniddesārahesu pasaṅgaṃ disvā tattha adhippetatthaṃ adhicca pavattanato atippasaṅgassa niyamanatthaṃ ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ padadvayenapi rūpassa asesapariggaho kato hoti. Athassa atītādivibhāgaṃ ārabhati ‘‘atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinā. Tañhi kiñci atītaṃ kiñci anāgatādibhedanti. Esa nayo vedanādīsupi.
其中,色首先依时段、相续、时节、刹那四种方式而得过去、未来、现在之名。依时段而言:某一有情的某一生存中,结生之前为过去,死心之后为未来,两者之间为现在。依相续而言:由同类时节所生、同类食所生之色,依前后次第相续而转起者为现在;在此之前,由异类时节、异类食所生者为过去;在此之后者为未来。心生之色:同一路心、同一速行、同一等至所生者为现在;在此之前为过去;在此之后为未来。业生色虽无各自依相续的过去等分别,但应依他们时节生、食生、心生之色作为其依处,来理解它的过去等状态。依时节而言:在某一须臾、上午、下午、夜间、白昼等时节中,依相续而转起的各各时节所系之色,名为现在;在此之前为过去;在此之后为未来。依刹那而言:摄生、住、灭三刹那者为现在;在此之前为过去;在此之后为未来。此中唯此刹那之说为究竟说,其余诸说为方便说。显示巴利原文
Tattha rūpaṃ tāva addhāsantatisamayakhaṇavasena catudhā atītaṃ nāma hoti, tathā anāgatapaccuppannaṃ. Tattha addhāvasena tāva ekassa ekasmiṃ bhave paṭisandhito pubbe atītaṃ, cutito uddhamanāgataṃ, ubhinnamantare paccuppannaṃ. Santativasena sabhāgekautusamuṭṭhānaekāhārasamauṭṭhānañca pubbāpariyavasena vattamānampi paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe visabhāgautuāhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Cittajaṃ ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattisamuṭṭhānaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Kammasamuṭṭhānassa pāṭiyekkaṃ santativasena atītādibhedo natthi. Tesaṃyeva pana utuāhāracittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ upatthambhakavasena tassa atītādibhāvo veditabbo. Samayavasena ekamuhuttapubbaṇhasāyanharattidivādīsu samayesu santānavasena pavattamānaṃ taṃtaṃsamayavantaṃ rūpaṃ paccuppannaṃ nāma, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ. Khaṇavasena uppādādikkhaṇattayapariyāpannaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tato pubbe atītaṃ, pacchā anāgataṃ, idamevettha nippariyāyaṃ, sesā pariyāyakathā.
“内或外”:眼等五种色,依自身相续而转起,故为内;其余色相对于彼则为外,故为外。此外,当知:属于自相续者为内,属于他人相续者为外。“粗或细”:眼等九种色与除水界外的三界,这十二种色可依撞击而被执取,故为粗;其余色与此相反,故为细。“劣或胜”:此处,劣胜可从譬喻与非譬喻两方面了知。就譬喻而言,相对于阿迦尼吒天之色,善见天之色为劣;而此善见天之色相对于善现天之色则为胜。如此层层比对,乃至地狱众生之色,应知为譬喻上的劣胜。若依非譬喻而言,凡作为所缘而生起不善异熟识的色,因不可爱故为劣;凡作为所缘而生起善异熟识的色,因可爱故为胜。正如不善异熟自身唯是不可爱,唯于不可爱中生起,非于可爱中;同样,善异熟自身唯是可爱,亦唯于可爱中生起,非于不可爱中。“远或近”:凡细色,因难以通达之性故为远;其余色因易于通达之性故为近。此外,亦应依处所相对而了知远近。“彼一切”:即上述依过去等句分别的这一切色。“应以正慧观见”:即应以与毗婆舍那俱行的道慧观见。显示巴利原文
Ajjhattaṃvā bahiddhā vāti cakkhādipañcavidhaṃ rūpaṃ attabhāvaṃ adhikicca pavattattā ajjhattaṃ, sesaṃ tato bāhirattā bahiddhā. Apica niyakajjhattampi idha ajjhattaṃ, parapuggalikampi ca bahiddhāti veditabbaṃ. Oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vāti cakkhādīni nava, āpodhātuvajjā tisso dhātuyo cāti dvādasavidhaṃ rūpaṃ ghaṭṭanavasena gahetabbato oḷārikaṃ, sesaṃ tato viparītattā sukhumaṃ. Hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vāti ettha hīnapaṇītabhāvo pariyāyato nippariyāyato ca. Tattha akaniṭṭhānaṃ rūpato sudassīnaṃ rūpaṃ hīnaṃ, tadeva sudassānaṃ rūpato paṇītaṃ. Evaṃ yāva narakasattānaṃ rūpaṃ, tāva pariyāyato hīnapaṇītatā veditabbā. Nippariyāyato pana yaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā akusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ hīnaṃ aniṭṭhabhāvato. Yaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ katvā kusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ paṇītaṃ iṭṭhabhāvato. Yathā hi akusalavipāko sayaṃ aniṭṭho aniṭṭhe eva uppajjati, na iṭṭhe, evaṃ kusalavipākopi sayaṃ iṭṭho iṭṭheyeva uppajjati, na aniṭṭhe. Yaṃ dūre santike vāti yaṃ sukhumaṃ, tadeva duppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā dūre, itaraṃ suppaṭivijjhasabhāvattā santike. Apicettha okāsatopi upādāyupādāya dūrasantikatā veditabbā. Taṃ sabbanti taṃ atītādīhi padehi visuṃ niddiṭṭhaṃ sabbaṃ rūpaṃ. Sammappaññāya daṭṭhabbanti sahavipassanāya maggapaññāya daṭṭhabbaṃ.
于“任何受”等句中,应知受的过去、未来、现在性,依相续与依刹那而安立。其中,依相续而言:同一心路、同一速行、同一等至所摄,且与同一类所缘相应而转起者,如观佛相或听法的人在一日中所转起的与信等相应之受,即为现在;此前者为过去,此后者为未来。依刹那而言:三刹那所摄者为现在;此前者为过去,此后者为未来。内外的区分,当依自相续而了知。粗细的区分,应依《分别论》所说“不善受粗,善、无记受细”等方法,从种类、自性、补特伽罗、世间与出世间方面而了知。先就种类而言:不善受,因为有罪过的业因、烦恼热恼的自性及不寂静的转起,故比善受为粗;因为具有恚害、有勤策、有异熟、烦恼热恼的自性及有罪过,故比异熟无记受为粗;因为具有异熟、烦恼热恼的自性、有损害及有罪过,故比唯作无记受为粗。而善受与无记受,依相反的道理,比不善受为细。善与不善二受,因为有恚害、有勤策、有异熟,各各比二种无记受为粗;二种无记受依相反的道理,比彼二受为细。如是,当知先就种类而言的粗细。显示巴利原文
Yākāci vedanātiādīsu pana santativasena ca khaṇavasena ca vedanāya atītānāgatapaccuppannabhāvo veditabbo. Tattha (visuddhi. 2.497 ādayo) santativasena ekavīthiekajavanaekasamāpattipariyāpannā ekavidhavisayasamāyogappavattā ca divasampi buddharūpaṃ passantassa dhammaṃ suṇantassa pavattasaddhādisahitavedanā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Khaṇavasena khaṇattayapariyāpannā paccuppannā, tato pubbe atītā, pacchā anāgatā. Ajjhattabahiddhābhedo niyakajjhattavasena veditabbo. Oḷārikasukhumabhedo ‘‘akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā vedanā sukhumā’’tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 11) vuttena jātisabhāvapuggalalokiyalokuttaravasena veditabbo. Jātivasena tāva akusalavedanā sāvajjakiriyahetuto kilesasantāpasabhāvato ca avūpasantavuttīti kusalavedanāya oḷārikā, sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato kilesasantāpasabhāvato sāvajjato ca vipākābyākatāya oḷārikā, savipākato kilesasantāpasabhāvato sabyāpajjato sāvajjato ca kiriyābyākatāya oḷārikā, kusalābyākatā pana vuttavipariyāyato akusalāya sukhumā. Dvepi kusalākusalavedanā sabyāpārato saussāhato savipākato ca yathāyogaṃ duvidhāyapi abyākatāya oḷārikā, vuttavipariyāyena duvidhāpi abyākatā tāhi sukhumā. Evaṃ tāva jātivasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
依自性而言:苦受因无味、有逼迫、可厌、能压伏,故比其他二受为粗;其他二受因适意、寂静、殊胜、可意、中庸,各别比苦受为细。而苦、乐二受,因有逼迫、能扰动、明显,故比不苦不乐受为粗;不苦不乐受依相反之理,比彼二受为细。如是,当知依自性而言的粗细。依补特伽罗而言:未得定者之受,因于种种所缘散乱,故比得定者之受为粗;依相反之理,另一受为细。如是,当知依补特伽罗而言的粗细。依世间出世间而言:有漏受为世间。彼因是诸漏生起之因、是暴流所摄、是轭所摄、是系缚所摄、是盖所摄、是取所摄、是有杂染、与凡夫共通,故比无漏受为粗;无漏受依相反之理,比有漏受为细。如是,当知依世间出世间而言的粗细。显示巴利原文
Sabhāvavasena pana dukkhavedanā nirassādato savipphārato ubbejanīyato abhibhavanato ca itarāhi dvīhi oḷārikā, itarā pana dve sātato santato paṇītato manāpato majjhattato ca yathāyogaṃ dukkhāya sukhumā. Ubho pana sukhadukkhā savipphārato khobhakaraṇato pākaṭato ca adukkhamasukhāya oḷārikā, sā vuttavipariyāyena tadubhayato sukhumā. Evaṃ sabhāvavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Puggalavasena pana asamāpannassa vedanā nānārammaṇavikkhittabhāvato samāpannassa vedanāya oḷārikā, vipariyāyena itarā sukhumā. Evaṃ puggalavasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Lokiyalokuttaravasena pana sāsavā vedanā lokiyā. Sā āsavuppattihetuto oghaniyato yoganiyato ganthaniyato nīvaraṇiyato upādāniyato saṃkilesikato puthujjanasādhāraṇato ca anāsavāya oḷārikā, sā vipariyāyena sāsavāya sukhumā. Evaṃ lokiyalokuttaravasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.
在此,应避免从种类等方面产生混淆。与不善异熟身识相应的受,就种类而言虽是无记而说为细,但就自性等方面则说为粗。正如所说:“无记受细,苦受粗。未得定者之受粗,有漏受粗。”同样地,对于苦受、乐受等,依种类说为粗,依自性等说为细。因此,要了知受的粗细,应当避免种类等方面的混淆。正如:无记受依种类比善、不善受为细。在此,不应以“何为无记?是苦耶?是乐耶?是得定者?未得定者?是有漏?是无漏?”等方式执取自性等的分别。此理适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
Tattha jātiādivasena sambhedo pariharitabbo. Akusalavipākakāyaviññāṇasampayuttā hi vedanā jātivasena abyākatattā sukhumāpi samānā sabhāvādivasena oḷārikā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘abyākatā vedanā sukhumā, dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā. Asamāpannassa vedanā oḷārikā, sāsavā vedanā oḷārikā’’ti (vibha. 11). Yathā ca dukkhavedanā, evaṃ sukhādayopi jātivasena oḷārikā, sabhāvādivasena sukhumā honti. Tasmā yathā jātiādivasena sambhedo na hoti, tathā vedanānaṃ oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā. Seyyathidaṃ – abyākatā jātivasena kusalākusalāhi sukhumā. Na tattha ‘‘katamā abyākatā, kiṃ dukkhā, kiṃ sukhā, kiṃ samāpannassa, kiṃ asamāpannassa, kiṃ sāsavā, kiṃ anāsavā’’ti evaṃ sabhāvādibhedo parāmasitabbo. Esa nayo sabbattha.
再者,根据“应观待彼彼受而说受为粗或细”的说法,在不善受中,嗔俱之受犹如火烧自身所依,故比贪俱之受为粗;贪俱之受为细。在嗔俱之中,决定者为粗,不决定者为细。在决定者中,住劫者为粗,其余为细。在住劫者中,无行者为粗,有行者为细。在贪俱之中,与见相应者为粗,不与见相应者为细。在彼中,决定、住劫、无行者亦为粗,其余为细。总的来说,不善中感多异熟者为粗,感少异熟者为细;善中感少异熟者为粗,感多异熟者为细。显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya vedanā oḷārikā sukhumā daṭṭhabbā’’ti vacanato akusalādīsupi lobhasahagatāya dosasahagatavedanā aggi viya attano nissayadahanato oḷārikā, lobhasahagatā sukhumā. Dosasahagatāpi niyatā oḷārikā, aniyatā sukhumā. Niyatāpi kappaṭṭhitikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Kappaṭṭhitikāsupi asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Lobhasahagatā pana diṭṭhisampayuttā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Sāpi niyatā kappaṭṭhitikā asaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā, avisesena akusalā bahuvipākā oḷārikā, appavipākā sukhumā. Kusalā pana appavipākā oḷārikā, bahuvipākā sukhumā.
又,欲界善为粗,色界善为细,无色界善更为细,出世间善则更为细。在欲界善中,布施所成善为粗,戒所成善为细,修所成善更为细。在修所成善中,二因善为粗,三因善为细。在三因善中,有行善为粗,无行善为细。在色界善中,初禅善为粗……乃至第五禅善为细。在无色界善中,空无边处相应善为粗……乃至非想非非想处相应善为细。在出世间善中,入流道相应善为粗……乃至阿罗汉道相应善为细。这一理则也适用于依各地所说的异熟、唯作、受,以及依苦等、等至等、有漏等所说的受。显示巴利原文
Apica kāmāvacarakusalā oḷārikā, rūpāvacarā sukhumā, tato arūpāvacarā, tato lokuttarā. Kāmāvacarā ca dānamayā oḷārikā, sīlamayā sukhumā, tato bhāvanāmayā. Bhāvanāmayāpi duhetukā oḷārikā , tihetukā sukhumā. Tihetukāpi sasaṅkhārikā oḷārikā, asaṅkhārikā sukhumā. Rūpāvacarā paṭhamajjhānikā oḷārikā…pe… pañcamajjhānikā sukhumāva. Arūpāvacarā ākāsānañcāyatanasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasampayuttā sukhumāva. Lokuttarā ca sotāpattimaggasampayuttā oḷārikā…pe… arahattamaggasampayuttā sukhumāva. Esa nayo taṃtaṃbhūmivipākakiriyavedanāsu dukkhādiasamāpannādisāsavādivasena vuttavedanāsu ca.
就处所而言,地狱中的苦受是粗的,畜生界中的苦受是细的……乃至他化自在天的苦受也是细的。如同苦受,乐受也应当随宜配于一切处。就事体而言:依于低劣事体的受是粗的,依于殊胜事体的受是细的。应知,在粗细的分判中,粗的是劣的,细的是殊胜的。至于“远”这一句,则是依“不善受与善、无记受是远的;不善受与不善受是近的”等理趣而作分别。因此,不善受由不同类、不混杂、不相似而与善受、无记受是远的;同样,善受、无记受与不善受也是远的。这一理趣适用于一切场合。然而,不善受由同类、混杂、相似而与不善受是近的。与各各受相应的想等,也应当这样来理解。显示巴利原文
Okāsavasena cāpi niraye dukkhā oḷārikā, tiracchānayoniyaṃ sukhumā…pe… paranimmitavasavattī sukhumāva. Yathā ca dukkhā, evaṃ sukhāpi sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ yojetabbā. Vatthuvasena cāpi hīnavatthukā yā kāci vedanā oḷārikā, paṇītavatthukā sukhumā. Hīnappaṇītabhede yā oḷārikā, sā hīnā. Yā ca sukhumā, sā paṇītāti veditabbā. Dūrapadaṃ pana akusalā vedanā kusalābyākatāhi vedanāhi dūre, santikapadaṃ akusalā vedanā akusalāya vedanāya santiketiādinā nayena vibhattaṃ. Tasmā akusalā vedanā visabhāgato asaṃsaṭṭhato asarikkhato ca kusalābyākatāhi dūre, tathā kusalābyākatā akusalāya. Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Akusalā pana vedanā sabhāgato ca saṃsaṭṭhato ca sarikkhato ca akusalāya santiketi. Taṃtaṃvedanāsampayuttānaṃ pana saññādīnampi evameva veditabbaṃ.
23 23.“闻法者”:由于具备称为“闻持”与“证得”的多闻,故为闻法者。“厌离”:即厌倦。在此,厌离是指导向出起的观智。“厌离者离染”:在此,依离染而说四道。“由离染而解脱”:即以离染之道为因,依寂止解脱而解脱。以此说四沙门果。“于解脱中,有‘已解脱’之智”:以此说省察智。“生已尽”等是它的范围。因为圣弟子以彼智省察时,了知“生已尽”等。然而,什么生已尽?又如何了知?并非他过去的生已尽,因为过去早已尽;并非未来的生,因为未来无有精勤;也不是现在的生。而是由于在道未修习时,会在有一、四、五蕴的生命中生起的、分为一、四、五蕴的那种生,由于道已修习,成为无生法而灭尽。他省察由道修习所断的烦恼,了知在烦恼无有时,即使有业,未来也不结生,如此而了知。显示巴利原文
23.Sutavāti āgamādhigamasaṅkhātena bāhusaccena samannāgatattā sutavā. Nibbindatīti ukkaṇṭhati. Ettha ca nibbidāti vuṭṭhānagāminīvipassanā adhippetā. Nibbindaṃ virajjatīti ettha virāgavasena cattāro maggā kathitā. Virāgā vimuccatīti virāgena maggeneva hetubhūtena paṭippassaddhivimuttivasena vimuccati. Iminā cattāri sāmaññaphalāni kathitāni. Vimuttasmiṃ vimuttamiti ñāṇaṃ hotīti iminā pana paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Khīṇā jātītiādīhi tassa bhūmi. Tena hi ñāṇena ariyasāvako paccavekkhanto ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’tiādīni pajānāti. Katamā panassa jāti khīṇā, kathañca naṃ pajānātīti? Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇā pubbeva khīṇattā, na anāgatā anāgate vāyāmābhāvato, na paccuppannā. Yā pana maggassa abhāvitattā uppajjeyya ekacatupañcavokārabhavesu ekacatupañcakkhandhappabhedā jāti, sā maggassa bhāvitattā anuppādadhammataṃ āpajjanena khīṇā, taṃ so maggabhāvanāya pahīnakilese paccavekkhitvā kilesābhāve vijjamānampi kammaṃ āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikaṃ hotīti jānanto pajānāti.
“已住”:即已住、已遍住,已作、已行、已完毕之义。“梵行”:即道梵行。因为七类有学与凡夫善人共住于道梵行,而漏尽者已安住究竟,故圣弟子省察自己的梵行住时,了知“梵行已立”。“应作已作”:即依四道,于四谛以遍知、断、证、修的方式,应作的十六种事皆已完毕之义。因为凡夫善人等尚在作彼事,漏尽者则已尽应作。故圣弟子省察自己的应作时,了知“应作已作”。“不受后有”:即了知“现在,为了如此状态、如此十六种事的状态,或为了烦恼的灭尽,我已无道修习之事”。或者,“如此状态”:即像这样的状态,从此现前持续的五蕴相续,我不再有另一五蕴相续,而这些五蕴已遍知,如断根之树般住立。他了知它们将在最后识灭尽时,如无燃料之火般熄灭。显示巴利原文
Vusitanti vutthaṃ parivutthaṃ, kataṃ caritaṃ niṭṭhitanti attho. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Puthujjanakalyāṇakena hi saddhiṃ satta sekkhā maggabrahmacariyaṃ vasanti nāma, khīṇāsavo vutthavāso, tasmā ariyasāvako attano brahmacariyavāsaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘vusitaṃ brahmacariya’’nti pajānāti. Kataṃ karaṇīyanti catūsu saccesu catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanāvasena soḷasavidhampi kiccaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho. Puthujjanakalyāṇakādayo hi taṃ kiccaṃ karonti, khīṇāsavo katakaraṇīyo. Tasmā ariyasāvako attano karaṇīyaṃ paccavekkhanto ‘‘kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti pajānāti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti idāni puna itthabhāvāya evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāya, kilesakkhayāya vā maggabhāvanākiccaṃ me natthīti pajānāti. Atha vā itthattāyāti itthabhāvā imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ khandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, ime pana pañcakkhandhā pariññātā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Te carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti pajānāti.
24 “那些比丘心满意足,对世尊所说生起欢喜”:即那些比丘自心满意、内心喜悦,或以喜与悦而心得满足,他们以如同迦陵频伽鸟鸣般悦耳动听、如甘露灌顶般润泽智者心田的梵音,对世尊所开示的善说、妙语,生起欢喜并信受,赞叹:“世尊,正是如此!善逝,正是如此!”此处的“abhinanda”一词,在“abhinandati abhivadati”等处也用于指渴爱;而在“Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā”等处,则用于指欢迎。显示巴利原文
24.Attamanā te bhikkhū bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti te bhikkhū sakamanā tuṭṭhamanā, pītisomanassehi vā samattamanā hutvā karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsato bhagavato vacanaṃ sukathitaṃ sulapitaṃ ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti matthakena sampaṭicchantā anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cāti attho. Ayañhi abhinanda-saddo ‘‘abhinandati abhivadatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.114, 118) taṇhāyapi āgato. ‘‘Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.43) upagamanepi.
“久居异乡的远行人,从远方平安归来,”
“亲戚、朋友与知交,无不欢喜他的归来。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cirappavāsiṃ purisaṃ, dūrato sotthimāgataṃ; Ñātimittā suhajjā ca, abhinandanti āgata’’nti. (dha. pa. 219; vi. va. 861) –
等处也用于接受。在“abhinanditvā anumoditvā”等处也用于随喜。在此,它适用于随喜与接受,因此说“既随喜又接受”。“心无取著,从诸漏解脱”:即对于以不再生起之灭而灭尽的诸漏,心无取著,不执取任何法为“我”“我所”,从而解脱。“六位阿拉汉”:即与世尊一同成为阿拉汉的六位。然而,由于天、梵天等也有证得阿拉汉的可能,此处是专指人间阿拉汉而说,故说“六位人间阿拉汉”。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu sampaṭicchanepi. ‘‘Abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) anumodanepi. Svāyamidha anumodanasampaṭicchanesu yujjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cā’’ti. Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamānehi āsavehi anupādāya aggahetvā kañci dhammaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti anādiyitvāva cittāni vimucciṃsu. Cha arahantoti bhagavatā saddhiṃ cha janā arahanto. Aññesaṃ pana devabrahmānampi arahattappattisambhavato idaṃ manussaarahanteyeva sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘cha manussā arahanto hontī’’ti.
亚沙出家之事义注显示巴利原文
Yasassa pabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
25 二十五、现在为了显示耶舍的出离,开始讲述“那时……”等。此处对不明显词句的注释如下:在“冬季的”等词中(《长部注》2.42;《增支部注》2.3.39),凡在冬季适宜居住之处,称为“冬季的”。其余诸词亦同此理。此处的词义为:冬季的居住省略后分而成“冬季”;适合冬季者,称为“冬季的”。其余诸词亦同此理。其中,雨季的殿堂不高不低,门窗不多不少,此处的地面铺设、覆盖物、嚼食啖食皆恰到好处。冬季的殿堂,柱与墙皆低矮,门窗薄细而有小孔,为引入暖气而设有壁龛,此处的地面铺设、覆盖物、下衣上衣则用能散热的毛织物等,嚼食啖食为油腻而带辛辣者。夏季的殿堂,柱与墙皆高耸,此处门窗众多且宽大,地面铺设用能散凉的亚麻织物,嚼食啖食为甘甜清凉之物,在窗边放置新瓮,盛满水,以青莲花等覆盖,各处安设水轮,由此水流如天降雨时般源源流出。显示巴利原文
25. Idāni yasassa pabbajjaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – hemantikotiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.42; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.39) yattha sukhaṃ hoti hemantakāle vasituṃ, ayaṃ hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ panettha vacanattho – hemante vāso hemantaṃ uttarapadalopena, hemantaṃ arahatīti hemantiko. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Tattha vassiko pāsādo nātiucco hoti nātinīco, dvāravātapānānipissa nātibahūni nātitanūni, bhūmattharaṇapaccattharaṇakhajjabhojjānipettha missakāneva vaṭṭanti. Hemantike thambhāpi bhittiyopi nīcā honti, dvāravātapānāni tanukāni sukhumachiddāni, uṇhappavesanatthāya bhittiniyyūhāni hariyanti, bhūmattharaṇapaccattharaṇanivāsanapārupanāni panettha uṇhavikiriyāni kambalādīni vaṭṭanti, khajjabhojjaṃ siniddhaṃ kaṭukasannissitañca. Gimhike thambhāpi bhittiyopi uccā honti, dvāravātapānāni panettha bahūni vipulajātāni honti, bhūmattharaṇāni sītavikiriyāni dukūlamayāni vaṭṭanti, khajjabhojjāni madhurarasasītavikiriyāni, vātapānasamīpesu cettha navā cāṭiyo ṭhapetvā udakassa pūretvā nīluppalādīhi sañchādenti, tesu tesu padesesu udakayantāni karonti, yehi deve vassante viya udakadhārā nikkhamanti.
“无男子”:指没有男子。不仅此处乐器演奏无男子,所有地方皆无男子。守门者亦是女子,沐浴等侍奉者亦是女子。据说其父心想:“享受如此具足权势与欲乐的男子若被看见,恐生疑虑,愿此疑虑于我儿不生。”故于一切事务皆只安排女子。“以五种欲功德”:指以色、声等五种欲的部分。“完全投入”:指正确地投入,即具备之意。“具足”是其同义词。“享受”:指周遍地游走,即于各种欲功德中运转诸根之意。“Āḷambara”指鼓。“Vikesika”指头发散乱,即披头散发之意。“Vikkheḷika”指流出口水。“Vippalapanti”指颠倒胡言或哭泣。“视为冢墓”:指见自身眷属犹如见到新尸林,与此相应。“发出感叹语”:指因悚惧而发出感叹之语,即说出由惊惧所发之词。显示巴利原文
Nippurisehīti purisavirahitehi. Na kevalañcettha tūriyāneva nippurisāni, sabbaṭṭhānānipi nippurisāneva. Dovārikāpi itthiyova, nahāpanādiparikammakarāpi itthiyova. Pitā kira ‘‘tathārūpaṃ issariyasukhasampattiṃ anubhavamānassa purisaṃ disvā parisaṅkā uppajjati, sā me puttassa mā ahosī’’ti sabbakiccesu itthiyova ṭhapāpesi. Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti rūpasaddādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi. Samappitassāti sammā appitassa, upetassāti attho. Samaṅgībhūtassāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paricārayamānassāti parito cārayamānassa, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāmaguṇe indriyāni cārayamānassāti attho. Āḷambaranti paṇavaṃ. Vikesikanti muttakesaṃ, vippakiṇṇakesanti attho. Vikkheḷikanti vissandamānalālaṃ. Vippalapantiyoti viruddhaṃ palapantiyo vā rudantiyo vā. Susānaṃ maññeti āmakasusānaṃ viya addasa sakaṃ parijananti sambandho. Udānaṃ udānesīti saṃvegavasena udānaṃ udānesi, saṃvegavasappavattaṃ vācaṃ nicchāresīti attho.
26 二十六、“这是耶舍啊”——世尊此语是指涅槃而说。因为涅槃不被渴爱等烦恼逼迫、缠附。“次第说法”(《长部注》2.75;《中部注》2.69)是指:布施之后说戒,戒之后说天,天之后说道,如此依着次第而说。其中,布施论即:“此布施称为安乐的因、成就的根本、财富的根基,对于陷于不公正者,是救护、庇护、归趣、依止。在此世与他世,没有与布施相似的依怙、基址、所缘、救护、庇护、归趣、依止。此布施,以依怙义,如同宝石所成的狮子座;以基址义,如同大地;以所缘义,如同攀缘绳;以度苦义,如同舟船;以安慰义,如同战场上的勇士;以防护怖畏义,如同善筑的城池;以不被悭吝垢等所染义,如同莲花;以焚毁这些之义,如同火;以难近义,如同毒蛇;以无畏惧义,如同狮子;以有力义,如同大象;以被认可为最吉祥义,如同白牛王;以到达安稳地义,如同云马王。此布施是我所行的道,是我的传承。我在圆满十波罗蜜时,曾行过毗罗摩大施、大果文达大施、大善见大施、毗山多罗大施等无量的大施;我曾身为兔时,在炽燃火堆中布施己身,摄受了求乞者的心。布施在世间能带来帝释的成就、魔的成就、梵的成就、显示巴利原文
26.Idaṃ kho yasāti bhagavā nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi taṇhādīhi kilesehi anupaddutaṃ anupassaṭṭhañca. Anupubbiṃ kathanti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.75; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.69) dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ, sīlānantaraṃ saggaṃ, saggānantaraṃ magganti evamanupaṭipāṭikathaṃ. Tattha dānakathā nāma ‘‘idaṃ dānaṃ nāma sukhānaṃ nidānaṃ, sampattīnaṃ mūlaṃ, bhogānaṃ patiṭṭhā, visamagatassa tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ, idhalokaparalokesu dānasadiso avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi. Idañhi avassayaṭṭhena ratanamayasīhāsanasadisaṃ, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena mahāpathavīsadisaṃ, ārammaṇaṭṭhena ālambanarajjusadisaṃ, idañhi dukkhanittharaṇaṭṭhena nāvā, samassāsanaṭṭhena saṅgāmasūro, bhayaparittāṇaṭṭhena susaṅkhatanagaraṃ, maccheramalādīhi anupalittaṭṭhena padumaṃ, tesaṃ nidahanaṭṭhena aggi, durāsadaṭṭhena āsīviso, asantāsanaṭṭhena sīho, balavantaṭṭhena hatthī, abhimaṅgalasammataṭṭhena setausabho, khemantabhūmisampāpanaṭṭhena valāhako assarājā. Dānaṃ nāmetaṃ mayā gatamaggo, mayheveso vaṃso, mayā dasa pāramiyo pūrentena velāmamahāyaññā mahāgovindamahāyaññā mahāsudassanamahāyaññā vessantaramahāyaññāti aneke mahāyaññā pavattitā, sasabhūtena jalite aggikkhandhe attānaṃ niyyātentena sampattayācakānaṃ cittaṃ gahitaṃ. Dānañhi loke sakkasampattiṃ deti, mārasampattiṃ brahmasampattiṃ cakkavattisampattiṃ sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ abhisambodhiñāṇaṃ detī’’ti evamādinā dānaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.
然而,由于布施者能受持戒,世尊在布施之后即说戒论。所谓布施,是以利益心或恭敬心,向应施者舍弃自己的所有,施与他人。因此布施者是对众生一心怀利益的人,绝不可能夺取他人的所有。因此,布施者能受持戒,故于布施之后说戒。再者,布施论在众人中流行、为一切人所共有、易于行持,且是安立于戒的方便,所以先说。因为具足舍戒的人,对所执事物无有执着,故能轻易受持诸戒,在戒中得善安立。以戒令施者与受者清净,是利他;以戒止息害他,是说应作之法;以戒说非不应作之法;以戒说财富与名声成就之因;以戒说有成就之因。因此世尊在布施论之后说戒论。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkoti, tasmā tadanantaraṃ sīlakathaṃ kathesi. Dānañhi nāma dakkhiṇeyyesu hitajjhāsayena pūjanajjhāsayena vā attano santakassa paresaṃ pariccajanaṃ, tasmā dāyako sattesu ekantahitajjhāsayo purisapuggalo, paresaṃ vā santakaṃ haratīti aṭṭhānametaṃ. Tasmā dānaṃ dadanto sīlaṃ samādātuṃ sakkotīti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Apica dānakathā tāva pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasādhāraṇattā sukarattā sīle patiṭṭhānassa upāyabhāvato ca ādito kathitā. Pariccāgasīlo hi puggalo pariggahavatthūsu nissaṅgabhāvato sukheneva sīlāni samādiyati, tattha ca suppatiṭṭhito hoti. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakavisuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato bhogayasasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānakathānantaraṃ sīlakathā kathitā.
所谓戒论,即:“戒名为依怙、立足处、所缘、庇护、洞穴、归趣、归宿。戒是我的世系,我在僧伽护龙王时、广财龙王时、瞻波耶龙王时、戒胜王时、养母象王时、六牙象王时,于无量生中圆满持戒。因为于此世他世的成就中,没有与戒相似的依怙,没有与戒相似的立足处、所缘、庇护、洞穴、归趣、归宿;没有与戒庄严相似的庄严;没有与戒花相似的花;没有与戒香相似的香。以戒庄严而庄严、佩戴戒花鬘、涂以戒香者,即使含天人在内的世间观看,也不会感到满足。”如这些与戒功德相关的论述。显示巴利原文
Sīlakathā nāma ‘‘sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ avassayo patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ. Sīlaṃ nāmetaṃ mama vaṃso, ahaṃ saṅkhapālanāgarājakāle bhūridattanāgarājakāle campeyyanāgarājakāle sīlavarājakāle mātuposakahatthirājakāle chaddantahatthirājakāleti anantesu attabhāvesu sīlaṃ paripūresiṃ. Idhalokaparalokasampattīnañhi sīlasadiso avassayo sīlasadisā patiṭṭhā ārammaṇaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gati parāyaṇaṃ natthi, sīlālaṅkārasadiso alaṅkāro natthi, sīlapupphasadisaṃ pupphaṃ natthi, sīlagandhasadiso gandho natthi. Sīlālaṅkārena hi alaṅkataṃ sīlakusumapiḷandhanaṃ sīlagandhānulittaṃ sadevakopi loko olokento tittiṃ na gacchatī’’ti evamādisīlaguṇappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.
为了说明依此戒而得生此天界,在戒论之后接着讲说天论。所谓天论,即:“此天界名为可爱、可意、可悦,此处常有游戏,常得成就。四大王天诸天享受九万年天乐、天成就,三十三天享受三亿六万年……”如这些与天功德相关的论述。因为宣说天界成就时,诸佛之口亦难穷尽。此也正如所说:“比丘们,我当以多种方式讲说天论”等。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ pana sīlaṃ nissāya ayaṃ saggo labbhatīti dassanatthaṃ sīlānantaraṃ saggakathaṃ kathesi. Saggakathā nāma ‘‘ayaṃ saggo nāma iṭṭho kanto manāpo , niccamettha kīḷā, niccaṃ sampattiyo labbhanti, cātumahārājikā devā navutivassasatasahassāni dibbasukhaṃ dibbasampattiṃ paṭilabhanti, tāvatiṃsā tisso ca vassakoṭiyo saṭṭhi ca vassasatasahassānī’’ti evamādisaggaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttakathā. Saggasampattiṃ kathayantānañhi buddhānaṃ mukhaṃ nappahoti. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘anekapariyāyena kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, saggakathaṃ katheyya’’ntiādi.
如此以天论诱引之后,又如装饰大象然后砍断其鼻一般,为了显示此天界亦无常、不坚固,于此不应生欲贪,便依“诸欲少味、多苦、多忧恼,此处过患更多”等方式,讲说诸欲的过患、卑劣与杂染。其中,过患即过失,指因无常性、少味性等而毁坏的状态。或者,过患即“令卑下运行”,即极可悲的状态。如此,诸欲如实审察者得以现前。卑劣即低劣性、下贱性,为不殊胜者所习行,而不为殊胜者所习行。杂染即众生由此而染污,应受逼恼、应受热恼之义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saggakathāya palobhetvā puna hatthiṃ alaṅkaritvā tassa soṇḍaṃ chindanto viya ayampi saggo anicco addhuvo, na ettha chandarāgo kātabboti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.177; pāci. 417) nayena kāmānaṃ ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ kathesi. Tattha ādīnavoti doso, aniccatādinā appassādatādinā ca dūsitabhāvoti attho. Atha vā ādīnaṃ vāti pavattatīti ādīnavo, paramakapaṇatā. Tathā ca kāmā yathābhūtaṃ paccavekkhantānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhanti. Okāroti lāmakabhāvo nihīnabhāvo aseṭṭhehi sevitabbatā seṭṭhehi na sevitabbatā ca. Saṃkilesoti tehi sattānaṃ saṃkilissanaṃ, vibādhetabbatā upatāpetabbatāti attho.
如此以欲的过患呵责之后,便开示出离的功德。诸欲中有多少过患,从对立面而言,出离中就有多少功德。又依“出离名为无拥挤、无杂染,出离于欲,出离于欲想,出离于欲寻,出离于欲热恼,出离于嗔害”等方式,开示出离的功德,并阐明、称赞出家及禅定等的功德。此处,讲说天界之后,为了显示此天界被贪等所杂染,而圣道于一切时无杂染,故应于天界之后讲说道。讲说道时,为了显示证得彼道的方法,应讲说:包含在天界内的乃至其他一切诸欲,实多过患、无常、不坚固、是变坏法,因此是诸欲的过患;它们卑劣、粗俗、是凡夫所行、非圣者所行、与无义相应,因此是它们的卑劣与低劣性;一切有皆为烦恼所依,因此此处是杂染;涅槃远离一切杂染,因此是出离的功德。应知如此开示了诸欲中的过患、卑劣、杂染,以及出离中的功德。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kāmādīnavena tajjetvā nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi. Yattakā ca kāmesu ādīnavā, paṭipakkhato tattakāva nekkhamme ānisaṃsā. Apica ‘‘nekkhammaṃ nāmetaṃ asambādhaṃ asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ, nikkhantaṃ kāmehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmasaññāya, nikkhantaṃ kāmavitakkehi, nikkhantaṃ kāmapariḷāhehi, nikkhantaṃ byāpārato’’tiādinā nayena nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsesi, pabbajjāya jhānādīsu ca guṇe vibhāvesi vaṇṇesi. Ettha ca saggaṃ kathetvā svāyaṃ saggo rāgādīhi upakkiliṭṭho, sabbathāpi anupakkiliṭṭho ariyamaggoti dassanatthaṃ saggānantaraṃ maggo kathetabbo. Maggañca kathentena tadadhigamupāyasandassanatthaṃ saggapariyāpannāpi pageva itare sabbepi kāmā nāma bahvādīnavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti kāmānaṃ ādīnavo, hīnā gammā pothujjanikā anariyā anatthasañhitāti tesaṃ okāro lāmakabhāvo, sabbepi bhavā kilesānaṃ vatthubhūtāti tattha saṃkileso, sabbasaṃkilesavippamuttaṃ nibbānanti nekkhamme ānisaṃso ca kathetabboti kāmesu ādīnavo okāro saṃkileso nekkhamme ca ānisaṃso pakāsitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“堪任心”意为适业之心:由于先前所说法中不信等心的过失已离去,成为堪受后说的法器,故为堪任作业之心。或者,不信等即是心的病,此时已离去,故“堪任心”即无病心。因见、慢等烦恼离去,故为柔软心;因欲贪等离去,故为无盖心;因与正行道中的广大喜悦相应,故为踊跃心。其中,以信成就故,为净信心——当世尊了知时,应如此连属。或者,“堪任心”即离欲贪故,为无病心;“柔软心”即离嗔恚故,是以慈而不僵硬之心;“无盖心”即离掉举、恶作故,散乱已去、不被他们覆盖之心;“踊跃心”即离惛沉、睡眠故,以策励而不沉滞之心;“净信心”即离疑故,于正行道决意之心——此处应如此了知义理。“自胜法”即自己最胜,由自己证得而持,以自然智所见、不共于他人。那是什么呢?即关于圣谛的教说。因此说“苦、集、灭、道”。显示巴利原文
Kallacittanti kammaniyacittaṃ, heṭṭhā pavattitadesanāya assaddhiyādīnaṃ cittadosānaṃ vigatattā uparidesanāya bhājanabhāvūpagamanena kammakkhamacittanti attho. Assaddhiyādayo vā yasmā cittassa rogabhūtā tadā tassa vigatā, tasmā kallacittaṃ arogacittanti attho. Diṭṭhimānādikilesavigamena muducittaṃ, kāmacchandādivigamena vinīvaraṇacittaṃ, sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ uḷārapītipāmojjayogena udaggacittaṃ. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā pasannacittaṃ yadā bhagavā aññāsīti sambandho. Atha vā kallacittanti kāmacchandavigamena arogacittaṃ. Muducittanti byāpādavigamena mettāvasena akaṭhinacittaṃ. Vinīvaraṇacittanti uddhaccakukkuccavigamena vikkhepassa vigatattā tena apihitacittaṃ. Udaggacittanti thinamiddhavigamena sampaggahavasena alīnacittaṃ. Pasannacittanti vicikicchāvigamena sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ adhimuttacittanti evampettha attho veditabbo. Sāmukkaṃsikāti sāmaṃ ukkaṃsikā, attanāyeva uddharitvā gahitā, sayambhūñāṇena diṭṭhā asādhāraṇā aññesanti attho. Kā ca pana sāti? Ariyasaccadesanā. Tenevāha ‘‘dukkhaṃ samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magga’’nti.
所谓“如是以”等,是以譬喻显示彼之断除烦恼与圣道生起。“去除了黑垢”指离去了黑垢。“完全地”即很好地。“染色”指青、黄等颜色所成之物。“会接受”即会拿取,成为极光净。“就在那座具上”即就在那座位上。由此显示了他的观照轻快性、慧的锐利性、乐行道速通达智性。“离垢”等如前所说。此处应如此结合譬喻:布如同心,布因外来污垢而染污的状态,如同心因贪等垢秽而染污的状态;洗衣石如同次第说法;水如同信;以水反复浸湿后,用碱、牛粪、灰、草木灰揉搓黑垢处以洗衣的加行,如同以信的润泽反复浸湿后,以念、定、慧使过失减弱,依戒、闻等规则净化心的精进策励;以此加行去除布上黑垢,如同以精进策励镇伏烦恼;染色如同圣道;以彼使洁净之布成为极光净的状态,如同以道使被镇伏烦恼之心得到清净。显示巴利原文
Seyyathāpītiādinā upamāvasena tassa kilesappahānaṃ ariyamagguppādañca dasseti. Apagatakāḷakanti vigatakāḷakaṃ. Sammadevāti suṭṭhu eva. Rajananti nīlapītādiraṅgajātaṃ. Paṭiggaṇheyyāti gaṇheyya, pabhassaraṃ bhaveyya. Tasmiṃyeva āsaneti tassaṃyeva nisajjāyaṃ. Etenassa lahuvipassakatā tikkhapaññatā sukhapaṭipadakhippābhiññatā ca dassitā hoti. Virajantiādi vuttanayameva. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ – vatthaṃ viya cittaṃ, vatthassa āgantukamalehi kiliṭṭhabhāvo viya cittassa rāgādimalehi saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvo, dhovanasilā viya anupubbikathā, udakaṃ viya saddhā, udakena temetvā temetvā ūsagomayachārikakhārakehi kāḷakapadese sammadditvā vatthassa dhovanapayogo viya saddhāsinehena temetvā temetvā satisamādhipaññāhi dose sithile katvā sīlasutādividhinā cittassa sodhane vīriyārambho, tena payogena vatthe kāḷakāpagamo viya vīriyārambhena kilesavikkhambhanaṃ, raṅgajātaṃ viya ariyamaggo, tena suddhassa vatthassa pabhassarabhāvo viya vikkhambhitakilesassa cittassa maggena pariyodapananti.
27 “乘马使者”指骑在马上的使者。“神通加行”指神通的作用。“作了加行”即作了、造作了的意思。什么目的呢?是为了遮止二者应得的别证之障。因为如果他见到儿子,则儿子证得阿罗汉、长者获得法眼都不会发生。因为一个未见谛者,若被乞求“还你母亲的生命吧”,如何能排除散乱,随佛所说而运心于智、获得法眼呢?而耶舍如此被乞求时,又如何能排除那散乱而住立于阿罗汉呢?显示巴利原文
27.Assadūteti āruḷhaasse dūte. Iddhābhisaṅkhāranti iddhikiriyaṃ. Abhisaṅkharesīti abhisaṅkhari, akāsīti attho. Kimatthanti ce? Ubhinnaṃ paṭilabhitabbavisesantarāyanisedhanatthaṃ. Yadi hi so puttaṃ passeyya, puttassapi arahattappatti seṭṭhissapi dhammacakkhupaṭilābho na siyā. Adiṭṭhasaccopi hi ‘‘dehi te mātuyā jīvita’’nti yācanto kathañhi nāma vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā bhagavato dhammadesanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā dhammacakkhuṃ paṭilabheyya, yaso ca evaṃ tena yāciyamāno kathaṃ taṃ vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhitvā arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya.
“说了此”:指随喜世尊说法,而说出“太殊胜了,尊者”等语。此处的“殊胜”一词是随喜之义,因此意为“善哉善哉,尊者”。显示巴利原文
Etadavocāti bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ abbhanumodamāno etaṃ ‘‘abhikkantaṃ bhante’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Abhikkanta-saddo cāyamidha abbhanumodane, tasmā sādhu sādhu bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti.
恐惧时、愤怒时、赞叹时,匆忙时、好奇时、惊讶时;
欢笑时、忧愁时、净信时,智者会作重复语。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Bhaye kodhe pasaṃsāyaṃ, turite kotūhalacchare; Hāse soke pasāde ca, kare āmeḍitaṃ budho’’ti. –
应知,此处正是以此特征,依净信与依赞叹而重复说了两次。又以“譬如”等四种譬喻来赞叹世尊的教说。其中,“倒覆”指口朝下放置,或成为向下面。“会翻正”指使之口朝上。“被覆盖”指被草、叶等遮盖。“会揭开”指将其打开。“对迷路者”指对迷失方向的人。“会指示道路”指牵着手说“这是路”。“在黑暗中”指黑半月的十四日、半夜、密林、厚云这四者重合的黑暗。显示巴利原文
Imināva lakkhaṇena idha pasādavasena pasaṃsāvasena cāyaṃ dvikkhattuṃ vuttoti veditabbo. Seyyathāpītiādinā catūhi upamāhi bhagavato desanaṃ thometi. Tattha nikkujjitanti adhomukhaṭhapitaṃ, heṭṭhāmukhajātaṃ vā. Ukkujjeyyāti uparimukhaṃ kareyya. Paṭicchannanti tiṇapaṇṇādichāditaṃ. Vivareyyāti ugghāṭeyya. Mūḷhassāti disāmūḷhassa. Maggaṃ ācikkheyyāti hatthe gahetvā ‘‘esa maggo’’ti vadeyya. Andhakāreti kāḷapakkhacātuddasī aḍḍharatti ghanavanasaṇḍameghapaṭalehi caturaṅgatame.
如此赞叹教说之后,他对此法于三宝生起净信心,并以表露净信的方式说道“我此”等。其中,“我此”即“此是我”。“愿世尊忆持我为优婆塞”意为:愿世尊如此忆持我——“这是优婆塞”,也就是请世尊知晓的意思。“从今日起”中,此处的“agga”一词是“开始”之义,因此应知“从今日起”即“以今日为开端”。或读作“ajjadagge”,其中的“da”是连音字,义为“以今日为起始”。“具命者”指具有生命。只要我的生命尚在延续,我便以此为依,愿世尊忆持我、了知我为无他师、以三皈依而皈依并作适当承事的优婆塞。纵使有人以利刃割截我的头,我也决不会说“佛不是佛”“法不是法”“僧不是僧”——我正是如此以身命奉献而作皈依。对于“殊胜”等词的不明显之义,应如此了知;其广释已见于前文《毘兰若品》注释中,故此处不再展开。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ desanaṃ thometvā imāya desanāya ratanattaye pasannacitto pasannākāraṃ karonto ‘‘esāha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha esāhanti eso ahaṃ. Upāsakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretūti maṃ bhagavā ‘‘upāsako aya’’nti evaṃ dhāretu, jānātūti attho. Ajjataggeti etthāyaṃ agga-saddo ādiatthe, tasmā ajjataggeti ajjataṃ ādiṃ katvāti evamattho veditabbo. Ajjatanti ajjabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Ajjadagge’’ti vā pāṭho, da-kāro padasandhikaro, ajja aggaṃ katvāti attho. Pāṇupetanti pāṇehi upetaṃ. Yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva upetaṃ, anaññasatthukaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi saraṇaṃ gataṃ upāsakaṃ kappiyakārakaṃ maṃ bhagavā dhāretu jānātu. Ahañhi sacepi me tikhiṇena asinā sīsaṃ chindeyya, neva buddhaṃ ‘‘na buddho’’ti vā, dhammaṃ ‘‘na dhammo’’ti vā, saṅghaṃ ‘‘na saṅgho’’ti vā vadeyyanti evaṃ attasanniyyātanena saraṇaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ ‘‘abhikkanta’’ntiādīnaṃ anuttānapadattho veditabbo, vitthāro pana heṭṭhā verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ āgatoyevāti idha na dassito.
28 “观察地”指观察自己所见的义理。“止息了神通加行”意思是:他如此决意——“就如那位长者居士正坐在那里看见善男子耶舍一样”。这即是其含义。“请接受”即请应允。“为了今日的”指为了我今日恭敬你们时,所将生起的福德与喜悦。世尊默然应允,即世尊不动身语,于内心忍许而默然,这是为摄受长者而以意接受的意思。当世尊说“来,比丘”时,据说他观察那神通所成衣钵的亲依止缘,见到此人曾在多生中布施衣等八资具,于是便说“来,比丘”。他即刻剃除须发、身披袈裟,八种比丘资具现于身上,如同六十岁的长老一般,礼敬世尊后坐下。应知:若有人将衣等八资具,或仅将衣钵,布施给须陀洹等圣者或具戒凡夫,并发愿道“愿此资具布施成为未来证得‘来,比丘’之状态的缘”,当因缘具足时,于诸佛面前,此布施便能成就神通所成资具的获得。显示巴利原文
28.Bhūmiṃ paccavekkhantassāti attanā diṭṭhamatthaṃ paccavekkhantassa. Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhesīti yathā taṃ seṭṭhi gahapati tattha nisinnova yasaṃ kulaputtaṃ passati, tathā adhiṭṭhāsīti attho. Adhivāsetūti sampaṭicchatu. Ajjatanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu sakkāraṃ karoto ajja bhavissati puññañca pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ karonto tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi, seṭṭhissa anuggahatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ehi bhikkhū’’ti bhagavā avocāti tassa kira iddhimayapattacīvarassa upanissayaṃ olokento anekāsu jātīsu cīvarādiaṭṭhaparikkhāradānaṃ disvā ‘‘ehi bhikkhū’’ti avoca. So tāvadeva bhaṇḍu kāsāvavasano aṭṭhahi bhikkhuparikkhārehi sarīre paṭimukkeheva vassasaṭṭhikatthero viya bhagavantaṃ namassamānova nisīdi. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapeti, tassa taṃ sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ.
29 “殊胜”指最上。“亲手”指亲手施与。“令满足后”指充分满足后,使其完全饱足、随其所欲而作。“令谢拒后”指充分谢拒后,以手势表示“够了、够了”令其停止。“已食”指已进食者。“手已离钵”指手已从钵移开,即手已拿开的意思。亦有读作“Onittapattapāṇi”,其义为:手已洗净、钵已离手,即手与钵已分开,指洗净手与钵后,将钵放置一边而坐。“坐于一边”指了知世尊处于如此状态后,坐于一旁。在“以法语”等句中,指以适合当时的法语,开示现世与来世的利益后,令其于善法中立、策励、激发,使其具足精进,并以彼精进及其他现有功德令其欢喜,降下法宝之雨,从座起身离去。显示巴利原文
29.Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena. Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā. Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā, alaṃ alanti hatthasaññāya paṭikkhipāpetvā. Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ . Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ, apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho – onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇi, taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamantaṃ pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho. Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsūti bhagavantaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ ñatvā ekasmiṃ okāse nisīdiṃsūti attho. Dhammiyā kathāyātiādīsu taṅkhaṇānurūpāya dhammiyā kathāya diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaatthaṃ sandassetvā kusale ca dhamme samādapetvā tattha ca naṃ samuttejetvā saussāhaṃ katvā tāya ca saussāhatāya aññehi ca vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassitvā uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi.
四在家友人出家故事的解释显示巴利原文
Catugihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
30 现在,为显示其友伴出家之事,而说“他们听闻”等。此处是难解词句的释义:“豪族与随豪族”,指那些由豪族与随豪族所构成的家族,即世代相承、具足豪族与随豪族的家族。“无垢”等是诸子之名。“剃除须发”指剃除头发与胡须。“袈裟衣”指以黄褐色所染、适合梵行者所著之衣。“下劣”指卑劣、粗恶。其余如前所述。显示巴利原文
30. Idāni tassa sahāyānaṃ pabbajjaṃ dassento ‘‘assosuṃ kho’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā – seṭṭhino ca anuseṭṭhino ca yesaṃ kulānaṃ tāni seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīni kulāni, tesaṃ seṭṭhānuseṭṭhīnaṃ kulānaṃ, paveṇivasena āgatehi seṭṭhīhi ca anuseṭṭhīhi ca samannāgatānaṃ kulānanti attho. Vimalotiādīni tesaṃ puttānaṃ nāmāni. Kesamassuṃ ohāretvāti kesañca massuñca oropetvā. Kāsāyāni vatthānīti kasāyarasapītāni brahmacariyaṃ carantānaṃ anucchavikāni vatthāni. Orakoti ūnako lāmako. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
五十在家友人出家故事的解释显示巴利原文
Paññāsagihisahāyapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
31 对于五十位在家友伴的出家,应说的亦已说过。然而,为显示所有这些人的宿世因缘,而说“耶舍等良家子弟的宿世因缘”等。此处,“以结群”指结成群体,即合为一体之意。“无依之尸”指无人看顾的尸体。“照料”指运到外面火化。显示巴利原文
31. Paññāsamattānaṃ gihisahāyānaṃ pabbajjāyapi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttameva. Imesaṃ pana sabbesaṃ pubbayogo vattabboti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasaādīnaṃkulaputtānaṃ ayaṃ pubbayogo’’tiādimāha. Tattha vaggabandhanenāti gaṇabandhanena, ekībhūtāti vuttaṃ hoti. Anāthasarīrānīti anāthāni matakaḷevarāni. Paṭijaggantāti bahi nīharitvā jhāpentā.
魔的故事之解释显示巴利原文
Mārakathāvaṇṇanā
32 32. 现在,为显示皈依具足戒,而发起“那时,世尊”等语。以下是逐词解释:我已解脱。游行,即次第游行的游行,指在村落、镇邑、王都中次第而行的游行。你们游行吧,意指每日最多行一由旬而游历。不要两人同行一道,因为若二人同行,一人说法时,另一人须默立,故如此说。初善,指最初即善、美妙、吉祥,中善、后善亦复如是。所谓初中后,依教法和说法有二种。就教法而言:戒为初,止观与道为中,果与涅槃为后;或戒与定为初,观与道为中,果与涅槃为后;或戒、定、观为初,道为中,果与涅槃为后。就说法而言:四句偈中,第一句为初,第二、三句为中,第四句为后;五句、六句者,第一句为初,最后句为后,其余诸句为中。单一连贯的经,缘起为初,“此说”为后,其余为中。多连贯的经,虽有多重连贯,中间仍为中,缘起为初,“此说”为后。具义,即令其义理具足而说。具文,即令文句圆满而说。完全圆满,指全体圆满。清净,指无杂染。梵行,指包含三学的教法梵行。你们应宣说,即应令其显扬。显示巴利原文
32. Idāni saraṇagamanūpasampadaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbapadavaṇṇanā (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.141) – muttāhanti mutto ahaṃ. Cārikanti anupubbagamanacārikaṃ, gāmanigamarājadhānīsu anukkamena gamanasaṅkhātaṃ cārikanti attho. Carathāti divasaṃ yojanaparamaṃ gacchantā caratha. Mā ekena dve agamitthāti ekena maggena dvīsu gatesu ekasmiṃ dhammaṃ desente ekena tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ hoti, tasmā evamāha. Ādikalyāṇanti ādimhi kalyāṇaṃ sundaraṃ bhaddakaṃ, tathā majjhapariyosānesu. Ādimajjhapariyosānañca nāmetaṃ sāsanassa ca desanāya ca vasena dubbidhaṃ. Tattha sāsanassa sīlaṃ ādi, samathavipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhayo vā ādi, vipassanāmaggā majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Sīlasamādhivipassanā vā ādi, maggo majjhaṃ, phalanibbānāni pariyosānaṃ. Desanāya pana catuppadikagāthāya tāva paṭhamapādo ādi, dutiyatatiyā majjhaṃ, catuttho pariyosānaṃ. Pañcapadachappadānaṃ paṭhamapādo ādi, avasānapādo pariyosānaṃ, sesā majjhaṃ. Ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, sesaṃ majjhaṃ. Anekānusandhikassa suttassa majjhe bahukampi anusandhi majjhameva, nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ. Sātthanti sātthakaṃ katvā desetha. Sabyañjananti byañjanehi ceva padehi ca paripūraṃ katvā desetha. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti sakalaparipuṇṇaṃ. Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Pakāsethāti āvi karotha.
“少尘垢种性者”:指在智慧眼中本性仅有少许烦恼尘垢,犹如为粗布所覆,在四句偈结束时能证得阿罗汉的众生。“退失”:指因不得利益而于法退失。故说:“未得者不得,于殊胜证得中退失”。“军营聚落”:指军队的聚落。相传在最初始劫时,有军队驻扎于此,因此此地得名“军营聚落”。也有读作“Senānigāmo”,意为善生之父名Senāni的村落。“我将前往那里”:意指并非我遣散你们后,便使人建造精舍等,由侍者等服侍而住,而是为了向三位结发者示现三千五百种神变后,说法才前往。显示巴利原文
Apparajakkhajātikāti paññācakkhumhi appakilesarajasabhāvā, dukūlasāṇiyā paṭicchannā viya catuppadikagāthāpariyosāne arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthā sattā santīti attho. Parihāyantīti alābhaparihāniyā dhammato parihāyanti. Tenevāha ‘‘anadhigataṃ nādhigacchantā visesādhigamato parihāyantī’’ti. Senānigamoti senāya nigamo. Paṭhamakappikānaṃ kira tasmiṃ ṭhāne senāniveso ahosi, tasmā so padeso ‘‘senānigamo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Senānigāmo’’tipi pāṭho, senāni nāma sujātāya pitā, tassa gāmoti attho. Tenupasaṅkamissāmīti nāhaṃ tumhe uyyojetvā pariveṇādīni kāretvā upaṭṭhākādīhi paricariyamāno viharissāmi, tiṇṇaṃ pana jaṭilānaṃ aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni dassetvā dhammameva desetuṃ upasaṅkamissāmi.
33 33. “魔罗波旬”:对于试图超越其境界的有情,他将其杀害,故名魔罗;他驱使他人生于恶,或自身投入于恶,故名波旬。他还有众多其他名称,如黑者、主宰、自在者、终结者、那木支、放逸者之亲属等,而此处仅取此二名。“前往”:他心中这样想:“这位沙门乔达摩好像要发动一场大战,说‘不要两人同行一道,应当说法’,将六十人遣散。然而,即使只有一人说法,我心尚且不安,若多人说法,岂能安乐?我应当去阻止。”如此思惟后,便前往。显示巴利原文
33.Māro pāpimāti attano visayaṃ atikkamituṃ paṭipanne satte māretīti māro, pare pāpe niyojeti, sayaṃ vā pāpe niyuttoti pāpimā. Aññānipissa kaṇho adhipati vasavattī antako namuci pamattabandhūtiādīni bahūni nāmāni, idha pana nāmadvayameva gahitaṃ. Upasaṅkamīti ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo gotamo mahāyuddhaṃ vicārento viya ‘mā ekena dve agamittha, dhammaṃ desethā’ti saṭṭhi jane uyyojeti, imasmiṃ pana ekasmimpi dhammaṃ desente mayhaṃ cittassa sātaṃ natthi, evaṃ bahūsu desentesu kuto bhavissati, paṭibāhāmi na’’nti cintetvā upasaṅkami.
“以一切缚”:指以一切烦恼的束缚。“诸天的与诸人的”:指那些称为天界欲乐所摄、人界欲乐所摄的烦恼束缚,他说你被所有那些束缚所缚。“被大束缚所缚”:指被巨大的烦恼束缚所缚,或被系缚于大束缚中,即被系缚于作为烦恼束缚之处的“有”之牢狱中。“沙门,你不会从我解脱”:意思是沙门,你不会从我的领域解脱。而“沙门,你不会从我解脱”这句话,是魔罗因不信世尊所说“比丘们,我已从一切束缚解脱”而说的;或者,即便相信,也为了恐吓而说——“如此他便不会为其他众生的解脱而努力了”,以虚伪的态度而说。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāsehīti sabbehi kilesapāsehi. Ye dibbā ye ca mānusāti ye dibbakāmaguṇasaṅkhātā mānusakakāmaguṇasaṅkhātā ca kilesapāsā nāma atthi, sabbehi tehi tvaṃ baddhoti vadati. Mahābandhanabaddhoti mahatā kilesabandhanena baddho, mahati vā bandhane baddho, kilesabandhanassa ṭhānabhūte bhavacārake baddhoti attho. Na me samaṇa mokkhasīti samaṇa tvaṃ mama visayato na muccissasi. ‘‘Na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti ca idaṃ māro ‘‘muttāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbapāsehī’’ti bhagavato vacanaṃ asaddahanto vadati, saddahantopi vā ‘‘evamayaṃ paresaṃ sattānaṃ mokkhāya ussāhaṃ na kareyyā’’ti santajjento kohaññe ṭhatvā vadati.
“被击倒”:指你已被我击倒,即被击败,令你陷入无能为力的境地。“空中行者”:能束缚在空中行走、具足五神通者,故称“空中行者”。因为贪欲之束缚对空中行者也能发挥作用,故称为“空中行者”,因此魔罗也认为它是空中行者。“生于意”:指意所生,即与意相应。此中余者,其义易明。显示巴利原文
Nihatoti tvaṃ mayā nihato, nibbisevanabhāvaṃ gamito parājitoti attho. Antalikkhe carante pañcābhiññepi bandhatīti antalikkhacaro. Rāgapāso hi antalikkhacaresupi kiccasādhanato ‘‘antalikkhacaro’’ti vuccati, teneva naṃ māropi antalikkhacaroti maññati. Manasi jātoti mānaso, manasampayuttoti attho. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
出家受具足戒论释显示巴利原文
Pabbajjūpasampadākathāvaṇṇanā
34 然而,依“我允许,比丘们”等起始的经文,即应解说有关出家与受具足戒的抉择。为详细开示,而说“当使期望出家的良家子出家时”等。其中,关联的是“哪些人已被拒绝”。应自己使出家,即自行剃发等而令其出家。因为进行剃发、着袈裟、授三皈依这三件事,即称为“使出家”。即使只做其中一件或两件,也如此称呼,因此“你使此人出家”是就剃发和着袈裟而说。就“指定戒师而使出家”而言,此处也是同样的方法。“带到界外”是为了回避剃发的告知而说。因此,即使在有比丘的寺院中,也不可对他人说“你剃此人的头发”。“使出家后”是就剃发而说。除比丘外,其他人不能令出家,这是就授三皈依而说。因此说道“然而沙弥”等。“有能之相”指有能的本性。以同义语阐明同一意义,故说“有因”。“已知”指显而易见。“有名望”指具备随从的成就。显示巴利原文
34. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave’’tiādikāya pana pāḷiyā yo pabbajjūpasampadāvinicchayo vattabbo, taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘pabbajjāpekkhaṃ kulaputtaṃ pabbājentenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ye puggalā paṭikkhittāti sambandho. Sayaṃ pabbājetabboti kesacchedanādīni sayaṃ karontena pabbājetabbo. Kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanaṃ saraṇadānanti hi imāni tīṇi karonto ‘‘pabbājetī’’ti vuccati. Etesu ekaṃ dve vāpi karonto tathā voharīyatiyeva, tasmā etaṃ pabbājehīti kesacchedanaṃ kāsāyacchādanañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upajjhāyaṃuddissa pabbājetīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Khaṇḍasīmaṃ netvāti bhaṇḍukammārocanapariharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena sabhikkhuke vihāre aññampi ‘‘etassa kese chindā’’ti vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Pabbājetvāti kesacchedanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Bhikkhuto añño pabbājetuṃ na labhatīti saraṇadānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘sāmaṇero panā’’tiādi. Bhabbarūpoti bhabbasabhāvo. Tamevatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vibhāveti ‘‘sahetuko’’ti. Ñātoti pākaṭo. Yasassīti parivārasampattiyā samannāgato.
这是通过颜色、形状、气味、来源、处所来显示不净、可厌、违逆之相而作的关联。其中,这些头发,从颜色上说也是违逆的,从形状上、从气味上、从来源上、从处所上说也是违逆的。纵使在可意的粥碗或饭钵里,看到任何类似头发颜色的东西,人们也会厌恶地说:‘这混进了头发,拿走吧!’如此,头发从颜色上是违逆的。夜间进食时,触到形似头发的阿克瓦卡纤维或玛卡奇瓦卡纤维,也同样厌恶,如此,从形状上是违逆的。没有涂油、以花熏等加以装饰的头发,气味极为可厌,若投入火中则更加可厌。头发即使从颜色和形状上或许不违逆,但从气味上必定违逆。正如幼童的粪便,颜色像姜黄,形状也像姜黄块;被丢弃在垃圾堆的肿胀黑色狗尸,颜色像棕榈果,形状像揉圆后又松开的鼓,牙齿像素馨花蕾。这两者从颜色和形状上或许不违逆,但从气味上必定违逆。同样,头发即使从颜色和形状上或许不违逆,从气味上必定违逆。又如在不净之处、由村落排水而生、可作羹汤的菜叶,对城市人来说是可厌、不可用的,同样,头发是由脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等排泄物所生,故极为可厌。如此,从来源上也是违逆的。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena asucijegucchapaṭikūlabhāvaṃ pākaṭaṃ karontenāti sambandho. Tattha kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikūlā. Manuññepi (visuddhi. 1.183; vibha. aṭṭha. 356; sārattha. ṭī. pārājikakaṇḍa 2.162) hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’’nti jigucchanti, evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikūlā. Rattiṃ bhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvā tatheva jigucchanti, evaṃ saṇṭhānato paṭikūlā. Telamakkhanapupphadhūmādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārakassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍisaṇṭhānaṃ. Saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisā, taṃ ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlameva, evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlā, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyevāti. Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā paramajegucchāti evaṃ āsayato paṭikūlā. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇakaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā, te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti evaṃ okāsato paṭikūlātiādinā nayena tacapañcakassa vaṇṇādivasena paṭikūlabhāvaṃ pakāsentenāti attho.
或者,显示无命、无众生之相而言:这些头发生于包裹头盖骨的皮上。其中,如同生于蚁丘顶上的杂草,蚁丘顶不知‘我身上生了杂草’,杂草也不知‘我们生于蚁丘顶上’;同样,包裹头盖骨的皮不知‘我身上生了头发’,头发也不知‘我们生于包裹头盖骨的皮上’。这些法彼此没有关注与观察。如此,头发是此身体中一个单独的部分,是无心的、无记的、空的、无众生的、坚硬的、地界。通过这样的方法显示无命、无众生之相。‘以前’是指于过去诸佛之前。‘已摧破诸行’是指以名色确定智与缘摄受智摧破诸行。‘已修习修习’是指以聚观照等,通过一切善修习的圆满而修习修习。显示巴利原文
Nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ vā pākaṭaṃ karontenāti ime kesā nāma sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacamme jātā. Tattha yathā vammikamatthake jātesu kunthatiṇesu na vammikamatthako jānāti ‘‘mayi kunthatiṇāni jātānī’’ti, nāpi kunthatiṇāni jānanti ‘‘mayaṃ vammikamatthake jātānī’’ti, evameva na sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacammaṃ jānāti ‘‘mayi kesā jātā’’ti, nāpi kesā jānanti ‘‘mayaṃ sīsakaṭāhapaliveṭhanacamme jātā’’ti. Aññamaññaṃ ābhogapaccavekkhaṇarahitā ete dhammā. Iti kesā nāma imasmiṃ sarīre pāṭiyekko koṭṭhāso acetano abyākato suñño nissatto thaddho pathavīdhātūtiādinā nayena nijjīvanissattabhāvaṃ pakāsentena. Pubbeti purimabuddhānaṃ santike. Madditasaṅkhāroti nāmarūpavavatthānena ceva paccayapariggahavasena ca ñāṇena parimadditasaṅkhāro. Bhāvitabhāvanoti kalāpasammasanādinā sabbaso kusalabhāvanāya pūraṇena bhāvitabhāvano.
‘不取’者,此处他们认为‘出家不成就’。‘许可的具足戒’是指以四羯磨白文许可的具足戒。‘处所作具足’中,当知胸等为处所,摄护等为所作。为了说明‘应于施与时中间不断,作成鼻音而施’,故说‘同一关联’。所谓‘断绝’,是指于施与时作成m音而作断绝。应当告知他一切适宜与不适宜之事,即应告知除了十学处之外,关于执取、不执取等分类的适宜与不适宜之事。‘于增上戒中应教导’以此说明,应以此令他圆满众学法、依止师义务等增上戒,若于其中应作而不作、不应作而作,则应受治罚。显示巴利原文
Adinnaṃna vaṭṭatīti ettha pabbajjā na ruhatīti vadanti. Anuññātaupasampadāti ñatticatutthakammena anuññātaupasampadā. Ṭhānakaraṇasampadanti ettha urādīni ṭhānāni, saṃvutādīni karaṇānīti veditabbāni. Anunāsikantaṃ katvā dānakāle antarā vicchedaṃ akatvā dātabbānīti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekasambandhānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vicchinditvāti ma-kārantaṃ katvā dānasamaye vicchedaṃ katvā. Sabbamassa kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbanti dasasikkhāpadavinimuttaṃ parāmāsāparāmāsādibhedaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Ābhisamācārikesu vinetabboti iminā sekhiyaupajjhāyavattādiābhisamācārikasīlamanena pūretabbaṃ, tattha ca kattabbassa akaraṇe akattabbassa ca karaṇe daṇḍakammāraho hotīti dīpeti.
第二魔事论释显示巴利原文
Dutiyamārakathāvaṇṇanā
35 以下是对“那时世尊雨安居结束后”等经文中新出词语的注释:“如理作意”:依方法作意,即于无常等以无常等而作意。“如理正勤”:依方法精进,即依未生恶令不生等规则而发起的精进。“解脱”:以最上义说,指阿拉汉果的解脱。“说”:指世尊心想:“此人自己精进证得阿拉汉,犹不满足,现在又鼓励他人‘你们也证得吧’,我要阻止他。”因而说。“魔网”:即烦恼网。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
35.Atha kho bhagavā vassaṃvuṭṭhotiādikāya pana pāḷiyā ayaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā. Yonisomanasikārāti upāyamanasikārena, aniccādīsu aniccādito manasikaraṇenāti attho. Yoniso sammappadhānāti upāyavīriyena, anuppannākusalānuppādanādividhinā pavattavīriyenāti attho. Vimuttīti ukkaṭṭhaniddesena arahattaphalavimutti vuttā. Ajjhabhāsīti ‘‘ayaṃ attanā vīriyaṃ katvā arahattaṃ patvāpi na tussati, idāni aññesampi ‘pāpuṇāthā’ti ussāhaṃ karoti, paṭibāhessāmi na’’nti cintetvā abhāsi. Mārapāsenāti kilesapāsena. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
跋德瓦基亚论释显示巴利原文
Bhaddavaggiyakathāvaṇṇanā
36 在三十贤善群事中,“随意而住”:随其意乐而住。诸佛若住一处,不因树荫、饮水等缺失,或坐卧处不适,或人们无信等而生厌倦;也不因这些条件具足而心生欢喜、久住不去,谓“我今安乐而住”。然而,若如来住于某处时,众生能于三皈依中确立,或受持戒律,或出家,或成为他人证入入流道等的亲依止缘,则诸佛以欲令众生安立这些成就的意乐而住;若无这些,便离去。因此说“随意而住”。“进入”:即入。“约三十”:即三十之数。其余如前所说。显示巴利原文
36. Tiṃsabhaddavaggiyavatthumhi yathābhirantaṃ viharitvāti yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā. Buddhānañhi ekasmiṃ ṭhāne vasantānaṃ chāyūdakādīnaṃ vipattiṃ vā aphāsukasenāsanaṃ vā manussānaṃ assaddhādibhāvaṃ vā āgamma anabhirati nāma natthi, tesaṃ sampattiyā ‘‘idha phāsuṃ viharāmā’’ti abhiramitvā ciravihāropi natthi. Yattha pana tathāgate viharante sattā saraṇesu vā tīsu patiṭṭhahanti, sīlāni vā samādiyanti, pabbajanti vā, sotāpattimaggādīnaṃ vā paresaṃ upanissayo hoti, tattha buddhā satte tāsu sampattīsu patiṭṭhāpanaajjhāsayena vasanti, tāsaṃ abhāve pakkamanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāajjhāsayaṃ viharitvā’’ti. Ajjhogāhetvāti pavisitvā. Tiṃsamattāti tiṃsapamāṇā. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
伍卢韦喇神变故事注释显示巴利原文
Uruvelapāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā
37-38 在优楼频螺迦叶事中,“结发者”:即蓄结发者,因有结发故,称结发者。“引导者”:即领袖,指亲自引导、教导自宗教法者为导师。“迦叶,若不以为重”:即迦叶,若你无任何沉重、不适。“火屋”:即火堂。“两者俱成火焰”:指两者皆成火焰、正在燃烧时。“何竟有”:即所谓有。显示巴利原文
37-38. Uruvelakassapavatthumhi jaṭiloti jaṭādharo. Jaṭā assa atthīti hi jaṭilo. Netīti nāyako, sāmaṃ vineti attano laddhiṃ sikkhāpetīti vināyako. Sace te kassapa agarūti kassapa sace tuyhaṃ bhāriyaṃ aphāsukaṃ kiñci natthi. Agyāgāreti aggisālāyaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ sajotibhūtānanti ubhosu sajotibhūtesu pajjalitesu. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.
39 “今日”即指今日这一天。“火屋中”指火堂中。“善意”指称为善心的心。“于火界善巧”指于火遍禅定善巧。“出现”意为显现,或指围绕。“放入钵中”即投入钵中。“常食”即恒常的食物。显示巴利原文
39.Ajjaṇhoti ajja ekadivasaṃ. Aggisālamhīti agyāgāre. Sumanamanasoti sundaracittasaṅkhātamano. Tejodhātūsu kusaloti tejokasiṇasamāpattīsu kusalo. Udicchareti ullokesuṃ, parivāresunti vā attho. Pattamhi odahitvāti patte pakkhipitvā. Dhuvabhattenāti niccabhattena.
40 “夜已过”中,“已过”一词表耗尽之义,故为“夜已尽”。这四大天王是在中夜刚过时来的。据说这是诸天的常规:前来侍奉佛陀或佛弟子时,他们都在中夜刚过时到来。“色已过”即肤色美妙,意为可爱色、可意色。诸天来到人间时,会舍弃原本的肤色与神通,化作粗大之身,以超胜的肤色、衣饰、身光等,展现天的神通威力,如同人间前往观看戏剧等集会的人们那般,以精心装扮的身相而来。这其中,欲界天即使不以装扮之身也能来,因为其色身较为粗重。他们确实以段食为食。而色界天则不能以未装扮之身前来,因为其色身更为微细,身体极其微细,不能凭此进行行、住、坐、卧。因此,梵天世界的梵天们也大多以化现的色身活动。他们的根本结生色极其微细、广大,仅作为心识生起的所依和立足处,以其形状而存在。显示巴利原文
40.Abhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkanta-saddo khaye vattati, tena parikkhīṇāyarattiyāti attho. Ete hi cattāro mahārājāno majjhimayāmasamanantare āgatā. Niyāmo kiresa devatānaṃ, yadidaṃ buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchantā majjhimayāmasamanantare āgacchanti. Abhikkantavaṇṇāti abhirūpachavivaṇṇā, iṭṭhavaṇṇā manāpavaṇṇāti vuttaṃ hoti. Devatā hi manussalokaṃ āgacchamānā pakativaṇṇaṃ pakatiiddhiṃ jahitvā oḷārikaṃ attabhāvaṃ katvā atirekavaṇṇavatthālaṅkārakāyādīhi obhāsaṃ muñcamānādivasena ca dibbaṃ iddhānubhāvañca nimminitvā naṭasamajjādīni gacchantā manussā viya abhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgacchanti. Tattha kāmāvacarā anabhisaṅkhatenapi āgantuṃ sakkonti oḷārikarūpattā. Tathā hi te kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhā, rūpāvacarā pana anabhisaṅkhatena kāyena āgantuṃ na sakkonti sukhumatararūpattā. Tesañhi atisukhumova attabhāvo, na tena iriyāpathakappanaṃ hoti. Tasmā brahmalokepi brahmāno yebhuyyena nimmitarūpeneva pavattanti. Mūlapaṭisandhirūpañhi nesaṃ ativiya sukhumamahārūpaṃ, kevalaṃ taṃ cittuppādassa nissayādhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ saṇṭhānavantaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati.
“纯然全分”:此处“纯然”一词意为毫无剩余,“全分”一词意为周遍一切,故“纯然全分的树林”即毫无剩余、周遍一切的树林。因即使有能力遍照无余的光明,也可能由于某种原因而只照一处,为表明此光明全然遍照,故取用表周遍义的“全分”一词。或者,“纯然全分”也可理解为稍有不圆满。因世尊光明未照到的区域,诸天便以自身光明去照亮。事实上,世尊的光明不会被任何光明所压制,反而能压制乃至日月等的光明而存在。“照亮后”意指:以衣饰、庄严具及身体所生的光明遍照,如同月亮、如同太阳,使其成为一片光明、一片辉耀。因为诸天的身光能遍照十由旬、十二由旬左右乃至更远之处,衣饰、庄严具等所生的光明也是如此。“四方”指在四个方向。“所谓名”指称为名。显示巴利原文
Kevalakappanti ettha kevala-saddassa anavasesattaṃ attho, kappa-saddassa samantabhāvo, tasmā kevalakappaṃ vanasaṇḍanti anavasesaṃ samantato vanasaṇḍanti attho. Anavasesaṃ pharituṃ samatthassapi hi obhāsassa kenaci kāraṇena ekadesapharaṇampi siyā, ayaṃ pana sabbaso pharatīti dassetuṃ samantattho kappa-saddo gahito. Atha vā īsaṃ asamatthaṃ kevalakappaṃ. Bhagavato pabhāya anobhāsitameva hi padesaṃ devatā attano pabhāya obhāsenti. Na hi bhagavato pabhā kāyaci pabhāya abhibhūyati, sūriyādīnampi pana pabhaṃ sā abhibhuyya tiṭṭhatīti. Obhāsetvāti vatthālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho. Devatānañhi sarīrābhā dasadvādasayojanamattaṭṭhānaṃ tato bhiyyopi pharitvā tiṭṭhati, tathā vatthābharaṇādīsu samuṭṭhitā pabhā. Catuddisāti catūsu disāsu. Yatra hi nāmāti yaṃ nāma.
43 “鸯伽摩揭陀人”指居住在鸯伽、摩揭陀两国之人。“神通神变”指属于神通的神变,并非他心神变与教诫神变。神变有三种:神通神变、他心神变、教诫神变。其中,“在此,比丘以一成多,以多成一……显现、隐匿……”等经文所示(长部1.238-239;中部1.147;相应部2.70;5.834),即神通神变。“在此,比丘能了知其他众生、其他人的心,了知其心所,了知其寻,了知其伺:‘你的心是这样,你的心是这样’”等经文所示(无碍解道3.30),即了知他心之后而说,此为他心神变。“在此,比丘这样教导:‘你们应当这样寻思,不要这样寻思;应当这样作意,不要这样作意;应当舍弃此,具足彼而住’”等经文所示(无碍解道3.30),是声闻与佛陀于一切时所应说的法教,此为教诫神变。显示巴利原文
43.Aṅgamagadhāti ubho aṅgamagadharaṭṭhavāsino. Iddhipāṭihāriyanti iddhibhūtaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ, na ādesanānusāsanīpāṭihāriyanti attho. Tividhañhi pāṭihāriyaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ anusāsanīpāṭihāriyanti. Tattha ‘‘idha bhikkhu ekopi hutvā bahudhā hoti, bahudhāpi hutvā eko hoti āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāva’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 1.238-239; ma. ni. 1.147; saṃ. ni. 2.70; 5.834) iddhividhameva iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cittampi ādisati, cetasikampi ādisati, vitakkitampi ādisati, vicāritampi ādisati ‘evampi te mano, itthampi te mano’’’tiādinayappavattaṃ (paṭi. ma. 3.30) parassa cittaṃ ñatvā kathanaṃ ādesanāpāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu evamanusāsati ‘evaṃ vitakketha, mā evaṃ vitakkayittha, evaṃ manasi karotha, mā evaṃ mānasā karittha, idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathā’’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.30) evamādinayappavattā sāvakānaṃ buddhānañca sabbakālaṃ desetabbadhammadesanā anusāsanīpāṭihāriyaṃ.
其中(优陀那义注1),对于“神变”一词的词义,他们说:因为排除敌对、去除贪等烦恼,故称“神变”。然而,世尊并无应被排除的贪等敌对烦恼;而凡夫在远离随烦恼、具足八种功德的心中,敌对已断除时,神通方得生起,因此不能以彼处的世俗言说而在此处称为“神变”。不过,若因大悲世尊所要度化者心中有烦恼为敌,排除他们烦恼而称“神变”,此说合理。或者,世尊与教法的敌对即是外道,排除他们而称“神变”,因为他们被神通、他心神变与教诫神变所排除、所去除,以去除邪见及不能显示正见的方式。“paṭi”一词,或表“之后”义,如“他进入后,另一位婆罗门来了”(小尼柯耶·事义偈4)等中所示,是故,于心得定、远离随烦恼、所作已办后,应被排除、应被生起者,即是“神变”;或者,在自己的随烦恼被第四禅与道排除之后,之后的排除即是“神变”;神通、他心神变与教诫神变,在远离随烦恼、所作已办后,为利众生应再次生起,且在排除自身随烦恼后,它们成为排除其他众生烦恼者,故是“神变”。“神变”本身就是“神…”显示巴利原文
Tattha (udā. aṭṭha. 1) pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriyanti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi ye haritabbā, puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ vattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha pāṭihāriyanti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti. Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo pacchāti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. vatthugāthā 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ, iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti, paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ. Paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Svātanāyāti sve dātabbassa atthāya.
44 “粪扫衣已生起”是指寻求者以所得的方式而生起。其寻求正是为了观看种种神变。因为手一触,莲花池便化现而出,故说“用手挖掘了莲花池”。显示巴利原文
44.Paṃsukūlaṃuppannaṃ hotīti pariyesamānassa paṭilābhavasena uppannaṃ hoti. Vicittapāṭihāriyadassanatthāva sā pariyesanā. Yasmā pāṇinā phuṭṭhamatte sā pokkharaṇī nimmitā ahosi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pāṇinā pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇitvā’’ti.
46-49 第四六至四九节。“结发者”指苦行者。因蓄留发髻,故此处称为“结发者”。“于中八夜降雪之时”,指冬季之中,摩伽月月末四夜与颇求那月月初四夜,即此二月之间的八夜降雪之时。“于尼连禅河中浮出”:有人在此被视为圣地的水中,先全身没入,再从中浮出、升起、露出水面。“沉入”指连头没入水中。“亦作浮出与沉入”指反复进行浮出与沉入。因为在那里,持“仅一次浮出,罪业便得清净”之见者,唯作浮出即离去;然而浮出不依沉入则不能存立,因其不可离故,他们亦作沉入。持“仅一次沉入,罪业便得清净”之见者,亦唯沉入一次,复因前述之不可离性而作浮出后方离去。另有持“反复浮出与沉入而沐浴,罪业便得清净”之见者,则时时作浮出与沉入。为总括这些一切,故曰“他们浮出,亦沉入,亦作浮出与沉入”。此处,虽浮出必以沉入为前导,然唯作沉入者为数甚少,而作浮出及兼作二者为数众多,为显其多,故先说浮出。显示巴利原文
46-49.Jaṭilāti tāpasā. Te hi jaṭādhāritāya idha ‘‘jaṭilā’’ti vuttā. Antaraṭṭhakāsu himapātasamayeti hemantassa utuno abbhantarabhūte māghamāsassa avasāne catasso, phagguṇamāsassa ādimhi catassoti evaṃ ubhinnamantare aṭṭharattīsu himapatanakāle. Nerañjarāya ummujjantīti keci tasmiṃ titthasammate udake paṭhamaṃ nimuggasakalasarīrā tato ummujjantā vuṭṭhahanti uppilavanti. Nimujjantīti sasīsaṃ udake osīdanti. Ummujjananimujjanampi karontīti punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanānipi karonti. Tattha hi keci ‘‘ekummujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te ummujjanameva katvā gacchanti. Ummujjanaṃ pana nimujjanamantarena natthīti avinābhāvato nimujjanampi te karontiyeva. Yepi ‘‘ekanimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, tepi ekavārameva nimujjitvā vuttanayeneva avinābhāvato ummujjanampi katvā pakkamanti. Apare ‘‘punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni katvā nahāte pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te kālena kālaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni karonti. Te sabbepi sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ummujjantipi nimujjantipi ummujjananimujjanampi karontī’’ti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi nimujjanapubbakaṃ ummujjanaṃ, nimujjanameva pana karontā katipayā, ummujjanaṃ tadubhayañca karontā bahūti tesaṃ yebhuyyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ummujjanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ.
50-51 第五十至五一节。“水流”指洪水。“尘染”指为尘垢所覆,即布满尘埃之意。而“迦叶,你既非阿拉汉”一语,以此遮止当时迦叶的无学位;亦非以“已证入阿拉汉道”肯定其有学位。二者唯显示其非圣者之状态。“彼能令你成为阿拉汉,或能证入阿拉汉道的那条行道,你亦无有”——以此更遮止其善凡夫之状态。此中,“行道”指戒清净等六种清净,依此行去,即趣入圣道,故称“行道”。“成为”意为存在。“久远以来”,指从久远以来,即自调伏那伽王之时起之意。“担衣架与火祭物”中,“衣架”指钻火棍、水壶、针等苦行者资具,搬运这些之担架,名为“担衣架”;“火祭物”指勺等供火之器具。显示巴利原文
50-51.Udakavāhakoti udakogho. Reṇuhatāyāti rajogatāya, rajokiṇṇāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Neva ca kho tvaṃ kassapa arahāti etena tadā kassapassa asekkhabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati, nāpi arahattamaggasamāpannoti etena sekkhabhāvaṃ. Ubhayenapissa anariyabhāvameva dīpeti. Sāpi te paṭipadā natthi, yāya tvaṃ arahā vā assasi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti iminā panassa kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāvampi paṭikkhipati. Tattha paṭipadāti sīlavisuddhiādayo cha visuddhiyo. Paṭipajjati etāya ariyamaggoti paṭipadā. Assasīti bhaveyyāsi. Cirapaṭikāti cirakālato paṭṭhāya, nāgadamanato paṭṭhāyāti attho. Khārikājamissanti ettha khārīti araṇīkamaṇḍalusūciādayo tāpasaparikkhārā, taṃ haraṇakājaṃ khārikājaṃ. Aggihutamissanti dabbiādiaggipūjopakaraṇaṃ.
52-53 第五二至五三节。“障难”指灾患。今为将三千五百次神变一并计算以示,乃开始讲述“依世尊之加持,五百根木柴未能劈开”等。然而,调伏那伽王等十六种神变在此未予计入,应知与此合计,共为三千五百一十六次神变。显示巴利原文
52-53.Upasaggoti upaddavo. Idāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni pāṭihāriyasahassāni ekato gaṇetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavato adhiṭṭhānena pañca kaṭṭhasatāni na phāliyiṃsū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Nāgadamanādīni pana soḷasa pāṭihāriyāni idha na gaṇitāni, tehi saddhiṃ soḷasātirekaaḍḍhuḍḍhapāṭihāriyasahassānīti veditabbaṃ.
燃烧经注释显示巴利原文
Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
54 第五十四节。现在,为了说明那一千位比丘因听闻《燃烧经》的教导而证得阿拉汉果,开始宣说“那时,世尊……”等语。其中,“住于伽耶的伽耶山顶”是说:因靠近名为伽耶的河流,有一村庄名为伽耶,世尊便住于该伽耶村。此处用的是邻近处的处所格。在伽耶村附近,有一名为伽耶的池塘,也有一条河流,还有一处名为伽耶山顶、形状如象额的后背岩石。世尊正住在能容纳千位比丘之处,故说“于伽耶山顶”,意为住在伽耶村附近、名为伽耶山顶的后背岩石处。“告诸比丘”是指:世尊思择适合他们的法教后,为宣说该法而告知他们。世尊带领那千位手持神通所成衣钵的沙门,来到伽耶山顶,在他们围绕中坐下,而后思惟:“何种法谈适合他们?”随即决定:“这些人日夜奉事于火,我将把十二处开示为如同正在燃烧、炽燃一般,这样他们便能证得阿拉汉果。”于是,为了向他们如此宣说,便开示了这篇《燃烧经》:“诸比丘,一切在燃烧……”等。显示巴利原文
54. Idāni tassa bhikkhusahassassa ādittapariyāyadesanāya arahattappattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha khobhagavā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha gayāyaṃ viharati gayāsīseti gayānāmikāya nadiyā avidūre bhavattā gāmo gayā nāma, tassaṃ gayāyaṃ viharati. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Gayāgāmassa hi avidūre gayāti ekā pokkharaṇīpi atthi nadīpi gayāsīsanāmako hatthikumbhasadiso piṭṭhipāsāṇopi. Yattha bhikkhusahassassa okāso pahoti, bhagavā tattha viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gayāsīse’’ti, gayāgāmassa āsanne gayāsīsanāmake piṭṭhipāsāṇe viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhikkhū āmantesīti tesaṃ sappāyadhammadesanaṃ vicinitvā taṃ desessāmīti āmantesi. Bhagavā hi taṃ iddhimayapattacīvaradharaṃ samaṇasahassaṃ ādāya gayāsīsaṃ gantvā tena parivārito nisīditvā ‘‘katarā nu kho etesaṃ dhammakathā sappāyā’’ti cintento ‘‘ime sāyaṃ pātaṃ aggiṃ paricaranti, imesaṃ dvādasāyatanāni ādittāni sampajjalitāni viya katvā dassessāmi, evaṃ ime arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ sakkhissantī’’ti sanniṭṭhānamakāsi. Atha nesaṃ tathā desetuṃ ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’ntiādinā imaṃ ādittapariyāyaṃ abhāsi.
其中(《相应部注》3.4.23),所谓“一切”有四种:一切一切、处一切、有身一切、部分一切。于此——显示巴利原文
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.23) sabbaṃ nāma catubbidhaṃ sabbasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ padesasabbanti. Tattha –
在此,无有任何他所未见之物;
亦无未了知、不应知之事;
一切所应知者,如来皆已遍知,
因此,如来名为具一切眼者。”(大义释 156;小义释·豆陀迦学童问释 32;无碍解道 1.121)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Na tassa addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñci; Atho aviññātamajānitabbaṃ; Sabbaṃ abhiññāsi yadatthi neyyaṃ; Tathāgato tena samantacakkhū’’ti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. dhotakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 32; paṭi. ma. 1.121) –
这便是“一切一切”。“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说一切,谛听”(《相应部》4.23),这便是“处一切”。“诸比丘,我将为你们宣说一切法根本门”(《中部》1.1),这便是“有身一切”。“于一切法中最初现起的心、意、意所、相应意识界”,这便是“部分一切”。如此,仅五所缘为部分一切,三地诸法为有身一切,四地诸法为处一切,凡所应知者为一切一切。部分一切不涵盖有身一切,因为其中不包含三地诸法中的一部分。有身一切不涵盖处一切,因为其不包含出世间法。处一切亦不涵盖一切一切。何以故?因处一切仅摄四地诸法,而不摄概念施设。然而,在此经中,意指处一切,但即使在此,也唯应取随观所及之法。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ sabbasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.23) idaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammamūlapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.1) idaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sabbadhammesu vā paṭhamasamannāhāro uppajjati cittaṃ mano mānasaṃ tajjā manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti idaṃ padesasabbaṃ nāma. Iti pañcārammaṇamattaṃ padesasabbaṃ, tebhūmakā dhammā sakkāyasabbaṃ, catubhūmakā dhammā āyatanasabbaṃ, yaṃ kiñci neyyaṃ sabbasabbaṃ. Padesasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti tassa tebhūmakadhammesupi ekadesassa asaṅgaṇhanato. Sakkāyasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ asaṅgaṇhanato. Āyatanasabbaṃ sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Kasmā? Yasmā āyatanasabbena catubhūmakadhammāva pariggahitā , na lakkhaṇapaññattiyoti. Imasmiṃ pana sutte āyatanasabbaṃ adhippetaṃ, tatthāpi idha vipassanupagadhammāva gahetabbā.
眼者(《法集论注》596;《相应部注》3.4.1),有两种眼:智眼与肉眼。其中,智眼有五种:佛眼、法眼、遍眼、天眼与慧眼。这其中,所谓佛眼,即了知众生习性随眠之智与了知根器胜劣之智,如经云“以佛眼观察世间”(《长部》2.69;《中部》1.283)所说。所谓法眼,即下三道与三种果,如经云“远尘离垢之法眼生起”(《长部》1.355;《相应部》5.1081)所说。所谓遍眼,即一切知智,如经云“登殿堂而具遍眼”(《长部》2.70;《中部》1.282)所说。所谓天眼,即由光明增上而生起之智,如经云“以清净、超越凡夫的天眼”(《中部》1.148, 284)所说。所谓慧眼,即通晓四谛之智,如经云“眼生起”(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》15)所说。肉眼亦有二种:扶根肉眼与净色肉眼。这其中,位于眼眶内、被眼膜包覆之肉团,略说有色、香、味、食素、命根、身净色、眼净色等十三种成分。详言之,地、水、火、风四界与色、香、味、食素,此九种依四种生起而有三十六种,加上命根、身净色与眼净色四种为业所生,故合为四十种成分,此即所谓显示巴利原文
Cakkhūti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.1) dve cakkhūni ñāṇacakkhu ceva maṃsacakkhu ca. Tattha ñāṇacakkhu pañcavidhaṃ buddhacakkhu dhammacakkhu samantacakkhu dibbacakkhu paññācakkhūti. Tesu buddhacakkhu nāma āsayānusayañāṇañceva indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca, yaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento’’ti (dī. ni. 2.69; ma. ni. 1.283) āgataṃ. Dhammacakkhu nāma heṭṭhimā tayo maggā tīṇi ca phalāni, yaṃ ‘‘virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.355; saṃ. ni. 5.1081) āgataṃ. Samantacakkhu nāma sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘pāsādamāruyha samantacakkhū’’ti (dī. ni. 2.70; ma. ni. 1.282) āgataṃ. Dibbacakkhu nāma ālokavaḍḍhanena uppannañāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā visuddhenā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.148, 284) āgataṃ. Paññācakkhu nāma catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) āgataṃ. Maṃsacakkhupi duvidhaṃ sasambhāracakkhu pasādacakkhūti. Tesu yvāyaṃ akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehi parivārito maṃsapiṇḍo, yattha catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavo jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhuppasādo kāyappasādoti saṅkhepato terasa sambhārā honti, vitthārato pana catasso dhātuyo vaṇṇagandharasojā sambhavoti ime nava catusamuṭṭhānavasena chattiṃsa, jīvitaṃ bhāvo cakkhuppasādo kāyappasādoti ime kammasamuṭṭhānā tāva cattāroti cattālīsa sambhārā honti, idaṃ sasambhāracakkhu nāma. Yaṃ panettha setamaṇḍalaparicchinnena kaṇhamaṇḍalena parivārite diṭṭhimaṇḍale sanniviṭṭhaṃ rūpadassanasamatthaṃ pasādamattaṃ, idaṃ pasādacakkhu nāma. Tassa tato paresañca sotādīnaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.436) vuttāva.
其中,对于此净色眼,世尊依之而说“眼燃烧”等。此处,燃烧,即点燃、炽燃,意为被十一种火所烧而成为一片火网。依止于眼而生起的识为眼识,或者说,以眼为因的识为眼识。诚然,色、光明、作意等亦是此识生起的因,但它们为共通因,而眼为不共因,故以不共因而作此说,犹如说“麦芽”。耳识等亦同此理。依止于眼而生起的触为眼触,此为与眼识相应之触的异名。耳触等亦同此理。依眼触为缘而生起的受,即以眼触为根本缘而生起的领受、推度、确定与速行之受。至于与眼识相应之受,眼触为其缘之事,实不待言。因为眼触对俱生之受以俱生等力而为缘,对非俱生之受则以亲依止等力而为缘。故说“依眼触为缘,生起乐受、或苦受、或不苦不乐受”。耳门受等亦同此理。此处,意者,指有分心,因此处许意门。法者,即法所缘。意识者,即舍俱转向与速行。意触者,即与有分俱生之触。受者,即与转向相应之受及速行相应之受。至于与有分相应之受,其取用实无可说。或者,若不离析转向于有分之外,则意者应视为舍俱转向之有分。法者,即法所缘。意识者,即速行识。意触者,即与有分及转向俱生之触。受者,即与速行俱生之受,亦可包括与有分及转向俱生之受。显示巴利原文
Tattha yadidaṃ pasādacakkhu, tañca gahetvā bhagavā ‘‘cakkhu āditta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ādittanti padittaṃ, sampajjalitaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ekajālībhūtanti attho. Cakkhusannissitaṃ viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, cakkhussa vā kāraṇabhūtassa viññāṇaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Kāmaṃ rūpālokamanasikārādayopi tassa viññāṇassa kāraṇaṃ, te pana sādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ, cakkhu asādhāraṇanti asādhāraṇakāraṇenāyaṃ niddeso yathā ‘‘yavaṅkuro’’ti. Sotaviññāṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Cakkhusannissito phasso cakkhusamphasso, cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphassassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sotasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo. Cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjativedayitanti cakkhusamphassaṃ mūlapaccayaṃ katvā uppannā sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanajavanavedanā. Cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāya pana vedanāya cakkhusamphassassa paccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Cakkhusamphasso hi sahajātāya vedanāya sahajātādivasena, asahajātāya upanissayādivasena paccayo hoti. Teneva ‘‘cakkhusamphassapaccayā uppajjati vedayitaṃ sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sotadvāravedanādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha pana manoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ manodvārassa adhippetattā. Dhammāti dhammārammaṇaṃ. Manoviññāṇanti sahāvajjanakaṃ javanaṃ. Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgasahajāto phasso. Vedayitanti āvajjanavedanāya saddhiṃ javanavedanā. Bhavaṅgasampayuttāya pana vedanāya gahaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Āvajjanaṃ vā bhavaṅgato amocetvā manoti sāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhammāti dhammārammaṇameva. Manoviññāṇanti javanaviññāṇaṃ. Manosamphassoti bhavaṅgāvajjanasahajāto phasso. Vedayitanti javanasahajātā vedanā, bhavaṅgāvajjanasahajātāpi vaṭṭatiyeva.
所谓贪火等,贪本身以燃烧之义而称为火,故说贪火。因为贪生起时变得锐利,燃烧、焚烤有情,所以称为“火”。其余二者也是如此。此处有诸事例(《长部注》3.305;《分别论注》924)——有一位年轻比丘尼,在心山寺前往布萨堂时,站着注视守门人的形貌。当时,她内在的贪变得极为锐利而生起,那贪所生的火界以极锐利的特性,连同与它俱生的诸法,烧毁了心脏所在处,犹如外火烧毁所依之物。于是那位比丘尼被烧而死。比丘尼们前来,说道:“这年轻比丘尼还站着,去叫她吧。”一人上前抓住她的手问:“为何站着?”刚一抓住,她便转身倒地。这是贪具有燃烧性的事例。显示巴利原文
Rāgagginātiādīsu rāgova anudahanaṭṭhena aggīti rāgaggi. Rāgo hi tikhiṇaṃ hutvā uppajjamāno satte anudahati jhāpeti, tasmā ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Tatrimāni vatthūni (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; vibha. aṭṭha. 924) – ekā daharabhikkhunī cittalapabbatavihāre uposathāgāraṃ gantvā dvārapālarūpaṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā. Athassā anto rāgo tikhiṇataro hutvā uppanno, tasmā taṃsamuṭṭhānā tejodhātu ativiya tikhiṇabhāvena saddhiṃ attanā sahajātadhammehi hadayapadesaṃ jhāpesi yathā taṃ bāhirā tejodhātu sannissayaṃ, tena sā bhikkhunī jhāyitvā kālamakāsi. Bhikkhuniyo gacchamānā ‘‘ayaṃ daharā ṭhitā, pakkosatha na’’nti āhaṃsu. Ekā gantvā ‘‘kasmā ṭhitāsī’’ti hatthe gaṇhi. Gahitamattā parivattitvā papatā. Idaṃ tāva rāgassa anudahanatāya vatthu.
关于嗔的燃烧,应见因心意生起忿怒的天众。据传(《长部·注疏》1.47-48),有一位天子心想:“我要玩赏星宿”,便与随从驾着战车沿路行进。此时另一位天子出门,看见前面那位行进的天子,便生起嗔怒,心想:“唉,这个可怜虫,就像没见过世面似的,见到这个就欢喜得仿佛膨胀起来、仿佛要裂开似的走着。”前面行进的天子也转过身来,看见那位生气的天子,心想:“生气的人很容易被认出来”,知道对方生起嗔怒后,便回嗔道:“你生气了又能把我怎么样?这份荣华是我通过布施、持戒等获得的,不是靠你获得的。”当一方生气而另一方不生气时,便能保护自己。因为生气者的嗔恚,在对方不生气时,由于无所执取,仅生起一次而无反复,便不能使他堕落,犹如火遇到水般熄灭,所以不生气者能保护自己免于堕落。然而,若双方都生气,一方的嗔恚成为另一方的缘,另一方的嗔恚也成为这一方的缘,二者便如同互相叫喊着堕入内宫一般而堕落。因为当双方都生气时,嗔恚通过彼此间越来越强的增长力,以锐利的现起、以烧毁所依之味,生起时烧灼心所依处,毁坏极其微细……显示巴利原文
Dosassa pana anudahanatāya manopadosikā devā daṭṭhabbā. Tesu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.47-48) kira eko devaputto ‘‘nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmī’’ti saparivāro rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjati. Athañño nikkhamanto taṃ purato gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘bho ayaṃ kapaṇo adiṭṭhapubbaṃ viya etaṃ disvā pītiyā uddhumāto viya bhijjamāno viya ca gacchatī’’ti kujjhati. Purato gacchantopi nivattitvā taṃ kuddhaṃ disvā kuddhā nāma suvijānā hontīti kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvā ‘‘tvaṃ kuddho mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasi, ayaṃ sampatti mayā dānasīlādīnaṃ vasena laddhā, na tuyhaṃ vasenā’’ti paṭikujjhati. Ekasmiñhi kuddhe itaro akuddho rakkhati. Kuddhassa hi so kodho itarasmiṃ akujjhante anupādāno ekavārameva uppattiyā anāsevano cāvetuṃ na sakkoti, udakaṃ patvā aggi viya nibbāyati, tasmā akuddho taṃ cavanato rakkhati. Ubhosu pana kuddhesu ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti, tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ubho kandantānaṃyeva orodhānaṃ cavanti. Ubhosu hi kuddhesu bhiyyo bhiyyo aññamaññamhi parivaḍḍhanavasena tikhiṇasamudācāro nissayadahanaraso kodho uppajjamāno hadayavatthuṃ niddahanto accantasukhumālaṃ karajakāyaṃ vināseti, tato sakalopi attabhāvo antaradhāyati. Idaṃ dosassa anudahanatāya vatthu.
关于愚痴的燃烧,应见嬉戏生过患的天众。由于愚痴之力,他们失去正念,因此耽于嬉戏而错过进食时间,便致死亡。据传(《长部·注疏》1.45-46),他们凭着由殊胜福德所获得的广大荣华与财富玩赏星宿,由于那份荣华极为广大,他们连“我们用了饮食,还是没用饮食”都不知道。于是从错过一餐开始,即使之后不间断地又吃又喝,也依然死去,无法存活。为什么呢?因为业生火界强盛。人类的业生火界微弱,业生身则强健。由于他们火界微弱、业生身强健,即使过了七天,也能用热水、凉粥等来支撑身体。然而天众的火界强盛,因为是由广大福德所生,且消化了广大、厚重、滋润的天食;而业生身则微弱,因为柔软、微细、娇嫩。正因如此,世尊在因陀罗娑罗窟,对无法站在自然地面的天帝释说:“你应决意令身粗重。”因此,他们只要错过一次进食时间便无法存活。犹如在夏季正午,放在热石上的莲花或青莲花,到了傍晚即使以百壶水浇灌,也不能恢复原样,只会枯萎;同样地,他们后来即使不间断地又吃又喝,也依然死去,无法存活。显示巴利原文
Mohassa pana anudahanatāya khiḍḍāpadosikā devā daṭṭhabbā. Mohavasena hi tesaṃ satisammoso hoti, tasmā khiḍḍāvasena āhārakālaṃ ativattetvā kālaṃ karonti. Te (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.45-46) kira puññavisesādhigatena mahantena attano sirivibhavena nakkhattaṃ kīḷantā tāya sampattimahantatāya ‘‘āhāraṃ paribhuñjimha, na paribhuñjimhā’’tipi na jānanti. Atha ekāhārātikkamanato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva na tiṭṭhanti. Kasmā? Kammajatejassa balavatāya. Manussānañhi kammajatejo mando, karajakāyo balavā. Tesaṃ tejassa mandatāya karajakāyassa balavatāya sattāhampi atikkamitvā uṇhodakaacchayāguādīhi sakkā vatthuṃ upatthambhetuṃ. Devānaṃ pana tejo balavā hoti uḷārapuññanibbattattā uḷāragarusiniddhasudhāhārajiraṇato ca, karajaṃ mandaṃ mudusukhumālabhāvato. Teneva hi bhagavā indasālaguhāyaṃ pakatipathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ asakkontaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ ‘‘oḷārikakāyaṃ adhiṭṭhāhī’’ti āha, tasmā te ekaṃ āhāravelaṃ atikkamitvā saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā nāma gimhānaṃ majjhanhike tattapāsāṇe ṭhapitaṃ padumaṃ vā uppalaṃ vā sāyanhasamaye ghaṭasatenapi siñciyamānaṃ pākatikaṃ na hoti vinassatiyeva, evameva pacchā nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva na tiṭṭhanti.
那么,他们的食物是什么?进食的时间又在何时?所有欲界天众皆以天食为食,其中下层诸天的天食,依次比上层诸天的更为殊胜。他们按照各自的时日,日复一日地受用。但也有人说道:“他们食用如猫足迹般大小的天食。那食物只要置于舌上,便能遍满全身,直至发端与爪尖,仅以他们的一日来计算,便可维持七日。”显示巴利原文
Ko pana tesaṃ āhāro, kā āhāravelāti? Sabbesampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ sudhā āhāro, so heṭṭhimehi heṭṭhimehi uparimānaṃ uparimānaṃ paṇītatamo hoti. Taṃ yathāsakaṃ divasavasena divase divase bhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘biḷārapadappamāṇaṃ sudhāhāraṃ bhuñjanti. So jivhāya ṭhapitamatto yāva kesagganakhaggā kāyaṃ pharati, tesaṃyeva divasavasena sattadivasaṃ yāpanasamatthova hotī’’ti vadanti.
那么,哪些天众被称为嬉戏生过患天呢?注疏中并没有简别说“就是这些”,而是笼统地指出“业生之火界强盛,而由业所生之身则微弱”,因此应当理解为:但凡任何以段食为生的天众,若如此而行,便会如此死去。然而有些人说:“那些天众是化乐天和他化自在天。仅因对嬉戏生起过患,他们便被称为嬉戏生过患天。”至于心意生起恼恨的天众,注疏中说为四大王天。但另有些人说:“嬉戏生过患天也是四大王天。”如此,贪等三者,以燃烧之义,当知为“火”。而生等燃烧,则因其作为种种苦的所依而燃烧,故称为火。忧等燃烧之义是显而易见的。此处其余内容如前所述。因此,在此经中,通过眼等以十一种火而燃烧,说明了苦相;并由于以苦性,说明了苦的状态。显示巴利原文
Ke pana te khiḍḍāpadosikā nāma devāti? Ime nāmāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāraṇā natthi, ‘‘kammajatejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ manda’’nti avisesena vuttattā pana ye keci kabaḷīkārāhārūpajīvino evaṃ karonti, te evaṃ cavantīti veditabbā. Keci panāhu ‘‘nimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattino te devā. Khiḍḍāya padussanamatteneva hete khiḍḍāpadosikāti vuttā’’ti. Manopadosikā pana cātumahārājikāti aṭṭhakathāyameva vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘khiḍḍāpadosikāpi cātumahārājikāyevā’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ tāva rāgādayo tayo anudahanaṭṭhena ‘‘aggī’’ti veditabbā. Jātiādittayaṃ pana nānappakāradukkhavatthubhāvena anudahanato aggi. Sokādīnaṃ anudahanatā pākaṭāyeva. Sesamettha vuttanayameva. Iti imasmiṃ sutte dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvena dukkhamatāya dukkhabhāvassa kathitattā.
频婆娑罗会见故事注释显示巴利原文
Bimbisārasamāgamakathāvaṇṇanā
55 55. 现在,为了阐明“当时,世尊在象头山随宜住了一段时间后”等句中,那些词义隐晦的注解,而开始讲述“拉提瓦那即是多罗园”等内容。其中,“多罗园”是因多罗树众多而得名的园林。在“某些人朝着世尊所在的方向合掌致敬”等句中,“合掌致敬”是针对那些态度摇摆不定者而说的。据说他们这样想:“如果持邪见者斥责我们‘你们为何礼敬沙门乔达摩’,我们就回答‘仅仅合掌就算是礼敬吗?’如果持正见者斥责‘你们为何不礼敬世尊’,我们就回答‘难道只有以头触地才算礼敬吗?合掌不也是礼敬吗?’”所谓告知名字与族姓,即是在说“乔达摩尊者,我是某人之子,名叫达陀、名叫密陀,来到这里”的人,是在告知名字;而在说“乔达摩尊者,我是瓦色塔族人,是迦旃延族人,来到这里”的人,则是在告知族姓。据说这些贫穷的没落家族子弟,为了在众人中凭借名字与族姓而扬名,才这样做的。至于那些默然安坐的人,则既是狡狯者,也是愚痴者。其中,狡狯者这样想:“与一两个人说上三言两语就会成为熟人,一旦熟识了,若不向一两位比丘布施就不合适了”,为了从中脱身,他便默然安坐。愚痴者则纯粹是由于无知而安坐,如同。显示巴利原文
55. Idāni ‘‘atha kho bhagavā gayāsīse yathābhirantaṃ viharitvā’’tiādīsu yā sā anuttānapadavaṇṇanā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘laṭṭhivaneti tāluyyāne’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tāluyyāneti tālarukkhānaṃ bahubhāvato evaṃladdhanāme uyyāne. Appekacce yena bhagavā tenañjaliṃ paṇāmetvātiādīsu añjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti ye ubhatopakkhikā, te sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Te kira evaṃ cintayiṃsu ‘‘sace no micchādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā tumhe samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vanditthā’ti, tesaṃ ‘kiṃ añjalimattakaraṇenapi vanditaṃ hotī’ti vakkhāma. Sace no sammādiṭṭhikā codessanti ‘kasmā bhagavantaṃ na vanditthā’ti, ‘kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vanditaṃ hoti, nanu añjalikammampi vandanā evā’ti vakkhāmā’’ti. Nāmagottaṃ sāvetvāti ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ asukassa putto datto nāma mitto nāma idha āgato’’ti vadantā nāmaṃ sāventi nāma, ‘‘bho gotama, ahaṃ vāseṭṭho nāma kaccāno nāma idhāgato’’ti vadantā gottaṃ sāventi nāma. Ete kira daliddā jiṇṇakulaputtā parisamajjhe nāmagottavasena pākaṭā bhavissāmāti evaṃ akaṃsu. Ye pana tuṇhībhūtā nisīdiṃsu, te kerāṭikā ceva andhabālā ca. Tattha kerāṭikā ‘‘ekaṃ dve kathāsallāpe karonte vissāsiko hoti, atha vissāse sati ekaṃ dve bhikkhā adātuṃ na yutta’’nti tato attānaṃ mocentā tuṇhī nisīdanti. Andhabālā aññāṇatāyeva avakkhittā mattikāpiṇḍo viya yattha katthaci tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti.
“对瘦弱者的教导”:在此,为显示“对瘦弱者的教导”这一义理分别,先说“由于苦行生活而身体瘦弱”等。“火供”即侍奉火。此处,色等由于可欲求的意义而称为“欲”,所以说“这些色等是欲”。“祭祀得以成就”是说他们宣说因祭祀而成功。“在依着中”:此处有四种依着,即欲依着、蕴依着、烦恼依着、行依着。欲也是“缘于五种欲功德而生起的快乐喜悦,这是欲的味”等所说乐的依止处,依“乐依于此”的词义而称为“依着”。蕴因为是蕴所生苦的依止处,烦恼因为是恶趣苦的依止处,行因为是生存苦的依止处,而被称为“依着”。其中,此处理解为蕴依着,所以说“了知在蕴依着中的垢秽”。“祭祀只是垢秽”,是他们说因祭祀而成功的只是垢秽。“在已献供中”指在大祭祀中。“在已奉事中”指每日应做的侍火工作。“不执著于欲有”即不粘著于欲有,意为从那里解脱。显示巴利原文
Kisakovadānoti ettha kisakānaṃ ovadāno kisakovadānoti imaṃ tāva atthavikappaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tāpasacariyāya kisasarīrattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aggihuttanti aggiparicaraṇaṃ. Rūpādayova idha kāmanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘kāmā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘ete rūpādayo kāme’’ti. Yaññā abhivadantīti yāgahetu ijjhantīti vadanti. Upadhīsūti ettha cattāro upadhī kāmupadhi khandhupadhi kilesupadhi abhisaṅkhārupadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.167) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato upadhīyati ettha sukhanti iminā vacanatthena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti. Khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti, tesu khandhupadhi idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘khandhupadhīsu malanti ñatvā’’ti. Yaññā malameva vadantīti yāgahetu malameva ijjhatīti vadanti. Yiṭṭheti mahāyāge. Huteti divase divase kattabbaaggiparicaraṇe. Kāmabhave asattanti kāmabhave alaggaṃ, tabbinimuttanti vuttaṃ hoti.
57-58 57-58.“希求”即渴望。在诸天界黄金中,肩胛金也是最上等的,所以说“肩胛金块之色”。正如在人用黄金中,合金金是低劣的,经熔炼的金则更胜一筹,从矿中出产的金又胜于熔炼金,而任何天界黄金都更为殊胜;同样,在天界黄金中,赡部洲金胜于紫磨金,肩胛金又胜于赡部洲金,因此它是最上等的。“肩胛金块”是指以尼迦重量制成的肩胛金金片。用不足一尼迦金制成的,经不起锤打与磨光;用超过一尼迦金制成的,虽经得起锤打与磨光,却不具光泽,显得质地粗糙;用一尼迦金制成的,既能经得起锤打与磨光,又具足光泽。有人说一尼迦是二十金,另有人说是二十五金。而在《中部义注》中说:“所谓尼迦,是五钱金。”据说一钱金是四达罗那。显示巴利原文
57-58.Āsīsanāti patthanā. Dibbasuvaṇṇesupi siṅgīsuvaṇṇassa sabbaseṭṭhattā ‘‘siṅgīnikkhasavaṇṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yatheva hi manussaparibhoge suvaṇṇe yuttikataṃ hīnaṃ, tato rasaviddhaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, rasaviddhato ākaruppannaṃ, tato yaṃ kiñci dibbaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, evaṃ dibbasuvaṇṇesupi cāmīkarato sātakumbhaṃ, sātakumbhato jambunadaṃ, jambunadato siṅgīsuvaṇṇaṃ, tasmā taṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Siṅgīnikkhanti ca nikkhaparimāṇena siṅgīsuvaṇṇena kataṃ suvaṇṇapaṭṭaṃ. Ūnakanikkhena katañhi ghaṭṭanamajjanakkhamaṃ na hoti, atirekena kataṃ ghaṭṭanamajjanaṃ khamati, vaṇṇavantaṃ pana na hoti, pharusadhātukaṃ khāyati, nikkhena kataṃ ghaṭṭanamajjanañceva khamati vaṇṇavantañca hoti. Nikkhaṃ pana vīsatisuvaṇṇanti keci . Pañcavīsatisuvaṇṇanti apare. Majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘nikkhaṃ nāma pañcasuvaṇṇā’’ti vuttaṃ. Suvaṇṇo nāma catudharaṇanti vadanti.
安住于十种圣住者——显示巴利原文
Dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāsoti –
诸比丘,在此,比丘断除了五支,具足了六支,拥有一护,安住于四依,舍离了各别的真理,彻底平息了寻求,思惟清净无浊,身行轻安,心善解脱,慧善解脱。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha, (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 10.20) bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti chaḷaṅgasamannāgato ekārakkho caturāpasseno panuṇṇapaccekasacco samavayasaṭṭhesano anāvilasaṅkappo passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro suvimuttacitto suvimuttapañño.
诸比丘,比丘如何断除五支呢?在此,诸比丘,比丘已断除欲贪,已断除嗔恚,已断除昏沉睡眠,已断除掉举追悔,已断除疑惑。诸比丘,比丘便是如此断除五支的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca , bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmacchando pahīno hoti, byāpādo pahīno hoti, thinamiddhaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pahīnaṃ hoti, vicikicchā pahīnā hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu pañcaṅgavippahīno hoti.
诸比丘,比丘又如何具足六支呢?在此,诸比丘,比丘以眼见到色法后,既不欢喜也不忧恼,安住于舍,具足正念与正知;以耳听闻声法后……以鼻嗅到香法后……以舌尝到味法后……以身触到触法后……以意识知法法后,既不欢喜也不忧恼,安住于舍,具足正念与正知。诸比丘,比丘便是如此具足六支的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Sotena saddaṃ sutvā…pe… ghānena gandhaṃ ghāyitvā… jivhāya rasaṃ sāyitvā… kāyena phoṭṭhabbaṃ phusitvā… manasā dhammaṃ viññāya neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti.
诸比丘,比丘如何具有一护?在此,诸比丘,比丘具足以念防护之心。诸比丘,比丘如此即具有一护。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu satārakkhena cetasā samannāgato hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ekārakkho hoti.
诸比丘,比丘如何具有四依?在此,诸比丘,比丘于审虑后受用一事,于审虑后忍受一事,于审虑后回避一事,于审虑后去除一事。诸比丘,比丘如此即具有四依。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati, saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāseti, saṅkhāyekaṃ parivajjeti, saṅkhāyekaṃ vinodeti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu caturāpasseno hoti.
诸比丘,比丘如何是已断除个别执取真实者?在此,诸比丘,种种沙门婆罗门的种种个别执取真实,比丘对所有这些皆已驱除、彻底驱除、舍弃、吐出、释放、断除、彻底舍离。诸比丘,比丘如此便是已断除个别执取真实者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu panuṇṇapaccekasacco hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yāni tāni puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ puthupaccekasaccāni , sabbāni tāni nuṇṇāni honti panuṇṇāni cattāni vantāni muttāni pahīnāni paṭinissaṭṭhāni. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu panuṇṇapaccekasacco hoti.
比丘们,比丘如何成为已完全舍离寻求者呢?在此,比丘们,比丘已断除欲寻求,已断除有寻求,梵行寻求也已止息。比丘们,比丘这样便是已完全舍离寻求者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmesanā pahīnā hoti, bhavesanā pahīnā hoti, brahmacariyesanā paṭippassaddhā. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samavayasaṭṭhesano hoti.
比丘们,比丘如何成为无浊思惟者呢?在此,比丘们,比丘已断除欲思惟,已断除嗔恚思惟,已断除害思惟。比丘们,比丘这样便是无浊思惟者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno kāmasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, byāpādasaṅkappo pahīno hoti, vihiṃsāsaṅkappo pahīno hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu anāvilasaṅkappo hoti.
比丘们,比丘如何成为身行轻安者呢?在此,比丘们,比丘由断除乐与断除苦,以及先前喜与忧的灭没,进入并安住于不苦不乐、舍念清净的第四禅。比丘们,比丘这样便是身行轻安者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passaddhakāyasaṅkhāro hoti.
诸比丘,比丘如何为善解脱心者?诸比丘,于此,比丘的心从贪解脱,从瞋解脱,从痴解脱。诸比丘,如此便是善解脱心者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno rāgācittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti, dosā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti, mohā cittaṃ vimuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttacitto hoti.
诸比丘,比丘如何为善解脱慧者?诸比丘,于此,比丘了知:‘我的贪已断除,其根已截,如截断的多罗树桩,无有再生,未来不生的法。’了知:‘我的瞋已断除……(中略)……我的痴已断除,其根已截,如截断的多罗树桩,无有再生,未来不生的法。’诸比丘,如此便是善解脱慧者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘rāgo me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti, ‘doso me pahīno…pe… moho me pahīno ucchinnamūlo tālāvatthukato anabhāvaṃkato āyatiṃ anuppādadhammo’ti pajānāti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu suvimuttapañño hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348; a. ni. 10.20) –
如是,他已安住于所证得的十种圣者住处。显示巴利原文
Evamāgatesu dasasu ariyavāsesu vutthavāso.
其中,“住处”是因为他们住于此;唯是圣者的住处,故为“圣者住处”,因为非圣者不可能有那样的住处。此处,“圣者”以最高含义指漏尽者。“一守护者”指他有一称为念的守护,故为一守护者。因为漏尽者在三门中,一切时念都成就守护的作用。因此,他无论行、住、睡、醒,恒常不断地有智见现前,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Tattha vasanti etthāti vāsā, ariyānaṃ eva vāsāti ariyavāsā anariyānaṃ tādisānaṃ vāsānaṃ asambhavato. Ariyāti cettha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena khīṇāsavā gahitā. Ekārakkhoti ekā satisaṅkhātā ārakkhā etassāti ekārakkho. Khīṇāsavassa (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.20) hi tīsu dvāresu sabbakāle sati ārakkhakiccaṃ sādheti. Tenevassa carato ca tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hotīti vuccati.
“四依止者”:因为他有四种依止、四种依靠,故名四依止者。“思择后”:即以智慧(思择)。“受用”:即以智慧了知后,只受用适合受用者。其详细内容应依“如理思择后受用衣服”等而了知。“思择后忍受一种”:即以智慧了知后,只忍受适合忍受的。其详细内容应依“如理思择后忍耐寒冷”等而了知。“回避”:即以智慧了知后,只回避适合回避的。其详细内容应依“如理思择后回避凶猛的大象”等而了知。“去除”:即以智慧了知后,只去除适合去除的,予以驱除、逐出,不令其住于内。其详细内容应依“不忍受已生起的欲寻”等而了知。显示巴利原文
Caturāpassenoti cattāri apassenāni apassayā etassāti caturāpasseno. Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.308). Paṭisevatīti ñāṇena ñatvā sevitabbayuttakameva sevati. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) nayena veditabbo. Saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetīti ñāṇena ñatvā adhivāsetabbayuttakameva adhivāseti. Vitthāro panettha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.24) nayena veditabbo. Parivajjetīti ñāṇena ñatvā parivajjetabbayuttakameva parivajjeti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo. Vinodetīti ñāṇena ñatvā vinodetabbameva vinodeti nudati nīharati anto vasituṃ na deti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.
“已断除个别执取真实者”:由于将“唯此见是真实,唯此是真实”等作各别执取,故名个别执取真实;这些见真实已被驱除、逐出、断除,所以是已断除个别执取真实者。“种种沙门婆罗门”:指众多的沙门婆罗门。这里,沙门即出家者,婆罗门即被称为“尊者”者。“种种个别执取真实”:即众多各别执取的真实,也就是“唯此见是真实,唯此是真实”这样各别执取的真实。“已驱除”:即已逐出。“已彻底驱除”:即已善逐出。“已舍弃”:即已释放。“已吐出”:即已呕出。“已释放”:即已切断束缚。“已断除”:即已舍断。“已彻底舍离”:即已如此舍离,令不再返回于心。所有这些语词,都是对证得圣道之前所执取的见执的舍断、释放等状态的同义词。显示巴利原文
Panuṇṇapaccekasaccoti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.38; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348) ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitattā paccekasaṅkhātāni diṭṭhisaccāni panuṇṇāni nīhaṭāni pahīnāni assāti panuṇṇapaccekasacco. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti bahūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Ettha ca samaṇāti pabbajjupagatā. Brāhmaṇāti bhovādino. Puthupaccekasaccānīti bahūni pāṭekkasaccāni, ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva sacca’’nti pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitāni bahūni saccānīti attho. Nuṇṇānīti nīhaṭāni. Panuṇṇānīti suṭṭhu nīhatāni. Cattānīti vissaṭṭhāni. Vantānīti vamitāni. Muttānīti chinnabandhanāni katāni. Pahīnānīti pajahitāni. Paṭinissaṭṭhānīti yathā na puna cittaṃ ārohanti, evaṃ paṭivissajjitāni. Sabbāneva cetāni ariyamaggādhigamato pubbe gahitassa diṭṭhiggāhassa vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanāni.
“已完全舍离寻求者”:此处,avayā指无缺减,saṭṭhā指已舍离。正确无缺地舍离了寻求,故称“已完全舍离寻求者”,意为正确地舍离了一切寻求。“心从贪解脱”等,通过说明贪等已断除的状态,讲述了道的作用成就。“我的贪已断除”等,以省察的方式讲述了圣果。因为证得最高果位时,彻底了知贪等的不生起法性,这种了知便是省察智。其中,五支为:断除、个别执取真实的驱除、寻求的完全舍离。在所说的“思择后受用一种、忍受一种、回避一种、去除一种”这一依止中,去除是道的功用,其余亦由道成就。显示巴利原文
Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.348; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.20) ettha avayāti anūnā. Saṭṭhāti nissaṭṭhā. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assāti samavayasaṭṭhesano, sammā vissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho. ‘‘Rāgā cittaṃ vimutta’’ntiādīhi maggassa kiccanipphatti kathitā rāgādīnaṃ pahīnabhāvadīpanato. ‘‘Rāgo me pahīno’’tiādīhi paccavekkhaṇāmukhena ariyaphalaṃ kathitaṃ. Adhigate hi aggaphale sabbaso rāgādīnaṃ anuppādadhammataṃ pajānāti, tañca pajānanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti. Tattha pañcaṅgavippahānapaccekasaccāpanodanaesanāsamavayasajjanāni ‘‘saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevati adhivāseti parivajjeti vinodetī’’ti vuttesu apassenesu vinodanā ca maggakiccāneva, itare ca maggeneva samijjhanti.
“十力者”:他具备十种力,即所谓身力和智力,故名十力者。如来的力有两种:身力与智力。其中,身力应依象的种姓而了知。正如古人所说:显示巴利原文
Dasabaloti kāyabalasaṅkhātāni ñāṇabalasaṅkhātāni ca dasa balāni etassāti dasabalo. Duvidhañhi tathāgatassa balaṃ kāyabalaṃ ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
“黑象、恒河象、白象、铜褐象,”
香象、吉祥象、金象、布萨象、六牙象——这十种象。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha 76; udā. aṭṭha. 75; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 1.39; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.44; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 81);
以上便是十种象族。其中,黑象应视为普通象族。十人之力,等于一头黑象之力。十头黑象之力,等于一头恒河象之力。十头恒河象之力,等于一头白象之力。十头白象之力,等于一头铜象之力。十头铜象之力,等于一头黄褐象之力。十头黄褐象之力,等于一头香象之力。十头香象之力,等于一头吉祥象之力。十头吉祥象之力,等于一头金象之力。十头金象之力,等于一头布萨象之力。十头布萨象之力,等于一头六牙象之力。十头六牙象之力,等于一位如来之体力,这也称为那罗延坚固力。此处,‘那罗’(nārā)意为光芒;由于众多、种种光芒从此生出,故称‘那罗延’(nārāyana),即金刚,因此意为金刚坚固力。若按普通象计算,此力相当于千亿头象之力;若按人计算,则相当于十亿人之力。这便是如来的体力。显示巴利原文
Imāni hi dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tattha nārā vuccanti rasmiyo, tā bahū nānāvidhā tato uppajjantīti nārāyanaṃ, vajiraṃ, tasmā vajirasaṅghātabalanti attho. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ.
智慧力则在经典中已有说明。于此,经文如下(《中部》1.148;《增支部》10.21)——显示巴利原文
Ñāṇabalaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ āgatameva. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi (ma. ni. 1.148; a. ni. 10.21) –
舍利弗,如来确实具足这十种如来力。具足这些力,如来宣称处于牛王之位,于大众中作狮子吼,转梵轮。哪十种?舍利弗,于此,如来如实了知处是处、非处是非处。舍利弗,如来如实了知处是处、非处是非处,这便是如来的如来力。依此力,如来宣称处于牛王之位,于大众中作狮子吼,转梵轮。(1)显示巴利原文
‘‘Dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalāni, yehi balehi samannāgato tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. Katamāni dasa? Idha, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, yampi, sāriputta, tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. (1)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知过去、未来、现在所造诸业,依其处、依其因而感得的果报……(略)(2)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammasamādānānaṃ ṭhānaso hetuso vipākaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (2)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知导向一切处之道迹……(略)(3)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato sabbatthagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (3)
再者,舍利子,如来如实了知世间之种种界、差别界……(略)(4)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekadhātuṃ nānādhātuṃ lokaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (4)
再者,舍利子,如来如实了知众生之种种意乐差别……(略)(5)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikataṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (5)
再者,舍利子,如来如实了知其余众生、其余补特伽罗的根器高下……(略)(6)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ indriyaparopariyattaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (6)
再者,舍利弗,如来如实了知禅那、解脱、定、等至的杂染、清净与出起……(略)(7)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesaṃ vodānaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe…. (7)
再者,舍利弗,如来忆念种种过去生,如一生、二生……(略)如来如此忆念种种过去生,连同其相貌、其情况……(略)(8)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati. Seyyathidaṃ? Ekampi jātiṃ dvepi jātiyo…pe… iti sākāraṃ sauddesaṃ anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati…pe…. (8)
再者,舍利弗,如来以清净、超越常人的天眼,见众生死后结生,或低劣或殊胜,或美丽或丑陋,或生善趣或堕恶趣,如实了知众生各随其业而往……(略)(9)显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena satte passati cavamāne upapajjamāne hīne paṇīte suvaṇṇe dubbaṇṇe sugate duggate, yathākammūpage satte pajānāti…pe…. (9)
复次,舍利弗,如来由诸漏灭尽,于现法中,以自胜智证得无漏心解脱、慧解脱,具足而住。……舍利弗,此亦为如来之如来力。依此力,如来宣称牛王之位,于众中作狮子吼,转梵轮。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna caparaṃ, sāriputta, tathāgato āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati…pe… idampi, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti. Imāni kho, sāriputta, dasa tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti. (10)
在此,‘处为处’即因缘为因缘。了知:‘凡诸法对诸法为因、为缘而生起,此即是处;凡诸法对诸法非因、非缘而生起,此即是非处’,如此,如实了知处为处、非处为非处。‘此亦’即以此智。显示巴利原文
Tattha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha. 760) ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. ‘‘Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ. Ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ aṭṭhāna’’nti pajānanto ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yampīti yena ñāṇena.
‘业受持’:即受持后所作之善与不善业,或业本身即是业受持。‘处、因’:即缘与因。其中,趣、依、时、方便是果报之处,业为其因。显示巴利原文
Kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetuto ca. Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa ṭhānaṃ, kammaṃ hetu.
“遍赴一切”指通往一切趣与无趣。“行道”即道路。“如实了知”:即使众人杀害同一有情,一切人的思心所都以该有情的命根为所缘,但他们的业却各不相同。其中一人以恭敬心、生起意欲而行;一人被他人逼迫而行,说“你也来做吧”;一人仿佛也有相同的意欲,不加抗拒地随行。因此,他们中有人以此业生于地狱,有人生于畜生趣,有人生于饿鬼界。如来在造业的那一刻便了知:“以此方式造业故,此人将生于地狱,此人将生于畜生趣,此人将生于饿鬼界。”若生于地狱,亦了知:“此人将生于大地狱,此人将生于近边地狱。”若生于畜生趣,亦了知:“此人将成为无足者,此人将成为二足者,此人将成为四足者,此人将成为多足者。”若生于饿鬼界,亦了知:“此人将成为被火焚烧而焦渴者,此人将成为饥渴者,此人将成为依他人施舍而活者。”对于这些业,亦了知:“此业将牵引结生,此业在由他业所给的结生中,将成为依止的异熟。”显示巴利原文
Sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca. Paṭipadanti maggaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu ekameva pāṇaṃ ghātentesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā tassevekassa jīvitindriyārammaṇā, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena chandajāto karoti, eko ‘‘ehi tvampi karohī’’ti parehi nippīḷito karoti, eko samānacchando viya hutvā appaṭibāhiyamāno vicarati, tasmā tesu eko teneva kammena niraye nibbattati, eko tiracchānayoniyaṃ, eko pettivisaye. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva ‘‘iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa niraye nibbattissati, esa tiracchānayoniyaṃ, esa pettivisaye’’ti jānāti. Niraye nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa mahāniraye nibbattissati, esa ussadaniraye’’ti jānāti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa apādako bhavissati, esa dvipādako, esa catuppādo, esa bahuppādo’’ti jānāti. Pettivisaye nibbattamānampi ‘‘esa nijjhāmataṇhiko bhavissati, esa khuppipāsiko, esa paradattūpajīvī’’ti jānāti. Tesu ca kammesu ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhissati, etaṃ aññena dinnāya paṭisandhiyā upadhivepakkaṃ bhavissatī’’ti jānāti.
同样,当全村居民一起布施食物时,一切人的思心所都以食物为所缘,但他们的业却各不相同。其中一人以恭敬心而行,如前所述。因此,他们中有些人转生于天界,有些人转生于人间。如来在造业的那一刻便了知:“以此方式造业故,此人将转生人间,此人将转生天界。在其中,此人将生于刹帝利家,此人将生于婆罗门家,此人将生于吠舍家,此人将生于首陀罗家;此人将生于他化自在天,此人将生于化乐天,此人将生于兜率天,此人将生于夜摩天,此人将生于三十三天,此人将生于四大王天,此人将生于地居天。”如此,在造业的那一刻,便了知各处种种差别,如低劣与殊胜、美貌与丑陋、随从少与随从多等。显示巴利原文
Tathā sakalagāmavāsikesu ekato piṇḍapātaṃ dadamānesu kāmaṃ sabbesampi cetanā piṇḍapātārammaṇāva, taṃ pana kammaṃ tesaṃ nānākāraṃ. Tesu hi eko ādarena karotīti sabbaṃ purimasadisaṃ. Tasmā tesu ca keci devaloke nibbattanti, keci manussaloke. Taṃ tathāgato āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti. ‘‘Iminā nīhārena āyūhitattā esa manussaloke nibbattissati, esa devaloke, tatthāpi esa khattiyakule, esa brāhmaṇakule, esa vessakule, esa suddakule, esa paranimmitavasavattīsu, esa nimmānaratīsu, esa tusitesu, esa yāmesu, esa tāvatiṃsesu, esa cātumahārājikesu, esa bhummadevesū’’tiādinā tattha tattha hīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇaappaparivāramahāparivāratādibhedaṃ taṃ taṃ visesaṃ āyūhanakkhaṇeyeva jānāti.
同样,在开始修习内观时,便了知:“以此方式,此人不能觉察任何事物;此人仅能确定四大种;此人仅停留在色摄受;此人仅停留在非色摄受;此人仅停留在名色摄受;此人仅停留在缘摄受;此人仅停留在以相为所缘的内观;此人仅证得初果;此人仅证得二果;此人仅证得三果;此人证得阿拉汉果。”在修习遍业处时,也了知:“此人仅有遍业处,此人将生起禅相,此人仅证得安止,此人将以禅那为足处、修习内观而证得阿拉汉果。”显示巴利原文
Tathā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapentesuyeva ‘‘iminā nīhārena esa kiñci sallakkhetuṃ na sakkhissati, esa mahābhūtamattameva vavatthapessati, esa rūpapariggahe eva ṭhassati, esa arūpapariggaheyeva, esa nāmarūpapariggaheyeva, esa paccayapariggaheyeva, esa lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyameva, esa paṭhamaphaleyeva, esa dutiyaphale eva, esa tatiyaphale eva, esa arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti jānāti. Kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontesupi ‘‘imassa parikammamattameva bhavissati, esa nimittaṃ uppādessati, esa appanaṃ eva pāpuṇissati, esa jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti jānāti.
“多界”指由眼界等诸界,或由欲界等诸界而具有众多界。“种种界”指由于那些界的特征各有不同,而有种种不同类别的界。“世间”指蕴、处、界的世间。“如实了知”指无颠倒地通达那些界的自性。显示巴利原文
Anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi, kāmadhātuādīhi vā dhātūhi bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātunti tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā nānappakāradhātuṃ. Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ aviparītato sabhāvaṃ paṭivijjhati.
“种种意乐”指由低劣等种种意乐而呈现的种种意乐性。“其他众生”指殊胜的众生。“其他人”指较此低劣的众生。或者,这两个词是同一含义,只是为应受教化者而分为两种说法。“根之胜劣”指信等诸根的胜与劣,即增长与衰退。显示巴利原文
Nānādhimuttikatanti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ. Parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ, veneyyavasena pana dvedhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho.
“禅那、解脱、定、等至”是指:初禅等四种禅那、“有色者见色”等八解脱、有寻有伺等三种定,以及初禅等至等九种次第等至。“杂染”是指退分法。“清净”是指胜分法。“出起”是指,如所说:“清净也是出起,从彼彼定出起也是出起”(《分别论》828),即熟练的禅那、有分以及果等至。因为下下的熟练禅那是上上的足处,所以说“清净也是出起”。从一切禅那以有分而出起,从灭尽等至以果等至而出起,所以说“从彼彼定出起也是出起”。一切智的广说抉择已于《破除愚痴·分别论注》中说明;而宿住随念、天眼、漏尽智的解说,则在《毗兰若篇》中详细阐明。显示巴利原文
Jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnañca navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhānaṃ, tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti (vibha. 828) evaṃ vuttaṃ paguṇajjhānañceva bhavaṅgaphalasamāpattiyo ca. Heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimañhi paguṇajjhānaṃ uparimassa uparimassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘vodānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgena sabbajhānehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, phalasamāpattiyā nirodhasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tametaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhānampi vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbañāṇānañca vitthārakathāya vinicchayo sammohavinodaniyaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 760) vutto. Pubbenivāsānussatidibbacakkhuāsavakkhayañāṇakathā pana verañjakaṇḍe (pārā. 12) vitthāritāyeva.
舍利弗尊者,这些便是之前所说“舍利弗,这些即是如来的十种如来力”的十力,此处正式确认。其中,有人提出异议:“所谓十力智并非单独存在,这仅仅是一切知智的分类。”这种看法不应接受。因为十力智是一种,一切知智是另一种。十力智各自了知不同的事业,并以一切知智为依止。十力的次第是:一、如实了知因与果;二、了知诸业果报的种种生灭;三、了知业道的差别;四、了知界的种种差别;五、了知众生心的固执倾向;六、了知根性的利钝;七、了知入禅等法;八、了知过去生起烦恼、灭除烦恼的相续;九、了知众生临终结生;十、了知圣谛与漏尽。一切知智则了知这些及其更上之义,而非作用于一切行。此智若无禅那,便不能离欲;无神通,便不能变化;无道,便不能断除垢染。世尊正是由于同时具足这样的身力与智力,才被称为“十力者”。显示巴利原文
Imāni kho sāriputtāti yāni pubbe ‘‘dasa kho panimāni, sāriputta, tathāgatassa tathāgatabalānī’’ti avocaṃ, imāni tānīti appanaṃ karoti. Tattha paravādikathā hoti ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti, taṃ na tathā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇaṃ sakasakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ tampi tato avasesampi pajānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva , pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca pajānāti, etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Iti yathāvuttakāyabalena ceva ñāṇabalena ca samannāgatattā bhagavā ‘‘dasabalo’’ti vuccati.
具足十无学支者,即“无学正见、无学正思惟、无学正语、无学正业、无学正命、无学正精进、无学正念、无学正定、无学正智、无学正解脱”(《长部》3.348, 360)中所说的十种无学法。其中,从无学正见到无学正智,皆以果法为所缘境。正见与正智二支,依智慧的分别作用,可说是“正见于所见之处,正智于所知之处”。在此,“正见生起”时,所缘显现殊胜,故说为辨别。所谓正解脱,是借此语显示诸果法的集聚,诸法相融一体。即便是圣果所摄的诸法,也必定由止息恶法而得解脱。显示巴利原文
Dasahi asekkhehi aṅgehi upetoti ‘‘asekkhā sammādiṭṭhi, asekkho sammāsaṅkappo, asekkhā sammāvācā, asekkho sammākammanto, asekkho sammāājīvo, asekkho sammāvāyāmo, asekkhā sammāsati, asekkho sammāsamādhi, asekkhaṃ sammāñāṇaṃ, asekkhā sammāvimuttī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.348, 360) evaṃ vuttehi dasahi asekkhadhammehi samannāgato. Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhiādayo ca sabbe phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhi sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā ‘‘sammā dassanaṭṭhena sammādiṭṭhi, sammā pajānanaṭṭhena sammāñāṇa’’nti. Atthi hi dassanajānanānaṃ visaye pavattiākāraviseso. Sammāvimuttīti iminā pana padena vuttāvasesā phalasamāpattisahagatadhammā saṅgahitāti veditabbā . Ariyaphalasampayuttadhammāpi hi sabbaso paṭipakkhato vimuttataṃ upādāya vimuttīti vattabbataṃ labhanti.
59 “声音稀疏”是指:就连在寺院附近行走的行人,其言语声也稀少。“不以城中的喧嚣声”是指:不同于城中人们那种嘈杂不清的喧闹声。众人聚集一处共同发出的声响,称为喧嚣。“有往来流动的人群”是指:在内部走动的人众。“人们秘密活动的形态”是指:与众人秘密行事相关的情形。“相宜的寂静”是指:与某处相适应的整体和谐。其余的道理,如前所述。显示巴利原文
59.Vacanasaddena appasaddanti ārāmupacārena gacchato addhikajanassapi vacanasaddena appasaddaṃ. Nagaranigghosasaddenāti avibhāvitatthena nagare manussānaṃ nigghosasaddena. Manussehi samāgamma ekajjhaṃ pavattitasaddo hi nigghoso. Anusañcaraṇajanassāti antosañcārino janassa. Manussānaṃ rahassakiriyaṭṭhāniyanti manussānaṃ rahassakaraṇassa yuttaṃ anucchavikaṃ. Vivekānurūpanti ekībhāvassa anurūpaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
舍利弗与摩嘎剌那出家事之释义显示巴利原文
Sāriputtamoggallānapabbajjākathāvaṇṇanā
60 六十、今为显示前文“其时,散若耶游方者”等未释之词的注释,而说“舍利弗、目犍连”等。其中,舍利婆罗门女之子为舍利弗,目犍连婆罗门女之子为目犍连。据我们所知,这两家族七代相续,即便与仆从同乘一辆车出行,血统亦未尝混杂。两位母亲在同日怀胎,十个月后安然同日产下此二人。此后,两家又各自育有六十二位子女。命名之日,上提萨迦村舍利婆罗门家称长子为“优波提舍”,库利多伽村目犍连婆罗门家称长子为“拘律陀”。是故,二人以优波提舍与拘律陀之名著称。显示巴利原文
60. Idāni ‘‘tena kho pana samayena sañcayo paribbājako’’tiādīsu apubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ dassento ‘‘sāriputtamoggallānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sārībrāhmaṇiyā putto sāriputto, moggallībrāhmaṇiyā putto moggallāno. Amhākaṃ kira (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu) bhagavato nibbattito puretarameva sāriputto rājagahanagarassa avidūre upatissagāme sārībrāhmaṇiyā nāma kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Taṃdivasamevassa sahāyopi rājagahasseva avidūre kolitagāme moggallībrāhmaṇiyā kucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Tāni kira dvepi kulāni yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā ābaddhapaṭibaddhasahāyāneva. Tesaṃ dvinnaṃ ekadivasameva gabbhaparihāraṃ adaṃsu. Dasamāsaccayena jātānampi tesaṃ chasaṭṭhi dhātiyo upanayiṃsu. Nāmaggahaṇadivase sārībrāhmaṇiyā puttassa upatissagāme jeṭṭhakulassa puttattā ‘‘upatisso’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu, itarassa kolitagāme jeṭṭhakulassa puttattā ‘‘kolito’’ti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gihikāle upatisso kolitoti evaṃ paññāyamānanāmā’’ti.
“二百五十位青年随从”一处,也有人说是“各五百位青年随从”。此语在《增支部注》中有所说——显示巴利原文
Aḍḍhateyyasatamāṇavakaparivārāti ettha pañcapañcasatamāṇavakaparivārātipi vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190) –
“优波提舍青年前往河畔或园林嬉戏时,常有五百金轿随行;拘律陀青年则有五百良驷马车随行。二人各领有五百青年为随从。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Upatissamāṇavakassa kīḷanatthāya nadiṃ vā uyyānaṃ vā gamanakāle pañca suvaṇṇasivikāsatāni parivārāni honti, kolitamāṇavakassa pañca ājaññarathasatāni. Dvepi janā pañcapañcamāṇavakasataparivārā hontī’’ti.
在王舍城,每年有名为‘山岳节’的集会。他们两人在同一个地方铺好座席,坐在一起观看集会:在可笑之处发笑,在令人悚惧之处悚惧,在适合布施之处布施。就这样,他们日复一日地观看集会,由于智慧已趋成熟,有一天,他们不再像前些日子那样在可笑之处发笑,在令人悚惧之处悚惧,在适合布施之处布施。两人都这样思惟:‘这里有什么可看的呢?所有这些人在未满百岁之前都将归于无有,我们应当寻求解脱法。’他们怀着这个所缘而坐。于是拘利陀对优波提舍说:‘优波提舍贤友,你今天不像往日那样欢喜踊跃,显得不悦。你觉察到了什么?’优波提舍说:‘拘利陀贤友,观看这些并无实质,这是没有意义的,应当寻求自己解脱之法。我正这样思惟而坐。你又为什么不悦呢?’拘利陀也说了同样的话。优波提舍知道他与自己志同道合,便这样说:‘我们两人都善加思惟了。然而,寻求解脱法的人应当获得出家,我们在谁座下出家呢?’显示巴利原文
Rājagahe ca anusaṃvaccharaṃ giraggasamajjaṃ nāma hoti. Tesaṃ dvinnampi ekaṭṭhāneyeva mañcakaṃ bandhanti. Dvepi ekatova nisīditvā samajjaṃ passitvā hasitabbaṭṭhāne hasanti, saṃvegaṭṭhāne saṃvijjanti, dāyaṃ dātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne dāyaṃ denti. Tesaṃ imināva niyāmena ekadivasaṃ samajjaṃ passantānaṃ paripākagatattā ñāṇassa purimadivasesu viya hasitabbaṭṭhāne hāso vā saṃvegaṭṭhāne saṃvijjanaṃ vā dāyaṃ dātuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne dāyadānaṃ vā nāhosi. Dvepi pana janā evaṃ cintayiṃsu ‘‘kiṃ ettha oloketabbaṃ atthi, sabbepime appatte vassasate apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gamissanti, amhehi pana ekaṃ mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ārammaṇaṃ gahetvā nisīdiṃsu. Tato kolito upatissaṃ āha ‘‘samma upatissa, na tvaṃ aññadivasesu viya haṭṭhapahaṭṭho, anattamanadhātukosi, kiṃ te sallakkhita’’nti. ‘‘Samma kolita, etesaṃ olokane sāro natthi, niratthakametaṃ, attano mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ cintayanto nisinnomhīti. Tvaṃ pana kasmā anattamanoti. Sopi tatheva āha. Athassa attanā saddhiṃ ekajjhāsayataṃ ñatvā upatisso evamāha ‘‘amhākaṃ ubhinnaṃ sucintitaṃ, mokkhadhammaṃ pana gavesantehi ekā pabbajjā laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, kassa santike pabbajāmā’’ti.
那时,游方者散阇耶住在王舍城,与一大群游方众一起。他们(优波提舍和拘利陀)心想:‘我们将在他的座下出家。’便带着五百位青年在散阇耶座下出家了。自从他们出家之时起,散阇耶便获得了超常的利养与名声。他们仅用几天就完全掌握了散阇耶的全部教义,便问:‘老师,您所知的教义只有这些,还是另有更多?’散阇耶说:‘只有这些,你们已经全部知道了。’听了他的话,他们思惟:‘既然如此,在他座下修梵行是无益的。我们是为了寻求解脱法而出离的,而在他座下无法生起解脱法。然而赡部洲洲很大,我们游行于村落、市镇、王都,必定会遇到宣说解脱法的老师。’从那时起,无论在哪里听说有聪明的沙门、婆罗门,他们就去那里与之讨论问题。没有人能解答他们所提的问题,而他们却能解答那些人的问题。他们就这样游遍了整个赡部洲洲后返回,回到自己的地方,约定说:‘拘利陀贤友,我们两人谁先证得不死,就应当告诉对方。’为简要说明此事,经中说:‘在那里,他们见到大众……乃至……作了约定。’显示巴利原文
Tena kho pana samayena sañcayo paribbājako rājagahe paṭivasati mahatiyā paribbājakaparisāya saddhiṃ. Te ‘‘tassa santike pabbajissāmā’’ti pañcahi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṃ sañcayassa santike pabbajiṃsu. Tesaṃ pabbajitakālato paṭṭhāya sañcayo atirekalābhaggayasaggappatto ahosi. Te katipāheneva sabbaṃ sañcayassa samayaṃ parimadditvā ‘‘ācariya, tumhākaṃ jānanasamayo ettakova, udāhu uttaripi atthī’’ti pucchiṃsu. Sañcayo ‘‘ettakova, sabbaṃ tumhehi ñāta’’nti āha. Tassa kathaṃ sutvā cintayiṃsu ‘‘evaṃ sati imassa santike brahmacariyavāso niratthako, mayaṃ mokkhadhammaṃ gavesituṃ nikkhantā, so imassa santike uppādetuṃ na sakkā, mahā kho pana jambudīpo, gāmanigamarājadhāniyo carantā avassaṃ mokkhadhammadesakaṃ ācariyaṃ labhissāmā’’ti. Te tato paṭṭhāya ‘‘yattha yattha paṇḍitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā atthī’’ti suṇanti, tattha tattha gantvā pañhasākacchaṃ karonti, tehi puṭṭhaṃ pañhaṃ añño kathetuṃ samattho nāma natthi, te pana tesaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjenti. Evaṃ sakalajambudīpaṃ pariggaṇhitvā nivattitvā sakaṭṭhānameva āgantvā ‘‘samma kolita, yo paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati , so ārocetū’’ti katikaṃ akaṃsu. Imameva vatthuṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘tatra nesaṃ mahājanaṃ disvā…pe… katikaṃ akaṃsū’’ti āha.
其中,‘穿白衣的游方者’是指穿着白布的游方者,以此表示他不是裸体游方者。在‘以端严的行进……’等句中:‘端严的’是指能生净信、合宜、与沙门相应的;‘行进’是指行走;‘退回’是指转身返回;‘前视’是指看前方;‘环视’是指看周围;‘屈伸’是指弯曲诸关节;‘伸展’是指展开诸关节。所有这些词都是表示如此状态之特征的具格,因此意思是:由于具足正念正知而作,故成为端严的行进、退回、前视、环视、屈伸、伸展者。‘垂目’是指向下低垂目光。‘威仪具足’是指具足那种端严行进等的威仪。‘为有需求者所推知’:通过推理智推知‘有死,则必有不死’,如此推知为‘存在’的涅槃;寻求、遍求此涅槃者,心想‘我何不跟随这位比丘之后呢?’——这是关联。‘如《善施经》中所说种类’:如所说:‘施主们的家中有堂舍,那里设有座位,备有饮用水,出家人乞食后坐在那里进食。如果他们愿意,也接受施主们的东西,因此应知那也是某一家族类似堂舍的一处墙角。’——这是所说的种类。显示巴利原文
Tattha channaparibbājakassāti setapaṭadharassa paribbājakassa. Tena nāyaṃ naggaparibbājakoti dasseti. Pāsādikena abhikkantenātiādīsu pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena sāruppena samaṇānucchavikena. Abhikkantenāti gamanena. Paṭikkantenāti nivattanena. Ālokitenāti purato dassanena. Vilokitenāti ito cito dassanena. Samiñjitenāti pabbasaṅkocanena. Pasāritenāti tesaṃyeva pasāraṇena. Sabbattha itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ, tasmā satisampajaññakehi vabhisaṅkhatattā pāsādikaabhikkantapaṭikkantaālokitavilokitasamiñjitapasārito hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Okkhittacakkhūti heṭṭhākhittacakkhu. Iriyāpathasampannoti tāya pāsādikaabhikkantāditāya sampannairiyāpatho. Atthikehi upaññātanti ‘‘maraṇe sati amatenapi bhavitabba’’nti evaṃ anumānañāṇena ‘‘atthī’’ti upagataṃ nibbānaṃ nāma, taṃ magganto pariyesanto yannūnāhaṃ imaṃ bhikkhuṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandheyyanti sambandho. Sudinnakaṇḍe vuttappakāranti ‘‘dānapatīnaṃ gharesu sālā honti, āsanāni cettha paññattāni honti, upaṭṭhāpitaṃ udakakañjiyaṃ, tattha pabbajitā piṇḍāya caritvā nisīditvā bhuñjanti. Sace icchanti, dānapatīnampi santakaṃ gaṇhanti, tasmā tampi aññatarassa kulassa īdisāya sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti veditabba’’nti evaṃ vuttappakāraṃ.
“无论说少或多”:游方者心中想到:“我名优波提舍,你尽己所能,无论说多说少,我当以百千理趣通达,这是我的责任。”故出此言。为说明“灭”与“灭之道”乃依部分相同、部分引申之理趣而总说为“灭”,所以又说“或者”等语。“使之了悟”即令其证得。所谓“闻此法门已,远尘离垢,法眼生起”:此处,游方者仅听完前两句,便安立于具足千种理趣的须陀洹果。应知后两句,是在证得须陀洹时完成的。显示巴利原文
Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā bhāsassūti paribbājako ‘‘ahaṃ upatisso nāma, tvaṃ yathāsattiyā appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā pāvada, etaṃ nayasatena nayasahassena paṭivijjhituṃ mayhaṃ bhāro’’ti cintetvā evamāha. Nirodho ca nirodhupāyo ca ekadesasarūpekasesanayena ‘‘nirodho’’ti vuttoti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Paṭipādentoti nigamento. Imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā virajaṃ vītamalaṃ dhammacakkhuṃ udapādīti ettha paribbājako paṭhamapadadvayameva sutvā sahassanayasampanne sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Itarapadadvayaṃ sotāpannakāle niṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.
“以许多劫、那由他”:于此应知:十十为百,十百为千,千之百倍为十万,十万之百倍为一俱胝,俱胝之百倍为一钵俱胝,钵俱胝之百倍为一俱胝钵俱胝,俱胝钵俱胝之百倍为一那由他。显示巴利原文
Bahukehi kappanahutehīti ettha dasa dasakāni sataṃ, dasa satāni sahassaṃ, sahassānaṃ sataṃ satasahassaṃ, satasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭi, koṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ pakoṭi, pakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ koṭipakoṭi, koṭipakoṭisatasahassānaṃ sataṃ ekanahutanti veditabbaṃ.
61 那时,游方者舍利弗前往游方者目犍连处。(《增支部注》1.1.189-190;《法句经注》1.10舍利弗长老事)他证得须陀洹果后,更上的殊胜境界尚未生起时,心中思惟“此处必有因缘”,便对长老说:“尊者,请不必再继续说法,到此即可。我们的导师住在何处?”“在竹林园,游方者。”“尊者,请您先走。我有一同伴,我们曾相互约定:‘谁先证得不死,当告知对方。’我将履行此约,带上同伴,沿着您所行之路,往导师处去。”随后,他五体投地,顶礼长老双足,右绕三匝,送别长老后,便朝游方者园的方向走去。显示巴利原文
61.Athakho sāriputto paribbājako yena moggallāno paribbājako tenupasaṅkamīti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.189-190; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.10 sāriputtattheravatthu) sotāpanno hutvā uparivisese appavattante ‘‘bhavissati ettha kāraṇa’’nti sallakkhetvā theraṃ āha ‘‘bhante, mā upari dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhayittha, ettakameva hotu, kahaṃ amhākaṃ satthā vasatī’’ti. Veḷuvane paribbājakāti. ‘‘Bhante, tumhe purato yātha, mayhaṃ eko sahāyako atthi, amhehi ca aññamaññaṃ katikā katā ‘yo paṭhamaṃ amataṃ adhigacchati, so ārocetū’ti, ahaṃ taṃ paṭiññaṃ mocetvā sahāyakaṃ gahetvā tumhākaṃ gatamaggeneva satthu santikaṃ āgamissāmī’’ti pañcapatiṭṭhitena therassa pādesu nipatitvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā theraṃ uyyojetvā paribbājakārāmābhimukho agamāsi.
62 他便对游方者舍利弗这样说:“今日我同伴的面色不同于往日,他必定已证得不死。”以此询问不死的证得。舍利弗回答:“是的,贤友,我已证得不死。”承认之后,便告知全部经过,并诵出同一首偈颂。偈颂结束时,游方者目犍连安住于须陀洹果。因此说:“那时,游方者目犍连……法眼生起……”“贤友,我们去世尊那里吧。”他先问:“贤友,导师住在何处?”听到回答:“贤友,据称在竹林园,我们的阿说示长老如此告知。”便这样说。显示巴利原文
62.Sāriputtaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavocāti ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ sahāyassa mukhavaṇṇo na aññadivasesu viya, addhā anena amataṃ adhigataṃ bhavissatī’’ti amatādhigamaṃ pucchanto etadavoca. Sopissa ‘‘āmāvuso, amataṃ adhigata’’nti paṭijānitvā sabbaṃ pavattiṃ ārocetvā tameva gāthaṃ abhāsi. Gāthāpariyosāne moggallāno paribbājako sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho moggallānassa paribbājakassa…pe… dhammacakkhuṃ udapādī’’ti. Gacchāma mayaṃ, āvuso, bhagavato santiketi ‘‘kahaṃ samma satthā vasatī’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘veḷuvane kira samma, evaṃ no ācariyena assajittherena kathita’’nti vutte evamāha.
舍利弗长老素来尊师重道,因此对同伴游方者目犍连这样说:“我们应将所证得的不死,也告知我们的老师散阇耶游方者。他若能觉悟,便会证悟;若不能证悟,则会信受我们,前往导师处;听闻诸佛的教法后,将证得道果。”于是两人一同前往散阇耶处。因此说:“那时,舍利弗与目犍连前往游方者散阇耶处。”到达后说:“老师,您在做什么?世间佛陀已出世,法已善说,僧团已善行,来吧,我们去见十力者。”散阇耶说:“你们在说什么,孩子们?”他拒绝了他们,并向他们说明现前的利养与恭敬。他们说:“愿我们这样的弟子众常得如此,至于你们去或不去,你们自己决定。”散阇耶知道“这些人知道这么多,不会听从我的话”,便说:“你们去吧,孩子们,我年事已高,不能再过弟子生活。”他们虽以数百种理由劝导,却无法令他觉悟,便带领听从自己教导的人前往竹林。五百弟子中,二百五十人折返,二百五十人随他们同去。因此说:“那时,舍利弗与目犍连带领那二百五十位游方者前往竹林。”显示巴利原文
Sāriputtatthero ca nāmesa sadāpi ācariyapūjakova, tasmā sahāyaṃ moggallānaṃ paribbājakaṃ evamāha ‘‘amhehi adhigataṃ amataṃ amhākaṃ ācariyassa sañcayaparibbājakassapi kathessāma, bujjhamāno paṭivijjhissati, appaṭivijjhanto amhākaṃ saddahitvā satthu santikaṃ gamissati, buddhānaṃ desanaṃ sutvā maggaphalappaṭivedhaṃ karissatī’’ti. Tato dvepi janā sañcayassa santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā yena sañcayo paribbājako tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti. Upasaṅkamitvā ca ‘‘ācariya, tvaṃ kiṃ karosi, loke buddho uppanno, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho, āyāma dasabalaṃ passissāmā’’ti. So ‘‘kiṃ vadatha tātā’’ti tepi vāretvā lābhaggayasaggappavattimeva nesaṃ dīpeti. Te ‘‘amhākaṃ evarūpo antevāsikavāso niccameva hotu, tumhākaṃ pana gamanaṃ vā agamanaṃ vā jānāthā’’ti āhaṃsu. Sañcayo ‘‘ime ettakaṃ jānantā mama vacanaṃ na karissantī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘gacchatha tumhe tātā, ahaṃ mahallakakāle antevāsikavāsaṃ vasituṃ na sakkomī’’ti āha. Te anekehipi kāraṇasatehi taṃ bodhetuṃ asakkontā attano ovāde vattamānaṃ janaṃ ādāya veḷuvanaṃ agamaṃsu. Pañcasu antevāsikasatesu aḍḍhateyyasatā nivattiṃsu, aḍḍhateyyasatā tehi saddhiṃ agamaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho sāriputtamoggallānā tāni aḍḍhateyyāni paribbājakasatāni ādāya yena veḷuvanaṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti.
“解脱”是指:对于具足如上所说特征的涅槃,以涅槃为所缘的果解脱,佛陀授记舍利弗与目犍连已决意于此。这是此句的关联。显示巴利原文
Vimutteti yathāvuttalakkhaṇe nibbāne tadārammaṇāya phalavimuttiyā adhimutte ne sāriputtamoggallāne byākāsīti sambandho.
如此授记后,世尊于四众中说法,随顺他们的根行而增长法教。除两位上首弟子外,所有二百五十位游方者皆证得阿拉汉果。世尊伸手说:“来,比丘们。”所有人的须发自然消失,神通所成的钵与衣系于身上。两位上首弟子也获得了神通所成的钵与衣,然而上三道之事业尚未完成。何以故?因声闻波罗蜜智之广大故。其后,大目犍连尊者于出家后第七日,依止摩揭陀国的迦罗婆罗村,修习沙门法时,陷入昏沉睡眠,被世尊警策,去除昏沉睡眠后,听闻如来所授的界业处,即完成上三道之事业,达到声闻波罗蜜智的顶点。舍利弗长老亦于出家后半个月,与世尊一同依止王舍城,住于豕首窟时,当为其外甥长爪游方者开示《受持经》时,随经遣智,如食他人所增之食,达到声闻波罗蜜智的顶点。因此说:“大目犍连长老七日安立阿拉汉果,舍利弗长老半月。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ byākaritvā ca satthā catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ desento nesaṃ parisāya cariyavasena dhammadesanaṃ vaḍḍhesi, ṭhapetvā dve aggasāvake sabbepi aḍḍhateyyasatā paribbājakā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Satthā ‘‘etha bhikkhavo’’ti hatthaṃ pasāresi, sabbesaṃ kesamassu antaradhāyi, iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ kāyapaṭibaddhaṃ ahosi. Aggasāvakānampi iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ āgataṃ, uparimaggattayakiccaṃ pana na niṭṭhāti. Kasmā? Sāvakapāramīñāṇassa mahantatāya. Athāyasmā mahāmoggallāno pabbajitadivasato sattame divase magadharaṭṭhe kallavāḷagāmakaṃ upanissāya samaṇadhammaṃ karonto thinamiddhaṃ okkamanto satthārā saṃvejito thinamiddhaṃ vinodetvā tathāgatena dinnaṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ suṇantova uparimaggattayakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto. Sāriputtattheropi pabbajitadivasato addhamāsaṃ atikkamitvā satthārā saddhiṃ tameva rājagahaṃ upanissāya sūkarakhataleṇe viharanto attano bhāgineyyassa dīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanāpariggahasuttante desiyamāne suttānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā parassa vaḍḍhitabhattaṃ bhuñjanto viya sāvakapāramīñāṇassa matthakaṃ patto. Tenevāha ‘‘mahāmoggallānatthero sattahi divasehi arahatte patiṭṭhito, sāriputtatthero addhamāsenā’’ti.
虽然大目犍连长老不久便证得阿拉汉果,而法将(舍利弗)则较迟,即便如此,舍利弗长老才是智慧更为广大者。因为大目犍连长老在遍观行境中,如同以杖端按压一般,仅遍观了一部分,精进七日后证得阿拉汉果。舍利弗长老则遍观了除佛与独觉佛的遍观行境之外、弟子无余的遍观行境,如此遍观而精进了半个月。这是由于上首弟子的遍观行境须无余地遍行,而弟子波罗蜜智也需如此成熟。譬如有人心想‘我要取竹竿’,见到一丛大竹,心想‘砍伐竹丛会很费事’,便从中间伸手进去,将刚好够到的竹竿从根部和顶部砍断后取走。他虽先走,却得不到坚实或笔直的竹竿。另一人见到同样的竹丛,心想‘若我只取刚好够到的竹竿,便得不到坚实和笔直的’,于是系好腰带,用大砍刀砍开竹丛,挑选出坚实且笔直的竹竿后取走。此人虽后走,却得到了坚实且笔直的竹竿。这两位长老的精进,情形正与此相同。显示巴利原文
Yadipi mahāmoggallānatthero na cirasseva arahattaṃ patto, dhammasenāpati tato cirena, evaṃ santepi sāriputtattherova mahāpaññataro. Mahāmoggallānatthero hi sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viya ekadesameva sammasanto satta divase vāyamitvā arahattaṃ patto. Sāriputtatthero ṭhapetvā buddhānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca sammasanacāraṃ sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ nippadesaṃ sammasi, evaṃ sammasanto addhamāsaṃ vāyami. Ukkaṃsagatassa sāvakānaṃ sammasanacārassa nippadesena pavattiyamānattā sāvakapāramīñāṇassa ca tathā paripācetabbattā. Yathā hi puriso ‘‘veṇuyaṭṭhiṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti mahājaṭaṃ veṇuṃ disvā ‘‘jaṭaṃ chindantassa papañco bhavissatī’’ti antarena hatthaṃ pavesetvā sampattameva yaṭṭhiṃ mūle ca agge ca chinditvā ādāya pakkameyya, so kiñcāpi paṭhamataraṃ gacchati, yaṭṭhiṃ pana sāraṃ vā ujuṃ vā na labhati. Aparo tathārūpameva veṇuṃ disvā sace sampattayaṭṭhiṃ gaṇhissāmi, sāraṃ vā ujuṃ vā na labhissāmīti kacchaṃ bandhitvā mahantena satthena veṇujaṭaṃ chinditvā sārā ceva ujū ca yaṭṭhiyo uccinitvā ādāya pakkameyya, ayaṃ kiñcāpi pacchā gacchati, yaṭṭhiyo pana sārā ceva ujū ca labhati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ imesaṃ dvinnaṃ therānaṃ padhānaṃ.
此处所谓‘遍观行境’,应知即内观之地,因‘遍观行于此’故称‘遍观行境’。其中,诸佛的遍观行境,据说是百千亿轮围世界中,有情相续所摄及非根所系的一切诸行。也有人说是在百千亿轮围界中。正因如此,诸佛的大金刚智,以摄于自身的方式进入缘起法,以三十六亿百千面而转起。诸独觉佛的遍观行境,据说是连同自身相续中的诸行,加上中印度住民有情相续所摄及非根所系的诸行。也有人说仅是赡部洲住民相续所摄的。不将自身相续中的一切法与其他有情相续中的法作相续区分,而以‘同为外在之有’的共相进行遍观,这是弟子们的遍观行境。然而大目犍连长老在外在诸法中,也以自身相续的区分,取出某些部分来遍观,而且只是以智触及而已。因此说‘如同用杖端按压般,只遍观了一部分’。在那里,因为智本来应于所知境尽其范围而转起,却没有那样转起,故说‘如同用杖端按压般’;因为缺乏无间的法随观,故说‘只遍观了一部分’。法将(舍利弗)的遍观行境,也即是如前所述的弟子内观之地。然而在此,长老以极为超越、无余且无间的方式正确地观照。因此说‘无余地遍观了弟子的遍观行境’。显示巴利原文
Sammasanacāro ca nāmettha vipassanābhūmi veditabbā sammasanaṃ carati etthāti sammasanacāroti katvā. Tattha buddhānaṃ sammasanacāro dasasahassalokadhātuyaṃ sattasantānagatā anindriyabaddhā ca saṅkhārāti vadanti. Koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷesūti apare. Tathā hi attaniyavasena paṭiccasamuppādanayaṃ otaritvā chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena buddhānaṃ mahāvajirañāṇaṃ pavattaṃ. Paccekabuddhānaṃ sasantānagatehi saddhiṃ majjhimadesavāsīsattasantānagatā anindriyabaddhā ca saṅkhārā sammasanacāroti vadanti. Jambudīpavāsīsantānagatāti keci. Sasantānagate sabbadhamme parasantānagate ca santānavibhāgaṃ akatvā bahiddhābhāvasāmaññato sammasanaṃ, ayaṃ sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāro. Moggallānatthero pana bahiddhā dhammepi sasantānavibhāgena keci keci uddharitvā sammasi, tañca kho ñāṇena phuṭṭhamattaṃ katvā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viya ekadesameva sammasanto’’ti. Tattha ñāṇena nāma yāvatā neyyaṃ vattitabbaṃ, tāvatā avattanato ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭiyā uppīḷento viyā’’ti vuttaṃ, anupadadhammavipassanāya abhāvato ‘‘ekadesameva sammasanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammasenāpatinopi yathāvuttasāvakānaṃ vipassanāya bhūmiyeva sammasanacāro. Tattha pana thero sātisayaṃ niravasesaṃ anupadañca sammā vipassi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāvakānaṃ sammasanacāraṃ nippadesaṃ sammasī’’ti.
于此,有六种人:干观者、得世间神通的普通弟子、大弟子、上首弟子、独觉佛、正自觉者。其中,干观者未依禅那与神通而获得智慧善巧,如同盲者欲入某处一般,于内观之时不能如愿修习所欲之法,唯依已把握之法而增长内观。得世间神通的普通弟子,能以内观入门之外的其他方式,令内观扩展,因其智慧较广的缘故。大弟子具足胜愿,能比前者更为超越地扩展内观。在上首弟子中,第二位因胜愿成就与等持更为优胜,能比前者更扩展内观;第一位则依更大的智慧,能以弟子们所不共的方式扩展内观。独觉佛依更大的胜愿,随顺自所成就的胜愿,能比前者更扩展内观。至于诸佛的内观,由圆满成熟的智慧巴拉密修习而成,与一切知智的证得相应,恰如一位如萨罗邦伽般精通刀箭之术的射手所射之箭,在途中不滞于树木藤蔓等物,直落靶心,不滞不逸;同样,此内观不滞不逸于中途,于所应遍观之法上,如实以种种理趣而转起——这便称为'大金刚智'。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca sukkhavipassakā lokiyābhiññappattā pakatisāvakā mahāsāvakā aggasāvakā paccekabuddhā sammāsambuddhāti chasu janesu sukkhavipassakānaṃ jhānābhiññāhi anadhigatapaññānepuññattā andhānaṃ viya icchitapadesokkamanaṃ vipassanākāle icchiticchitadhammabhāvanā natthi, te yathāpariggahitadhammamatteyeva vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhenti. Lokiyābhiññappattā pana pakatisāvakā yena mukhena vipassanaṃ ārabhanti, tato aññenapi vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti vipulañāṇattā. Mahāsāvakā abhinīhārasampannattā tato sātisayaṃ vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti. Aggasāvakesu dutiyo abhinīhārasampattiyā samādhānassa sātisayattā vipassanaṃ tatopi vitthārikaṃ karoti. Paṭhamo pana tatopi mahāpaññatāya sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vitthārikaṃ karoti. Paccekabuddhā tehipi mahābhinīhāratāya attano abhinīhārānurūpaṃ tatopi vitthārikaṃ vipassanaṃ karonti. Buddhānaṃ sammadeva paripūritapaññāpāramīpabhāvitā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamassa anurūpā yathā nāma katavālavedhaparicayena sarabhaṅgasadisena dhanuggahena khitto saro antarā rukkhalatādīsu asajjamāno lakkheyeva patati, na sajjati na virajjati, evaṃ antarā asajjamānā avirajjamānā vipassanā sammasanīyadhammesu yāthāvato nānānayehi pavattati, yaṃ ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati.
其中,干观者的内观行境,如萤火虫之光;得世间神通普通弟子的,如灯盏之光;大弟子的,如火炬之光;上首弟子的,如药草星之光;独觉佛的,如月亮之光;正自觉者的,则如千光庄严的秋日轮显现。同样,干观者的内观行境,犹如盲人以杖端探路而行;得世间神通普通弟子的,犹如行于独木桥;大弟子的,犹如行于小腿桥;上首弟子的,犹如行于车桥;独觉佛的,犹如行于大腿道;正自觉者的,犹如行于大车道。又当知,佛与独觉佛的内观,由思所成智所增长,故为自然智;其余人的内观,由闻所成智所增长,故依他教而生。显示巴利原文
Etesu ca sukkhavipassakānaṃ vipassanācāro khajjotappabhāsadiso, abhiññappattapakatisāvakānaṃ dīpappabhāsadiso, mahāsāvakānaṃ ukkāppabhāsadiso, aggasāvakānaṃ osadhitārakappabhāsadiso, paccekabuddhānaṃ candappabhāsadiso, sammāsambuddhānaṃ rasmisahassapaṭimaṇḍitasaradasūriyamaṇḍalasadiso hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tathā sukkhavipassakānaṃ vipassanācāro andhānaṃ yaṭṭhikoṭiyā gamanasadiso, lokiyābhiññappattapakatisāvakānaṃ daṇḍakasetugamanasadiso, mahāsāvakānaṃ jaṅghasetugamanasadiso, aggasāvakānaṃ sakaṭasetugamanasadiso, paccekabuddhānaṃ mahājaṅghamaggagamanasadiso, sammāsambuddhānaṃ mahāsakaṭamaggagamanasadiso. Tathā buddhānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca vipassanā cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaḍḍhitattā sayambhūñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaḍḍhitattā paropadesasambhūtāti veditabbā.
现在,为了显示两位长老的宿世精进,开始说'据说在过去……'等语。这一切意义皆显而易见。显示巴利原文
Idāni ubhinnampi therānaṃ pubbayogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atīte kirā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthameva.
63 六三、所谓‘山围城’:指王舍城。因其四周为山所环绕,形如围栏而耸立,故得‘山围’之名。至于‘于受用义中’云云,乃就嫉妒行为的业有之性而说。显示巴利原文
63.Giribbajanagaranti samantā pabbataparikkhittaṃ vajasadisaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhatīti giribbajanti evaṃladdhanāmaṃ rājagahanagaraṃ. Usūyanakiriyāya kammabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘upayogatthe vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
依止师义务事之释义显示巴利原文
Upajjhāyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
64 六四、能审察有罪与无罪者,称为‘亲教师’(upajjhāya);无亲教师者,则称‘无亲教师’(anupajjhāyakā)。故说‘远离了能审察有罪与无罪的师长’。此中,‘有罪与无罪’是指小罪与大罪。这里的‘ā’字含有增长之义,犹如‘果与非果’等词中的用法。‘残食钵’一词中,‘残食’(uttiṭṭha)与‘残食’(ucchiṭṭha)同义。因此说‘因人们对彼物作残食想,故称残食钵’。复以‘乞食所用之钵’此句,通过显示钵的真实相状,阐明了安立其为残食钵的缘由。‘在那个’即指在那个乞食所用的钵中。显示巴利原文
64. Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāyo, natthi upajjhāyo etesanti anupajjhāyakā. Tenāha ‘‘vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyakena garunā virahitā’’ti. Tattha vajjāvajjanti khuddakaṃ mahantañca vajjaṃ. Vuddhiattho hi ayamakāro ‘‘phalāphala’’ntiādīsu viya. Uttiṭṭhapattanti ettha ucchiṭṭha-saddasamānattho uttiṭṭha-saddo. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmiñhi manussā ucchiṭṭhasaññino, tasmā uttiṭṭhapattanti vutta’’nti. Piṇḍāya caraṇakapattanti iminā pana pattassa sarūpadassanamukhena ucchiṭṭhakappanāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāvitaṃ. Tasminti tasmiṃ piṇḍāya caraṇakapatte.
65 六五、‘具恭敬、具顺从’一句中,‘恭敬’(gārava)指尊重之态,即如同对待石伞一般郑重其事。与恭敬俱行,故为‘具恭敬’(sagāravā)。师长有所教示时,因恭敬而随顺听闻,此谓‘顺从’(patissa),意为顺从的状态及与顺从相应的一切尊敬。与顺从俱行,故为‘具顺从’(sappatissā),意指接受教诫。或谓‘应被顺从’(patissīyati),故为‘顺从’(patisso),即应受尊重者。与彼顺从俱行,故为‘具顺从’。而在注释书中,未作字句分别,唯为显示义理而说‘确立尊重与尊长之状态’。‘善哉’(sāhū)即好。‘轻’(lahū)即不重,意为‘于我而言,您作为亲教师,并非沉重负担’。‘合宜的’(opāyika)即与方便相应,意为‘您以此方便为我确立亲教师身份,从今往后我则成为您的负担’,乃如是说。‘适当的’(patirūpa)即合适,意为‘您摄受我为弟子,此乃恰当之举’。‘以令人净信的方式’(pāsādikena)即凭借能生净信的身业、语业。‘成就’(samp显示巴利原文
65.Sagāravā sappatissāti ettha garubhāvo gāravaṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇīyatā. Saha gāravenāti sagāravā. Garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patisso, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāgañca yaṃkiñci gāravanti attho. Saha patissenāti sappatissā, ovādaṃ sampaṭicchantāti attho . Patissīyatīti vā patisso, garukātabbo. Tena saha patissenāti sappatissā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā atthamattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘garukabhāvañceva jeṭṭhakabhāvañca upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāhūti sādhu. Lahūti agaru, mama tuyhaṃ upajjhāyabhāve bhāriyaṃ nāma natthīti attho. Opāyikanti upāyapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ te upajjhāyaggahaṇaṃ iminā upāyena tvaṃ me ito paṭṭhāya bhāro jātosīti vuttaṃ hoti. Patirūpanti anurūpaṃ tava upajjhāyaggahaṇanti attho. Pāsādikenāti pasādāvahena kāyavacīpayogena. Sampādehīti tividhasikkhaṃ nipphādehīti attho. Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādiṃ dassento kāyena vā viññāpeti. Gahito tayā…pe… viññāpetīti ‘‘sāhū’’tiādīsu ekaṃ vadantoyeva imamatthaṃ viññāpetīti vuccati. Tenevāha ‘‘idameva hī’’tiādi. Sādhūti sampaṭicchanaṃ sandhāyāti upajjhāyena ‘‘sāhū’’ti vutte saddhivihārikassa ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchanavacanaṃ sandhāya. Kasmā nappamāṇanti āha ‘‘āyācanadānamattena hī’’tiādi, saddhivihārikassa ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti āyācanamattena, upajjhāyassa ca ‘‘sāhū’’tiādinā dānavacanamattenāti attho. Na ettha sampaṭicchanaṃ aṅganti saddhivihārikassa sampaṭicchanavacanaṃ ettha upajjhāyaggahaṇe aṅgaṃ na hoti.
66 第六十六条。‘正行’即正确的行为。‘他的’指共住弟子。‘应给予同样温度的洗脸水’:在温度与身体状态相同的情况下,应给予同样的水。‘两件衣’是就披覆衣与僧伽梨而说。若问既然如此,为何又说‘僧伽梨’?答:因为一切衣都是缝合而成,所以称为僧伽梨。‘在步距之间’:此处‘步距’指跨步之处,即不作信使般的拖延、并肩而行时两脚之间大约一肘的距离;或者将脚向前跨出并放下称为‘步距’,此处应取此义。‘从此处开始’:即从‘不应在亲教师说话时’句中的‘不’字开始。‘应知一切处皆有恶作罪’:这是为了显示即使患病者也不得免除这些情况而说。因为,对于其他所述亲教师的义务,若无病者以不恭敬心而不履行,在义务的违犯上,一切处皆是恶作。因此下文会说:‘无病的共住弟子即使共住六十年,也应履行一切亲教师义务,若以不恭敬心不作,在义务的违犯上即是恶作。’而与‘不’字相关的处所,即显示巴利原文
66.Sammāvattanāti sammāpavatti. Assāti saddhivihārikassa. Tādisameva mukhadhovanodakaṃ dātabbanti utumhi sarīrasabhāve ca ekākāre tādisameva dātabbaṃ. Dve cīvarānīti pārupanaṃ saṅghāṭiñca sandhāya vadati. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘saṅghāṭiyo’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘sabbañhi cīvaraṃ saṅghaṭitattā saṅghāṭīti vuccatī’’ti. Padavītihārehīti ettha padaṃ vītiharati etthāti padavītihāro, padavītiharaṇaṭṭhānaṃ dūtavilambitaṃ akatvā samagamane dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ. Padānaṃ vā vītiharaṇaṃ abhimukhaṃ haritvā nikkhepo padavītihāroti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ito paṭṭhāyāti ‘‘na upajjhāyassa bhaṇamānassā’’ti ettha vutta na-kārato paṭṭhāya. Sabbattha dukkaṭāpatti veditabbāti ‘‘īdisesu gilānopi na muccatī’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññampi hi yathāvuttaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ anādariyena akarontassa agilānassa vattabhede sabbattha dukkaṭameva. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘agilānena hi saddhivihārikena saṭṭhivassenapi sabbaṃ upajjhāyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ, anādarena akarontassa vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ. Na-kārapaṭisaṃyuttesu pana padesu gilānassapi paṭikkhittakiriyaṃ karontassa dukkaṭamevā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 64). Āpattiyā āsannavācanti āpattijanakameva vacanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yāya hi vācāya āpattiṃ āpajjati, sā vācā tassā āpattiyā āsannāti vuccati.
‘以衣包裹钵’中,此处《结文处》说:‘用上衣的一角包裹’。‘在村落’指在属于村落范围的任何此类地方。‘在俗人家中’指在屋内。‘在回返处’指在座堂。‘应以水询问三次’是关联语句,意思是应在开始、中间、结束时如此询问三次。‘近’即邻近。‘以洗净的沙’即用无尘、清净的沙。‘如果能够’:为了阐明所说的义理,故说‘不被任何疾病所压倒’。‘去了精舍’指去了亲教师的精舍。显示巴利原文
Cīvarena pattaṃ veṭhetvāti ettha ‘‘uttarāsaṅgassa ekena kaṇṇena veṭhetvā’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Gāmeti gāmapariyāpanne tādise kismiñci padese. Antaraghareti antogehe. Paṭikkamaneti āsanasālāyaṃ. Tikkhattuṃ pānīyena pucchitabboti sambandho, ādimhi majjhe anteti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ pucchitabboti attho. Upakaṭṭhoti āsanno. Dhotavālikāyāti nirajāya parisuddhavālikāya. Sace pahotīti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘na kenaci gelaññena abhibhūto hotī’’ti. Pariveṇaṃ gantvāti upajjhāyassa pariveṇaṃ gantvā.
67 第六十七条。共住弟子的义务事,其义已经明了。显示巴利原文
67. Saddhivihārikavattakathā uttānatthāyeva.
不正行等事之释义显示巴利原文
Nasammāvattanādikathāvaṇṇanā
68 在“不如法行等论”中,“依家之爱”是指“这是我的父亲”这般生起的爱。在这里,对戒师生起如父之心,即名为依家之爱。因为对于已证悟谛理、已断除执著的圣者来说,那种属于不善品类的依家之爱并不存在,所以此处并非指其;世尊也不会驱使比丘们去行杂染之法。然而,由于它与依家之爱相似,因此应知这里是借着“爱”的名义而说慈爱。若有一位具足行仪的比丘说:“尊者,请放心,我会照顾你们的共住弟子或近住弟子,会教导应教导的,也会妥善处理应当做的事。”或者那些共住弟子等说:“尊者,你们尽可放心。”又或者他们不接受行仪,那么从那时起,戒师与依止师便无犯。这是诸师所说。其余此处义理明显。显示巴利原文
68. Nasammāvattanādikathāyaṃ gehassitapemanti ‘‘pitā me aya’’nti evaṃ uppannapemaṃ. Upajjhāyamhi pitucittupaṭṭhānameva hi idha gehassitapemaṃ nāma. Na hi idaṃ akusalapakkhiyaṃ gehassitapemaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ paṭividdhasaccānaṃ pahīnānugedhānaṃ tadasambhavato, na ca bhagavā bhikkhū saṃkilese niyojeti, gehassitapemasadisattā pana pemamukhena mettāsineho idha vuttoti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tesu eko vattasampanno bhikkhu…pe… tesaṃ anāpattī’’ti vacanato sace eko vattasampanno bhikkhu ‘‘bhante, tumhe appossukkā hotha, ahaṃ tumhākaṃ saddhivihārikaṃ antevāsikaṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmi, ovaditabbaṃ ovadissāmi, iti karaṇīyesu ussukkaṃ āpajjissāmī’’ti vadati, te eva vā saddhivihārikādayo ‘‘bhante, tumhe kevalaṃ appossukkā hothā’’ti vadanti, vattaṃ vā na sādiyanti , tato paṭṭhāya ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anāpattīti vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
拉达婆罗门事论的解释。显示巴利原文
Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
69 在拉达婆罗门事中,“变得消瘦”是指不能咀嚼或吞咽食物,身体羸弱,血肉极少。“肤色极度苍白”是指变得极度苍白,如同枯叶之色。“筋脉遍布身体”是指由于血肉耗尽,身体仿佛被血管之网所覆盖。“敬礼”即恭敬之行,意为表示尊敬。“知恩”即知所受之恩,了知所做之事而知晓,称为知恩报恩者。难道长老不知道世尊在波罗奈已通过三皈依开许了出家与具足戒吗?他并非不知。若如此,为何他说“尊者,我如何令那位婆罗门出家、受具足戒呢”?针对此问,答言:“虽具寿舍利弗……”等。“以圆满的”即以完整的。所谓“该说别的,却说别的”,是指应说“尊者”,却说“朋友”。显示巴利原文
69. Rādhabrāhmaṇavatthumhi kiso ahosīti khādituṃ vā bhuñjituṃ vā asakkonto tanuko ahosi appamaṃsalohito. Uppaṇḍuppaṇḍukajātoti sañjātuppaṇḍuppaṇḍukabhāvo paṇḍupalāsappaṭibhāgo. Dhamanisanthatagattoti pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattā sirājāleneva santharitagatto. Adhikāranti adhikiriyaṃ, sakkāranti vuttaṃ hoti. Kataṃ jānantīti kataññuno, kataṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānantīti katavedino. Kiṃ pana thero bhagavatā bārāṇasiyaṃ tīhi saraṇagamanehi anuññātaṃ pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca na jānātīti? No na jānāti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘kathāhaṃ, bhante, taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ pabbājemi upasampādemī’’ti kasmā āhāti imaṃ anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kiñcāpi āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi. Parimaṇḍalehīti paripuṇṇehi. Aññathā vā vattabbaṃ aññathā vadatīti ‘‘bhante’’ti vattabbaṃ ‘‘bandhe’’ti vadati.
71-73 “紧接着”即不间断地。“犯制限”指违犯学处。“为维持身命而依止的”称为“依止”,即托钵食等四种资具。其中,“托钵食”是指凭借双腿游行乞得的一口之食。“额外所得”是指比“依止托钵食”所说乞食所得更多的获得,如僧团食等。其中,应施予全体僧团的食物为“僧团食”;指定若干比丘而施的食物为“指定食”;通过邀请而施的食物为“邀请食”;令取筹而施的食物为“筹食”;每半月施一次的食物为“半月食”;布萨日施的食物为“布萨食”;月黑分初日施的食物为“初日食”。这些的详细解说,将在《卧坐具犍度》的解释中阐明。显示巴利原文
71-73.Samanantarāti anantaraṃ. Paṇṇattivītikkamaṃ karotīti sikkhāpadavītikkamaṃ karoti. Attabhāvapariharaṇatthaṃ nissīyantīti nissayā, piṇḍiyālopabhojanādikā cattāro paccayā. Tattha piṇḍiyālopabhojananti jaṅghapiṇḍiyabalena caritvā ālopamattaṃ laddhabhojanaṃ. Atirekalābhoti ‘‘piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāyā’’ti evaṃ vuttabhikkhāhāralābhato adhikalābho saṅghabhattādi. Tattha sakalassa saṅghassa dātabbabhattaṃ saṅghabhattaṃ. Katipaye bhikkhū uddisitvā dātabbabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ. Nimantetvā dātabbabhattaṃ nimantanaṃ. Salākaṃ gāhāpetvā dātabbabhattaṃ salākabhattaṃ. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekadivasaṃ dātabbabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dātabbabhattaṃ uposathikaṃ. Pāṭipadadivase dātabbabhattaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ. Vitthārakathā nesaṃ senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ āvi bhavissati.
“精舍”是指以墙围起来的整个住处。“半屋”是指长殿。也有人说是金翅鸟形状的殿堂。“殿堂”是指四方形殿堂。“覆顶殿”是指平顶殿堂。然而其他人说:“精舍是长面殿堂;半屋是一侧有顶的卧坐处,据说它的一侧墙壁较高,另一侧较低,因此它是一侧有顶的;殿堂是长方形四角殿堂;覆顶殿是平顶、带有月光露台的。” “窟”是指山窟。“腐尿”是指任何尿。如同金色之身也被称为“腐身”一样,即使是新鲜的尿,也同样是腐尿。其余在此的,意义明显。显示巴利原文
Vihāroti pākāraparicchinno sakalo āvāso. Aḍḍhayogoti
长殿,也称为鹰巢殿。殿是指四角形建筑。覆顶殿是指平顶殿堂。另有些人则说:“僧舍名为长面殿,半圆殿是单坡顶的坐卧处,据说它的一侧墙壁较高,另一侧较低,因此成为单坡顶。殿堂……”窟指山洞。“纯净无染”是指没有污秽,如同黄金的色体称为“纯净体”,新制成的物品也是如此,称为纯净之物。以上解释完毕。显示巴利原文
Dīghapāsādo. Garuḷasaṇṭhānapāsādotipi vadanti. Pāsādoti caturassapāsādo. Hammiyanti muṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘vihāro nāma dīghamukhapāsādo, aḍḍhayogo ekapassacchadanakasenāsanaṃ , tassa kira ekapasse bhitti uccatarā hoti, itarapasse nīcā, tena taṃ ekapassacchadanakaṃ hoti, pāsādo āyatacaturassapāsādo, hammiyaṃ muṇḍacchadanaṃ candikaṅgaṇayutta’’nti. Guhāti pabbataguhā. Pūtimuttanti yaṃ kiñci muttaṃ. Yathā suvaṇṇavaṇṇopi kāyo ‘‘pūtikāyo’’ti vuccati, evaṃ abhinavampi muttaṃ pūtimuttameva. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
戒师行仪论的解释。显示巴利原文
Ācariyavattakathāvaṇṇanā
75 在优波先那事中,“所习行的”是指已行持的、随顺法的行仪。“比丘,你是否能忍受?”意思是:比丘,你这具四轮九门的身体机械,是否堪忍、能忍、能持、能守护,而不生起任何苦痛?“是否能维持?”意思是:是否在一切事务中都能维持,不显现任何障碍?“如来虽知……”等语,是为了引出后面“比丘,你戒腊多少?”等提问的回答而说。其简要含义是:名为如来者,即使知道,若有那样的提问因缘,便会提问;若没有那样的提问因缘,即使知道也不问。不过,因为诸佛没有“不知”这回事,所以不说“虽不知”。他们了知时机而问:若存在提问的时机,便了知时机而问;若不存在,也了知时机而不问。如此提问时,如来也只问与义相应之事,即问那些依于义、依于因缘的事,不问与无义相应之事。为何如此?因为在与无义相应之事上,如来已断除桥梁。所谓“桥梁”,即指道路,意思是:已通过道路彻底断除了那样的言说。显示巴利原文
75. Upasenavatthumhi āciṇṇanti caritaṃ vattaṃ anudhammatā. Kacci bhikkhu khamanīyanti bhikkhu kacci tuyhaṃ idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ khamanīyaṃ sakkā khamituṃ sahituṃ pariharituṃ, na kiñci dukkhaṃ uppādetīti. Kacci yāpanīyanti kacci sabbakiccesu yāpetuṃ sakkā, na kiñci antarāyaṃ dassetīti. Jānantāpi tathāgatātievamādi yaṃ parato ‘‘kati vassosi tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādinā pucchi, tassa parihāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – tathāgatā nāma jānantāpi sace tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ hoti, pucchanti. Sace pana tādisaṃ pucchākāraṇaṃ natthi, jānantāpi na pucchanti. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ajānanaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘ajānantāpī’’ti na vuttaṃ. Kālaṃ viditvā pucchantīti sace tassā pucchāya so kālo hoti, evaṃ taṃ kālaṃ viditvā pucchanti. Sace na hoti, evampi kālaṃ viditvāva na pucchanti. Evaṃ pucchantāpi ca atthasaṃhitaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, yaṃ atthanissitaṃ kāraṇanissitaṃ, tadeva pucchanti, no anatthasaṃhitaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā anatthasaṃhite setughāto tathāgatānaṃ. Setu vuccati maggo, maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto samucchedoti vuttaṃ hoti.
现在,为了显示“与义相应”中如来所问的依义之言说,而说“以二种行相”等。其中,“行相”即因缘。“我们将说法”,是指将讲述与事缘相应的经,或者讲述与宿世行迹因缘相应的本生。“或将为弟子们制定学处”,是指通过该提问,将弟子的违犯公开后,制定或重或轻的学处,确立教诫。“过急”即过快。显示巴利原文
Idāni atthasaṃhitanti ettha yaṃ atthanissitaṃ vacanaṃ tathāgatā pucchanti, taṃ dassento ‘‘dvīhi ākārehī’’tiādimāha. Tattha ākārehīti kāraṇehi . Dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti aṭṭhuppattiyuttaṃ suttaṃ vā pubbacaritakāraṇayuttaṃ jātakaṃ vā kathayissāma. Sāvakānaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmāti sāvakānaṃ vā tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā garukaṃ vā lahukaṃ vā sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāma āṇaṃ ṭhapessāma. Atilahunti atisīghaṃ.
76 在关于外道的事例中,“前外道”指过去曾为外道者。在《增支部·八集》2.3.62处,应知“教义”,应知“教义创立者”,应知“外道”,应知“外道弟子”。其中,“教义”即六十二种邪见。因众生在此中漂浮、沉浮,故称为“教义”。这些邪见的制造者,如富兰那迦叶等,称为“教义创立者”。接受其见解而出家者,称为“外道”。因其生于教义中,故为“外道”;或如所说,他们持有称为邪见的教义,故为“有教义者”,“有教义者”即外道。应知供养他们资具者为“外道弟子”。“被同法者说”指被同法者们所说,此处为工具格的宾格用法。同法者,或因应与五种同法者一同学习,或因属于他们而得名,意即被佛陀所制学处所说之人。Pasūro,是其名。“遍行者”指舍弃在家束缚而出家者。显示巴利原文
76. Aññatitthiyavatthumhi aññatitthiyapubboti pubbe aññatitthiyo bhūtoti aññatitthiyapubbo. Ettha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.62) ca titthaṃ jānitabbaṃ, titthakaro jānitabbo , titthiyā jānitabbā, titthiyasāvakā jānitabbā. Tattha titthaṃ nāma dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo. Ettha hi sattā taranti uppilavanti ummujjanimujjaṃ karonti, tasmā ‘‘tittha’’nti vuccanti. Tāsaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ uppādetā titthakaro nāma pūraṇakassapādiko. Tassa laddhiṃ gahetvā pabbajitā titthiyā nāma. Te hi titthe jātāti titthiyā, yathāvuttaṃ vā diṭṭhigatasaṅkhātaṃ titthaṃ etesaṃ atthīti titthikā, titthikā eva titthiyā. Tesaṃ paccayadāyakā titthiyasāvakāti veditabbā. Sahadhammikaṃ vuccamānoti sahadhammikena vuccamāno, karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Pañcahi sahadhammikehi sikkhitabbattā, tesaṃ vā santakattā ‘‘sahadhammika’’nti laddhanāmena buddhapaññattena sikkhāpadena vuccamānoti attho. Pasūroti tassa nāmaṃ. Paribbājakoti gihibandhanaṃ pahāya pabbajjupagato.
“正是那个教义领域”:此中,六十二邪见所摄的教义本身就是领域,故称“教义领域”;又或,那些人拥有教义,故为“有教义者”,即外道,他们的领域亦名“教义领域”。而“领域”一词,例如“甘谟惹是马的领域,南道是牛的领域”中,是指出生地。显示巴利原文
Taṃyeva titthāyatananti ettha dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ titthameva āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, titthaṃ vā etesaṃ atthīti titthino, titthiyā, tesaṃ āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ. Āyatananti ca ‘‘assānaṃ kambojo āyatanaṃ, gunnaṃ dakkhiṇapatho āyatana’’nti ettha sañjātiṭṭhānaṃ āyatanaṃ nāma.
于悦意之领域,众鸟栖止翱翔;
求荫凉者前往荫凉,求果实者食用果实。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā; Chāyaṃ chāyatthino yanti, phalatthaṃ phalabhojino’’ti. (a. ni. 5.38) –
在此,“集会处”是领域之义。而“诸比丘,有此五种解脱处”(《增支部·五集》26)中的“处”,则是指原因,这一切在这里都能获得。因为所有执持邪见者,当生起时,便在这六十二种邪见中生起;当聚集时,也在这六十二种邪见中聚集、会合;而他们成为执邪见者的原因,也正是这六十二种邪见。因此,如前所述,教义以其为出生地等义而成为领域,故称“教义领域”;同理,外道们的领域也被称为“教义领域”。显示巴利原文
Ettha samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, vimuttāyatanānī’’ti (a. ni. 5.26) ettha kāraṇaṃ, taṃ idha sabbampi labbhati. Sabbepi hi diṭṭhigatikā sañjāyamānā imāsuyeva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīsu sañjāyanti, samosaramānāpi etāsuyeva samosaranti sannipatanti, diṭṭhigatikabhāve ca nesaṃ imāyeva dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttaṃ titthameva sañjātiādinā atthena āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, tenevatthena titthīnaṃ āyatanantipi titthāyatanaṃ.
“依止具寿而住”句中,“具寿”为宾格的属格用法,意为“依止具寿而住”。而“贤能……乃至……具有所说特征者”,是就善于护持大众的多闻者而说。于“优波离,以五支”等句中,所应解说之义,后文将会显明。显示巴利原文
Āyasmato nissāya vacchāmīti ettha āyasmatoti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, āyasmantaṃ nissāya vasissāmīti attho. Byatto…pe… vuttalakkhaṇoyevāti parisupaṭṭhāpakabahussutaṃ sandhāya vadati. Pañcahupāli aṅgehītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
驱离与忏悔之论释显示巴利原文
Paṇāmanākhamāpanākathāvaṇṇanā
80 “先前所说的特征”为连接词。典籍中虽可见“应以同样的特征了知依止弟子的罪”这一文句,但此处应理解为“不应以同样的特征了知依止弟子的罪”。其含义是:不应以对共住弟子所说的特征来了知依止弟子的罪。否则,便与“因依止弟子在依止导师而住期间,应履行导师的一切义务”这句话相违。因为这句话表明,未依止的依止弟子若不履行义务,才有罪。因此应如此把握:共住弟子若不履行所说的义务,无论是否脱离依止,皆有罪;而依止弟子唯在未脱离依止时才有罪。正因如此,在《清净道论》(1.41)关于亲属障碍的论述中——显示巴利原文
80. Yaṃ pubbe lakkhaṇaṃ vuttanti sambandho, ‘‘teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti potthakesu pāṭho dissati, ‘‘na teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti evaṃ panettha pāṭho veditabbo. Saddhivihārikassa vuttalakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti na veditabbāti evaṃ panettha atthopi veditabbo. Aññathā ‘‘nissayantevāsikena hi yāva ācariyaṃ nissāya vasati, tāva sabbaṃ ācariyavattaṃ kātabba’’nti idaṃ virujjheyya. Idañhi vacanaṃ nissayantevāsikassa amuttanissayasseva vattaṃ akarontassa āpattīti dīpeti. Tasmā saddhivihārikassa yathāvuttavattaṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassa amuttakassapi āpatti, nissayantevāsikassa pana amuttanissayasseva āpattīti gahetabbaṃ. Teneva visuddhimaggepi (visuddhi. 1.41) ñātipalibodhakathāyaṃ –
“亲属”是指:在寺院中,即导师、戒师、共住弟子、弟子、同戒师、同导师;在家中,即母、父、姐妹、兄弟等。他们若患病,便会成为此人的障碍,故应通过照顾他们、使其康复来断除障碍。其中,若戒师生病,若不能迅速痊愈,则应终其一生予以照顾。同样,出家导师、授具足戒导师、共住弟子、已受具足戒的出家弟子、同戒师也当如此。而依止导师、教诫导师、依止弟子、教诫弟子、同导师,则只要依止和教诫关系未断,便应照顾。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Ñātīti vihāre ācariyupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakasamānācariyakā, ghare mātā pitā bhaginī bhātāti evamādikā. Te gilānā imassa palibodhā honti, tasmā so palibodho upaṭṭhahitvā tesaṃ pākatikakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Tattha upajjhāyo tāva gilāno sace lahuṃ na vuṭṭhāti, yāvajīvaṃ paṭijaggitabbo. Tathā pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo saddhivihāriko upasampāditapabbājitaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakā ca. Nissayācariya uddesācariya nissayantevāsika uddesantevāsikasamānācariyakā pana yāva nissayauddesā anupacchinnā, tāva paṭijaggitabbā’’ti –
已详尽说明。而这一分类,若依“应以同样的特征了知依止弟子的罪”之文句,则不合理。因为这一文句表明:如同共住弟子一样,依止弟子若不履行所说的义务,不论是否脱离依止,皆有罪。因此,此处应依上述方式采纳文句。显示巴利原文
Vibhāgena vuttaṃ. Ayañca vibhāgo ‘‘teneva lakkhaṇena nissayantevāsikassa āpatti veditabbā’’ti evaṃ pāṭhe sati na yujjeyya. Ayañhi pāṭho saddhivihārikassa viya nissayantevāsikassapi yathāvuttavattaṃ akarontassa nissayamuttakassa amuttakassapi āpattīti imamatthaṃ dīpeti, tasmā vuttanayenevettha pāṭho gahetabbo.
而出家弟子、授具足戒弟子、法弟子等……乃至……应行义务”,这是指出家导师、授具足戒导师、法导师的显示巴利原文
Pabbajjaupasampadadhammantevāsikehi pana…pe… tāva vattaṃ kātabbanti pabbajjācariyaupasampadācariyadhammācariyānaṃ
应如所述履行义务。其中,授予学处者,是为出家导师;诵具足戒甘马语者,是为授具足戒导师;给予读诵或教示质问者,当知是为法导师。此处其余内容,浅显易明。显示巴利原文
Etehi yathāvuttavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tattha yena sikkhāpadāni dinnāni, ayaṃ pabbajjācariyo. Yena upasampadakammavācā vuttā, ayaṃ upasampadācariyo. Yo uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ vā deti, ayaṃ dhammācariyoti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
依止舍断之论释显示巴利原文
Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāvaṇṇanā
83 于依止舍断的论述中,“去了某方”指为了居住而前往某一方向,无论其有返回之意或无返回之意。“比丘的同伴”指其良善的品性。“观察”即审察。于“若散乱……应去那里”一段中,若因某事当日无法前往,而心想“过几日再去”,对前往仍怀有热忱,则称为“护持”。“不要回到这里”意为不要进入此处。“应即住于那里”意为即于该处取得依止而住。于“就在那座寺院……可以居住”一段中,由于已被和尚舍弃,故无与和尚共住的豁免;是故,即使先前与和尚共住者,从阿阇梨处所受的依止亦不舍断。显示巴利原文
83. Nissayapaṭippassaddhikathāyaṃ disaṃ gatoti puna āgantukāmo anāgantukāmo vā hutvā vāsatthāya kañci disaṃ gato. Bhikkhuno sabhāgatanti pesalabhāvaṃ. Oloketvāti upaparikkhitvā. Vibbhante…pe… tattha gantabbanti ettha sace kenaci karaṇīyena tadaheva gantuṃ asakkonto katipāhena gamissāmīti gamane saussāho hoti, rakkhatīti vadanti. Mā idha paṭikkamīti mā idha pavisi. Tatreva vasitabbanti tattheva nissayaṃ gahetvā vasitabbaṃ. Taṃyeva vihāraṃ…pe… vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti ettha upajjhāyena pariccattattā upajjhāyasamodhānaparihāro natthi, tasmā upajjhāyena samodhānagatassapi ācariyassa santike gahitanissayo na paṭippassambhati.
于从阿阇梨舍断依止的论述中,“阿阇梨已离去”等:关于和尚离去的判定,前文已说,据此亦可了知,此处不再复述,而另立一种方式:“某位阿阇梨告假后离去”等,而这一方式在和尚离去时亦应了知。以此处所说之相,于他处亦当同样看待。若越过两块土块所掷之距后返回,则依止已舍断。至此程度即名为“已往他方”,纵使弟子尚未放下义务,依止亦舍断。阿阇梨与和尚越过两块土块所掷之距而住于另一住处者,是指在界外近行区域内,从弟子与共住者的住处越过两块土块所掷之距,而住于另一卧坐处;然而在界内近行区域内,即使越过两块土块所掷之距而住,依止亦不舍断。“即使阿阇梨本欲舍弃,以遣离依止而遣离”等一切,在和尚的命令中亦当了知。其余在此易明。显示巴利原文
Ācariyamhānissayapaṭippassaddhīsu ācariyo pakkanto vā hotīti ettha ‘‘pakkantoti disaṃ gato’’tiādinā upajjhāyassa pakkamane yo vinicchayo vutto, so tattha vuttanayeneva idhāpi sakkā viññātunti taṃ avatvā ‘‘koci ācariyo āpucchitvā pakkamatī’’tiādinā aññoyeva nayo āraddho, ayañca nayo upajjhāyapakkamanepi veditabboyeva. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu ekattha vuttalakkhaṇaṃ aññatthāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sace dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvā nivattati, paṭippassaddho hotīti ettha ettāvatā disāpakkanto nāma hotīti antevāsike anikkhittadhurepi nissayo paṭippassambhati. Ācariyupajjhāyā dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ vihāre vasantīti bahiupacārasīmāyaṃ antevāsikasaddhivihārikānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānato dve leḍḍupāte atikkamma aññasmiṃ senāsane vasanti, antoupacārasīmāyaṃ pana dve leḍḍupāte atikkamitvāpi vasato nissayo na paṭippassambhati. ‘‘Sacepi ācariyo muñcitukāmova hutvā nissayapaṇāmanāya paṇāmetī’’tiādi sabbaṃ upajjhāyassa āṇattiyampi veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.
应授达上五法之论释显示巴利原文
Upasampādetabbapañcakakathāvaṇṇanā
84 84. 在“诸比丘,具足五支者……”等句中,“不应令沙弥侍奉”的意思是:身为和尚,不得接纳沙弥。此义在《增支部注释》(A.ni.aṭṭha.3.5.251-253)中已说。显示巴利原文
84.Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatenātiādīsu na sāmaṇero upaṭṭhāpetabboti upajjhāyena hutvā sāmaṇero na gahetabbo. Ayamattho aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.251-253) vuttoyeva.
“应先将自己安立于合宜之处;
然后教导他人,贤者便不会染污。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Attānameva paṭhamaṃ, patirūpe nivesaye; Athaññamanusāseyya, na kilisseyya paṇḍito’’ti. (dha. pa. 158) –
为随顺此义,首先策励于自身成就,故说“非以无学戒蕴”等,而非就犯戒支而言。其中,“以无学戒蕴”意指:无学者的戒蕴,即名无学戒蕴。因属无学者,故称无学戒蕴。一切处皆如此。同样,名为解脱智见的省察智,亦得成立无学性。然而所谓“无学戒”,并非唯指道果,而是指任何在无学相续中生起的戒,因为此处意指世间与出世间混合之戒。于定蕴等乃至解脱蕴,亦是同理。因此,如同戒、定、慧蕴意指混合,解脱蕴亦应知包括彼分解脱等,而非仅指舍断解脱。而解脱智见则是世间的。正如《相应部注释》(Saṃ.ni.aṭṭha.1.1.135)中说:“前四句说世间与出世间的戒、定、慧、解脱,解脱智见是省察智,彼唯是世间。”显示巴利原文
Imassa anurūpavasena paṭhamaṃ tāva attasampattiyaṃ niyojetuṃ ‘‘na asekkhena sīlakkhandhenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, na āpattiaṅgavasena. Tattha asekkhena sīlakkhandhenāti asekkhassa sīlakkhandho asekkho sīlakkhandho nāma. Asekkhassa ayanti hi asekkho, sīlakkhandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Evañca katvā vimuttiñāṇadassanasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇassapi asekkhatā upapannā. Asekkhasīlanti ca na maggaphalameva adhippetaṃ, atha kho yaṃkiñci asekkhasantāne pavattasīlaṃ lokiyalokuttaramissakassa sīlassa idhādhippetattā. Samādhikkhandhādīsupi vimuttikkhandhapariyosānesu ayameva nayo. Tasmā yathā sīlasamādhipaññakkhandhā missakā adhippetā, evaṃ vimuttikkhandhopīti tadaṅgavimuttiādayopi veditabbā, na paṭippassaddhivimutti eva. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyameva. Teneva saṃyuttanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.135) vuttaṃ ‘‘purimehi catūhi padehi lokiyalokuttarasīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiyo kathitā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ hoti, taṃ lokiyamevā’’ti.
在“无信”等三事中:无信,即没有信。就善的方面而言,有信,即能信,或因具有信而称为有信。无耻,即无惭,这是对不厌离不善等至者的称呼。有惭,即具足惭。无惧,即不知畏惧,指对不善等至不感恐惧。其相反者为具惧。懈怠,即卑劣地沉滞,是对精进弱劣者的称呼。勤发精进,即已发勤精进,是对已具足正勤者的称呼。念忘失,即念已忘失,谓念已退失。念现前,即念已现前,是对恒时趋向所缘、令念得现前者的称呼。显示巴利原文
Assaddhotiādīsu tīsu vatthūsu saddhā etassa natthīti assaddho. Sukkapakkhe saddahatīti saddho, saddhā vā etassa atthītipi saddho. Natthi etassa hirīti ahiriko, akusalasamāpattiyā ajigucchamānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Hirī etassa atthīti hirimā. Na ottappatīti anottappī, akusalasamāpattiyā na bhāyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tabbiparīto ottappī. Kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusīto, hīnavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Āraddhaṃ vīriyaṃ etassāti āraddhavīriyo, sammappadhānayuttassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Muṭṭhā sati etassāti muṭṭhassati, naṭṭhassatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhitā sati etassāti upaṭṭhitassati, niccaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhappavattasatissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
增上戒中戒坏失,及在行仪中行坏失,即犯后而未出离。执取或令人执取名为常断的极端见者,是为执极端者,此是邪见。前面两句,即:“不能照顾或令人照顾弟子或共住者之病,不能安抚或令人安抚心不乐者”这两句。显示巴利原文
Adhisīlesīlavipanno ca ajjhācāre ācāravipanno ca āpajjitvā avuṭṭhito. Sassatucchedasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ gaṇhāti gāhayatīti vā antaggāhikā, micchādiṭṭhi. Purimāni dve padānīti ‘‘na paṭibalo hoti antevāsiṃ vā saddhivihāriṃ vā gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ vā upaṭṭhāpetuṃ vā, anabhirataṃ vūpakāsetuṃ vā vūpakāsāpetuṃ vā’’ti imāni dve padāni.
殊胜、最上的行持,名为增上行;此增上行既是应学之处,故为学处,即增上行学处;或谓依增上行而制定的学处,亦名增上行学处。作为道梵行的起始,称为初梵行,这是指摄于二部别解脱中的学处。因此《清净道论》中说:“摄于二部别解脱者,为初梵行;摄于犍度轨仪者,为增上行。”是故,于“有学制定”一词中,当解为一切摄于二部别解脱中、应学的制定。所以《义注》亦说:“有学制定,即是以波罗夷等为首的、应学的学处制定。”其余在此,易可了知。显示巴利原文
Abhivisiṭṭho uttamo samācāroti abhisamācāro, abhisamācārova sikkhitabbato sikkhāti ābhisamācārikā sikkhā, abhisamācāraṃ vā ārabbha paññattā sikkhā ābhisamācārikā. Maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāti ādibrahmacariyakā, ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannasikkhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannaṃ ādibrahmacariyakaṃ, khandhakavattapariyāpannaṃ ābhisamācārika’’nti visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.11) vuttaṃ. Tasmā sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti ettha sikkhitabbato sabbāpi ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannā paṇṇattīti gahetabbā. Teneva gaṇṭhipadepi vuttaṃ ‘‘sekkhapaṇṇattiyanti pārājikamādiṃ katvā sikkhitabbasikkhāpadapaññattiya’’nti. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
曾为外道者事之论述的注释显示巴利原文
Aññatitthiyapubbavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
86 第八十六事。在外道缘起事中,有邪命外道与裸体外道两种裸形游方者,故说“裸形游方者或邪命外道”等。其中,邪命外道仅以一块布掖于腋下而着,下身全裸。裸体外道则通体一丝不挂。显示巴利原文
86. Aññatitthiyavatthumhi ājīvako acelakoti duvidho naggaparibbājakoti āha ‘‘naggaparibbājakasseva ājīvakassa vā’’tiādi. Tattha ājīvako upari ekameva vatthaṃ upakacchake pavesetvā paridahati, heṭṭhā naggo. Acelako sabbena sabbaṃ naggoyeva.
87 第八十七事。“Āmisakiñcikkhasampadāna”是指施予极少量的物品。“Rūpūpajīvikā”是指凭依自己的容貌而生活的女人。“Vesiyā gocaro”是指依朋友交往而应往赴的妓女之处,亦即妓女的活动范围。此理适用于一切处。“Yobbanappattā yobbanātītā vā”是指无论是已届青春还是已过青春的年长未破身女子。比丘尼本是梵行增盛者,比丘亦然。二者所缘不相顺,若以交往而亲近,不几日便会成为梵行的障碍,故说“与她们很快便会熟悉,由此戒律便遭破坏”。其余在此,显而易见。显示巴利原文
87.Āmisakiñcikkhasampadānaṃ nāma appamattakasseva deyyadhammassa anuppadānaṃ. Rūpūpajīvikāti attano rūpaṃyeva nissāya jīvantiyo. Vesiyā gocaro mittasanthavavasena upasaṅkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ assāti vesiyāgocaro. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yobbanappattā yobbanātītā vāti ubhayenapi mahallikā anividdhakumāriyova vadati. Bhikkhuniyo nāma ussannabrahmacariyā, tathā bhikkhūpi. Tesaṃ aññamaññavisabhāgavatthubhāvato santhavavasena upasaṅkamane katipāheneva brahmacariyantarāyo siyāti āha ‘‘tāhi saddhiṃ khippameva vissāso hoti, tato sīlaṃ bhijjatī’’ti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
五种疾病事之论述的注释显示巴利原文
Pañcābādhavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
88 第八十八项。五种病事中,关于“指甲背量”:三部义注皆言:“是指小指指甲背。”“若其虽仅有指甲背量,但处于增长期,则不应令出家。”此句显示了总的原则。因此,身体任何部位,若有指甲背量且处于增长期,即不可行,此义已然成立。若虽为指甲背量,却处于非增长期,则一切处皆可行,但此并非总的原则所许,故为显示仅限于特定部位而开许,方有“然而,如果……”等言说。因为,若不加区别地允许处于非增长期的指甲背量,便不会制定“在由下衣和上衣自然遮蔽之处”这一部位限制。是故,在由下衣和上衣自然遮蔽之处以外的部位,即使是指甲背量且处于非增长期,亦不可行,此义已然成立。然而,比指甲背量更为微细者,无论处于增长期或非增长期,一切处皆可行,因为比指甲背量更微细者,即使处于增长期,也仅在面部等处被遮止。显示巴利原文
88. Pañcābādhavatthumhi nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇanti ettha ‘‘kaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhi adhippetā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tañce nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃhoti, na pabbājetabbo’’ti iminā sāmaññato lakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā yattha katthaci sarīrāvayavesu nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ vaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitañce, na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. Evañca sati nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampi avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitañce, sabbattha vaṭṭatīti āpannaṃ, tañca na sāmaññato adhippetanti padesaviseseyeva niyametvā dassento ‘‘sace panā’’tiādimāha. Sace hi avisesena nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitaṃ vaṭṭeyya, ‘‘nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaacchanne ṭhāne’’ti padesaniyamaṃ na kareyya, tasmā nivāsanapārupanehi pakatipaṭicchannaṭṭhānato aññattha nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitampi na vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ, nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakataraṃ pana avaḍḍhanakapakkhe vaḍḍhanakapakkhe vā ṭhitaṃ hotu, vaṭṭati nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakatarassa vaḍḍhanakapakkhe avaḍḍhanakapakkhe vā ṭhitassa mukhādīsuyeva paṭikkhittattā.
对于肿块,亦应以同理了知判断。然而,在面部等处,即使比枣核量更小的肿块也不可行,此点并未单独显示。因此处仅言:“于面部等不遮蔽之处,即使处于非增长期,亦不可行。”尽管如此,依循对麻风病所述之理,可知在面部等处,即使比枣核量更小的肿块亦不可行。因此,“即使处于非增长期”中的“pi”字为连词,用以摄持未说之义。由此,即使比枣核量更小亦不可行,此义便已显示。以上是我们的见解。“生于本色”指未有因病而生的变异颜色。“枣核量”指如同枣核般的大小。“Suchaviṃ kāretvā”意为令皮肤愈合。“Sañchaviṃ kāretvā”亦是异读,意为令皮肤复原。“莲花叶色”指如红莲花、白莲花叶般的颜色。“肺痨”是指消耗性疾病。显示巴利原文
Gaṇḍepi imināva nayena vinicchayo veditabbo. Tattha pana mukhādīsu kolaṭṭhimattato khuddakataropi gaṇḍo na vaṭṭatīti visuṃ na dassito. ‘‘Mukhādike appaṭicchannaṭṭhāne avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopi na vaṭṭatī’’ti ettakameva hi tattha vuttaṃ, tathāpi kuṭṭhe vuttanayena mukhādīsu kolaṭṭhippamāṇato khuddakataropi gaṇḍo na vaṭṭatīti viññāyati, tasmā avaḍḍhanakapakkhe ṭhitopīti ettha pi-saddo avuttasampiṇḍanattho. Tena kolaṭṭhimattato khuddakataropi na vaṭṭatīti ayamattho dassitoyevāti ayamamhākaṃ khanti. Pakativaṇṇe jāteti rogahetukassa vikāravaṇṇassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kolaṭṭhimattakoti badaraṭṭhippamāṇo. Suchaviṃ kāretvāti sañjātachaviṃ kāretvā. ‘‘Sañchaviṃ kāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, vijjamānachaviṃ kāretvāti attho. Padumapuṇḍarīkapattavaṇṇanti rattapadumasetapadumavasena padumapattavaṇṇaṃ. Sosabyādhīti khayarogo.
王卒等事之论述的注释显示巴利原文
Rājabhaṭādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
90-96 90至96节。于国王兵卒等事中,“āhaṃsu”指众人言说。因此……如是说:因己为法主,故为使比丘众将来不再行此事,而制立学处,言:“诸比丘,不得令名为‘持旗者’的盗贼出家,若令出家者,犯恶作。”“Uparamanti”是指退却、回转。“Bhinditvā”是指打破脚镣。“Chinditvā”是指切断锁链。“Muñcitvā”是指解开绳索的束缚。“Vivaritvā”是指在村牢等处打开村门等。“于不看守者中逃跑”是指在众人看守中,于看守者未注意时逃跑。“Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhaṃ”是指逐渐地、一点一点地。显示巴利原文
90-96. Rājabhaṭādivatthūsu āhaṃsūti manussā vadiṃsu. Tasmā…pe… evamāhāti yasmā sayaṃ dhammassāmī, tasmā bhikkhūhi apabbājitabbaṃ coraṃ aṅgulimālaṃ pabbājetvā āyatiṃ akaraṇatthāya bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ‘‘na, bhikkhave, dhajabandho coro pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti āha. Uparamantīti viramanti nivattanti. Bhinditvāti andubandhanaṃ bhinditvā. Chinditvāti saṅkhalikabandhanaṃ chinditvā. Muñcitvāti rajjubandhanaṃ muñcitvā. Vivaritvāti gāmabandhanādīsu gāmadvārādīni vivaritvā. Apassamānānaṃ vā palāyatīti purisaguttiyaṃ purisānaṃ apassamānānaṃ palāyati. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhanti thokaṃ thokaṃ.
97 关于灌顶等事,他们清扫牢狱等处,这是针对“以一切共通之法则”而说。若自由妇女自行呈递文书,则不如法。那些自由妇女心想“我们也作女奴”,便自行让人写下女奴文书,这也不如法。她们就如同头上被浇了酪浆一般。意思是,如同对待非奴隶时用酪浆洗发后宣示其为自由民,此处同样,因为是依净人言语所施,所以他们实际并非奴隶。然而,据说在锡兰有浇酪浆的习俗。所谓“不应令出家”,是指即使用如法语词施与,他们仍是僧团的净人奴仆,所以如此说。所谓无主奴隶,是指主人连同妻子儿女等皆已死亡,没有任何人领有他,这种人也不应令出家,但他自己可以放免为自由人。或者,由所在国中的主人们为他办理。在三处义理论中说:“天女奴之子可以令出家”。他们说,若奴隶出家后见到自己主人而逃跑,则无罪。其余各处,其义明显。显示巴利原文
97. Abhisekādīsu bandhanāgārādīni sodhenti, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sabbasādhāraṇena vā nayenā’’ti. Sace sayameva paṇṇaṃ āropenti, na vaṭṭatīti tā bhujissitthiyo ‘‘mayampi dāsiyo homā’’ti sayameva dāsipaṇṇaṃ likhāpenti, na vaṭṭati. Takkaṃ sīse āsittakasadisāva hontīti yathā adāse karontā takkena sīsaṃ dhovitvā adāsaṃ karonti, evaṃ ārāmikavacanena dinnattā adāsāva teti adhippāyo. Takkāsiñcanaṃ pana sīhaḷadīpe cārittanti vadanti. Neva pabbājetabboti vuttanti kappiyavacanena dinnepi saṅghassa ārāmikadāsattā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Nissāmikadāso nāma yassa sāmikā saputtadārādayo matā honti, na koci tassa pariggāhako, sopi pabbājetuṃ na vaṭṭati, taṃ pana attanāpi bhujissaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ye vā pana tasmiṃ raṭṭhe sāmino, tehipi kārāpetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Devadāsiputtaṃ pabbājetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsu gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Dāsassa pabbajitvā attano sāmike disvā palāyantassa āpatti natthīti vadanti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva.
解除依止之论述解释。显示巴利原文
Nissayamuccanakakathāvaṇṇanā
103 关于解除依止者的义务,在五法、六法中,“然而两者……乃至……随好”这一段,三处义理论中说:“所有这些详细分类,若在根本注释书中已经了知,即为已知。”在“知道犯戒”等句中,那里也说:“即使不熟悉文本,但若知道‘这样做便犯此戒’,也是可以的。”又有人说,此应理解为以前已熟练掌握文本,对于戒师与和尚也是如此。此处其余内容,意义明显。显示巴利原文
103. Nissayamuccanakassa vattesu pañcakachakkesu pana ubhayāni kho pana…pe… anubyañjanasoti ettha ‘‘sabbopi cāyaṃ pabhedo mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ ñātāyaṃ ñāto hotī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Āpattiṃ jānātītiādīsu ca ‘‘pāṭhe avattamānepi ‘idaṃ nāma katvā idaṃ āpajjatī’ti jānāti ce, vaṭṭatī’’ti tattheva vuttaṃ. Tañca kho pubbe pāṭhe paguṇe kateti gahetabbanti ca ācariyupajjhāyānampi eseva nayoti ca keci vadanti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
罗睺罗事之论述解释。显示巴利原文
Rāhulavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
105 在罗睺罗事中,“即住于彼处”:因为他们所有人自从证得阿罗汉果时起,作为圣者确实处于中舍,所以并未将国王送来的信息禀告十力尊,便径自住在那里。“某日,有一位名为黑优陀夷的大臣”:据说,此人于莲花胜佛的时代,生于天鹅城的良善之家。当他听导师说法时,见导师将一位比丘置于令在家众生起净信者中的首位,他便发愿行善,希求获得那位次。他终生行善,辗转于人天之中。在我们的菩萨入母胎结生之日,他也恰在迦毗罗卫城的大臣家中结生。由于他与菩萨在同一天出生,就在当日,他被放在细布之上,送到菩萨身旁侍奉。与菩萨同日出生者共有七者:菩提树、罗睺罗之母、四只宝瓶、象乘、犍陟、车匿及黑优陀夷,他们被称为“同生者”。后来,于命名之日,因他生于全城皆大欢喜之日,便得名“优陀夷”。但因肤色稍黑,故称“黑优陀夷”。他与菩萨一同游戏,渐渐长大。显示巴利原文
105. Rāhulavatthumhi tattheva vihariṃsūti sabbepi te arahattaṃ pattakālato paṭṭhāya ariyā nāma majjhattāva hontīti rañño pahitasāsanaṃ dasabalassa anārocetvāva tattha vihariṃsu. Ekadivasaṃ jātaṃ kāḷudāyiṃ nāma amaccanti ayaṃ kira (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.225) padumuttarabuddhakāle haṃsavatīnagare kulagehe nibbatto satthu dhammadesanaṃ suṇanto satthāraṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ kulappasādakānaṃ aggaṭṭhāne ṭhapentaṃ disvā adhikārakammaṃ katvā taṃ ṭhānantaraṃ patthesi. So yāvajīvaṃ kusalaṃ katvā devamanussesu saṃsaranto amhākaṃ bodhisattassa mātukucchiyaṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase kapilavatthusmiṃyeva amaccagehe paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātadivase bodhisattena saddhiṃyeva jātoti taṃ divasaṃyeva dukūlacumbaṭake nipajjāpetvā bodhisattassa upaṭṭhānatthāya nayiṃsu. Bodhisattena hi saddhiṃ bodhirukkho rāhulamātā catasso nidhikumbhiyo ārohaniyahatthī kaṇḍako channo kāḷudāyīti ime satta ekadivase jātattā sahajātā nāma ahesuṃ. Athassa nāmaggahaṇadivase sakalanagarassa udaggacittadivase jātoti udāyītveva nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Thokaṃ kāḷadhātukattā pana kāḷudāyī nāma jāto. So bodhisattena saddhiṃ kumārakīḷaṃ kīḷanto vuddhiṃ agamāsi.
以六十余偈:显示巴利原文
Saṭṭhimattāhigāthāhīti –
不太冷,不太热,无大饥荒与饥饿;
大地青草葱茏,大牟尼,是时候了。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṅgārino dāni dumā bhadante; Phalesino chadanaṃ vippahāya; Te accimantova pabhāsayanti; Samayo mahāvīra bhāgīrasānaṃ. (theragā. 527) ‘‘Nātisītaṃ nātiuṇhaṃ, nātidubbhikkhachātakaṃ; Saddalā haritā bhūmi, esa kālo mahāmunī’’ti. –
以这些为首的六十余偈。义理论中说:“‘莲叶雨’意为如莲叶色的水。”也有人说,莲叶雨是指雨量如莲叶大小,从中间涌起,逐渐形成百层、千层而降的雨。据说,在那雨中,想被淋湿的人才被淋湿,其他人则不会。没有一位国王……乃至……离去:也就是说,听闻法义后,当亲戚们离去时,没有一位国王或大臣在邀请“明天请接受我们的施食”之后才离去。他的父亲净饭大王也想:“我的儿子不去我家,会去哪里呢?”于是没有邀请便离去了。然而回去之后,他在家中为二万比丘准备了粥等,并铺设了座位。显示巴利原文
Ādikāhi saṭṭhimattāhi gāthāhi. ‘‘Pokkharavassanti pokkharapattavaṇṇamudaka’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Pokkharapattappamāṇaṃ majjhe uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena satapaṭalaṃ sahassapaṭalaṃ hutvā vassanakavassantipi vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira vassante temetukāmāva tementi, na itare. Ekopi rājā vā…pe… gato natthīti dhammadesanaṃ sutvā pakkantesu ñātīsu ekopi rājā vā rājamahāmatto vā ‘‘sve amhākaṃ bhikkhaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti nimantetvā gato natthi. Pitāpissa suddhodanamahārājā ‘‘mayhaṃ putto mama gehaṃ anāgantvā kahaṃ gamissatī’’ti animantetvāva agamāsi, gantvā pana gehe vīsatiyā bhikkhusahassānaṃ yāguādīni paṭiyādāpetvā āsanāni paññāpesi.
“家族城”即亲族所在的城市。“从头巾开始”即从头开始。所谓“头巾”,是因为世尊圆满的额头和圆满的头部与头巾相似,故得此名。从世尊的右耳鬓开始,有一层肉膜隆起,覆盖并充满整个额头,延伸到左耳鬓处安立;这肉膜细滑、金色、光明、圆满,犹如国王所绑的头巾带一般闪耀。据说,国王们见到世尊的这一特征后,才制作了头巾带。其他人的头部则不圆满:有的头像布片,有的头像果实,有的头像骨头,有的头像葫芦,有的头像水罐,有的头像山洞。而世尊的头部则如同用锥子旋转安立一般,极为圆满,也像水泡一样。正因为如此,由于与缠着头巾的头部相似,且处处圆满如头巾,世尊便被称为“头巾头”。显示巴利原文
Kulanagareti ñātikulassa nagare. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāyāti sīsato paṭṭhāya. Uṇhīsanti hi uṇhīsasadisattā bhagavato paripuṇṇanalāṭassa paripuṇṇasīsassa ca etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhagavato hi dakkhiṇakaṇṇacūḷikato paṭṭhāya maṃsapaṭalaṃ uṭṭhahitvā sakalanalāṭaṃ chādayamānaṃ pūrayamānaṃ gantvā vāmakaṇṇacūḷikāya patiṭṭhitaṃ saṇhatamatāya suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya pabhassaratāya paripuṇṇatāya ca rañño baddhauṇhīsapaṭṭo viya virocati. Bhagavato kira imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ disvā rājūnaṃ uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ akaṃsu. Aññe pana janā aparipuṇṇasīsā honti, keci kappasīsā, keci phalasīsā, keci aṭṭhisīsā, keci tumbasīsā, keci kumbhasīsā, keci pabbhārasīsā, bhagavato pana āraggena vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaṃ viya suparipuṇṇaṃ udakapubbuḷasadisampi hoti. Teneva uṇhīsaveṭhitasīsasadisattā uṇhīsaṃ viya sabbattha parimaṇḍalasīsattā ca uṇhīsasīsoti bhagavā vuccati.
名为“人狮偈”的八偈:显示巴利原文
Narasīhagāthāhināma aṭṭhahi gāthāhīti –
头发润泽青黑,柔软卷曲,
额头如日轮般无垢明净,
鼻子匀称、高挺、柔软而修长,
光芒之网遍布的人狮。"
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Siniddhanīlamudukuñcitakeso; Sūriyanimmalatalābhinalāṭo; Yuttatuṅgamudukāyatanāso; Raṃsijālavitato narasīho’’ti. (jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
如是等八偈。然而在义理分中:显示巴利原文
Evamādikāhi aṭṭhahi gāthāhi. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana –
双足红润妙好,印有轮宝庄严,
双足跟修长,以相好严饰,
双足为拂尘与伞盖所庄严,
这确实是你的父亲,人中之狮。
殊胜的释迦王子,柔和娇贵,
具足相好,心志圆满之身;
为利益世间而来的人中英杰;
这正是你们的父亲,人中狮子。
为人天所爱敬的人中龙象;
行步如醉象王般优雅者;
此即是你的父亲,人中狮王。
刹帝利族中最胜家族出身者
为天人所礼敬双足者
心安住于戒与定者
这便是你的父亲——人中狮子。
鼻梁修长,匀称端正;
眼睫如牛,深青明眸;
眉间白毫,皎洁深蓝犹如因陀罗弓;
这位便是你的父亲,世间之雄狮。
颈项圆润、丰美、匀称端正;
狮颊兽王之身
金色妙肤,最胜色泽
此即汝父,人中狮子
音声柔润、深沉、悦耳、美妙;
舌如朱砂般红润柔软;
四十齿洁白明亮;
这便是你的父亲,人中狮子。
发如眼药,色深蓝而润泽;
额似金板,清净明洁;
眉间白毫,如月珠般洁白纯净。
为众星所环拥之相;
沙门之王,处弟子众中;
这即是你们的父亲——人中狮王。(本生经注·一·近因缘谈)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Cakkavaraṅkitarattasupādo; Lakkhaṇamaṇḍitaāyatapaṇhi; Cāmarachattavibhūsitapādo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Sakyakumāravaro sukhumālo; Lakkhaṇacittikapuṇṇasarīro; Lokahitāya gato naravīro; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Puṇṇasasaṅkanibho mukhavaṇṇo; Devanarāna piyo naranāgo; Mattagajindavilāsitagāmī; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Khattiyasambhavaaggakulīno; Devamanussanamassitapādo; Sīlasamādhipatiṭṭhitacitto; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Āyatayuttasusaṇṭhitanāso; Gopakhumo abhinīlasunetto; Indadhanūabhinīlabhamūko; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Vaṭṭasuvaṭṭasusaṇṭhitagīvo ; Sīhahanū migarājasarīro; Kañcanasucchaviuttamavaṇṇo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Siniddhasugambhiramañjusaghoso; Hiṅgulabandhukarattasujivho; Vīsativīsatisetasudanto; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Añjanavaṇṇasunīlasukeso ; Kañcanapaṭṭavisuddhanalāṭo; Osadhipaṇḍarasuddhasuuṇṇo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho. ‘‘Gacchatinilapathe viya cando; Tāragaṇāpariveṭhitarūpo; Sāvakamajjhagato samaṇindo; Esa hi tuyha pitā narasīho’’ti. (jā. aṭṭha. 1.santikenidānakathā) –
此处也显示了九首偈颂,但与文中“以八首偈颂”的说法并不相符。从顶髻至脚底所说的次第,在那里也未见。为乞食而行,故称乞食行。显示巴利原文
Imā nava gāthāyopi ettha dassitā, tā pana ‘‘aṭṭhahi gāthāhī’’ti vacanena na samenti. Uṇhīsato paṭṭhāya yāva pādatalāti vuttānukkamopi tattha na dissati. Bhikkhāya caratīti bhikkhācāro.
“起立”指起身站在他人门前应取的团食。“不应放逸”指如果舍弃乞食的行仪、寻求胜妙的食物而起立,便名为放逸;如果次第乞食而行,则名为不放逸。如此行者,在起立时不应放逸。“法”指舍弃邪命,次第而行,也就是行此乞食之善法。“安乐而卧”只是说法之辞,其义为:如此行持乞食法的行者,于现世与他世,以四威仪安乐而住。显示巴利原文
Uttiṭṭheti uttiṭṭhitvā paresaṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā gahetabbapiṇḍe. Nappamajjheyyāti piṇḍacārikavattaṃ hāpetvā paṇītabhojanāni pariyesanto uttiṭṭhe pamajjati nāma, sapadānaṃ piṇḍāya caranto pana nappamajjati nāma, evaṃ karonto uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyya. Dhammanti anesanaṃ pahāya sapadānaṃ caranto tameva bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ sucaritaṃ care. Sukhaṃ setīti desanāmattametaṃ, evaṃ panetaṃ bhikkhāya cariyadhammaṃ caranto dhammacārī idhaloke ca paraloke ca catūhipi iriyāpathehi sukhaṃ viharatīti attho.
第二偈中“不令其为恶行”指:若行于妓女等不当行处,便名为行此乞食法之恶行;若不如此行,而是行此善法,则不令其为恶行。此处其余内容的含义如前所述。应知此第二偈是前往父亲住处后所说。因此,在《长老偈注》(《长老偈注》1.156 难达长老偈注)中,阿阇梨法护长老说:“次日入村乞食,以‘起立不应放逸’偈令父亲住于须陀洹果,然后前往住处,以‘应行善法’偈令大爱道住于须陀洹果,令国王住于斯陀含果。”《法句经注》(《法句经注》1.12 难达长老事)中也说:“次日入村乞食,以‘起立不应放逸’偈令父亲住于须陀洹果,以‘应行法’偈令大爱道住于须陀洹果,令国王住于斯陀含果。”显示巴利原文
Dutiyagāthāya na naṃ duccaritanti vesiyādibhede agocare caranto naṃ bhikkhācariyadhammaṃ duccaritaṃ carati nāma, evaṃ acaritvā taṃ dhammaṃ care sucaritaṃ, na naṃ duccaritaṃ care. Sesamettha vuttatthameva. Imaṃ pana dutiyagāthaṃ pitu nivesanaṃ gantvā abhāsīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva theragāthāsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (theragā. aṭṭha. 1.156 nandattheragāthāvaṇṇanā) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘dutiyadivase piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’ti gāthāya pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā nivesanaṃ gantvā ‘dhammaṃ care sucarita’nti gāthāya mahāpajāpatiṃ sotāpattiphale rājānañca sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpesī’’ti. Dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyampi (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.12 nandattheravatthu) vuttaṃ ‘‘punadivase piṇḍāya paviṭṭho ‘uttiṭṭhe nappamajjeyyā’ti gāthāya pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpetvā ‘dhammaṃ care’ti gāthāya mahāpajāpatiṃ sotāpattiphale rājānañca sakadāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāpesī’’ti.
听闻《法护本生经》后,他便住于不还果。又一日,国王在王宫用过早餐,坐于一旁,对尊者说:“尊者,在您修习难行之际,有一天神前来对我说:‘你的儿子死了。’我不信她的话,拒绝道:‘我的儿子不证菩提,绝不会死。’”国王这样说后,尊者便说:“如今您如何能信?过去也曾示现骸骨,对您说‘你的儿子死了’,您也同样不信。”于是以此因缘,讲述了《大法护本生经》。听闻此经后,国王住于不还果。显示巴利原文
Dhammapālajātakaṃ sutvā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhāsīti punekadivasaṃ rājanivesane katapātarāso ekamantaṃ nisinnena raññā ‘‘bhante, tumhākaṃ dukkarakārikakāle ekā devatā maṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘putto te kālakato’ti āha. Ahaṃ tassā vacanaṃ asaddahanto ‘na mayhaṃ putto bodhiṃ appatvā kālaṃ karotī’ti paṭikkhipinti vutte idāni kathaṃ saddahissatha, pubbepi aṭṭhikāni dassetvā ‘putto te mato’ti vutte na saddahitthā’’ti imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā mahādhammapālajātakaṃ kathesi. Taṃ sutvā rājā anāgāmiphale patiṭṭhahi.
“剃发”指依家族传统剃除头发。“授位”指灌顶为太子。“新宅庆典”即入住新宅的吉祥仪式,“娶妻庆典”即举行婚礼的吉祥仪式。“伞盖庆典”指太子的伞盖庆典。“国中美者”指国内最美、无六种身过、具足五种美的女子。她不过高、不过矮、不过瘦、不过胖、不过黑、不过白,超越人间的容色而未达天人的容色,因此无有六种身过。她具足五种美:皮美、肉美、筋美、骨美、龄美。无需外来照明,仅凭自身光芒便能照亮十二肘之地,肤色如黄檀或金色,这是皮美。她的四肢及面部末端如同经虫漆处理过一般,犹如红珊瑚或红毯,这是肉美。二十指甲在肉不显处如满涂虫漆,在显处如乳流,这是筋美。三十二颗牙齿紧密整齐,如同洗净的钻石列,这是骨美。纵然年届一百二十岁,仍如十六岁,无有皱纹白发,这是龄美。如此具足五种美,故称国中美者。显示巴利原文
Kesavissajjananti kulamariyādavasena kesoropanaṃ. Paṭṭabandhoti yuvarājapaṭṭabandho. Abhinavagharappavesanamaho gharamaṅgalaṃ, vivāhakaraṇamaho āvāhamaṅgalaṃ. Chattamaṅgalanti yuvarājachattamaṅgalaṃ. Janapadakalyāṇīti (udā. aṭṭha. 22) janapadamhi kalyāṇī uttamā chasarīradosarahitā pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā. Sā hi yasmā nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷā nāccodātāti atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, appattā dibbaṃ vaṇṇaṃ, tasmā chasarīradosarahitā. Chavikalyāṇaṃ maṃsakalyāṇaṃ nahārukalyāṇaṃ aṭṭhikalyāṇaṃ vayakalyāṇanti imehi pana pañcahi kalyāṇehi samannāgatattā pañcakalyāṇasamannāgatā nāma. Tassā hi āgantukobhāsakiccaṃ natthi. Attano sarīrobhāseneva dvādasahatthaṭṭhāne ālokaṃ karoti, piyaṅgusāmā vā hoti suvaṇṇasāmā vā, ayamassā chavikalyāṇatā. Cattāro panassā hatthapādā mukhapariyosānañca lākhārasaparikammakataṃ viya rattapavāḷarattakambalasadisaṃ hoti, ayamassā maṃsakalyāṇatā. Vīsati pana nakhapattāni maṃsato amuttaṭṭhāne lākhārasapūritāni viya muttaṭṭhāne khīradhārāsadisāni honti, ayamassā nahārukalyāṇatā. Dvattiṃsa dantā suphusitā sudhotavajirapanti viya khāyanti, ayamassā aṭṭhikalyāṇatā. Vīsativassasatikāpi samānā soḷasavassuddesikā viya hoti nivalipalitā, ayamassā vayakalyāṇatā. Iti imehi pañcahi kalyāṇehi samannāgatattā janapadakalyāṇīti vuccati.
“Tuvaṭa”意为迅速。他也不敢对世尊说“请拿钵”,便径直走向寺院。据说他出于对如来的恭敬,没能说出“尊者,请拿钵”。但他心想:“世尊会在阶梯顶端拿钵。”导师在那个地方没有取。他又想:“他会在阶梯脚下拿钵。”导师在那里也没有取。他又想:“他会在王宫庭院拿钵。”导师在那里还是没有取。王子想折返,不情愿地走着,出于对导师的恭敬,连“请拿钵”也说不出口,边走边想:“会在这里拿吧,会在那里拿吧。”而国中美者的话语,仿佛梗在他的心中。确实,灌顶庆典并未像国中美者的话语那样折磨难陀王子,因此他心中的热恼极为强烈。于是,导师就在他想着“会在此处折返,会在彼处折返”的当下,将他带到寺院,说:“难陀,你要出家吗?”他出于对佛陀的恭敬,没有说“我不出家”,而是说:“是的,我出家。”导师说:“那么,就让难陀出家吧。”便让他出了家。因此说:“世尊让不情愿的他出了家。”《法句经注》中说:“导师抵达迦毗罗卫城后,于第三天令难陀出家。”而在《增支部注》中……显示巴利原文
Tuvaṭanti sīghaṃ. Sopi bhagavantaṃ ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ avisahamāno vihāraṃyeva agamāsīti. So kira tathāgate gāravena ‘‘pattaṃ vo bhante gaṇhathā’’ti vattuṃ nāsakkhi. Evaṃ pana cintesi ‘‘sopānasīse pattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti. Satthā tasmimpi ṭhāne na gaṇhi. Itaro ‘‘sopānapādamūle gaṇhissatī’’ti cintesi. Satthā tatthāpi na gaṇhi. Itaro ‘‘rājaṅgaṇe gaṇhissatī’’ti cintesi. Satthā tatthāpi na gaṇhi. Kumāro nivattitukāmo aruciyā gacchanto satthu gāravena ‘‘pattaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vattumpi asakkonto ‘‘idha gaṇhissati, ettha gaṇhissatī’’ti cintento gacchati. Janapadakalyāṇiyā ca vuttavacanaṃ tassa hadaye tiriyaṃ patitvā viya ṭhitaṃ. Nandakumārañhi abhisekamaṅgalaṃ na tathā pīḷesi, yathā janapadakalyāṇiyā vuttavacanaṃ, tenassa cittasantāpo balavā ahosi. Atha naṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne nivattissati, imasmiṃ ṭhāne nivattissatī’’ti cintentameva satthā vihāraṃ netvā ‘‘pabbajissasi nandā’’ti āha. So buddhagāravena ‘‘na pabbajissāmī’’ti avatvā ‘‘āma pabbajissāmī’’ti āha. Satthā ‘‘tena hi nandaṃ pabbājethā’’ti vatvā pabbājesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anicchamānaṃyeva bhagavā pabbājesī’’ti. ‘‘Satthā kapilapuraṃ gantvā tatiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’ti dhammapadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.12 nandattheravatthu) vuttaṃ, aṅguttaranikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.230) pana –
大士证得一切知智后,转动无上法轮,饶益世间。他从王舍城前往迦毗罗卫城,初次相见,便令父亲安住于入流果;次日,前往父亲住处,教导罗睺罗之母后,再为其余大众说法;又次于难陀王子灌顶、入宅、婚庆之时,亲临其居所,令王子持钵,为度其出家,携之走向寺院。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mahāsattopi sabbaññutaṃ patvā pavattitavaradhammacakko lokānuggahaṃ karonto rājagahato kapilavatthuṃ gantvā paṭhamadassaneneva pitaraṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhāpesi, punadivase pitu nivesanaṃ gantvā rāhulamātāya ovādaṃ katvā sesajanassapi dhammaṃ kathesi, punadivase nandakumārassa abhisekagehappavesanaāvāhamaṅgalesu vattamānesu tassa nivesanaṃ gantvā kumāraṃ pattaṃ gāhāpetvā pabbājetuṃ vihārābhimukho pāyāsī’’ti –
《增支部注》中作此说,而此处则说“世尊抵达迦毗罗卫城后,于第二日令难陀出家”。凡此种种,皆为阿阇梨随诸诵者各自辗转口耳相传所护持而来,故于各处所说有所不同,并非阿阇梨言论本身有前后矛盾。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘bhagavā kapilapuraṃ āgantvā dutiyadivase nandaṃ pabbājesī’’ti vuttaṃ, sabbampetaṃ ācariyena taṃtaṃbhāṇakānaṃ tathā tathā anussavavasena pariharitvā āgatabhāvato tattha tattha tathā tathā vuttanti natthettha ācariyavacane pubbāparavirodho.
“梵色貌”,意为与梵天形貌同等之容色。“Tyassa”,即“他的”。“随转”,指系属轮回者。“有苦”,即与苦同俱,故为有苦。七种圣财如下——显示巴利原文
Brahmarūpavaṇṇanti brahmarūpasamānarūpaṃ. Tyassāti te assa. Vaṭṭānugatanti vaṭṭapariyāpannaṃ. Savighātanti dukkhasahitattā savighātaṃ, sadukkhanti attho. Sattavidhaṃ ariyadhananti –
信为财,戒为财,惭与愧为财;
所闻与施舍为财,智慧正是第七财。”(《增支部》7.5-6)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saddhādhanaṃ sīladhanaṃ, hiriottappiyaṃ dhanaṃ; Sutadhanañca cāgo ca, paññā ve sattamaṃ dhana’’nti. (a. ni. 7.5-6) –
以上即是所说的七种圣财。“以乞食行持正命”即依循乞食之道。对儿女的爱生起时,会搅动全身,直透骨髓而安住,故说:“尊者,对儿女的爱……直透骨髓而安住。”确实,对儿女的爱因其力强,如同与生俱来的喜悦冲动之遍布,以其俱生色法等遍满的方式,搅动全身,直透骨髓而安住。所谓“Yatra hi nāma”,即“Yo nāma”。此处其余内容显而易见。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaṃ sattavidhaṃ ariyadhanaṃ. Uñchācariyāyāti bhikkhācariyāya. Puttasineho uppajjamāno sakalasarīraṃ khobhetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘puttapemaṃ bhante…pe… aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Puttasineho hi balavabhāvato sahajātapītivegassa savipphāratāya taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpadhammehi pharaṇavasena sakalasarīraṃ āloḷetvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhati. Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma. Sesamettha uttānameva.
学处与处罚事之论述解释。显示巴利原文
Sikkhāpadadaṇḍakammavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
106 “诸比丘,我允许沙弥的十学处”等中,应学的条目即学处,意为学的部分。或者,学的条目即学处,意为增上戒、增上心、增上慧学的证得方法。从义理上说,则指与欲界善心相应的离,而这里与其相应的法也应依此而取。以其自性而令堕落,从中间杀害称为“杀”——即不使缓慢落下,而令其迅速坠落之意。或者,超越界限,以刀等制服而令其坠落为“杀”;对生命的杀害为“杀生”,即杀害生命、将生命杀死之意。在此,“生命”于世俗上说为有情,从胜义上说明为命根。对于那样的生命,若起生命想,生起能切断命根的加行,由身门或语门之一所起的杀心,这就是杀生。由此而有杀生。显示巴利原文
106.Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sāmaṇerānaṃ dasa sikkhāpadānītiādīsu sikkhitabbāni padāni sikkhāpadāni, sikkhākoṭṭhāsāti attho. Sikkhāya vā padāni sikkhāpadāni, adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya adhigamupāyāti attho. Atthato pana kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo, taṃsampayuttadhammā panettha taggahaṇeneva gahetabbā. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atipātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññatarappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto, tato pāṇātipātā.
“远离”:因是怨敌之因,故称为怨敌的杀生等恶法,它将其摒除,如同责问“我在此处,你为何来?”一般,将它驱除,所以是“远离”。或者,依此而远离,应说为“远离”,依词源学方式而说为“远离”。从义理上说,“远离”是与欲界善心相应的离。它在《分别论》中以“对于远离杀生者,那时所有对杀生的厌离、远离、极远离、远离、不作、不造、不犯、不越界限、如断桥梁”等方式而被说明。虽然这种“远离”也有出世间的,但此处意指依受持而起的离;由于出世间的离不可能依受持生起,因此应取与欲界善心相应的离。显示巴利原文
Veramaṇīti verahetutāya verasaññitaṃ pāṇātipātādipāpadhammaṃ maṇati, ‘‘mayi idha ṭhitāya kathamāgacchasī’’ti vā tajjentī viya nīharatīti veramaṇī. Viramati etāyāti vā viramaṇīti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘veramaṇī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthato pana veramaṇīti kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo. Sā ‘‘pāṇātipātādiṃ viramantassa yā tasmiṃ samaye pāṇātipātā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhāpatti velānatikkamo setughāto’’ti evamādinā nayena vibhaṅge (vibha. 704) vuttā. Kāmañcesā veramaṇī nāma lokuttarāpi atthi, idha pana samādānavasappavattā virati adhippetāti lokuttarāya viratiyā samādānavasena pavattiasambhavato kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttā viratiyo gahetabbā.
“离不与取”等中,取未给与之物为“不与取”,意即取他人之物、偷盗、窃贼。其中,“未给与”指他人所持有之物,即他人对此可以随意支配,且不受惩罚、无有过失之物。对于那样的他人持有物,若起他人持有想,生起能令其取走的加行,此偷盗之心即为不与取。显示巴利原文
Adinnādānā veramaṇītiādīsu adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parassaharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ. Yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti, tasmiṃ pana parapariggahite parapariggahitasaañano tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ.
非梵行,即非殊胜行,指两两交合。由于它被呵责为“诸欲少乐、多苦、多恼,于此过患更大”等,故为非殊胜、非赞叹之行;或为非殊胜者、下劣男女之行,故为非殊胜行。因其为非殊胜行,故亦称为非梵行。从义理上说,非梵行是以非法行为目的、发生于身门的、能生起非道之道的思心所。显示巴利原文
Abrahmacariyaṃ nāma aseṭṭhacariyaṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpatti. Sā hi ‘‘appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā, ādīnavo ettha bhiyyo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.177; 2.42) hīḷitattā aseṭṭhā appasatthā cariyāti vā aseṭṭhānaṃ nihīnānaṃ itthipurisānaṃ cariyāti vā aseṭṭhacariyaṃ, aseṭṭhacariyattā abrahmacariyanti ca vuccati , atthato pana asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggappaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā abrahmacariyaṃ.
“妄”指不真实、错误的事物,“语”指将其当作真实、正确而告知他人。从特征上说,想要将不真实的事物当作真实去告知他人,并生起这种告知之思的心所,即是妄语;由于依此而说妄语,故称为妄语。显示巴利原文
Musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu, vādoti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti katvā.
“谷酒、果酒、酒类放逸处”中,“谷酒”有五种:饼酒、粉酒、米酒、投入酵母者、混合配料者。“果酒”有五种:花酒、果酒、蜜酒、糖酒、混合配料者。其中,将饼放入容器,加入适量水,揉捏而制成者为饼酒;其余谷酒亦如此。“酵母”即该酒的种子,也就是那些称为酒丸的东西,投入它们而制成者为投入酵母者。以诃子、芥子等各种配料混合而制成者为混合配料者。以蜜树、棕榈、椰子等花汁长期放置者为花酒。以波罗蜜等果汁制成者为果酒。以葡萄汁制成者为蜜酒。以甘蔗汁制成者为糖酒。以诃子、余甘子、苦味药材等各种配料的汁液长期放置者为混合配料者。所有这一切,因其能令人醉,饮后使人迷醉,故称为酒。“放逸处”即放逸的因。谷酒、果酒、酒类放逸处,便是那个思心所的名称;因为这三者即是放逸处,故说“离谷酒果酒酒类放逸处”。显示巴利原文
Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānāti ettha surāti pūvasurā piṭṭhasurā odanasurā kiṇṇapakkhittā sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā. Merayanti pupphāsavo phalāsavo madhvāsavo guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Tattha pūve bhājane pakkhipitvā tajjaṃ udakaṃ datvā madditvā katā pūvasurā. Evaṃ sesasurāpi. Kiṇṇāti pana tassā surāya bījaṃ vuccati, ye surāmodakāti vuccanti, te pakkhipitvā katā kiṇṇapakkhittā. Harītakīsāsapādinānāsambhārehi saṃyojitā sambhārasaṃyuttā. Madhukatālanāḷikerādipuppharaso ciraparivāsito pupphāsavo. Panasādiphalaraso phalāsavo. Muddikāraso madhvāsavo. Ucchuraso guḷāsavo. Harītakaāmalakakaṭukabhaṇḍādinānāsambhārānaṃ raso ciraparivāsito sambhārasaṃyutto. Taṃ sabbampi madakaraṇavasena majjaṃ pivantaṃ madayatīti katvā. Pamādaṭṭhānanti pamādakāraṇaṃ. Yāya cetanāya taṃ majjaṃ pivanti, tassā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Surāmerayamajje pamādaṭṭhānaṃ surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānā.
“非时食”中:从日出至日中,是佛等圣者们惯行、常行的进食时间,称为“时”;此外的时间为“非时”。以应被食用之义为“食”,粥、饭等一切属于“时药”之物。正如“夜间止食”中,以省略后词的方式将夜间的进食称为“夜”,此处亦将食物的吞咽称为“食”。在非时进食,即为非时食;由此说“离非时食”,义即在非时吞咽时药之物。或者,此处的“食”字并非业行之义的“应被食用者”,而应取状态行之义的“吞咽”,所以非时的吞咽即是非时食。那么,吞咽何物?由于“夜分药”等已被允许,且“非时食”一词惯用于吞咽时药,故知是吞咽时药。从义理上说,发生于身门、在非时吞咽时药的思心所,应知为“非时食”。显示巴利原文
Vikālabhojanāti aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā. Ayaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena bhojanaṃ, yāgubhattādi sabbaṃ yāvakālikavatthu. Yathā ca ‘‘rattūparato’’ti (dī. 1.10, 194; ma. ni. 1.293; 3.14) ettha rattiyā bhojanaṃ rattīti uttarapadalopena vuccati, evamettha bhojanajjhoharaṇaṃ bhojananti. Vikāle bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ, tato vikālabhojanā, vikāle yāvakālikavatthussa ajjhoharaṇāti attho. Atha vā na ettha kammasādhano bhuñjitabbatthavācako bhojanasaddo, atha kho bhāvasādhano ajjhoharaṇatthavācako gahetabbo , tasmā vikāle bhojanaṃ ajjhoharaṇaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ. Kassa pana ajjhoharaṇanti? Yāmakālikādīnaṃ anuññātattā vikālabhojana-saddassa vā yāvakālikajjhoharaṇe niruḷhattā yāvakālikassāti viññāyati, atthato pana kāyadvārappavattā vikāle yāvakālikajjhoharaṇacetanā ‘‘vikālabhojana’’nti veditabbā.
“观看舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演”中,因不顺从教法,故称为“表演”,即成为障碍的观看。由于观看舞蹈等会生起贪欲,简言之,它不顺从世尊“诸恶莫作”等教法。舞蹈、歌唱、音乐与表演,总称为舞蹈歌唱音乐表演。此处,无论是自己进行还是令他人进行的舞蹈,由于舞蹈状态共通,在圣典中仅以“舞蹈”一词统摄;同样,以“歌唱”、“音乐”二词统摄自己歌唱、令他人歌唱、自己奏乐、令他人奏乐。因此,应知此处义为:远离自己舞蹈、令他人舞蹈等,乃至以孔雀舞等方式进行的舞蹈等,以及远离成为障碍的观看。比丘、比丘尼既不可自己进行舞蹈等,也不可令他人进行,亦不可观看他人进行。此处,“观看”亦依“以部分代表其余”之理而包含“听闻”。因为五识以各自对境的明了为自性,所以听闻亦可简称为“观看”。正如所说:“以五识不彻知任何法,唯除单纯的触境。”此处,若以观看的欲望前往而观看,则犯戒;若在站立、安坐、躺卧之处,有来者或进入视野者而看到,则可能产生染污,但不犯戒。显示巴利原文
Naccagītavāditavisūkadassanāti ettha sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Naccādīnañhi dassanaṃ sachandarāgappavattito saṅkhepato ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183) bhagavato sāsanaṃ na anulometi. Naccañca gītañca vāditañca visūkadassanañca naccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ parehi payojāpiyamānañcettha naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññato pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddehi gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni, tasmā attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā ca veramaṇīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Naccādīni attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnaṃ vaṭṭati. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena. Yathā sakaṃ visayaālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasambhavato ‘‘dassanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kañci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Dassanakamyatāya upasaṅkamitvā passato eva cettha vītikkamo hoti, ṭhitanisinnasayanokāse pana āgataṃ gacchantassa vā āpāthagataṃ passato siyā saṃkileso, na vītikkamo.
“花鬘、香、涂香、佩戴、装饰、严饰处”中,“花鬘”指任何花朵。虽然世间“花鬘”一词指串成的花环,但在教法中,依惯用语也用于花朵,因此任何花朵,无论已串或未串,都应视为“花鬘”。“香”指香粉、熏香等,除涂香之外的任何香物。“涂香”指为涂抹而研磨准备的任何能改变肤色的物品。佩戴称为“戴”,填补缺陷处称为“装饰”,因香或因肤色而享用称为“严饰”。因此,《长部注》和《中部注》说:“佩戴者称为戴,填补缺陷处者称为装饰,因香或因肤色而享用者称为严饰。”而《小部注·胜义光明》中仅说:“花鬘等中的佩戴等,应依序对应。”“处”指原因,因此,凡夫以何种恶戒之思进行那些戴花鬘等行为,该思即是“佩戴装饰严饰处”。显示巴利原文
Mālāgandhavilepanadhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānāti ettha mālāti yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi mālā-saddo loke baddhamālavācako, sāsane pana ruḷhiyā pupphesupi vutto, tasmā yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ baddhamabaddhaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘mālā’’ti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gandhanti vāsacuṇṇadhūmādikaṃ vilepanato aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti vilepanatthaṃ pisitvā paṭiyattaṃ yaṃ kiñci chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Piḷandhanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ, ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ maṇḍanaṃ, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanaṃ vibhūsanaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.10) majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāyañca (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.293) ‘‘piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma, ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paramatthajotikāyaṃ pana khuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘mālādīsu dhāraṇādīni yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojetabbānī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ, tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, sā dhāraṇamaṇḍanavibhūsanaṭṭhānaṃ.
“高床大床”:此处,“高”(uccā)是与“高”字同义的另一词。于上而卧,故名为“床”(sayana)。高床与大床合称“高床大床”。“高床”指尺寸超越规定的床等,“大床”指铺设不如法敷具的椅子等。且应知此处“座”已摄于“床”中。然而,所依之处若被遮止,依于彼处的行为亦随之遮止,故虽唯说“高床大床”,义理上应知即显示了远离其受用中的坐与卧。又或,在“高床大床之卧”这一表述中,是以省略一分的语法而说,犹如“名色缘六处”;由于坐是卧的前行,故应知仅以“卧”字便涵盖了“座”。显示巴利原文
Uccāsayanamahāsayanāti ettha uccāti ucca-saddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ, uccāsayanañca mahāsayanañca uccāsayanamahāsayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ mañcādi. Mahāsayanaṃ akappiyattharaṇehi atthataṃ āsandādi. Āsanañcettha sayaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārā kiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūtanisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Atha vā uccāsayanamahāsayanasayanāti etasmiṃ atthe ekasesanayena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti, āsanakiriyāpubbakattā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇeneva āsanampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
“接受金银”:此处,“金”(jātarūpa)指黄金。“银”(rajata)指铜钱、铁钱、铅钱、木钱等作为流通之用的货币。接受此两者,即称为“接受金银”。此处的接受有三种:以身、以语、以意。其中,以身接受为拿取,以语接受为令人拿取,以意接受为认可。这三种接受,或以总说方式,或以省略一分的语法,总称为“接受”,故既不应自己拿取,亦不应令人拿取,也不可认可他人寄存之物。然而,此十学处于在家众亦是共通的。《清净道论》中曾言:“近事男、近事女以常戒而有五学处,若具精进则有十,依布萨支而有八,此为在家戒。”此处,“十”即指沙弥应守护之戒,如陶师等人所持。但在《胜义灯》小部注释中却说:“最初两条、第四与第五,是近事男与沙弥共通的常戒;依布萨戒时,近事男以第七、第八为一支,除最后一条外,其余悉与沙弥共通,而最后一条唯沙弥特有。”这与“若具精进则有十”的说法似有出入。“非失灭事”指失灭的标志之事,即决意、原因。显示巴利原文
Jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo lohamāsako jatumāsako dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti, tassa ubhayassapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ jātarūparajatapaṭiggahaṇaṃ. Tividhañcettha paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasāti. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyanaṃ. Tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ sāmaññaniddesena ekasesanayena vā gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā neva uggahetuṃ na uggahāpetuṃ na upanikkhittaṃ vā sādituṃ vaṭṭati. Imāni pana dasa sikkhāpadāni gahaṭṭhānampi sādhāraṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 13) ‘‘upāsakaupāsikānaṃ niccasīlavasena pañca sikkhāpadāni, sati vā ussāhe dasa, uposathaṅgavasena aṭṭhāti idaṃ gahaṭṭhasīla’’nti. Ettha hi dasāti sāmaṇerehi rakkhitabbasīlamāha ghaṭikārādīnaṃ viya. Paramatthajotikāyaṃ pana khuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.sādhāraṇavisesavavatthāna) ‘‘ādito dve catutthapañcamāni upāsakānaṃ sāmaṇerānañca sādhāraṇāni niccasīlavasena, uposathasīlavasena pana upāsakānaṃ sattamaṭṭhamaṃ cekaṃ aṅgaṃ katvā sabbapacchimavajjāni sabbānipi sāmaṇerehi sādhāraṇāni, pacchimaṃ pana sāmaṇerānameva visesabhūta’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sati vā ussāhe dasā’’ti iminā na sameti. Nāsanavatthūti liṅganāsanāya vatthu, adhiṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti.
107 “如何”即“以何方便”。“自己的住处”,此是就个人所有而言,《结文》中作此说。此处,结文作者们的意图是:“以雨安居所得之坐卧处”,是指他由雨安居而得的僧团坐卧处;“自己的住处”,亦是指他个人的坐卧处。然而,我们在此处的看法是:“或其所住之处”,是指他的常住所,无论是僧团的还是个人的;“或其返回之处”,则是指因侍奉等因缘而常前往的戒师或依止师的住处。因此,为显示此二者,说“两者皆指自己的住处与以雨安居所得之坐卧处”。其中,“自己的住处”显示了戒师与依止师的住处,“以雨安居所得之坐卧处”则显示了他自己的住处。此二者,无论是僧团的还是个人的,都应作遮蔽。“门口”指应通过门口进食。“作罚治”即施以罚治。“罚”(daṇḍa),是因以此而调伏之故,依其所应作之业而称为“罚治”,即遮蔽等。显示巴利原文
107.Kintīti kena nu kho upāyena. ‘‘Attano pariveṇanti idaṃ puggalikaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ayamettha gaṇṭhipadakārānaṃ adhippāyo – ‘‘vassaggena pattasenāsana’’nti iminā tassa vassaggena pattaṃ saṅghikasenāsanaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘attano pariveṇa’’nti imināpi tasseva puggalikasenāsanaṃ vuttanti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti – ‘‘yattha vā vasatī’’ti iminā saṅghikaṃ vā hotu puggalikaṃ vā, tassa nibaddhavasanakasenāsanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yattha vā paṭikkamatī’’ti iminā pana yaṃ ācariyassa upajjhāyassa vā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhānādinimittaṃ nibaddhaṃ pavisati, taṃ ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ubhayenapi attano pariveṇañca vassaggena pattasenāsanañca vutta’’nti āha. Tattha attano pariveṇanti iminā ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ, vassaggena pattasenāsananti iminā pana tassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadubhayampi saṅghikaṃ vā hotu puggalikaṃ vā, āvaraṇaṃ kātabbamevāti. Mukhadvārikanti mukhadvārena bhuñjitabbaṃ. Daṇḍakammaṃ katvāti daṇḍakammaṃ yojetvā. Daṇḍenti vinenti etenāti daṇḍo, soyeva kātabbattā kammanti daṇḍakammaṃ, āvaraṇādi.
关于未请问与遮止事等之论的注释显示巴利原文
Anāpucchāvaraṇavatthuādikathāvaṇṇanā
108 “你们对他作罚羯磨”,意为“你们对他施加罚羯磨、命令”。或者,“罚羯磨”即惩治的羯磨,故说“你们对他作惩治”。此理适用于一切此类情形。“坐卧处的执取亦止息”以此显示他也成为破雨安居者。若确是过失深重,于未来不能安住于防护,则应驱摈。在此,若经三次劝告仍不止息,应告知僧团后灭摈。纵使后来请求再出家,也应告知僧团后再予出家,诸师说。“他将获得后安居的雨安居分”,指因他后来入了后安居而获得。“应告知后给予利养”,是就破雨安居者而说。“其余五学处”指非时食等五条。“应令其忏悔过犯”,即应以“尊者,过犯战胜了我”等方式令其忏悔。显示巴利原文
108.Daṇḍakammamassa karothāti assa daṇḍakammaṃ yojetha āṇāpetha. Daṇḍakammanti vā niggahakammaṃ, tasmā niggahamassa karothāti vuttaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha īdisesu ṭhānesu. Senāsanaggāho ca paṭippassambhatīti iminā ca chinnavasso ca hotīti dīpeti. Sace ākiṇṇadosova hoti, āyatiṃ saṃvare na tiṭṭhati, nikkaḍḍhitabboti ettha sace yāvatatiyaṃ vuccamāno na oramati, saṅghaṃ apaloketvā nāsetabbo. Puna pabbajjaṃ yācamānopi apaloketvā pabbājetabboti vadanti. Pacchimikāya vassāvāsikaṃ lacchatīti pacchimikāya puna vassaṃ upagatattā lacchati. Apaloketvā lābho dātabboti chinnavassatāya vuttaṃ. Itarāni pañca sikkhāpadānīti vikālabhojanādīni pañca. Accayaṃ desāpetabboti ‘‘accayo maṃ, bhante, accagamā’’tiādinā nayena desāpetabbo.
关于般哒咖事论的注释显示巴利原文
Paṇḍakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
109 在黄门事项中,有人说“于黑分时为女,于白分时为男,此即分时黄门”。然而义注中说“于黑分时为黄门,于白分时其热恼止息”,由于在非黄门分时仅说热恼止息,可知于黄门分时热恼增盛即成为黄门状态,因此此处应以此为准。所谓“无有”,即此人无有女性状态或男性状态。在其黄门分时禁止出家,对此,三部《甘提帕达》中说“应在非黄门分时令其出家,于黄门分时应驱逐”。然而有人说“若在非黄门分时出家者能证得烦恼灭尽,则不应驱逐”,这仅是他们的个人见解,因为黄门不可能证得烦恼灭尽,而已灭尽烦恼者不可能出现黄门状态。在关于无因结生的论述中,确实普遍说黄门为无因结生。并且据说,被灌注者、嫉妒者、分时黄门从结生开始即具黄门本性,而非仅在生命流转期间才有。正因如此,在无因结生的解说中,黄门如同生盲、生聋者等,并未以“生”字加以区分而列出。在此处,第四波罗夷的注释中也普遍说:“在列举不能证果之人时,黄门、畜生、双性人这三种根器有缺陷者为无因结生者,他们的天界未受阻,但道果受阻。”显示巴利原文
109. Paṇḍakavatthumhi ‘‘yo kāḷapakkhe itthī hoti, juṇhapakkhe puriso, ayaṃ pakkhapaṇḍako’’ti keci vadanti, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘kāḷapakkhe paṇḍako hoti, juṇhapakkhe panassa pariḷāho vūpasammatī’’ti apaṇḍakapakkhe pariḷāhavūpasamasseva vuttattā paṇḍakapakkhe ussannapariḷāhatā paṇḍakabhāvāpattīti viññāyati, tasmā idamevettha sārato paccetabbaṃ. Itthibhāvo pumbhāvo vā natthi etassāti abhāvako. Tasmiṃ yevassa pakkhe pabbajjā vāritāti ettha ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbājetvā paṇḍakapakkhe nāsetabbo’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘apaṇḍakapakkhe pabbajito sace kilesakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti, na nāsetabbo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ paṇḍakassa kilesakkhayāsambhavato khīṇakilesassa ca paṇḍakabhāvānupapattito. Ahetukapaṭisandhikathāyañhi avisesena paṇḍakassa ahetukapaṭisandhitā vuttā. Āsittausūyapakkhapaṇḍakānañca paṭisandhito paṭṭhāyeva paṇḍakasabhāvo, na pavattiyaṃyevāti vadanti. Teneva ahetukapaṭisandhiniddese jaccandhabadhirādayo viya paṇḍako jātisaddena visesetvā na niddiṭṭho. Idhāpi catutthapārājikasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.233) ‘‘abhabbapuggale dassentena paṇḍakatiracchānagataubhatobyañjanakā tayo vatthuvipannā ahetukapaṭisandhikā, tesaṃ saggo avārito, maggo pana vārito’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ.
关于贼住者事论的注释显示巴利原文
Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
110 在贼住者事项中,“良家”指生于母系家族与父系家族,从父母开始的一切亲属。“贼住者”即其共住是偷盗而来者。此处所指的是偷盗形相或两者兼具者,非仅偷盗共住本身,故说“三种贼住者”等。他不接受依戒腊次第的礼敬,即不接受比丘或沙弥依受戒先后应有的礼敬。他接受依戒腊次第的礼敬,即自己妄语后,接受与所显示戒腊相应的依序礼敬。“比丘戒腊计算等”,以此显示这里所说的“共住”并非仅指同一羯磨等。显示巴利原文
110. Theyyasaṃvāsakavatthumhi kolaññāti mātuvaṃse pituvaṃse ca jātā mātāpituppabhutisabbañātayo. Theyyāya saṃvāso etassāti theyyasaṃvāsako. So ca na saṃvāsamattasseva thenako idhādhippeto, atha kho liṅgassa tadubhayassa ca thenakopīti āha ‘‘tayo theyyasaṃvāsakā’’tiādi. Na yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatīti yathāvuḍḍhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vā sāmaṇerānaṃ vā vandanaṃ na sādiyati. Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyatīti attanā musāvādaṃ katvā dassitavassānurūpaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanaṃ sādiyati. Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikoti iminā na ekakammādikova idha saṃvāso nāmāti dasseti.
在“国王……乃至……怖畏”一语中,“怖畏”一词应分别与各词结合,如“因国王怖畏、因饥荒怖畏”等。“他不接受共住,只要他心清净”,意思是:由于因国王怖畏等而持形相,只要他心清净,他便不接受共住。因为若有人并非因国王怖畏等,而仅仅为了欺骗比丘并与之共住而持形相,他由于心不清净,仅凭持形相即成为贼住者。但此人由于没有以不清净心欺骗比丘的意图,只要他不接受共住,就不称为贼住者。正因如此,三部《甘提帕达》中说:“因国王怖畏等而持形相者,即使怀有‘让在家人知道我是沙门’的欺骗之心,由于没有欺骗比丘的意图,故不犯过。”然而有些人说“这里怖畏止息即是心清净”,若如此理解,则此人怖畏止息后,只要不接受共住,就不成为贼住者,此义可明。但在理解此义时,可能会得出“怖畏未止息者即使接受共住也不成为贼住者”的结论,而义注中并未显示怖畏未止息者接受共住即非贼住者。“一切外道食”一句,显示即使怖畏未止息,也必须在不接受共住的情况下居住。正因如此,三部《甘提帕达》中说:“因为来到寺院而受用僧物者难以避免共住,故说‘一切外道食’。”显示巴利原文
Rāja…pe… bhayenāti ettha bhaya-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘rājabhayena dubbhikkhabhayenā’’tiādinā . Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānasoti rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāya so suddhamānaso yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāsetīti attho. Yo hi rājabhayādiṃ vinā kevalaṃ bhikkhū vañcetvā tehi saddhiṃ saṃvasitukāmatāya liṅgaṃ gaṇhāti, so asuddhacittatāya liṅgaggahaṇeneva theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana tādisena asuddhacittena bhikkhū vañcetukāmatāya abhāvato yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva theyyasaṃvāsako nāma na hoti. Teneva ‘‘rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgānaṃ ‘gihī maṃ samaṇoti jānantū’ti vañcanācitte satipi bhikkhūnaṃ vañcetukāmatāya abhāvā doso na jāto’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vūpasantabhayatā idha suddhacittatā’’ti vadanti, evañca sati so vūpasantabhayo yāva saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, tāva theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti ayamattho viññāyati. Imasmiñca atthe viññāyamāne avūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyanepi theyyasaṃvāsakatā na hotīti āpajjeyya, na ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ avūpasantabhayassa saṃvāsasādiyanepi atheyyasaṃvāsakatā dassitā. Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjantoti ca iminā avūpasantatayenapi saṃvāsaṃ asādiyanteneva vasitabbanti dīpeti. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmā vihāraṃ āgantvā saṅghikaṃ gaṇhantassa saṃvāsaṃ pariharituṃ dukkaraṃ, tasmā sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattāni bhuñjantoti idaṃ vutta’’nti, tasmā rājabhayādīhi gahitaliṅgatāyevettha suddhacittatāti gahetabbaṃ.
“一切外道食”指为一切共住者共同准备,放置在街道、十字路口等处应施与的食物。“应随身携带者”指应以身体携带的东西。“他们迎面走来”指面向而来。“以从事劳作”指以耕田、牧牛等劳作。他拿着那套衣钵前往寺院,即穿上袈裟,将钵挂在肩头,前往寺院。他自己并不知道——不知道“如此出家者称为贼住者”,或不知道“不能这样做”,或不知道“如此出家者不是沙门”。而“如此出家者称为贼住者”仅是举例说明。“在未受具足戒时”一句,显示若在受具足戒时听闻,即使不报告,也不成为贼住者。显示巴利原文
Sabbapāsaṇḍiyabhattānīti sabbasāmayikānaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ katvā vīthicatukkādīsu ṭhapetvā dātabbabhattāni. Kāyaparihāriyānīti kāyena pariharitabbāni. Abbhuggacchantīti abhimukhaṃ gacchanti. Kammantānuṭṭhānenāti kasigorakkhādikammakaraṇena. Tadeva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya vihāraṃ gacchatīti cīvarāni nivāsanapārupanavasena ādāya pattañca aṃsakūṭe laggetvā vihāraṃ gacchati. Nāpi sayaṃ jānātīti ‘‘yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotī’’ti vā ‘‘evaṃ kātuṃ na labhatī’’ti vā ‘‘evaṃ pabbajito samaṇo na hotī’’ti vā na jānāti. Yo evaṃ pabbajati, so theyyasaṃvāsako nāma hotīti idaṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ. Anupasampannakāleyevāti iminā upasampannakāle sutvā sacepi nāroceti, theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti dīpeti.
“不舍戒……乃至……不是贼住者”,这是说:由于比丘们所给的形相未被舍弃,故不是形相偷盗者;由于接受了与形相相应的共住,故也不是共住偷盗者。一位比丘虽着袈裟,又穿着白衣,对此也应看到同样的理由。后面“沙弥保持自己的形相”等,对于沙弥所述的情况,在非贼住者的方面也是同样的道理。对于比丘尼也是同样的道理,已说之义以“因为她希望成为在家身份”等加以阐明。“任何年长出家者”是就沙弥而言。“在大袋等中”,以此显示属于在家人的物品。“自己仅是沙弥……乃至……不是贼住者”,在此,虽然不是贼住者,但确实犯波罗夷。其余在此是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti idaṃ bhikkhūhi dinnaliṅgassa apariccattattā na liṅgathenako hoti, liṅgānurūpassa saṃvāsassa sāditattā nāpi saṃvāsathenako hotīti vuttaṃ. Eko bhikkhu kāsāye saussāhova odātaṃ nivāsetvāti etthāpi idameva kāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Parato sāmaṇero saliṅge ṭhitotiādinā sāmaṇerassa vuttavidhānesupi atheyyasaṃvāsakapakkhe ayameva nayo. Bhikkhuniyāpi eseva nayoti vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘sāpi hi gihibhāvaṃ patthayamānā’’tiādinā vibhāveti. Yo koci vuḍḍhapabbajitoti sāmaṇeraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Mahāpeḷādīsūti etena gihisantakaṃ dassitaṃ. Sayaṃ sāmaṇerova…pe… theyyasaṃvāsako na hotīti ettha kiñcāpi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, pārājikaṃ pana āpajjatiyeva. Sesamettha uttānameva.
投外道者事论注释显示巴利原文
Titthiyapakkantakakathāvaṇṇanā
在投外道者事中,一旦接受他们的标志,即成为投外道者。因为对于心怀“我要成为外道”而去的人,仅通过接受标志,邪见也即已被接受,故如此说。然而,有人说:“只要标志被接受,无论邪见已被接受与否,都成为投外道者。”这种说法不可取。对于心怀“我要成为外道”而去的人,除了接受标志,并没有另外所谓的“接受邪见”。正是通过接受标志,他便成为已接受邪见者。因此说:“为了考察而穿着拘舍草衣等……只要尚未接受,就还守护着那邪见。一旦接受,便成为投外道者。”如果裸体前往邪命外道的住处,每一步都得恶作罪。这是指怀着“我要成为邪命外道”的不净心而行,故得恶作罪。即使裸体而行,也不能免于恶作罪。“计算欺诈之年”,是指计算欺诈之年后,接受共住的意思。显示巴利原文
Titthiyapakkantakakathāyaṃ tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte titthiyapakkantako hotīti ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti gatassa liṅgaggahaṇeneva tesaṃ laddhipi gahitāyeva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘tesaṃ liṅge ādinnamatte laddhiyā gahitāyapi aggahitāyapi titthiyapakkantako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Na hi ‘‘titthiyo bhavissāmī’’ti gatassa liṅgasampaṭicchanato aññaṃ laddhiggahaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Liṅgasampaṭicchaneneva hi so gahitaladdhiko hoti. Teneva ‘‘vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kusacīrādīni…pe… yāva na sampaṭicchati, tāva taṃ laddhi rakkhati. Sampaṭicchitamatte titthiyapakkantako hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Naggova ājīvakānaṃ upassayaṃ gacchati, padavāre padavāre dukkaṭanti ‘‘ājīvako bhavissa’’nti asuddhacittena gamanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Naggena hutvā gamanapaccayāpi dukkaṭā na muccatiyeva. Kūṭavassaṃ gaṇentoti kūṭavassaṃ gaṇetvā saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantoti adhippāyo.
111 111. 畜生事,其义自明。显示巴利原文
111. Tiracchānagatavatthu uttānameva.
弑母者等事论注释显示巴利原文
Mātughātakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
112 112. 于弑母者等事中,“apavāhana”意为离开、离去,即“patikaraṇa”之义。正如对同种姓者加以破坏时,业更为严重;对不同种姓者则不然。故说“人类女性”。母、父的称谓乃因子女关系而得;世间中,因收养或名义等而称“子女”的情况亦可见,但那是间接的称呼。为显示直接、确定的含义,故说“亲生母亲”。正如在人类生存状态中,善法能生起锐利、明净、雄猛的成就,如同三位菩萨证得三菩提;同样,在人类生存状态中,不善法也能生起锐利、明净、雄猛的成就,因此说“自己也是人类种姓者”。死殁之后立刻感果,称为“无间”;系属于此无间,或以无间为因而生起,故为“无间业”。以此无间业,即为弑母业。对于弑父者,若所杀之父是人类、是亲生父亲,且自己也是人类种姓者,故意剥夺其生命,此人即由无间业中的弑父业而成为弑父者。如此,一切应当了知,故说“于弑父者中,此理亦然”。显示巴利原文
112. Mātughātakādivatthūsu apavāhananti apagamanaṃ, patikaraṇanti attho. Yathā samānajātikassa vikopane kammaṃ garutaraṃ, na tathā vijātikassāti āha ‘‘manussitthibhūtā’’ti . Puttasambandhena mātupitusamaññā , dattakittimādivasenapi puttavohāro loke dissati, so ca kho pariyāyatoti nippariyāyasiddhataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘janikā mātā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā manussattabhāve ṭhitasseva kusaladhammānaṃ tikkhavisadasūrabhāvāpatti yathā taṃ tiṇṇampi bodhisattānaṃ bodhittayanibbattiyaṃ, evaṃ manussattabhāve ṭhitasseva akusaladhammānampi tikkhavisadasūrabhāvāpattīti āha ‘‘sayampi manussajātikenevā’’ti. Cutianantaraṃ phalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttaṃ, taṃnibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlaṃ, anantarapayojanaṃ vā ānantariyaṃ, tena ānantariyena mātughātakakammena. Pitughātakepi yena manussabhūto janako pitā sayampi manussajātikeneva satā sañcicca jīvitā voropito, ayaṃ ānantariyena pitughātakakammena pitughātakotiādinā sabbaṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘pitughātakepi eseva nayo’’ti.
即使转变了性别特征,杀害母亲或父亲者,其业仍为无间业。因为即便性别特征转变了,那由同一业所生起的有分相续流与命根相续流,依然是同一个,而非其他。然而,若自己是人类而杀害畜生类的母亲或父亲,或自己是畜生类而杀害人类的母亲或父亲,或自己是畜生类而杀害畜生类的母亲或父亲,其业不成为无间业,但仍是重业,近于无间业。此处应说明“羊四句”“战场四句”“贼四句”。即使抱着“我要杀羊”的意图,而杀害了转生为羊的人类母亲或父亲,由于以杀意损害了无间业的对象,仍触犯无间业。但若以杀羊的意图,而无杀父母的意图,杀害了羊,则不触犯无间业,因为无间业的对象不存在。若以杀父母的意图杀害父母,则必定触犯。此理也适用于其余两个四句。如同对父母那样,对阿罗汉也应当了知这些四句。在一切情况下,先前的意图心并非标准,而杀心以其所缘及命根,在无间业的无间性上才是标准。已造无间业者,即使为了“我要遮止此业的果报”,而以大塔般大小的金塔充满整个轮围世界进行供养,或向充满整个轮围世界的比丘僧团作大布施,或追随佛陀世尊、紧握其僧伽帝衣角而行,身坏命终后,也必定生于地狱。显示巴利原文
Parivattitaliṅgampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.128; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.275; vibha. aṭṭha. 809) mātaraṃ pitaraṃ vā jīvitā voropentassa ānantariyakammaṃ hotiyeva. Satipi hi liṅgaparivatte so eva ekakammanibbatto bhavaṅgappabandho jīvitindriyappabandho ca, nāññoti. Yo pana sayaṃ manusso tiracchānabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā, sayaṃ vā tiracchānabhūto manussabhūtaṃ, tiracchānabhūtoyeva vā tiracchānabhūtaṃ jīvitā voropeti, tassa kammaṃ ānantariyaṃ na hoti, bhāriyaṃ pana hoti, ānantariyaṃ āhacceva tiṭṭhati. Eḷakacatukkaṃ saṅgāmacatukkaṃ coracatukkañcettha kathetabbaṃ. ‘‘Eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti abhisandhināpi hi eḷakaṭṭhāne ṭhitaṃ manusso manussabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā mārento ānantariyaṃ phusati maraṇādhippāyeneva ānantariyavatthuno vikopitattā. Eḷakābhisandhinā pana mātāpitiaasandhinā vā eḷakaṃ mārento ānantariyaṃ na phusati ānantariyavatthuabhāvato. Mātāpitiabhisandhinā mātāpitaro mārento phusateva. Esa nayo itarasmimpi catukkadvaye. Yathā ca mātāpitūsu, evaṃ arahantepi etāni catukkāni veditabbāni. Sabbattha hi purimaṃ abhisandhicittaṃ appamāṇaṃ, vadhakacittaṃ pana tadārammaṇaṃ jīvitindriyañca ānantariyānānantarabhāve pamāṇaṃ. Katānantariyakammo ca ‘‘tassa kammassa vipākaṃ paṭibāhissāmī’’ti sakalacakkavāḷaṃ mahācetiyappamāṇehi kañcanathūpehi pūretvāpi sakalacakkavāḷaṃ pūretvā nisinnassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ datvāpi buddhassa bhagavato saṅghāṭikaṇṇaṃ amuñcanto vicaritvāpi kāyassa bhedā nirayameva upapajjati, pabbajjañca na labhati.
115 115.“希望”:指希望穿着白衣。因此说“仅在接受了在家身份时”。关于破僧的详细说明,将在后文阐明。“四种业”:指白二甘马等四种业。“以恶心”:即阐明前述之义,说“以杀心”。因为以杀心所染污的心,在此称为“恶心”。“令出血”:此处,由于如来之身不可破坏,通过他人加害而割破皮肤、出血的情况并不存在。然而,体内仅有一处血液聚集,因打击而激荡,于是积聚成瘀。提婆达多所投掷的岩石碎片破裂后,击中如来脚背,脚背如同被斧头砍击般,仅内部出血。而耆婆则随顺如来的意愿,用刀割开皮肤,从中引出坏血,令其舒适,因此他唯积善业。故说“如耆婆等”。显示巴利原文
115.Icchamānanti odātavatthavasanaṃ icchamānaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘gihibhāve sampaṭicchitamatteyevā’’ti. Saṅghabhedakakathāvitthāro parato āvi bhavissati. Catunnaṃ kammānanti apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ. Duṭṭhacittenāti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘vadhakacittenā’’ti. Vadhakacetanāya hi dūsitacittaṃ idha duṭṭhacittaṃ nāma. Lohitaṃ uppādetīti ettha tathāgatassa abhejjakāyatāya parūpakkamena cammacchedaṃ katvā lohitapaggharaṇaṃ nāma natthi, sarīrassa pana antoyeva ekasmiṃ ṭhāne lohitaṃ samosarati, āghātena pakuppamānaṃ sañcitaṃ hoti. Devadattena paviddhasilato bhijjitvā gatasakkhalikāpi tathāgatassa pādantaṃ pahari, pharasunā pahaṭo viya pādo antolohitoyeva ahosi. Jīvako pana tathāgatassa ruciyā satthakena cammaṃ chinditvā tamhā ṭhānā duṭṭhalohitaṃ nīharitvā phāsumakāsi, tenassa puññakammameva ahosi. Tenāha ‘‘jīvako viyā’’tiādi.
那么,于如来般涅槃后,那些破坏塔、砍伐菩提树、对舍利施加毁损的人,会得何等果报?那是重业,近似于无间业。然而,为守护有舍利的塔或佛像,可以砍伐造成妨碍的菩提树枝。即便有鸟栖息塔上,并在塔上遗粪,也可以砍伐。因为身舍利塔比受用塔更为重要。当有人毁坏塔地而行时,纵使在菩提树下,也可以砍伐后带走。但若菩提树枝妨碍了菩提屋,则不可为护屋而砍伐。因为屋是为菩提树而建,非菩提树为屋而存。在殿堂方面也是如此。然而,若殿堂中安奉了舍利,为守护舍利,则可砍伐菩提树枝。为照料菩提树,砍除吸取养分的枝条或腐烂部分,是可以的,此举如同照料佛陀的色身,亦能获得功德。显示巴利原文
Atha ye parinibbute tathāgate cetiyaṃ bhindanti, bodhiṃ chindanti, dhātumhi upakkamanti, tesaṃ kiṃ hotīti? Bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ hoti ānantariyasadisaṃ. Sadhātukaṃ pana thūpaṃ vā paṭimaṃ vā bādhamānaṃ bodhisākhaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Sacepi tattha nilīnā sakuṇā cetiye vaccaṃ pātenti, chindituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Paribhogacetiyato hi sarīracetiyaṃ garutaraṃ. Cetiyavatthuṃ bhinditvā gacchante bodhimūlepi chinditvā harituṃ vaṭṭati. Yā pana bodhisākhā bodhigharaṃ bādhati, taṃ geharakkhaṇatthaṃ chindituṃ na labhati. Bodhiatthañhi gehaṃ, na gehatthāya bodhi. Āsanagharepi eseva nayo. Yasmiṃ pana āsanaghare dhātu nihitā hoti, tassa rakkhaṇatthāya bodhisākhaṃ chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Bodhijagganatthaṃ ojoharaṇasākhaṃ vā pūtiṭṭhānaṃ vā chindituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva, satthu rūpakāyapaṭijaggane viya puññampi hoti.
具两性特征者事论注释显示巴利原文
Ubhatobyañjanakavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
116 “具有两性特征”即“ubhatobyañjanaka”,此为一语法上非同位关系的依主释复合词,前词省略了格尾。此处的“特征”(byañjana)指女根和男根。那么,两性特征者是只有一个根,还是有两个根呢?只有一个根。因为《根双论》中说:“当女根生起时,男根会生起吗?否。当男根生起时,女根会生起吗?否。”由此遮止在同一个相续中存在二根。而且,女性两性特征者具有女根,男性两性特征者具有男根。既然如此,第二特征岂不是不存在了吗?因为根被称为特征之因,而他并没有那个因?答:他的根并非第二特征之因。为什么呢?因为并非恒常存在。当女性两性特征者对女人生起贪心时,其男根便显露,女根则隐没不现;另一类者则相反。如果他们的根是第二特征之因,那么二特征应恒常存在,但事实并非如此,故应知:“他的根并非彼特征之因,唯有贪心在此为因,以业为助缘。”显示巴利原文
116.Ubhatobyañjanamassa atthīti ubhatobyañjanakoti iminā asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoyaṃ, purimapade ca vibhattialopoti dasseti. Byañjananti cettha itthinimittaṃ purisanimittañca adhippetaṃ. Atha ubhatobyañjanakassa ekameva indriyaṃ, udāhu dveti? Ekameva ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No. Yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’ti (yama. 3.indriyayamaka.188) ekasmiṃ santāne indriyadvayassa paṭisiddhattā, tañca kho itthiubhatobyañjanakassa itthindriyaṃ, purisaubhatobyañjanakassa purisindriyaṃ. Yadi evaṃ dutiyabyañjanakassa abhāvo āpajjati. Indriyañhi byañjanakāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, tañca tassa natthīti? Vuccate – na tassa indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Sadā abhāvato. Itthiubhatobyañjanakassa hi yadā itthiyā rāgacittaṃ uppajjati, tadā purisabyañjanaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, itthibyañjanaṃ paṭicchannaṃ guḷhaṃ hoti, tathā itarassa itaraṃ. Yadi ca tesaṃ indriyaṃ dutiyabyañjanakāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, sadāpi byañjanadvayaṃ tiṭṭheyya, na pana tiṭṭhati, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘na tassa taṃ byañjanakāraṇaṃ, kammasahāyaṃ pana rāgacittamevettha kāraṇa’’nti.
由于他只有一根,因此女性两性特征者自己能受孕,也能使他人受孕。男性两性特征者能使他人受孕,但自己不能受孕。至于“若结生时有男性相,若结生时有女性相”等有关结生时存在性相的说法,虽然《库伦达注》中有记载,但这并不合理。因为女性相等性相唯在转起时生起,而非在结生时。在结生时,唯有根生起,而非性相等。而且,不能仅将根称为性相,因为根与性相的自性不同。正如《阿他萨林尼》中所说:显示巴利原文
Yasmā cassa ekameva indriyaṃ hoti, tasmā itthiubhatobyañjanako sayampi gabbhaṃ gaṇhāti, parampi gaṇhāpeti. Purisaubhatobyañjanako paraṃ gaṇhāpeti, sayaṃ pana na gaṇhāti. Yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ purisaliṅgaṃ, yadi paṭisandhiyaṃ itthiliṅganti ca paṭisandhiyaṃ liṅgasabbhāvo kurundiyaṃvutto, so ca ayutto. Pavattiyaṃyeva hi itthiliṅgādīni samuṭṭhahanti, na paṭisandhiyaṃ. Paṭisandhiyaṃ pana indriyameva samuṭṭhāti, na liṅgādīni. Na ca indriyameva liṅganti sakkā vattuṃ indriyaliṅgānaṃ bhinnasabhāvattā. Vuttañhetaṃ aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 632) –
“女性性、女性状态,两者同义,指女性自性。此为业所生,结生时即生起。而女性相等则是依于女根,在转起时生起。犹如种子存在时,依于种子、以种子为缘,树木生长起来,具足枝叶,遍满虚空而安住;同样,当称为女性状态的女根存在时,便有女性相等。女根如同种子,依于种子而生长、遍满虚空而安住的树木,即如依于女根,女性相等在转起时生起。其中,女根非眼所识,唯意所识。女性相等则既是眼所识,亦是意所识。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Itthattaṃ itthibhāvoti ubhayaṃ ekatthaṃ, itthisabhāvoti attho. Ayaṃ kammajo paṭisandhisamuṭṭhito. Itthiliṅgādi pana itthindriyaṃ paṭicca pavatte samuṭṭhitaṃ. Yathā bīje sati bījaṃ paṭicca bījapaccayā rukkho vaḍḍhitvā sākhāviṭapasampanno hutvā ākāsaṃ pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evameva itthibhāvasaṅkhāte itthindriye sati itthiliṅgādīni honti. Bījaṃ viya hi itthindriyaṃ, bījaṃ paṭicca vaḍḍhitvā ākāsaṃ pūretvā ṭhitarukkho viya itthindriyaṃ paṭicca itthiliṅgādīni pavatte samuṭṭhahanti. Tattha itthindriyaṃ na cakkhuviññeyyaṃ, manoviññeyyameva. Itthiliṅgādīni cakkhuviññeyyānipi manoviññeyyānipī’’ti.
因此他说:“其中,审察的次第,应在《法集论注》中详细了知。”显示巴利原文
Tenevāha ‘‘tattha vicāraṇakkamo vitthārato aṭṭhasāliniyā dhammasaṅgahaṭṭhakathāya veditabbo’’ti.
无戒师者等事论注释显示巴利原文
Anupajjhāyakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
117 “学处尚未制定”是针对此处的学处而说的。“未请依止师”是指未以“尊者,请做我的依止师”这样的方式请求依止师。然而,在甘马语中提及依止师之名已是事实,应当如此看待。否则,如果未作称述,便可能构成“不忆念人”所说的羯磨过失,羯磨便会失效。正因为如此,才说“未请依止师”而不说“未称述依止师”。又如衣钵不具足者受具足戒时,若在甘马语中称述“衣钵具足者”这一不实之事,即使进行甘马语,具足戒同样成立;同样地,若称述“这位佛护是尊者法护的求具足戒者”这一不实之人,仅是以称述存在之词的方式完成甘马语,具足戒仍然成立。因此他说:“然而羯磨并不失效。”“诸比丘,不应让无依止师者受具足戒,若让受,犯恶作。”律中只说了这些,并未说“那个人未受具足戒”,而且羯磨过失的特征于此并不存在,故说“此不应取”。如律中说:“诸比丘,若作五众羯磨,以黄门为第五人作羯磨,则非羯磨,且不应作。”等语,可见黄门乃至两性特征者等,只有在充当人数时羯磨才会失效,其他情况则不然。因此他说:“乃至以两性特征者为依止师等,亦同此理。”显示巴利原文
117.Sikkhāpadaṃapaññattaṃ hotīti idheva paññattaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvāti ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti evaṃ upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā. Kammavācāya pana upajjhāyakittanaṃ kataṃyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā ‘‘puggalaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti vuttakammavipattisambhavato kammaṃ kuppeyya, teneva ‘‘upajjhāyaṃ akittetvā’’ti avatvā ‘‘upajjhaṃ aggāhāpetvā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Yathā ca aparipuṇṇapattacīvarassa upasampādanakāle kammavācāya ‘‘paripuṇṇassa pattacīvara’’nti asantavatthuṃ kittetvā kammavācāya katāyapi upasampadā ruhati, evaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti asantaṃ puggalaṃ kittetvā kevalaṃ santapadanīhārena kammavācāya katāya upasampadā ruhatiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘kammaṃ pana na kuppatī’’ti. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, anupajjhāyako upasampādetabbo, yo upasampādeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti ettakameva vatvā ‘‘so ca puggalo anupasampanno’’ti avuttattā kammavipattilakkhaṇassa ca asambhavato ‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pañcavaggakaraṇañce, bhikkhave, kammaṃ paṇḍakapañcamo kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 390) paṇḍakādīnampi ubhatobyañjanakapariyantānaṃ gaṇapūrakabhāveyeva kammaṃ kuppati, na aññathāti āha ‘‘ubhatobyañjanakupajjhāyapariyosānesupi eseva nayo’’ti.
无钵者等事论注释显示巴利原文
Apattakādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
118 或有其他比丘欲行布施,这是与此相关的。未触之施食,指尚未从顶端拿取的施食。与沙弥份额相等的食物份额:此处,虽然给沙弥的食物份额是均等的,并没有单独的所谓沙弥份额,但在往下分发食物时,有时可能会不足,因此其用意在于:不应从上端拿取,而应依照沙弥的次第取用后再作给予。并且,此份额只给予已决定出家的人。正因如此,才说了“未熟之钵”等语。显示巴利原文
118. Aññe vā bhikkhū dātukāmā hontīti sambandho. Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātanti aggahitaaggaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ. Sāmaṇerabhāgasamako āmisabhāgoti ettha kiñcāpi sāmaṇerānaṃ āmisabhāgassa samakameva diyyamānattā visuṃ sāmaṇerabhāgo nāma natthi, heṭṭhā gacchantaṃ pana bhattaṃ kadāci mandaṃ bhaveyya, tasmā upari aggahetvā sāmaṇerapāḷiyāva gahetvā dātabboti adhippāyo. Niyatapabbajjasseva cāyaṃ bhāgo dīyati. Teneva ‘‘apakkaṃ patta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
断手者等事论注释显示巴利原文
Hatthacchinnādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
119 “Ajapada”者,指状如山羊足迹之处。“Brahmujugatta”者,指身体如梵天般端直。“Avaseso satto”者,指不具备此特征的有情。以此显示:除大丈夫与转轮王之外,其余有情皆为驼背、侧弯之类。因为多数有情在肩、腰、膝三处弯曲。其中,腰部弯曲者向后弯,其余两处弯曲者向前弯。身体修长者则向一侧歪斜;有人仰面而行,犹如数星;有人肉少无血,状若木桩;有人身体前倾;有人行走时战栗不止。“Parivaṭuma”者,指四周圆润。显示巴利原文
119.Ajapadaketi ajapadasaṇṭhāne padese. Brahmujugattoti brahmā viya ujugatto. Avaseso sattoti iminā lakkhaṇena rahitasatto. Etena ṭhapetvā mahāpurisaṃ cakkavattiñca itare sattā khujjapakkhikāti dasseti. Yebhuyyena hi sattā khandhe kaṭiyaṃ jāṇūsūti tīsu ṭhānesu namanti. Te kaṭiyaṃ namantā pacchato namanti, itaresu dvīsu ṭhānesu namantā purato namanti. Dīghasarīrā pana ekena passena vaṅkā honti, eke mukhaṃ unnāmetvā nakkhattāni gaṇayantā viya caranti, eke appamaṃsalohitā sūlasadisā honti, eke purato pabbhārā honti, pavedhamānā gacchanti. Parivaṭumoti samantato vaṭṭalo.
“骨、筋、皮之身”者,指仅由骨、筋、皮构成的身体。“裂头”者,指头裂为二。“斜视者”者,指侧目而视。难词解释中说:“所谓水星,即是水泡。”“眼星”者,指眼球。“无睫毛眼”者,指缺少睫毛的眼睛。因为“睫毛”一词,在世间的惯常用法中即指眼睑之毛。所谓“蚱蜢蛙”者,指大嘴蛙。“羊面”者,指口中常流涎液的面孔。“所有这一切”者,是就“患疥疮者”等而言。“睾丸肿者”者,指睾丸患有增生之病者。“外跛者”者,指双足行走时向外斜行、双膝外张之人。“内跛者”者,指双足向后翻转、行走时双膝内收之人。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhisirācammasarīroti aṭṭhisirācammamattasarīro. Kappasīsoti dvidhābhūtasīso. Kekaroti tiriyaṃ passanto. ‘‘Udakatārakā nāma udakapubbuḷa’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Akkhitārakāti akkhibhaṇḍakā. Nippakhumakkhīti akkhidalalomehi virahitaakkhiko. Pakhuma-saddo hi loke akkhidalalomesu niruḷho. Paṭaṅgamaṇḍūko nāma mahāmukhamaṇḍūko. Eḷamukhoti niccapaggharaṇakalālamukho. Sabbañcetanti ‘‘kacchugatto vā’’tiādiṃ sandhāya vadati. Vātaṇḍikoti aṇḍakesu vuddhirogena samannāgato. Vikaṭoti tiriyaṃ gamanapādehi samannāgato, yassa ca caṅkamato jāṇukā bahi gacchanti. Paṇhoti pacchato parivattapādehi samannāgato, yassa caṅkamato jāṇukā anto pavisanti.
以“脚掌中部蜷缩”说明拳脚的原因。以“脚尖蜷缩”指明拳脚的成因。以“以脚背尖端行走”说明拳脚者的行走状态。“口吃”者,指言语蹇涩。凡将同一音节重复四五次者,即得此名。显示巴利原文
Kudaṇḍapādatāya kāraṇaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘majjhe saṅkuṭitapādattā’’ti. Agge saṅkuṭitapādattāti kuṇḍapādatāya kāraṇanidassanaṃ. Kuṇḍapādasseva gamanasabhāvaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘piṭṭhipādaggena caṅkamanto’’ti. Mammananti khalitavacanaṃ. Yo ekameva akkharaṃ catupañcakkhattuṃ vadati, tassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
依止无惭者事论注释显示巴利原文
Alajjīnissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
120 在依止相关的因缘中,与诸比丘具同等戒等德分者,名为“比丘同分”,其状态即“比丘同分性”。若有人欲住两三日便离去,得以无依止而住——其含义是:即使未作意“我当识知比丘同分性”,无依止而住亦为许可。然而,若明知比丘同分性,却心想“我明日便走,何必依止”,则不可令明相生起。若作意“我将于明相前起身离去”而卧,纵使明相现起,亦得许可。但若执取“我要住七日”而住,则必须请求依止。是故,若心想“我不过住七日左右,何须识知比丘同分性”,放下察知之责而住,此则不可;必须先审察比丘同分性,而后取得依止——这便是此处的义理。显示巴利原文
120. Nissayapaṭisaṃyuttavatthūsu bhikkhūhi samāno sīlādiguṇabhāgo assāti bhikkhusabhāgo, tassa bhāvo bhikkhusabhāgatā. Dve tīṇi divasāni vasitvā gantukāmena anissitenavasitabbanti ettha ‘‘yāva bhikkhusabhāgataṃ jānāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ vināpi anissitena vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Bhikkhusabhāgataṃ pana jānanto ‘‘sve gamissāmi, kiṃ me nissayenā’’ti aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapetuṃ na labhati. ‘‘Purāruṇā uṭṭhahitvāva gamissāmī’’ti ābhogena sayantassa sace aruṇo uggacchati, vaṭṭati. ‘‘Sattāhaṃ vasissāmī’’ti ālayaṃ karontena pana nissayo gahetabboti ‘‘sattāhamattaṃ vasissāmi, kiṃ bhikkhusabhāgatājānanenā’’ti jānane dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā vasituṃ na labhati, bhikkhusabhāgataṃ upaparikkhitvā nissayo gahetabboti attho.
行路者等依止事论注释显示巴利原文
Gamikādinissayavatthukathāvaṇṇanā
121 “若于中途休歇……乃至……无犯”——这是指在没有可提供依止者的情况下,并无犯。所谓“依彼”,是随顺巴利圣典的语义而说,即“依止于彼”的意思。然而,“若在阿沙利月……乃至……应前往彼处”这一段是说:若临近雨安居时,他打算离去,听闻“某大长老即将到来”,若他等候那位长老,是可以的。若在等候之时正好到了入雨安居日,那也无妨,理应前往能获得依止师之处。不过,也有一些人说:“若他于前往途中,见有生命之险或梵行之险,便应住于该处。”显示巴利原文
121.Antarāmagge vissamanto vā…pe… anāpattīti asati nissayadāyake anāpatti. Tassa nissāyāti pāḷianurūpato vuttaṃ, taṃ nissāyāti attho. Sace pana āsāḷhīmāse…pe… tattha gantabbanti ettha sace so vassūpanāyikāya āsannāya gantukāmo suṇāti ‘‘asuko mahāthero āgamissatī’’ti, tañce āgameti, vaṭṭati. Āgamentasseva ce vassūpanāyikadivaso hoti, hotu, gantabbaṃ tattha, yattha nissayadāyakaṃ labhati. Keci pana ‘‘sace so gacchanto jīvitantarāyaṃ brahmacariyantarāyaṃ vā passati, tattheva vasitabba’’nti vadanti.
准许以姓氏宣告之论注释显示巴利原文
Gottena anussāvanānujānanakathāvaṇṇanā
122 第122条。因为“某甲比丘、某乙尊者”是对名号的唱令,所以才有“我不敢取长老的名号”一语,意思是“我不敢取尊者毕波利沙的名号”。又由于有“亦得以姓氏唱令”的说法,可知随其所用的通称方式,即可成立。若被问“你的戒师叫什么名字”,也可以只将姓氏当作名字来说,这同样成立。因此,在四种名号当中,可以取任一名号来做唱令。一个人虽有众多名字,但不可能在作白时用一个名字,而在唱令时用另一个名字;唱令必须在义理和文句上都相一致。虽然巴利圣典中“某甲比丘、某乙尊者”将“尊者”一词放在后面,但在甘马语圣典中,却写成“此佛护比丘,是法护尊者的”,对此不应视为次序颠倒。因为巴利圣典中的“某甲比丘、某乙尊者”只是在显示义理,所以甘马语圣典中所示的“此佛护比丘,是法护尊者的”这种用法,纵使巴利圣典中并未如此说明,也是成立的。更何况,还有“我往昔未曾见这位尊者舍利弗”以及“尊者舍利弗是善解义理者”这样将“尊者”一词先用的范例。有些地方说“佛护长老尊者的”,有些地方只说“佛护的”,这不算省略称呼,因为名字本身并未被省略。有些地方说“佛护尊者的”,有些地方说“佛护尊者”。显示巴利原文
122. ‘‘Itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti nāmakittanassa anussāvanāya āgatattā ‘‘nāhaṃ ussahāmi therassa nāmaṃ gahetu’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘āyasmato pippalissa upasampadāpekkho’’ti evaṃ nāmaṃ gahetuṃ na ussahāmīti attho. ‘‘Gottenapi anussāvetu’’nti vacanato yena vohārena voharati, tena vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ. ‘‘Konāmo te upajjhāyo’’ti puṭṭhenapi gottameva nāmaṃ katvā vattabbanti siddhaṃ hoti, tasmā catubbidhesu nāmesu yena kenaci nāmena anussāvanā kātabbāti vadanti. Ekassa bahūni nāmāni honti, tattha ekaṃ nāmaṃ ñattiyā, ekaṃ anussāvanāya kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, atthato byañjanato ca abhinnāhi anussāvanāhi bhavitabbanti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘āyasmato’’ti padaṃ pacchā vuttaṃ, kammavācāpāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassā’’ti paṭhamaṃ likhitanti taṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttanti na paccetabbaṃ. Pāḷiyañhi ‘‘itthannāmo itthannāmassa āyasmato’’ti atthamattaṃ dassitaṃ, tasmā pāḷiyaṃ avuttopi ‘‘ayaṃ buddharakkhito āyasmato dhammarakkhitassā’’ti kammavācāpāḷiyaṃ payogo dassito. ‘‘Na me diṭṭho ito pubbe iccāyasmā sāriputto’’ti ca ‘‘āyasmā sāriputto atthakusalo’’ti ca paṭhamaṃ ‘‘āyasmā’’ti payogassa dassanatoti vadanti. Katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitattherassā’’ti vatvā katthaci kevalaṃ ‘‘buddharakkhitassā’’ti sāveti, sāvanaṃ hāpetīti na vuccati nāmassa ahāpitattāti eke. Sace katthaci ‘‘āyasmato buddharakkhitassā’’ti vatvā katthaci ‘‘buddharaakhatassāyasmato’’ti sāveti, pāṭhānurūpattā khettameva otiṇṇantipi eke. Byañjanabhedappasaṅgato anussāvanānaṃ taṃ na vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Sace pana sabbaṭṭhānepi eteneva pakārena vadati, vaṭṭati.
两位求具足戒者等事的论释显示巴利原文
Dveupasampadāpekkhādivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
123 “一白”在此处是指它们有共同的告白,因此“一白”应视为不同所依境的依主释复合词。由此说“二人一起作一白”。其中“一起”指同一时刻,这是省略了格位词尾的表达。依前述方式作一起白,即如先前所说“由一人为一人,由另一人为另一人”等,由两位或三位戒师,或由一位戒师共同行白。显示巴利原文
123.Ekānussāvaneti ettha ekato anussāvanaṃ etesanti ekānussāvanāti asamānādhikaraṇavisayo bāhiratthasamāsoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘dve ekatoanussāvane’’ti. Tattha ekatoti ekakkhaṇeti attho, vibhattialopena cāyaṃ niddeso. Purimanayeneva ekatoanussāvane kātunti ‘‘ekena ekassa, aññena itarassā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena dvīhi vā tīhi vā ācariyehi ekena vā ekatoanussāvane kātuṃ.
具足戒仪法论释显示巴利原文
Upasampadāvidhikathāvaṇṇanā
126 “他审察应谴责与不应谴责之事,故为亲教师”——以此表明“亲教师”一词与“审察”一词意义相同。显示巴利原文
126.Vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyatīti upajjhāti iminā upajjhāyasaddasamānattho upajjhāsaddopīti dasseti.
四依止等论的释显示巴利原文
Cattāronissayādikathāvaṇṇanā
130 “共受用”指法共受用与物质共受用。在“共受用、共住无犯”中,其意趣如下:由于此人已作接纳羯磨,处于清净比丘的地位,故与被举罪者共受用等缘故不犯波逸提,与无羞耻者共受用亦不犯恶作,因其不符合无羞耻者的特征。若有人对于甘蔗渣等七日药乃至尽形寿药,生起“非时嚼甘蔗是可以的”想,并如是嚼食,由此不曾照见波逸提,因为他的想是“可以”;或有人承认自己所犯罪过,却顽固地说“我不忏悔”——显示巴利原文
130.Sambhogeti dhammasambhoge āmisasambhoge ca. Anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāseti ettha ca ayamadhippāyo – yasmā ayaṃ osāraṇakammassa katattā pakatattaṭṭhāne ṭhito, tasmā na ukkhittakena saddhiṃ sambhogādipaccayā pācittiyaṃ, nāpi alajjinā saddhiṃ paribhogapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ alajjīlakkhaṇānupapattito. Yo hi ucchurasakasaṭānaṃ sattāhakālikayāvajīvikattā vaṭṭati vikāle ucchu khāditunti saññaṃ uppādetvā taṃ khāditvā tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ na passati ‘‘vaṭṭatī’’ti tathāsaññitāya, yo vā pana āpattimāpannabhāvaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘na paṭikaromī’’ti abhinivisati, ayaṃ –
故意犯戒,又覆藏戒罪;
又行于非道,如此之人名为无惭者。”(《遍问》359)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati; Agatigamanañca gacchati, ediso vuccati alajjīpuggalo’’ti. (pari. 359) –
由于不落入所述的特征,故不名为无惭者。因此,如同先前只要尚未对他作举罪甘马,与他共受用、共住便不犯戒,此处也是如此。应知这只是在一切不犯的情况下说“不犯”而已。因为世尊不会在有戒罪产生的情况下,说“共受用、共住不犯”。因此,有人对此解释道:“共受用、共住不犯”是针对此波逸提而言不犯戒,但“因与无惭者共受用故,实犯恶作”,并作了许多戏论,这些不应取为心要。其余在此是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
Vuttalakkhaṇe apatanato alajjī nāma na hoti. Tasmā yathā pubbe yāva ukkhepanīyakammaṃ kataṃ, tāva tena saddhiṃ sambhoge saṃvāse ca anāpatti, evamidhāpīti sabbathā anāpattiṭṭhāneyeva anāpatti vuttāti veditabbaṃ . Na hi bhagavā alajjinā saddhiṃ sambhogapaccayā āpattisambhave sati ‘‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’’ti vadati. Tato yamettha kenaci ‘‘anāpatti sambhoge saṃvāse’’ti iminā pācittiyena anāpatti vuttā, ‘‘alajjīparibhogapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ pana āpajjatiyevā’’ti vatvā bahudhā papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Sesamettha uttānameva.